Manual SIRIUS Innovations en-US

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual • 11/2009
Industrial Controls
Answers for industry.
SIRIUS Innovations System overview 1
SIRIUS 3RT2
contactors/contactor 2
assemblies
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state

switching devices 3
Industrial controls
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter
protectors 4
SIRIUS Innovations SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3
5
overload relays
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load

feeders 6
System Manual
SIRIUS 3RA28 function
modules for mounting on 7
3RT2 contactors
SIRIUS 3RR2 current

monitoring relays 8
Appendix A A
11/2009
A8E56203870002-01
Legal information
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation for the specific task, in particular its warning notices and
safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of
identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be adhered to. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG Ordernumber: 3ZX1012-0RA01-1AC1 Copyright © Siemens AG 2010.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 02/2010 Technical data subject to change
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents
1 System overview...................................................................................................................................... 19
1.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................19
1.1.1 Modular system for SIRIUS .........................................................................................................19
1.1.2 SIRIUS Innovations......................................................................................................................20
1.2 Safety instructions........................................................................................................................22
1.3 Standards and approvals .............................................................................................................23
1.3.1 Standards.....................................................................................................................................23
1.3.2 Approvals, test certificates, characteristics..................................................................................24
1.4 Overview ......................................................................................................................................25
1.4.1 SIRIUS modular system...............................................................................................................25
1.4.2 Content of SIRIUS Innovations System Manual ..........................................................................27
1.5 System properties ........................................................................................................................28
1.5.1 System properties ........................................................................................................................28
1.5.2 Modular system design ................................................................................................................29
1.5.3 Switching technology ...................................................................................................................30
1.5.4 Uniform connection system..........................................................................................................32
1.5.5 Flexible assembly methods..........................................................................................................33
1.5.6 Performance capability ................................................................................................................33
1.5.7 Assembly and mounting...............................................................................................................34
1.5.8 Load feeders ................................................................................................................................34
1.5.9 Application monitoring..................................................................................................................36
1.5.10 Communication ............................................................................................................................37
1.5.11 Safety applications.......................................................................................................................38
1.5.12 Environmental protection .............................................................................................................38
1.5.13 Energy efficiency..........................................................................................................................38
1.6 Customer benefits........................................................................................................................40
1.7 Components and combinations ...................................................................................................42
1.7.1 Switching and starting..................................................................................................................42
1.7.1.1 SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors..............................................................................................................42
1.7.1.2 SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices...............................................................................48
1.7.1.3 SIRIUS 3RW30/40 soft starters ...................................................................................................49
1.7.2 Protecting .....................................................................................................................................51
1.7.2.1 SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors ........................................................................................51
1.7.2.2 SIRIUS 3RV2917 infeed system..................................................................................................54
1.7.2.3 SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays ...........................................................................................55
1.7.3 Monitoring ....................................................................................................................................57
1.7.3.1 SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays ......................................................................................57
1.7.4 Feeders ........................................................................................................................................59
1.7.4.1 SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders ...................................................................................................59
1.7.4.2 SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters ...................................................................................................61
1.7.5 Function modules.........................................................................................................................65
1.7.5.1 SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors..............................66
1.7.5.2 SIRIUS 3RA27 function modules for connection to the automation level ...................................68
1.7.6 Device combinations....................................................................................................................70
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 5
Table of contents
1.8 Mounting and disassembly ..........................................................................................................72

1.8.1 Screw mounting ...........................................................................................................................72
1.8.2 Snap-on mounting........................................................................................................................72
1.9 Connection ...................................................................................................................................74
1.9.1 Connection systems.....................................................................................................................74
1.9.1.1 Screw connection.........................................................................................................................74
1.9.1.2 Spring-loaded connection ............................................................................................................75
1.9.1.3 Ring cable lug connection............................................................................................................79
1.9.2 Conductor cross-sections ............................................................................................................79
1.9.2.1 Conductor cross-sections for screw-type connection systems....................................................80
1.9.2.2 Conductor cross-sections for spring-loaded connection systems ...............................................82
1.9.2.3 Conductor cross-sections for ring cable lug connection system..................................................84
1.9.3 Image database ...........................................................................................................................85
1.10 Connection to the higher-level control .........................................................................................86
1.10.1 Connection to the higher-level control .........................................................................................86
1.10.2 IO-Link..........................................................................................................................................89
1.10.2.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................89
1.10.2.2 Benefits ........................................................................................................................................90
1.10.2.3 Applications..................................................................................................................................91
1.10.3 AS-Interface .................................................................................................................................94
1.10.3.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................94
1.10.3.2 Benefits ........................................................................................................................................95
1.10.3.3 Operating modes .........................................................................................................................95
1.10.3.4 Process communication and field communication.......................................................................96
1.10.3.5 System components ....................................................................................................................97
1.10.3.6 Technical data..............................................................................................................................98
1.10.3.7 More information ..........................................................................................................................99
2 SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies ..................................................................................... 101
2.1 Standards...................................................................................................................................101
2.1.1 General regulations and standards............................................................................................101
2.1.2 Protective separation .................................................................................................................102
2.1.3 Positively driven contact elements/Mirror contacts....................................................................103
2.2 Product description ....................................................................................................................104
2.2.1 Overview of the contactor range ................................................................................................104
2.2.2 Device versions..........................................................................................................................104
2.2.2.1 3RH2 contactor relays ...............................................................................................................105
2.2.2.2 3RT2 power contactors..............................................................................................................107
2.2.2.3 3RA23 reversing contactor assemblies .....................................................................................110
2.2.2.4 3RA24 contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start.....................................................111
2.2.2.5 Drive options ..............................................................................................................................112
2.2.3 Applications................................................................................................................................113
2.2.4 Performance features ................................................................................................................114
2.3 Product combinations ................................................................................................................115
2.4 Configuration..............................................................................................................................116
2.4.1 Overview of applications for contactors and contactor assemblies ...........................................116
2.4.2 Drive system/Coil selection........................................................................................................117
2.4.3 Application environment.............................................................................................................118
2.4.3.1 3RH2 contactor relays ...............................................................................................................118
2.4.3.2 3RT2 power contactors..............................................................................................................118
2.4.3.3 Contactors for railway applications ............................................................................................121
2.4.3.4 Installation altitude .....................................................................................................................122
2.4.4 Switching motorized loads .........................................................................................................123
SIRIUS Innovations
6 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Table of contents
2.4.5 Switching resistive loads............................................................................................................124

2.4.6 Changing the polarity of hoisting gear motors ...........................................................................125
2.4.7 Switching in the auxiliary circuit .................................................................................................126
2.4.8 Contactors with extended operating range ................................................................................127
2.4.8.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................127
2.4.8.2 Contactors with UC drive ...........................................................................................................127
2.4.8.4 Coupling relays ..........................................................................................................................130
2.4.9 Operation of a motor in two directions of rotation (3RA23 reversing contactor assembly) .......132
2.4.10 Starting three-phase motors with reduced starting current peaks (3RA24 contactor
assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start) ..................................................................................135
2.4.10.1 Technical background information.............................................................................................136
2.4.11 Using long control cables...........................................................................................................141
2.5 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................147
2.5.1 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................147
2.5.1.1 Mounting options........................................................................................................................147
2.5.1.2 Mounting position.......................................................................................................................147
2.5.1.3 Mounting on mounting plate.......................................................................................................148
2.5.1.4 Snapping onto DIN rail (snap-on mounting) ..............................................................................149
2.5.2 Replacing magnet coils..............................................................................................................149
2.6 Connection .................................................................................................................................152
2.7 Accessories................................................................................................................................154
2.7.1 Accessories overview ................................................................................................................154
2.7.2 Auxiliary switch blocks ...............................................................................................................160
2.7.2.1 Description .................................................................................................................................160
2.7.2.2 Configuration..............................................................................................................................163
2.7.2.3 Mounting/Disassembly...............................................................................................................166
2.7.3 Surge suppressor.......................................................................................................................169
2.7.3.1 Description .................................................................................................................................169
2.7.3.2 Configuration..............................................................................................................................170
2.7.3.3 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................177
2.7.4 EMC suppression module..........................................................................................................178
2.7.4.1 Description .................................................................................................................................178
2.7.4.2 Configuration..............................................................................................................................179
2.7.4.3 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................181
2.7.5 OFF-delay device.......................................................................................................................182
2.7.5.1 Description .................................................................................................................................182
2.7.5.2 Configuration..............................................................................................................................182
2.7.5.3 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................182
2.7.6 Mechanical latch ........................................................................................................................184
2.7.6.1 Description .................................................................................................................................184
2.7.6.3 Operation ...................................................................................................................................186
2.7.7 Additional load module...............................................................................................................187
2.7.7.1 Description .................................................................................................................................187
2.7.7.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................187
2.7.8 Control kit for manual operation of contactor contacts ..............................................................188
2.7.8.1 Description .................................................................................................................................188
2.7.8.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................188
2.7.9 Coupling link for PLC .................................................................................................................189
2.7.9.1 Description .................................................................................................................................189
2.7.9.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................190
2.7.10 LED display indicator module ....................................................................................................191
2.7.10.1 Description .................................................................................................................................191
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 7
Table of contents
2.7.10.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................191

2.7.11 Solder pin adapter......................................................................................................................192
2.7.11.1 Description .................................................................................................................................192
2.7.11.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................193
2.7.12 Coil terminal module ..................................................................................................................194
2.7.12.1 Description .................................................................................................................................194
2.7.12.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................195
2.7.13 Cover for ring cable lug..............................................................................................................196
2.7.13.1 Description .................................................................................................................................196
2.7.14 Sealable cover ...........................................................................................................................197
2.7.14.1 Description .................................................................................................................................197
2.7.14.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................197
2.7.15 3-phase infeed terminal .............................................................................................................198
2.7.15.1 Description .................................................................................................................................198
2.7.15.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................198
2.7.16 Parallel switching connectors.....................................................................................................199
2.7.16.1 Description .................................................................................................................................199
2.7.16.2 Configuration..............................................................................................................................199
2.7.16.3 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................200
2.7.17 Link module for two contactors in series....................................................................................201
2.7.17.1 Description .................................................................................................................................201
2.7.17.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................201
2.7.18 Link module for motor starter protector......................................................................................203
2.7.18.1 Description .................................................................................................................................203
2.7.19 Pneumatic timer .........................................................................................................................204
2.7.19.1 Description .................................................................................................................................204
2.7.19.3 Operation ...................................................................................................................................205
2.7.20 Insulating stop ............................................................................................................................206
2.7.20.1 Description .................................................................................................................................206
2.7.21 Terminal module for contactors with screw connections ...........................................................207
2.7.21.1 Description .................................................................................................................................207
2.7.21.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................207
2.7.22 3RA27 function modules for connection to the automation level (AS-Interface or IO-Link) ......209
2.7.22.1 Description .................................................................................................................................209
2.7.23 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors ......................................................210
2.7.23.1 Description .................................................................................................................................210
2.7.24 Assembly kit for reversing contactor assemblies.......................................................................211
2.7.24.1 Description .................................................................................................................................211
2.7.24.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................211
2.7.25 Assembly kit for contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start ......................................218
2.7.25.1 Description .................................................................................................................................218
2.7.25.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................220
2.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................227
2.8.1 Contactors for switching motors (3RT20) ..................................................................................227
2.8.1.1 Rated data for auxiliary contacts................................................................................................227
2.8.1.2 Contact service life of auxiliary and main contacts ....................................................................229
2.8.1.3 General data and short-circuit protection for 3RT201. contactors without overload relay ........231
2.8.1.4 Actuation - 3RT201. contactors .................................................................................................233
2.8.1.5 Main circuit - 3RT201. contactors (current carrying capacity for alternating current and
direct current) .............................................................................................................................235
2.8.1.6 Conductor cross-sections - 3RT201. contactors........................................................................241
2.8.1.7 General data and short-circuit protection for 3RT202. contactors without overload relay ........242
2.8.1.8 Actuation - 3RT202. contactors .................................................................................................244
2.8.1.9 Main circuit - 3RT202. contactors (current carrying capacity for alternating current)................247
SIRIUS Innovations
8 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Table of contents
2.8.1.10 Rated data for auxiliary contacts (CSA and UL) ........................................................................250
2.8.1.11 Main circuit - 3RT202. contactors (current carrying capacity for direct current)........................251
2.8.1.12 Conductor cross-sections - 3RT202. contactors........................................................................253
2.8.1.13 Rated data (CSA and UL) for 3RT201. and 3RT202. contactors ..............................................255
2.8.2 Contactors for specific applications (3RT23 and 3RT25) ..........................................................257
2.8.2.1 General data, short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay and actuation
(3RT231. and 3RT232. contactors) ...........................................................................................257
2.8.2.2 Main circuit - 3RT231. and 3RT232. (current carrying capacity for alternating current and
direct current) .............................................................................................................................260
2.8.2.3 General data, short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay and actuation
(3RT251. and 3RT252. contactors) ...........................................................................................262
2.8.2.4 Main circuit - 3RT251. and 3RT252. (current carrying capacity for alternating current and
direct current) .............................................................................................................................263
2.8.3 Contactors with extended operating range ................................................................................265
2.8.3.2 Coupling relays ..........................................................................................................................266
2.8.4 3RH2 contactor relays ...............................................................................................................270
2.8.4.1 Permissible mounting position, positively driven operation of contacts and contact
reliability of 3RH2 contactor relays (4- and 8-pole)....................................................................270
2.8.4.2 General data, rated data (CSA and UL), and data relating to short-circuit protection for
3RH2. contactor relays ..............................................................................................................271
2.8.4.3 Conductor cross-sections - 3RH2. contactor relays ..................................................................273
2.8.4.4 Actuation - 3RH2. contactor relays ............................................................................................274
2.8.4.5 Load side of 3RH2. contactor relays..........................................................................................276
2.8.5 Accessories for 3RT2 contactors and 3RH2 contactor relays ...................................................278
2.8.5.1 General data - Pneumatic timer 3RT2926-2P. ..........................................................................278
2.8.5.2 General data - OFF-delay device 3RT2916-2B. ........................................................................279
2.8.5.3 General data - Terminal module for contactors with screw connection.....................................281
2.8.5.4 General data - Mechanical latch 3RT2926-3A...........................................................................283
2.8.5.5 General data - Control side and load side - coupling link 3RH2924-1GP11 .............................284
2.9 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm) ..................................................................................286
2.9.1 Contactors and contactor relays (size S00)...............................................................................286
2.9.2 Contactors (size S0) ..................................................................................................................290
2.10 Circuit diagrams .........................................................................................................................293
2.10.1 Contactors and contactor accessories.......................................................................................294
2.10.2 Reversing contactor assembly (S00/S0) ...................................................................................308
2.10.3 Contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start ................................................................309
3 SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices ......................................................................................... 313
3.1 Safety instructions......................................................................................................................313
3.1.1 Standards...................................................................................................................................315
3.2.1 Device versions..........................................................................................................................316
3.2.2 Applications................................................................................................................................318
3.2.4 Solid-state switching devices .....................................................................................................320
3.2.5 Device labels..............................................................................................................................322
3.2.6 Advantages of solid-state switching devices .............................................................................325
3.4 Functions....................................................................................................................................327
3.4.1 Actuation of solid-state switching devices .................................................................................328
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 9
Table of contents
3.5 Planning/configuring ..................................................................................................................329

3.5.1 Selecting solid-state switching devices......................................................................................329
3.5.2 Configuration: Selecting solid-state contactors for motors ........................................................330
3.5.3 Short-circuit protection ...............................................................................................................334
3.5.3.1 Mounting accessories for the load feeder conforming to IEC....................................................334
3.5.3.2 Mounting accessories for the load feeder conforming to UL .....................................................336
3.6 Application planning...................................................................................................................339
3.6.1 Application areas .......................................................................................................................340
3.6.1.1 Switching motors........................................................................................................................340
3.6.1.2 Use in a photovoltaic plant.........................................................................................................340
3.7 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................341
3.7.1 Mounting instructions .................................................................................................................341
3.7.2 Screw mounting .........................................................................................................................343
3.7.3 Snapping onto/off DIN rail (snap-on mounting) .........................................................................343
3.8 Connection .................................................................................................................................344
3.8.1 Solid-state contactor ..................................................................................................................344
3.8.2 Solid-state reversing contactor ..................................................................................................345
3.9 FAQs - Frequently asked questions ..........................................................................................346
3.10 Accessories................................................................................................................................347
3.10.2 Insulating stop ............................................................................................................................347
3.10.2.1 Description .................................................................................................................................347
3.10.3.1 Description .................................................................................................................................348
3.11 Technical data............................................................................................................................350
3.11.1 General data ..............................................................................................................................350
3.11.2 Conductor cross-sections for solid-state contactors ..................................................................352
3.11.3 Conductor cross-sections for solid-state reversing contactors ..................................................353
3.11.4 Solid-state contactors 3RF34, 3-phase, screw connection .......................................................354
3.11.5 Solid-state contactors 3RF34, 3-phase, spring-loaded terminals..............................................355
3.11.6 Solid-state contactors - fuseless design with CLASS 10 motor starter protector ......................356
3.11.7 Solid-state contactors - fused design with 3RB30 overload relay .............................................357
3.11.8 Solid-state contactors - main circuit, 2-phase controlled ...........................................................358
3.11.9 Solid-state contactors with control circuit...................................................................................358
3.11.10 Solid-state reversing contactor with integration of four current paths to form a single
reversing circuit ..........................................................................................................................359
3.11.11 Solid-state contactors - fuseless design with CLASS 10 motor starter protector ......................359
3.11.12 Solid-state contactor - fused design with 3RB30 overload relay ...............................................360
3.11.13 Solid-state reversing contactor - main circuit, 2-phase controlled .............................................360
3.11.14 Solid-state reversing contactor with control circuit.....................................................................361
3.11.15 Characteristics - switching frequency/load ................................................................................362
3.11.15.1 Characteristics for the solid-state contactor...............................................................................362
3.11.15.2 Characteristics for the solid-state reversing contactor...............................................................367
3.12.1 Solid-state switching devices .....................................................................................................372
SIRIUS Innovations
10 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Table of contents
4 SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors................................................................................................... 379

4.1 Standards...................................................................................................................................379
4.2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................380
4.2.2 Versions .....................................................................................................................................381
4.2.3 Applications................................................................................................................................382
4.2.4 Motor starter protectors..............................................................................................................383
4.4 Functions....................................................................................................................................386
4.4.1 Overload and short-circuit protection.........................................................................................386
4.4.1.1 Tripping classes .........................................................................................................................386
4.4.1.2 Tripping characteristics ..............................................................................................................388
4.4.2 Phase loss sensitivity.................................................................................................................390
4.4.3 Protecting single-phase loads or DC loads................................................................................390
4.4.4 Test function...............................................................................................................................390
4.5 Configuration..............................................................................................................................391
4.5.2 Motor protection .........................................................................................................................391
4.5.3 System protection ......................................................................................................................391
4.5.4 Motor protection with overload relay function ............................................................................392
4.5.5 Short-circuit protection for starter combinations ........................................................................392
4.5.6 Transformer protection...............................................................................................................393
4.5.7 Main switch ................................................................................................................................393
4.5.8 Use in IT systems ......................................................................................................................393
4.5.9 Switching direct current..............................................................................................................394
4.5.10 Devices for North America (UL/CSA) ........................................................................................395
4.5.10.1 Approved according to UL 508/CSA C22.2 No. 14....................................................................395
4.5.10.2 Approval as "circuit breaker" according to UL 489/CSA C 22.2 No. 5-02 .................................396
4.5.12 Selecting the motor starter protectors........................................................................................398
4.5.13 Project guidelines for use downstream of frequency converters/inverters with pulsed
voltage........................................................................................................................................398
4.5.13.1 The effects of high-frequency currents on the thermal overload release ..................................398
4.5.13.2 Capacitive leakage currents.......................................................................................................399
4.5.13.3 Speed control of motors with characteristic-controlled frequency converters ...........................400
4.6 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................401
4.6.1 Standard mounting.....................................................................................................................401
4.6.1.1 Minimum clearances and mounting position..............................................................................401
4.6.1.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................402
4.6.2 Mounting in limiter circuit ...........................................................................................................403
4.7 Connection .................................................................................................................................403
4.8 Operation ...................................................................................................................................404
4.8.1 Setting the current......................................................................................................................404
4.8.2 Testing the overload release......................................................................................................405
4.8.3 Testing the overload relay function (3RV21) .............................................................................405
4.8.4 Securing .....................................................................................................................................406
4.8.5 Reclosing after tripping ..............................................................................................................406
4.9 Accessories................................................................................................................................407
4.9.2 Installation rules/Component rules ............................................................................................409
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 11
Table of contents
4.9.3 Auxiliary switch...........................................................................................................................410

4.9.3.1 Description .................................................................................................................................410
4.9.3.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................411
4.9.3.3 Disassembly...............................................................................................................................412
4.9.4 Signaling switch .........................................................................................................................413
4.9.4.1 Description .................................................................................................................................413
4.9.4.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................414
4.9.4.3 Disassembly...............................................................................................................................414
4.9.4.4 Operation and diagnostics .........................................................................................................415
4.9.5 Auxiliary release.........................................................................................................................416
4.9.5.1 Description .................................................................................................................................416
4.9.5.2 Auxiliary release voltage ranges ................................................................................................417
4.9.5.3 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................418
4.9.5.4 Disassembly...............................................................................................................................418
4.9.6 Disconnector module .................................................................................................................419
4.9.6.1 Description .................................................................................................................................419
4.9.6.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................419
4.9.6.3 Isolation and shut-off..................................................................................................................421
4.9.7 Phase barriers/UL 508 "type E" terminals .................................................................................422
4.9.7.1 Description .................................................................................................................................422
4.9.7.2 Mounting UL 508 "type E" terminals ..........................................................................................423
4.9.7.3 Mounting phase barriers ............................................................................................................423
4.9.8 Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism...............................................................................424
4.9.8.1 Description .................................................................................................................................424
4.9.8.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................425
4.9.8.3 Operating the door-coupling rotary operating mechanism ........................................................426
4.9.8.4 Operating the door-coupling rotary operating mechanism for arduous conditions....................429
4.9.9 Enclosures and mounting accessories ......................................................................................432
4.9.9.1 Description .................................................................................................................................432
4.9.9.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................433
4.9.10 Sealable cover ...........................................................................................................................436
4.9.10.1 Description .................................................................................................................................436
4.9.10.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................436
4.9.11 Insulated 3RV19 3-phase busbar system..................................................................................437
4.9.11.1 Description .................................................................................................................................437
4.9.11.2 Versions .....................................................................................................................................438
4.9.11.3 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................439
4.9.12 8US busbar adapter...................................................................................................................440
4.9.12.1 Description .................................................................................................................................440
4.9.12.2 Versions .....................................................................................................................................440
4.9.12.3 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................442
4.9.12.4 Disassembly...............................................................................................................................444
4.9.13 3RV2917 infeed system.............................................................................................................446
4.9.13.1 Description .................................................................................................................................446
4.9.13.2 Derating......................................................................................................................................449
4.9.13.3 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................450
4.9.14 Link module for attaching a contactor........................................................................................452
4.9.14.1 Description .................................................................................................................................452
4.9.14.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................452
4.10 Technical data............................................................................................................................453
4.10.2 3RV2 motor starter protectors....................................................................................................454
4.10.3 Rated data for auxiliary and signaling switches.........................................................................456
4.10.4 Auxiliary switches, front-mounted, transverse ...........................................................................456
4.10.5 Auxiliary switches, transverse, solid-state compatible...............................................................457
SIRIUS Innovations
12 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Table of contents
4.10.6 Auxiliary switches, lateral and signaling switches......................................................................457

4.10.7 Auxiliary releases.......................................................................................................................458
4.10.8 Short-circuit protection for auxiliary and control circuits ............................................................458
4.10.9 Conductor cross-sections main circuit .......................................................................................459
4.10.10 Conductor cross-sections auxiliary and control circuits .............................................................460
4.10.11 Short-circuit breaking capacity...................................................................................................462
4.10.11.1 Short-circuit breaking capacity for motor starter protectors.......................................................462
4.10.11.2 Short-circuit breaking capacity for motor starter protectors in the IT system ............................464
4.10.11.3 Short-circuit breaking capacity for motor starter protectors with limiter function .......................467
4.10.12 Permissible rated data of approved devices for North America (UL/CSA) ................................467
4.10.12.1 Approved according to UL 508/CSA C22.2 No. 14....................................................................467
4.10.12.2 Approval as "circuit breaker" according to UL 489/CSA C 22.2 No. 5-02 .................................476
4.11.1 Dimension drawings for 3RV2 motor starter protectors.............................................................478
5 SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays...................................................................................................... 485
5.1 Standards...................................................................................................................................485
5.1.1 Standards...................................................................................................................................485
5.2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................486
5.2.2 Versions .....................................................................................................................................487
5.2.3 Applications................................................................................................................................488
5.2.4 3RU21 thermal overload relays .................................................................................................490
5.2.5 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays .................................................................................491
5.4 Functions....................................................................................................................................494
5.4.1 Protection against overload, phase failure, and phase asymmetry ...........................................494
5.4.1.1 Functional principle ....................................................................................................................494
5.4.1.2 Time-delayed overload release..................................................................................................495
5.4.1.3 Tripping classes .........................................................................................................................495
5.4.1.4 Tripping characteristics ..............................................................................................................496
5.4.2 Ground-fault protection (3RB31 only) ........................................................................................499
5.4.3 Auxiliary contacts .......................................................................................................................500
5.4.4 Indication of the operating state.................................................................................................501
5.4.5 Self-monitoring (3RB30/3RB31 only).........................................................................................501
5.4.6 Additional functions....................................................................................................................502
5.5 Configuration..............................................................................................................................503
5.5.1 Overload relays in motor feeders...............................................................................................503
5.5.1.1 Overload relays in motor feeders...............................................................................................503
5.5.1.2 Normal and heavy-duty starting .................................................................................................504
5.5.1.3 Contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start ...................................................................505
5.5.1.4 Operation with frequency converters .........................................................................................505
5.5.3 Protecting explosion-protected motors ......................................................................................506
5.6 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................508
5.6.1 Mounting options........................................................................................................................508
5.6.2 Minimum clearances and mounting position..............................................................................508
5.6.3 Mounting/Disassembly...............................................................................................................509
5.7 Connection .................................................................................................................................513
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 13
Table of contents
5.7.1 Connection of 3RU21 overload relay.........................................................................................514

5.7.2 Connection of 3RB30/3RB31 overload relays ...........................................................................515
5.8 Operation ...................................................................................................................................516
5.8.1 Setting the current......................................................................................................................516
5.8.2 Setting the tripping class/ground-fault detection (3RB31) .........................................................517
5.8.3 RESET after release ..................................................................................................................517
5.8.4 TEST function ............................................................................................................................520
5.8.5 Response of the auxiliary contacts ............................................................................................522
5.9 Accessories................................................................................................................................523
5.9.1 Accessories................................................................................................................................523
5.9.2 Terminal support for stand-alone assembly...............................................................................524
5.9.2.1 Description .................................................................................................................................524
5.9.3 Mechanical remote RESET (release slide)................................................................................527
5.9.3.1 Description .................................................................................................................................527
5.9.4 Mechanical remote RESET (cable release)...............................................................................529
5.9.4.1 Description .................................................................................................................................529
5.9.5 Module for electrical remote RESET (3RU21 only) ...................................................................531
5.9.5.1 Description .................................................................................................................................531
5.9.5.2 Connecting the remote RESET..................................................................................................531
5.9.6 Sealable cover ...........................................................................................................................533
5.9.6.1 Description .................................................................................................................................533
5.9.6.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................533
5.9.7 Covers for ring cable lug connections........................................................................................535
5.9.7.1 Description .................................................................................................................................535
5.10 Technical data............................................................................................................................536
5.10.1.1 General data ..............................................................................................................................536
5.10.1.2 Protection functions - overview ..................................................................................................536
5.10.1.3 Equipment ..................................................................................................................................537
5.10.1.4 Configuration of load feeders.....................................................................................................537
5.10.1.5 Features of overload relays .......................................................................................................538
5.10.2 3RU21 ........................................................................................................................................539
5.10.2.1 General technical data ...............................................................................................................539
5.10.2.2 Main circuit .................................................................................................................................540
5.10.2.3 Conductor cross-sections main circuit .......................................................................................541
5.10.2.4 Auxiliary circuit ...........................................................................................................................543
5.10.2.5 Conductor cross sections, auxiliary circuit.................................................................................544
5.10.3 3RB30/3RB31 ............................................................................................................................546
5.10.3.2 Main circuit .................................................................................................................................548
5.11.1 Dimension drawings for 3RU21 thermal overload relays ..........................................................552
5.11.2 Dimension drawings for 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays ..........................................556
SIRIUS Innovations
14 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Table of contents
6 SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders ............................................................................................................. 563

6.1 Standards...................................................................................................................................563
6.2.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................564
6.2.2 Device versions..........................................................................................................................564
6.2.2.1 Pre-assembled complete devices ..............................................................................................566
6.2.2.2 Self-assembled load feeders .....................................................................................................567
6.2.3 Applications................................................................................................................................568
6.4 Functions....................................................................................................................................570
6.5 Configuration..............................................................................................................................571
6.6 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................572
6.6.1 Installation guidelines.................................................................................................................572
6.6.1.1 Minimum clearances (400 V AC) ...............................................................................................572
6.6.2 Mounting and disassembling load feeders ................................................................................576
6.6.2.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................576
6.6.2.2 Load feeder with screw-type connection system .......................................................................577
6.6.2.3 Load feeder with spring-loaded connection system ..................................................................579
6.6.2.4 Load feeder with hybrid connection ...........................................................................................589
6.6.3 Mounting and disassembling the assembly types .....................................................................593
6.6.3.1 On DIN rail without DIN rail adapter ..........................................................................................593
6.6.3.2 On DIN rail with DIN rail adapter................................................................................................594
6.6.3.3 On busbar system......................................................................................................................598
6.6.3.4 Wall mounting ............................................................................................................................605
6.7 Connection .................................................................................................................................608
6.8 Operation ...................................................................................................................................608
6.9 Accessories................................................................................................................................609
6.9.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................609
6.9.2 Accessories for starter combinations.........................................................................................610
6.9.3 Link modules ..............................................................................................................................611
6.9.4 Accessories for DIN rail mounting..............................................................................................614
6.9.5 Accessories for busbar mounting...............................................................................................615
6.10 Technical data............................................................................................................................616
6.10.1 General data ..............................................................................................................................616
6.10.2 Conductor cross-sections - main circuit.....................................................................................619
6.10.3 Conductor cross sections - auxiliary circuit................................................................................621
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 15
Table of contents
7 SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors ...................................................... 641
7.1 Standards...................................................................................................................................641
7.2.1 Device versions..........................................................................................................................643
7.2.3 Applications................................................................................................................................646
7.2.3.1 Function modules for direct-on-line start ...................................................................................646
7.2.3.2 Function modules for star-delta (wye-delta) start ......................................................................647
7.2.4 3RA28 function modules............................................................................................................649
7.3.1 Product combinations ................................................................................................................650
7.4 Functions....................................................................................................................................651
7.4.1 Overvoltage protection...............................................................................................................651
7.4.2 Time-delayed switching of contactors........................................................................................651
7.4.2.1 Response delay .........................................................................................................................651
7.4.2.2 OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage................................................................................................653
7.4.2.3 OFF-delay without auxiliary voltage...........................................................................................654
7.4.2.4 Star-delta (wye-delta) function ...................................................................................................655
7.5 Configuration..............................................................................................................................656
7.5.1 Configuration..............................................................................................................................656
7.6 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................660
7.6.1 Mounting instructions .................................................................................................................660
7.6.2 Minimum clearances and mounting position..............................................................................660
7.6.3 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................660
7.6.3.1 Function modules for direct-on-line start (solid-state timing relay with semiconductor
output/solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch) ...........................................................................660
7.6.3.2 Function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start ........................................................................662
7.6.4 Disassembly...............................................................................................................................665
output/solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch) ...........................................................................665
7.6.4.2 Function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start ........................................................................666
7.6.5 Replacing the removable terminal .............................................................................................668
7.7 Connection .................................................................................................................................669
7.7.1 Connecting the function modules for direct-on-line start ...........................................................669
7.7.1.1 Connecting the solid-state timing relay with semiconductor output...........................................669
7.7.1.2 Connecting the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch ..............................................................671
7.7.2 Connecting the function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start ................................................672
7.8 Operation ...................................................................................................................................673
7.8.1 Setting the times ........................................................................................................................673
7.9 Accessories................................................................................................................................674
7.9.1 Sealable cover cap ....................................................................................................................674
7.10 Technical data............................................................................................................................675
7.11 Dimension drawings...................................................................................................................677
7.11.1 Solid-state timing relays with semiconductor output and solid-state time-delay auxiliary
switches .....................................................................................................................................677
7.11.2 Star-delta (wye-delta) modules ..................................................................................................678
7.12.1 Internal circuit diagrams.............................................................................................................680
7.12.2 Example circuit diagrams...........................................................................................................681
SIRIUS Innovations
16 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Table of contents
8 SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays ................................................................................................ 683

8.1 Standards...................................................................................................................................683
8.1.1 Standards...................................................................................................................................683
8.2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................684
8.2.2 Versions .....................................................................................................................................685
8.2.3 Applications................................................................................................................................685
8.2.4 The advantages of current monitoring relays ............................................................................686
8.2.5 3RR214.-.A.30 Basic analog setting current monitoring relay...................................................687
8.2.6 3RR224.-.F.30 Standard digital setting current monitoring relay...............................................688
8.4 Functions....................................................................................................................................690
8.4.1 Functions and parameters .........................................................................................................690
8.4.2 Function charts for Basic analog setting current monitoring relay.............................................692
8.4.3 Function charts for Standard digital setting current monitoring relay ........................................693
8.5 Configuration..............................................................................................................................694
8.5.1 Current monitoring relay application areas ................................................................................694
8.5.2 Fault detection ...........................................................................................................................694
8.5.2.1 Wear detection ...........................................................................................................................695
8.5.2.2 Process monitoring ....................................................................................................................695
8.5.2.3 Overload detection.....................................................................................................................695
8.5.2.4 Detection of load shedding ........................................................................................................695
8.5.2.5 Cable break and phase failure ...................................................................................................696
8.5.2.6 Rotating field detection with motors...........................................................................................696
8.5.2.7 Motor protection in the case of special applications ..................................................................696
8.6 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................698
8.6.1 Mounting options........................................................................................................................698
8.6.2 Minimum clearances and mounting positions............................................................................698
8.6.3 Mounting/Disassembly...............................................................................................................698
8.7 Connection .................................................................................................................................701
8.7.1 3RR21 Basic analog setting current monitoring relay ...............................................................701
8.7.2 3RR22 Standard digital setting current monitoring relay ...........................................................702
8.8 Operation ...................................................................................................................................703
8.8.1.1 Parameters.................................................................................................................................703
8.8.1.2 Lower threshold value................................................................................................................704
8.8.1.3 Upper threshold value................................................................................................................705
8.8.1.4 ON-delay time ............................................................................................................................706
8.8.1.5 Tripping delay time.....................................................................................................................707
8.8.1.6 Memory ......................................................................................................................................708
8.8.1.7 Diagnostics with LED .................................................................................................................709
8.8.2.1 Parameters.................................................................................................................................710
8.8.2.2 Switching menus (possible settings are SET and RUN) ...........................................................712
8.8.2.3 Settings in the "RUN" menu.......................................................................................................715
8.8.2.4 Settings in the "SET" menu........................................................................................................717
8.8.2.5 Diagnostics in the "RUN" menu .................................................................................................726
8.9 Accessories................................................................................................................................728
8.9.1 Accessories................................................................................................................................728
8.9.2 Terminal support for stand-alone assembly...............................................................................728
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 17
Table of contents
8.9.2.1 Description .................................................................................................................................728

8.9.2.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................729
8.9.3 Sealable cover ...........................................................................................................................731
8.9.3.1 Description .................................................................................................................................731
8.9.3.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................731
8.10 Technical data............................................................................................................................732
8.10.1 Performance features of current monitoring relays....................................................................732
8.10.1.1 General data ..............................................................................................................................732
8.10.1.2 Monitoring functions...................................................................................................................733
8.10.1.3 Equipment ..................................................................................................................................734
8.10.1.4 Configuration of load feeders.....................................................................................................735
8.10.1.5 Features of current monitoring relays ........................................................................................736
8.10.1.6 Combinations with 3RT20 contactor..........................................................................................736
8.10.2.2 Main circuit .................................................................................................................................739
8.10.2.3 Connection for main circuit ........................................................................................................740
8.10.2.5 Connecting the auxiliary circuit ..................................................................................................742
8.10.2.6 Short-circuit protection ...............................................................................................................742
8.10.3.2 Main circuit .................................................................................................................................745
8.10.3.6 Short-circuit protection ...............................................................................................................748
8.11.1 Dimension drawings for 3RR21 Basic analog setting current monitoring relay.........................749
8.11.2 Dimension drawings for 3RR22 Standard digital setting current monitoring relay ....................751
A Appendix A ............................................................................................................................................ 755
A.1 Types of coordination.................................................................................................................755
A.2 More information ........................................................................................................................756
A.3 Correction sheet.........................................................................................................................757
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 759
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 773
SIRIUS Innovations
18 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview 1
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 Modular system for SIRIUS
System is everything: The SIRIUS modular system for the control cabinet
Siemens is one of the most important manufacturers of switching devices, whose product
range extends from devices that switch just a few milliamps to motor starter protectors for
power distribution. The process of configuring control cabinets must be quick, easy, flexible,
and must enable you to create space-saving solutions.
This is exactly what Siemens offers with its unique SIRIUS modular system. This system
offers all the functions and devices you will need for switching, starting, protecting, and
monitoring motors and systems. In other words, it provides a modular range of standard
components, which are perfectly matched to one another, can be combined really easily, and
use the same accessories. That's how easy controls and distribution can be.
Continuous further development and constant innovations ensure that, with SIRIUS, you are
ideally equipped to meet the challenges of today and tomorrow, and can benefit from cost-
effective solutions. All the components that make up the SIRIUS modular system are
characterized by a space-saving design and a high degree of flexibility. Configuration,
installation, wiring, and maintenance work are all extremely quick and easy to perform.
In further developing these products, a great deal of emphasis has consistently been placed
on meeting or even exceeding requirements in terms of essential performance features,
electrical and mechanical durability, dimensions, and ease of mounting and maintenance.
Environmentally-friendly and recyclable materials have been developed and used in the
system to reflect the ecological awareness that has grown at a quite incredible rate over the
last decade in particular. In the field of low-voltage switching devices, this has resulted in the
creation of modern industrial switching devices which fulfill all requirements with regard to
environmental compatibility.
Building on decades of experience, a totally new generation of devices for performing
switching, starting, protecting, and monitoring functions was created for the large and ever
growing number of motorized operating mechanism in the range up to 18.5 kW: SIRIUS
Innovations.
These new SIRIUS devices meet all requirements that have arisen in the field and can be
used as individual devices, as modules for complete load feeders, or installed in low-voltage
distribution boards or low-voltage switchgear. So no matter whether you want to configure
load feeders with motor starter protectors or overload relays, contactors, or soft starters,
SIRIUS has just the product you will need for any application.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 19
System overview
1.1 Introduction
1.1.2 SIRIUS Innovations
SIRIUS stands for innovation

Siemens is constantly developing its product portfolio to enable it to meet the demands of
industry, not only today, but in the future too. As part of this process, Siemens gathers
customer feedback on an ongoing basis and considers it in conjunction with the global trends
of tomorrow.
This manual underlines Siemens' claim to be a trendsetting company which offers you the
very best products for switching, starting, protecting, and monitoring your motors and
systems.
Figure 1-1 Innovations in the SIRIUS modular system
When coming up with these innovations for the SIRIUS modular system, particular
importance was placed on reducing the amount of wiring needed, saving space, reducing the
number of versions available, and providing operational reliability.
Simple and straightforward connection

The options for connecting to the higher-level control have now also been further improved:
The SIRIUS modular system now not only features the AS-Interface, but also the IO-Link,
which has been standardized as well. This ensures that switching devices can benefit from
optimum interaction with our SIMATIC automation system and also with third-party controls.
The connection to the automation level is implemented via function modules, which are
plugged onto contactors. However, these function modules are also available in a version for
traditional parallel wiring, as well as in versions featuring AS-i or IO-Link interfaces. This
simple version just contains the logic for performing the star-delta (wye-delta) functions of a
feeder, for example. There is no longer any need to carry out laborious control circuit wiring
work. The star-delta (wye-delta) times are set directly on the function module; all necessary
interlocks are already integrated therein. The smaller width is not only due to the higher
performance capability of the new devices, but also to the fact that the timing relay, for
example, which used to be connected separately, has been done away with completely.
SIRIUS Innovations
20 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.1 Introduction
Monitoring in just a few short steps

More and more often, drives are being required to monitor complex processes or expensive
machines to ensure they are functioning correctly. Previous solutions to such tasks involved
quite a lot of wiring. That's why the current monitoring relay has been fully integrated in the
main circuit in the new SIRIUS modular system. Designed like an overload relay, apparent or
active current measuring can thus be added in just a few short steps; but phase sequence,
phase failure, and other process-relevant data can also be evaluated too.
Reduced wiring
The infeed and power distribution options for a group of feeders has also been optimized in
order to reduce the wiring in the main circuit. The SIRIUS 3RV29 infeed system now
benefits, for example, from having a spring-loaded connection system available throughout,
which means that whole groups of feeders can be assembled quickly and without the need
for tools.
Minimized planning and configuration outlay

In order to reduce the effort involved in planning and configuration to a minimum, Siemens
offers a range of Internet tools in addition to the standard documents in paper format. These
tools can help you to select the most suitable product for your needs, to find the associated
technical data quickly, and to put together the relevant technical documentation easily.
With its SIRIUS modular system switching devices in sizes S00 and S0, which have been
completely redeveloped, Siemens can meet all requirements up to 32/40 A. This equates to
over 80% of all typical applications.
Problem-free usage
With its versatile product range, the SIRIUS modular system offers technology which is
suitable for use in all industries and all regions of the world. The products have been tested
in accordance with common standards and have obtained the approvals required to ensure
that they can be used anywhere in the world without any problems.
Flexible mounting options

The devices have been designed for installation on standard mounting rails ("DIN rails"), as
well as for screw fixing. A whole range of link modules is available for easily connecting
switching devices, both electrically and mechanically. These link modules are used to
combine the individual components of the SIRIUS modular system together to create load
feeders. If you make use of the spring-loaded connection system, this can even be done
without the need for tools by simply plugging the different components together.
The spring-loaded connection system has now been extended to cover the entire product
range of sizes S00 and S0 for the main circuit and the control circuit. The ring cable lug
connection system is also available for use with particular applications and on request for
certain regions.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 21
System overview
1.2 Safety instructions
Five safety rules for work in or on electrical installations

A set of rules, which are summarized in DIN VDE 0105 as the "five safety rules", are defined
for work in or on electrical installations as a preventative measure against electrical
accidents:
1. Isolate
2. Secure against switching on again
3. Verify that the equipment is not live
4. Ground and short-circuit
5. Erect barriers around or cover adjacent live parts
These five safety rules must be applied in the above order prior to starting work on an
electrical system. After completing the work, proceed in the reverse order.
It is assumed that every electrician is familiar with these rules.
Explanations
1. The isolating distances between live and de-energized parts of the system must vary
according to the operating voltage that is applied.
In electrical installations, "isolate" refers to the disconnection of all poles of live parts.
Disconnection of all poles can be achieved by, for example:
– Switching off the miniature circuit breaker
– Switching off the motor starter protector
– Unscrewing fuses
– Removing LV HRC fuses
2. The feeder must be secured against inadvertent restarting to ensure that it remains
isolated for the duration of the work. This can be achieved, for instance, by securing the
motor starter protector and miniature circuit breaker with lockable blocking elements in
the disconnected state, either using a lock or by unscrewing the fuses.
3. The deenergized state of the equipment should be verified using suitable test equipment,
e.g. a two-pole voltmeter. Single-pole test pins are not suitable for this purpose. The
absence of power must be established for all poles, phase to phase, and phase to N/PE.
4. Grounding and short-circuiting are only mandatory if the system has a nominal voltage
greater than 1 kV. In this case, the system should always be grounded first and then
connected to the live parts to be short-circuited.
5. These parts should be covered, or barriers erected around them, to avoid accidental
contact during the work with adjacent parts that are still live.
SIRIUS Innovations
22 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.3 Standards and approvals
1.3.1 Standards
The standards from Catalog LV 1 "Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution SIRIUS -
SENTRON - SIVACON" in the appendix always apply. Below are some of the most important
standards which apply to the innovations to the SIRIUS modular system.
Standards
Table 1- 1 IEC/DIN EN/DIN VDE standards
IEC DIN EN DIN VDE Title

60947-1 60947-1 — Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear: General rules
60947-2 60947-2 — • Motor starter protectors
60947-3 60947-3 — • Switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and
fuse-combination units
60947-4-1 60947-4-1 — • Contactors and motor-starters: Electromechanical

contactors and motor-starters
60947-4-2 60947-4-2 — • Contactors and motor-starters: AC semiconductor
motor controllers and starters
60947-4-3 60947-4-3 — • AC semiconductor controllers and contactors for
non-motorized loads
60947-5-1 60947-5-1 — Control circuit devices and switching elements:

Electromechanical control circuit devices
60947-6-2 60947-6-2 — Multiple function equipment: Control and protective

switching devices (or equipment) (CPS)
60335-1 60335-1 — Safety of household and similar electrical appliances -

Part 1: General requirements
— 50274 — Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies -

Protection against electric shock - Protection against
unintentional direct contact with hazardous live parts
60439-1 60439-1 — Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies:

Type-tested and partially type-tested assemblies
— 50274 — Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies -
Protection against electric shock - Protection against
unintentional direct contact with hazardous live parts
61140 61140 — Protection against electric shock - Common aspects for
installation and equipment
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 23
System overview
IEC DIN EN DIN VDE Title

61000-4-1 61000-4-1 — Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC); Part 4: Testing
and measurement techniques; Section 1: Overview of
IEC 61000-4 series
61000-6-3 61000-6-3 — Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC); Generic
standards - Emission standard for residential,
commercial and light-industrial environments
61000-6-4 61000-6-4 — Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC); Generic
standards - Emission standard for industrial
environments
Table 1- 2 UL/CSA/JIS standards
UL CSA C22.2 ASME JIS Title

UL 508 — — — Industrial Control Equipment
UL 489 — — — Molded Case Circuit-Breakers, Molded Case Switches,
and Circuit Breaker Enclosures
— No. 14 — — Industrial Control Equipment
— No. 5 — — Molded Case Circuit-Breakers, Molded Case Switches,
and Circuit Breaker Enclosures
— — A17.5/B44.1 — Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment
— — — C 8201-4-1 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear; Contactors
and Motor-Starter
1.3.2 Approvals, test certificates, characteristics
Approvals, test certificates, characteristics

You can find an overview of the certifications available for low-voltage controls and
distribution products and other technical documentation, updated daily, on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support).
For further information, refer to Catalog LV1 "Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution SIRIUS -
SENTRON - SIVACON", Chapter 20.
SIRIUS Innovations
24 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.4 Overview
1.4 Overview
1.4.1 SIRIUS modular system
SIRIUS modular system

The SIRIUS product range comprises devices for use in switching, starting, protecting, and
monitoring, as well as combinations thereof, which are known as "load feeders". Load
feeders can be created from the following devices:
● 3RT/3RH contactors
● 3RF solid-state switching devices
● 3RW soft starters
● 3RV motor starter protectors
● Thermal (3RU) or solid-state (3RB) overload relays
● 3RR monitoring relays
Since all devices are matched to one both electrically and mechanically, they can be
combined really easily to create load feeders. Alternatively, pre-assembled 3RA2 load
feeders or 3RA6 compact starters are also available.
The devices named above are supplemented for the main circuit by devices for the control
circuit: 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors and 3RA27 function
modules for connection to the higher-level control.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 25
System overview
1.4 Overview
Size
Function Components S00 S0 S2 ... S12
Main circuit Switching Contactors
and starting
Solid-state switching
devices
Soft starters ...
Protecting Motor starter

protectors
Overload relays ...
Monitoring Current monitoring

relays
Feeders Feeders
Compact starters
Control circuit Function modules for

mounting on
contactors
Function modules for

connection to the
automation level
SIRIUS Innovations
26 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.4 Overview
1.4.2 Content of SIRIUS Innovations System Manual
Content of SIRIUS Innovations System Manual in the SIRIUS modular system

This system manual focuses on the SIRIUS Innovations products in sizes S00 and S0 for
motors in the performance range up to 18.5 kW (400 V). Products which have separate,
device-specific manuals, are only briefly mentioned in this system manual. Comprehensive
technical details for such devices can be found in the relevant device-specific manuals. All
other products are described in detail in the product chapters of the system manual:
Information about ... Is available in ...

• 3RT2, 3RH2, and 3RA23/24 contactors and • Chapter 2 "SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor
contactor assemblies assebmlies (Page 101)"
• 3RF34 solid-state switching devices • Chapter 3 "SIRIUS 3RF4 solid-state switching
devices (Page 313)"
• 3RW soft starters • Manual "SIRIUS 3RW30/3RW40 Soft Starters"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi
ew/en/38752095)
(order no.: 3ZX1012-0RW30-1AC1)
• Manual "SIRIUS 3RW44 Soft Starters"
ew/en/21772518)
• 3RV2 motor starter protectors • Chapter 4 "SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter
protectors" (Page 379)
• 3RU2, 3RB30/31 overload relays • Chapter 5 "SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload
relays (Page 485)"
• 3RA21/22 load feeders • Chapter 6 "SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
(Page 563)"
• 3RA6 compact starters • Manual "SIRIUS 3RA6 Compact Starter"
ew/en/27865747)
(order no.: 3RA6992-0A)
• 3RA28 function modules for mounting on • Chapter 7 "SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules
contactors for mounting on 3RT2 contactors (Page 641)"
• 3RA27 function modules for connection to • Manual "Function Modules for AS-Interface"
the higher-level control (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vi
ew/en/39318922)
(order no.: 3ZX1012-0RA27-0AC0)
• Manual "Function Modules for IO-Link"
ew/en/39319600)
• 3RR2 current monitoring relays • Chapter 8 "SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring
relays (Page 683)"
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 27
System overview
1.5 System properties
Reference
You can download the manuals from the Internet (www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support).
Simply enter the order number of the relevant item into the search field.
Notes on further information (product information, product documentation, product selection,
etc.) available on the Internet can be found in the "More information (Page 756)" appendix.
Correction sheet
A Correction sheet (Page 757) is included at the end of the manual. Please use it to record
your suggestions for improvements, additions, and corrections, and return the sheet to us.
This will help us to improve the next edition of the manual.
1.5.1 System properties

All the devices affected by the innovations in the SIRIUS modular system are available in
two sizes (S00 up to 7.5 kW and S0 up to 18.5 kW at 400 V) and have a width of just 45 mm.
The devices come with a uniform range of accessories for both sizes.
SIRIUS Innovations
28 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.5.2 Modular system design

The individual SIRIUS Innovations components are modules from the complete SIRIUS
modular system (up to size S12, 250 kW at 400 V), which are matched to one another in
terms of their size and their technical data. This enables individual requirements to be met
quickly and cost-effectively. And it goes without saying that this applies to the uniform range
of accessories as well.

1 3RV29 infeed systems

2 3RV2 motor starter protectors
3 3RT2 contactors and contactor assemblies
4 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
5 3RW30/3RW40 soft starters
6 3RU2, 3RB3 overload relays
7 3RR2 current monitoring relays
Figure 1-2 Overview graphic (assembly in the control cabinet)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 29
System overview
1.5.3 Switching technology

The SIRIUS modular system has the right technology for every application:
Table 1- 3 Motor starting options
Application Technology
Electromechanical • Direct-on-line start • 3RT contactors, 3RA contactor
starting assemblies, or 3RA6 compact starters
• Reversing start • 3RA reversing contactor assemblies
• 3RA6 compact starters
• Star-delta (wye-delta) start • 3RA contactor assemblies for star-delta
(wye-delta) start
Electronic starting • Direct-on-line start • 3RF solid-state switching devices
• Reversing start • 3RF solid-state switching devices
• Soft start • 3RW soft starters
Example: 3RT contactors, 3RA contactor assemblies, or 3RA6 compact starters

3RT contactors, 3RA contactor assemblies, or 3RA6 compact starters are used for all
standard applications up to 250 kW.
W
ϑ ϑ PD[
WV W
Figure 1-3 Direct switching through current feed of the contactor coil
Example: 3RF solid-state switching devices

3RF solid-state switching devices are used for frequent switching or reversing, of motors in
parcel distribution systems, for example.
1 L2 3 L2 5 L3
A1 +
A2 -
A3 +
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
Figure 1-4 Two-phase switching through antiparallel thyristor pairs
SIRIUS Innovations
30 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
Example: 3RW soft starters

3RW soft starters are used for soft starting and ramp-down, for pumps and fans, for
example.
/
8 //
0
/
a
/
G 1G 1
8 //
α α
α α ϕ
Figure 1-5 Phase angle control of the thyristor pairs
Technology selection depends on various factors. The table below provides an overview of
the most important aspects:
Table 1- 4 Technology selection
Technology
Electromechanical Electronic
3RT contactors, 3RA 3RF solid-state 3RW soft starters
load feeders, or 3RA6 switching devices
compact starters
Number of starts per Average High Low

hour
Switching service life Average Long Average
Switching capacity High Low High
Occurrence of current High High Low
peaks
Occurrence of torque High High Low
peaks
Reversing operation Yes Yes No
Acoustic noise Average None Low
generation
Galvanic isolation Yes No No
Shock and vibration Average High Average
resistance
Power loss Low High Low
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 31
System overview
1.5.4 Uniform connection system

The devices are matched to one another in terms of their rated sizes and technical data.
● The same width guarantees quick mounting.
● Devices with the same rated current have the same terminals.
● Device combinations are matched to one another and offer screw-type, spring-loaded,
and ring cable lug connection systems.
The SIRIUS modular system has the right connection system for every environment. The
table below will help you to choose the right connection system:
Table 1- 5 Connection systems
Screw-type Spring-loaded Ring cable lug
Assembly/disassembly Standard Short Long

time
Testing after Required Not required Required
transportation
Maintenance costs Standard Low Standard
Contact reliability Standard High Standard
Vibration/shock Standard High Standard
resistance
Ferrule required on Partially required Not required Required
conductor
Removal of the Standard Easy Laborious
conductor
Use of link modules Standard Easy: plug-in Not possible
Available products S00 to S12 (consistent) S00 and S0 S00 and S0 (partially
(consistent) restricted)
Application frequency 80 % 15 % 5%
Costs Standard Small surcharge Standard
SIRIUS Innovations
32 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.5.5 Flexible assembly methods

The SIRIUS modular system offers maximum flexibility in terms of configuration. The system
components can be assembled as feeders or mounted separately.
Table 1- 6 Assembly (mounted separately or assembled as feeders)
Separately mounted Mounted as complete feeders
The system components are assembled The system components are assembled as a unit
separately (e.g. on separate DIN rails). (e.g. with a link module).
The SIRIUS modular system offers the right solution for every type of assembly:
Table 1- 7 Assembly types
Assembly type Benefit

Feeders assembled from individual SIRIUS More than 40,000 tested combinations offer
devices solutions for almost every application.
SIRIUS 3RA2 load feeders More than 500 pre-assembled combinations
facilitate rapid and fault-free control cabinet
assembly.
SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters Compact devices with high integrated functionality
for improved efficiency and reliability in the control
cabinet.
1.5.6 Performance capability

All innovations in the SIRIUS modular system can be mounted side by side and operated at
an ambient operating temperature of -25 °C to +60 °C. The SIRIUS modular system is
optimally suited for applications in demanding environments (in terms of dust exposure,
vibration and shock load; ATEX, etc.). All standard approvals have been obtained, making
the system suitable for use all over the world. In 400 V systems, size S00 covers a
performance range of up to 7.5 kW and size S0 up to 18.5 kW, with a width of just 45 mm. A
short-circuit breaking capacity of up to 150 kA is available.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 33
System overview
1.5.7 Assembly and mounting

Accessories such as auxiliary switches and surge suppressors can be mounted quickly and
disassembled in just a few short steps. Standard tools are required to disassemble
components only very rarely. Siemens offers a standardized tool (screwdriver 3RA2908-1A)
for disassembling conductors from spring-loaded terminals on all SIRIUS Innovations
products.
1.5.8 Load feeders

Link modules based on screw-type and spring-loaded connection systems are available for
assembling device combinations and fuseless load feeders. The link modules establish the
mechanical and electrical connections for the devices. Motor starter protectors can be
combined with the following devices via link modules:
● Contactors
● Soft starter
● Solid-state switching devices
The SIRIUS Innovations products now also offer a "plug-in connection system" for
assembling load feeders from devices with spring-loaded terminals. Contactors, solid-state
switching devices, and soft starters can be connected to the motor starter protector by simply
plugging them in via a link module:
$

A Link module
① Slot for link modules
② Slot for conductor connection
③ Screwdriver opening for assembly/disassembly without a link module
Figure 1-6 Link module
SIRIUS Innovations
34 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
The link module is first attached to the device to be connected, then the resulting unit is
plugged on to the motor starter protector. This ensures that the requisite electrical and
mechanical connections are established in the main circuit. Overload relays and current
monitoring relays can easily be attached to contactors and solid-state switching devices in a
similar way, without the need for another link module:

$

A Current monitoring relay

③ Screwdriver opening for assembly/disassembly without a link module
Figure 1-7 Plug-in connection system on the current monitoring relay
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 35
System overview
1.5.9 Application monitoring

The current monitoring relays, which enable intelligent protective functions to be easily
implemented within the application, are a central component of the innovations made to the
SIRIUS modular system.
Increasing numbers of customers require application monitoring in addition to motor
protection. Overload protection (based on I²t measuring/calculation) provides information on
the motorized load, but it does not necessarily allow for conclusions to be drawn regarding
the correct execution of processes within the machine. 2- or 3-phase current monitoring with
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays facilitates the direct monitoring and protection of the
application.

① Application monitoring
② Motor protection
Figure 1-8 Application monitoring
SIRIUS Innovations
36 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.5.10 Communication
SIRIUS switching devices can be connected to higher-level control systems using
conventional wiring, but also by means of intelligent wiring and a fieldbus:
● IO-Link
● AS-Interface
SIRIUS switching devices are linked into the Siemens Totally Integrated Automation concept
via function modules. Totally Integrated Automation offers the user uniformity in terms of
configuration, programming, data storage, and communication.
SIRIUS switching devices are connected to the automation level via AS-Interface or IO-Link,
without any additional wiring. These interfaces ensure that information about the switch
position and the readiness of the feeder for operation is transferred, and that contactor
control is implemented. In addition to these three items of information relating to feeders, IO-
Link also transfers diagnostics data.
5HDG\
$FWXDWLRQ
)HHGEDFNRI
VZLWFKLQJVWDWXV
SPS
'LDJQRVWLFV SPS
Figure 1-9 Communication via AS-Interface or IO-Link
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 37
System overview
1.5.11 Safety applications

SIRIUS switching devices are often used in parts of the system which have a bearing on
safety. The Safety Integrated concept enables uniform solutions to be created, from safety
relays through to fail-safe communication via AS-Interface or PROFIBUS DP.
Example
SIRIUS contactor in a safety application:
● Motor starter protectors in combination with undervoltage release and contactor:
PL d (ISO 13849-1) or SIL 2 (IEC 62061)
● Contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start:
PL e (ISO 13849-1) or SIL 3 (IEC 62061)
1.5.12 Environmental protection

Siemens attaches great importance to the subject of eco-design. Our company-internal
standard SN 36350 on environmentally compatible product design has been permanently
integrated in our product development processes since 1993. Our production meets the
highest quality and environmental standards.
The CO2 balance is another important topic as regards the manufacturing processes used
for our products. All Siemens products are eco-labeled in accordance with
DIN EN ISO 14021 as a matter of course. This process of eco-labeling makes our
environmentally-compatible product design more transparent and ensures that a continual
improvement in the CO2 balance can be observed.
1.5.13 Energy efficiency

The devices which make up the SIRIUS modular system are designed for minimum power
loss, and passively and actively support the realization of efficient systems and applications.
Product example soft starters

● Reduction of peak loads by up to 60%.
– The soft starter protects the connected products and systems both on the connection
and drive sides.
● Minimum intrinsic power loss thanks to integrated bypasses.
– The complete soft starter portfolio bridges the thyristors during operation by means of
bypasses and thus enables the intrinsic power loss to be reduced to contactor level.
– 1 W power loss requires 3 W cooling expenditure. Typical frequency converters
generate a power loss which is 30 times higher than that created by a comparable soft
starter (bypass operation) and thus require 90 times the cooling expenditure.
● The most space-saving starter ever.
– Volume reduction compared to typical contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta)
start: 66 %.
– Volume reduction compared to typical frequency converters: up to 98%.
SIRIUS Innovations
38 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
Product example contactors

● Minimized holding and closing power.
– The aspects of low power loss and further optimization of the holding and closing
power ratings played an important role in the development of SIRIUS contactors.
– SIRIUS contactors with electronically controlled coils support further reduction of the
holding power by up to 90%.
– All SIRIUS contactors can be used on the Chinese market, as they meet the Chinese
energy efficiency standard GB 21518-2008 for AC contactors in accordance with
"Grade 2". The contactors thus far exceed the minimum requirement ("Grade 3") and
are optimally equipped for the future.
Product example compact starters

● Only one switching point for minimized losses on the current path.
– Thanks to the combined functions of a solid-state overload relay, a motor starter
protector, and a contactor in a single device, transfer resistances (switching points,
cable transitions, etc.) are reduced to a minimum.
Product example overload relays

● Electronics instead of bimetal for minimized intrinsic power loss.
– In addition to a wide setting range of up to 1:10, the application of electronic sensors
and actuators facilitates intrinsic power loss reductions of more than 98%.
● Optimized thermal release (bimetal).
– For devices with thermal overload relay, the power loss compared to predecessor
products is reduced by 5 to 10% thanks to the optimized bimetal release.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 39
System overview
1.6 Customer benefits
Customer benefits
SIRIUS offers benefits in the following areas:
● Assembly and handling
● Planning and configuration
● Connection to the automation level
● System monitoring
Table 1- 8 Customer benefits
Area Technical highlights Customer benefits

Proven and optimized modularity and Maximum flexibility for
functional diversity in the SIRIUS application-oriented solutions
modular system
Performance increase with unchanged Space savings in the control
size, functions which are already cabinet
integrated, and "all-in-one" solution with
compact starters
Reduced variance, e.g. thanks to size- Reduced storage costs as well
independent accessories and wide as planning and ordering
voltage and wide setting ranges expenditure
Assembly and handling • Integrated spring-loaded connection Reduced wiring expenditure
system and fault avoidance in terms of
• Assembly of starters with plug-in assembly and handling
connection system
• Corresponding infeed systems and
integrated functionalities
System monitoring • Monitoring relays and function Operational reliability and
modules for extremely simple system availability
application monitoring
• End-of-lifetime detection for 3RA6
compact starter
• Comprehensive diagnostics
messages
Connection to the Easy connection to AS-i or IO-Link Optimum integration in the
automation level automation environment (TIA)
Planning and • Comprehensive planning and • Simplified system planning
configuration configuration tools and documentation
• Numerous approvals • Global applicability
• Numerous combination tests for
SIRIUS
SIRIUS Innovations
40 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
SIRIUS offers the perfect solution throughout the entire product lifecycle:
&RQILJXUDWLRQ 3ODQQLQJ2UGHULQJ 0RXQWLQJ 2SHUDWLRQ 0DLQWHQDQFH
0DFKLQHPDQXIDFWXUHUVDQGSODQWFRQVWUXFWRUV &RQWUROFDELQHWEXLOGHUV (QGFXVWRPHU
$XWRPDWLRQVXSSOLHUV
6LPSOLILHGV\VWHP 0D[LPXP 6SDFHVDYLQJVLQ 2SWLPXP +LJKRSHUDWLRQDO

SODQQLQJDQG IOH[LELOLW\IRU WKHFRQWUROFDELQHW LQWHJUDWLRQLQWKH UHOLDELOLW\DQG
GRFXPHQWDWLRQ DSSOLFDWLRQ DXWRPDWLRQ V\VWHPDYDLODELOLW\
RULHQWHGVROXWLRQV HQYLURQPHQW7,$
:RUOGZLGHDSSOLFD 5HGXFHGSODQQLQJ 5HGXFHGZLULQJ 5HGXFHGVWRUDJH

WLRQ DQGRUGHULQJ H[SHQGLWXUHDQG FRVWV
H[SHQGLWXUH IDXOWDYRLGDQFHLQ
WHUPVRIDVVHPEO\
DQGKDQGOLQJ
Figure 1-10 Customer benefits by product lifecycle
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 41
System overview
1.7 Components and combinations
1.7.1 Switching and starting
1.7.1.1 SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors
3RT2 contactors
Figure 1-11 S0 contactor
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors and contactor assemblies offer maximum flexibility in terms of
dimensioning, handling, and function:
Table 1- 9 3RT2 contactors and contactor assemblies
Area Customer benefits

Functions • Power contactors (motors, resistive loads) and contactor relays
• Conventional (S00 and S0) and electronic drive (S0 only; reduced power
consumption)
• Function modules for mounting on contactors and for connection to the
automation level (AS-i/IO-Link)
• Reversing contactor: space-saving mechanical interlock for S00 and S0
Dimensioning and • Performance increase: S00 (7.5 kW, 16 A), S0 (18.5 kW, 38 A)
design • Width 45 mm
• Integrated auxiliary switches in both S00 and S0
• Auxiliary switches in identical design for S00 and S0
• Screw-type, spring-loaded, and ring cable lug connection systems, plus
solder pin connection system (S00 only)
Mounting • Contactor assemblies (for star-delta (wye-delta) start, reversing contactor
advantages assembly, 2 contactors in series)
• Contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start:
– Up to 22 kW
– Control circuit wiring integrated in function modules, incl. electrical and
mechanical interlock
• Easy assembly of contactor assemblies and feeders by means of link
modules for screw-type and spring-loaded terminals
• Integrated cable duct for feeder-oriented assembly (with S0)
SIRIUS Innovations
42 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview

Application • Easy connection of feeders to the automation level via AS-Interface or IO-
areas/customer Link
benefits • Performance increase up to 18.5 kW in 45 mm width
• Safety applications: Motor starter protectors in combination with
– Undervoltage release and contactor usable in PL d/SIL 2
– Star-delta (wye-delta) starter usable in PL e/SIL 3
• Comprehensive approvals for global applicability
Reference
More information ... Is available in ...

About SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors The chapter titled SIRIUS 3RT2
contactors/contactor assemblies (Page 101)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 43
System overview
Fitting of auxiliary switches on 3RT2 contactors (size S00 and S0)

1 Contactor size S00

2 Contactor size S0
3 Laterally mountable auxiliary switch block (right or left), 2-pole
4 Auxiliary switch block for snapping onto the front, 4-pole
5 Auxiliary switch block for snapping onto the front, 2-pole (cable entry from above)
6 Auxiliary switch block for snapping onto the front, 2-pole (cable entry from below)
7 Auxiliary switch block for snapping onto the front, 1-pole (cable entry from above or below)
8 Function module for AS-Interface, direct-on-line start
9 3RA28 function modules
10 Function module for IO-Link, direct-on-line start
Figure 1-12 Fitting of auxiliary switches on 3RT2 contactors (size S00 and S0)
SIRIUS Innovations
44 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
Size-specific accessories for 3RT2 contactors (size S00)


9 Surge suppressor
10 3-phase infeed terminal
11 Star jumper, 3-pole, without connection terminal
12 Parallel switching connector, 3-pole or 4-pole, with connection terminal
13 Wiring modules on the top and bottom, for connecting the main and control current paths
14 Solder pin adapter
15 Terminal module (adapter) for contactors with screw connections
Figure 1-13 Size-specific accessories for 3RT2 contactors (size S00)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 45
System overview
Size-specific accessories for contactors (size S0)

1 Contactor size S0
6 Surge suppressor
10 Pneumatic delay block
11 Mechanical latch
SIRIUS Innovations
46 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
12 Parallel switching connector

14 Coil terminal module, top and bottom
15 Wiring modules, top and bottom, for connecting the control current paths
16 Wiring modules, top and bottom, for connecting the main current paths
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 47
System overview
1.7.1.2 SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
3RF34 solid-state switching devices
Figure 1-15 Solid-state switching device
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices feature a heat sink integrated in the insulated
enclosure, so no grounding is required.
Table 1- 10 3RF34 solid-state switching devices

Functions • Instantaneous switching solid-state contactors for motor switching
• Direct-on-line and reversing contactor (integrated electric interlock).
Dimensioning and • S0 (0.5 to 16 A)
design • Width 45 mm (2.2 kW/5.4 A) or 90 mm (7.5 kW/16 A)
• 24 V DC and 110 to 230 V AC
• Rated voltage up to 600 V
• Insulated enclosure
• Optimized sizing and few power versions up to 7.5 kW
• Screw-type and spring-loaded terminals
Mounting • Combination with protection devices and monitoring devices
advantages • Side-by-side assembly possible
• Easy connection to the motor starter protector by means of link module
• Connection option for solid-state overload relay or current monitoring relay
• Removable terminals for auxiliary circuit wiring
Application • Wear- and noise-free operation for frequent motor switching
areas/customer • Long service life (over 100 million operating cycles)
benefits • Comprehensive approvals for global applicability
Reference

About SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching Chapter "SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching
devices devices (Page 313)"
SIRIUS Innovations
48 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.7.1.3 SIRIUS 3RW30/40 soft starters
3RW30/40 soft starters
Figure 1-16 S0 soft starter
The SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starters for standard applications in 200 to 480 V systems
(3RW40: 200 to 600 V) provide basic functionalities at cost-optimized prices:
Table 1- 11 3RW30/40 soft starters

Functions • Soft starting for simple startup conditions
• Integrated bypass contact system
• Integrated protection functions for motor starter and soft starter (3RW40)
• 2-phase "polarity balancing" control method (consistently up to 250 kW)
• Thermistor motor protection (optional with 3RW40)
• Settable current limiting (3RW40)
Dimensioning and • Performance increase of 2 performance classes in smaller sizes:
design – S00 up to 17.6 A
– S0 up to 38 A
– S2 up to 72 A
• 45 mm width (18.5 kW/38 A)
Mounting • Easy commissioning and maintenance
advantages • Matched with the SIRIUS modular system
• Easy retrofitting with wiring already installed
• Parameterizable output (3RW40)
Application • Considerable power savings through integrated bypass contact system
areas/customer • Adjustable tripping classes (3RW40)
benefits • Integrated diagnostics functions (3RW40)
• Comprehensive approvals for global applicability, also ATEX (3RW40)
Reference

About SIRIUS 3RW30/40 soft starters Manual "SIRIUS 3RW30/3RW40 Soft Starters"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view
/en/38752095)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 49
System overview
Accessories for 3RW30 soft starters

1 Link module to motor starter protector with screw-type terminals

2 Link module to motor starter protector with spring-loaded terminals (size S0)
3 Link module to motor starter protector with spring-loaded terminals (size S00)
4 Infeed terminal (sizes S00 and S0)
Figure 1-17 Accessories for 3RW30 soft starters
Accessories for 3RW40 soft starters

1 Link module to motor starter protector with screw-type terminals

2 Link module to motor starter protector with spring-loaded terminals
3 Infeed terminal
4 Sealing cover
5 Fan for increased switching frequency
Figure 1-18 Accessories for 3RW40 soft starters
SIRIUS Innovations
50 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.7.2 Protecting
1.7.2.1 SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
3RV2 motor starter protectors
Figure 1-19 Motor starter protector S0
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors can be combined with other SIRIUS devices easily
and flexible, while also saving on space and wiring:
Table 1- 12 3RV2 motor starter protectors

Functions • Short-circuit protection, overload protection, switching (manual), isolation
• Fuseless
• Motor protection, starter protection, system protection, and transformer
protection
Dimensioning and • S00 und S0 (bis 40 A in nur 45 mm Baubreite)
design • Choice of connection systems:
- Screw-type terminals
- Spring-loaded terminals
- Ring cable lugs
Mounting • Easily and rapidly combinable with any SIRIUS switching device
advantages • Reduced main circuit wiring through combination with:
– SIRIUS infeed system
– 3-phase busbar system
– Infeed system for 3RA6 compact starters
– 8US busbar system
Application • Minimized space requirements
areas/customer • Reduced power consumption
benefits • Global applicability thanks to comprehensive approvals
Reference

About SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors Chapter 4 "SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter
protectors" (Page 379)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 51
System overview
Accessories for 3RV2 motor starter protectors
8
6
1 Signaling switch
2 Lateral auxiliary switch with 2 contacts
4 Disconnector module
5 Terminal block type E
6 Undervoltage release
7 Shunt release
8 Transverse auxiliary switch
Figure 1-20 Accessories for 3RV2 motor starter protectors
SIRIUS Innovations
52 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
Infeed systems
The SIRIUS modular system has the right infeed for every requirement.

1 SIRIUS infeed system (3RV2917)

2 3-phase busbar system (3RV1915)
3 Combination of 3RA68 infeed system for compact starter and
3RV2917 infeed system for motor starter protector
4 Busbar system (8US)
Figure 1-21 Infeed systems
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 53
System overview
1.7.2.2 SIRIUS 3RV2917 infeed system
3RV2917 infeed system
3b
5
3a
5
1
2
5
1 3-phase busbar with infeed

2 3-phase busbar for system expansion
3 Expansion plug
4 End cap
5 Connector
6 Contactor base
7 Outgoing terminal
Figure 1-22 3RV2917 infeed system
SIRIUS Innovations
54 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.7.2.3 SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
Figure 1-23 S0 overload relay
The thermal and solid-state overload relays are available in the modular system with graded
functionality, which reflects their flexible applicability.
Table 1- 13 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays

Functions • Current-dependent motor protection
• Modular system: Graded functionality for individual requirements
• Integrated temperature compensation
• Integrated remote reset with 3RB31
Dimensioning and • Performance increase:
design – S00 (7.5 kW/16 A)
– S0 (18.5 kW/up to 40 A)
• 45 mm width (40 A)
• Large wide setting range of 1:4 with 3RB3
• High long-term stability through special bimetals with 3RU2
• Matched and uniform accessories for thermal and solid-state overload
relays
• Screw-type, spring-loaded, ring cable lug connection system (only with
3RU2)
Mounting • Optional direct mounting on contactor or stand-alone assembly
advantages • Removable terminals for control circuit wiring (3RB3)
• Same stand-alone assembly support for 3RU2 and 3RB3, with screw-type
and spring-loaded connection systems
Application • 98% lower power consumption than conventional solutions (3RB3)
areas/customer • Lower power loss compared to predecessor (5 to 10% with 3RU2)
benefits • Optimum adjustability to the motor current: overlapping ranges up to 60°C,
above that up to 70°C without overlapping
• Comprehensive approvals for global applicability (e.g. ATEX)
Reference

About SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays Chapter 5 "SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
(Page 485)"
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 55
System overview
Accessories for 3RU2 and 3RB30/31 overload relays

1 Overload relay size S0

2 Overload relay size S00
3 Stand-alone assembly support, size S0
4 Stand-alone assembly support, size S00
5 Electrical remote reset, sizes S00 and S0 (3RU2 only)
6 Sealing cover, sizes S00 and S0
Figure 1-24 Accessories for 3RU2 and 3RB30/31 overload relays
SIRIUS Innovations
56 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.7.3 Monitoring
1.7.3.1 SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
3RR2 current monitoring relays
Figure 1-25 S0 current monitoring relays
The SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays are ideally suited to a range of applications,
thanks to the flexible way in which they can be adjusted:
Table 1- 14 3RR2 current monitoring relays

Functions • Analog or digital setting
• Overcurrent and undercurrent monitoring
• Phase sequence, phase failure, and fault current monitoring
• Apparent or active current monitoring
• Freely parameterizable threshold values and delay times
• Manual and automatic reset
Dimensioning and • S00, S0 (1.6 up to 40 A with only two versions)
design • 24 V AC/DC, 24 to 240 V AC/DC
• 160 to 690 V wide voltage range in the main circuit
• 45 mm width (40 A)
• 1 CO contact and 1 semiconductor output
• Clear status signals on the display
Mounting • Removable terminals for auxiliary circuit wiring
advantages • Direct mounting on contactor
• Same stand-alone mounting support as with overload relays
Application • One device for overload and underload monitoring
areas/customer • Integrated assembly:
benefits – Reduced wiring
– No separate transformers required
– 3-phase current monitoring with further monitoring options
• Current monitoring relay for feeder-integrated load monitoring
• Detection of fast and substantial, as well as slight and "subtle" changes
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 57
System overview
Reference

About SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays Chapter 8 "SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring
relays (Page 683)"
Accessories for 3RR2 current monitoring relays


3 Stand-alone mounting support
4 Sealing cover
Figure 1-26 3RR2 current monitoring relays
SIRIUS Innovations
58 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.7.4 Feeders
1.7.4.1 SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
Load feeders
Figure 1-27 S0 load feeder
The tested load feeders offer switching and protection functions. Thanks to their multiple
combination options, they can be easily configured for almost any requirement.
Table 1- 15 Load feeders

Functions • Switching and protection functions in one mechanical unit
• High short-circuit breaking capacity
• Tested combinations (fuseless and fused)
• Coordination types 1 and 2 (tested up to 150 kA)
• Tested for CLASS 10, 20, 30
• With motor starter protectors or MSPs for starter combinations
• With contactor, solid-state contactor, and soft starter
• Connection to the automation level via IO-Link and AS-i
Dimensioning and • Tested for all common line voltages
design • S00, S0 (0.06 up to 18.5 kW)
• Pre-assembled SIRIUS 3RA2 feeders with 230 V AC and 24 V DC
Mounting • Easy mounting of individual components into tested combinations
advantages • Direct connection of switching devices
• Perfectly matched accessories
• Screw-type, spring-loaded, ring cable lug connection systems
Application • Completely pre-assembled load feeders
areas/customer • Comprehensive type tests for load feeders for self-assembly by the
benefits customer (approx. 40,000 combinations)
• Comprehensive dimensioning, planning, and construction support
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 59
System overview
Accessories for load feeders

The main accessories for 3RV2 motor starter protectors, and those for 3RT2 contactors
(such as side-mounted and transverse auxiliary switches, current limiters, undervoltage
limiters, rotary operating mechanisms, busbar adapters, etc.) can be used for 3RA21/22 load
feeders and feeders for self-assembly.
3RA21/22 pre-assembled load feeders

The 3RA21/22 fuseless load feeders can be ordered as a complete device for direct-on-line
starting or reversing operation. Sizes S00 and S0 are both available with either screw-type or
spring-loaded connection systems.
Reference

About SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders Chapter 6 "SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
(Page 563)"
SIRIUS Innovations
60 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.7.4.2 SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters
3RA6 compact starter
Figure 1-28 Compact starter
The SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starter is a compact, highly integrated device which features
state-of-the-art controls, including practical diagnostics functions. The compact starter
ensures improved efficiency and reliability in the control cabinet.
Table 1- 16 3RA6 compact starters

Functions • Direct-on-line starter and reversing starter
• Short-circuit protection, electronic overload protection, functional switching,
and line protection
• Mechanical and electrical interlock with reversing starter
• IO-Link and AS-i connection
• Manual and automatic reset (remote reset via control)
Dimensioning and • S0 (0.1 up to 32 A/15 kW)
design • Width of 45 mm (direct-on-line starter) or 90 mm (reversing starter)
• 5 setting ranges from 0.1 A to 32 A
• Weld-free contacts (end-of-service-life indication)
• Screw-type and spring-loaded connection systems with removable
terminals in the main and auxiliary circuits
Mounting • SIRIUS 3RA68 infeed system for simpler, space-saving installation
advantages • Connection of cables up to 70 mm²
• Coding and locking options in the 3RA6 compact starter
• Removable terminals for easy and quick replacement if service is required
(permanent wiring)
• Optional control kit for testing the main current path
Application • Integrated diagnostics functions
areas/customer • Large wide voltage ranges and wide setting ranges
benefits • Three different power infeed options
• Fast and standardized configuration thanks to full integration in STEP 7
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 61
System overview
Versions
The 3RA6 compact starter is available in the following versions:
Table 1- 17 3RA6 compact starter versions
Version Figure
Compact starter direct-on-line version
Compact starter reversing version
Compact starter direct-on-line, IO-Link version
Compact starter reversing, IO-Link version
Reference

About the 3RA6 compact starter Manual "SIRIUS 3RA6 Compact Starter"
/en/27865747)
(order no.: 3RA6992-0A)
SIRIUS Innovations
62 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
Accessories for 3RA6 compact starters
1 3RA6 compact starter

2 External auxiliary switch block
3 AS-i add-on module
4 AS-i add-on module with:
• Two local inputs for safe disconnection
• Two additional digital inputs
• One additional digital input and one digital output
• Two additional digital outputs
• For on-site control
5 Adapter for screw mounting
Figure 1-29 Accessories for 3RA6 compact starters
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 63
System overview
Infeed system for 3RA6 compact starter

1 Infeed on left or right using spring-loaded connection system

2 Infeed on left using screw-type connection system
3 Expansion module
4 Expansion plug
5 Terminal block
6 Expansion plug for 3RV19
7 PE infeed
8 PE expansion plug
9 PE tap
10 45 mm adapter for infeed system for 3RA6
Figure 1-30 Infeed system for 3RA6 compact starter
SIRIUS Innovations
64 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.7.5 Function modules
Figure 1-31 Function modules
Function modules are used to perform various control jobs on automatic production lines and
for processing machines. They are suited to all time-delayed switching operations in control,
starting, protection, and regulation circuits, and ensure a high degree of repeat accuracy for
delay times, once they have been set.
Function modules are divided into those with a communication connection (AS-Interface or
IO-Link) and those without a communication connection.
Communication-capable 3RA27 function modules are available for the following contactors
and contactor assemblies:
● For direct-on-line start
● For reversing start
● For star-delta (wye-delta) start
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 65
System overview
1.7.5.1 SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors
3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors

SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors enable the
control circuit wiring to be reduced significantly. With star-delta (wye-delta) starters, for
example, they replace the control circuit wiring in its entirety.
Table 1- 18 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors

Functions • Direct-on-line, reversing, and star-delta (wye-delta) start
• Time-delayed switching of contactors (0.05 to 100 s)
• ON-delay and OFF-delay versions
• Star-delta (wye-delta) function module without extra control circuit wiring
• Switch position indication for the contactor via a mechanical plunger
Dimensioning and • Only one version for S00 and S0
design • Suitable for control voltages of 24 to 240 V AC/DC
• Contactor coil controlled via semiconductor output
• Star-delta (wye-delta) switchover 0.5 to 60 s
• Star-delta (wye-delta) changeover delay: 50 ms
Mounting • Easy plug-on assembly of a starter, without tools
advantages • Removable terminals
Application • Assembly of star-delta (wye-delta) starters, including timing function and
areas/customer electrical interlock, without additional wiring
benefits • Universal applicability thanks to wide voltage and time ranges
SIRIUS Innovations
66 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
Assembly
With 3RA28 function modules, a starter can be easily assembled by combining individual
modules together or by using pre-assembled combinations.
Type of starter Individual modules Pre-assembled combinations

Direct-on-line start

Reversing start
Star-delta (wye-delta)
start
Reference

About 3RA28 function modules for direct-on-line Chapter 7 "SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules
start and star-delta (wye-delta) start (Page 641)"
About function modules for reversing starting Chapter 2 "SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor
assemblies (Page 101)"
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 67
System overview
1.7.5.2 SIRIUS 3RA27 function modules for connection to the automation level
3RA27 function modules for connection to the automation level

3RA27 function modules are integrated into the higher-level control system via an IO-Link
master or AS-Interface. They facilitate the simple exchange of data with the control.
Communication-capable function modules are mounted on contactors or contactor
assemblies with a communication connection from the SIRIUS device family.
Table 1- 19 3RA27 function modules for connection to the automation level

Functions • Connection of direct-on-line, reversing, and star-delta (wye-delta) starters
to the automation level
• Function modules with IO-Link or AS-i interface
• 2- or 3-wire communication to the control
• Integrated logic functions for starter types
• Replacement of laborious control circuit wiring
• Additional diagnostics via IO-Link.
Dimensioning and • One module for both sizes S00 and S0
design • Standard motor starter profile for all starter types
• Starter-oriented configuration in the TIA environment
• IO-Link:
– Up to 4 feeders in one group per channel on the master
– Addressing not required
• AS-i
– One address per feeder
– Max. 62 addresses
Mounting • Just a few cable connections to the control
advantages • Considerably minimized wiring complexity within a starter
• Also available as pre-assembled contactor assemblies (e.g. star-delta
(wye-delta) starters)
• No control circuit wiring to the motor starter protector (voltage check)
• Available with screw-type and spring-loaded connection systems
Application • Easy and fast connection of a load feeder to the control
areas/customer • Reduced number of I/O channels on the control
benefits • Easy and fast configuration
• Improved transparency through integrated diagnostics
SIRIUS Innovations
68 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
Assembly
With the 3RA27 function modules, feeder functions are realized with contactors and a
connection is established with the control. This connection is realized via IO-Link or AS-i
(3RA2712) or via parallel wiring (3RA28).
Table 1- 20 Assembly of 3RA27 function modules
Type of starter Assembly

Direct-on-line start
Reversing start
Star-delta (wye-delta) start
Reference

About 3RA27 function modules for AS-Interface Manual "Function Modules for AS-Interface"
/en/39318922) (3ZX1012-0RA27-0AC0)
About 3RA27 function modules for IO-Link Manual "Function Modules for IO-Link"
/en/39319600) (3ZX1012-0RA27-1AC1)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 69
System overview
1.7.6 Device combinations

The flexible designs enable the individual devices to be combined in myriad different ways.
More than 40,000 combinations have been tested, which offer solutions for almost every
application. Over 500 pre-assembled combinations are available, facilitating rapid and fault-
free control cabinet assembly.
Device combinations
The combination matrix below shows which devices can be combined for the main circuit:
6ZLWFKLQJDQGVWDUWLQJ 3URWHFWLQJ 0RQLWRULQJ
57 5) 5: 59 58 5% 55

&RQWDFWRUV 57 [V [VR [V [V
6ROLGVWDWHVZLWFKLQJ 5)
GHYLFHV
[ [ [
6RIWVWDUWHUV 5: [V
0RWRUVWDUWHUSURWHFWRUV 59 [V [ [V
2YHUORDGUHOD\V 58 [VR
5%
[V [
&XUUHQWPRQLWRULQJUHOD\V 55 [V [
x Screw-type terminals
s Spring-loaded terminals
o Ring cable lug connection system
Mechanical connection with link module
Direct mechanical connection
Figure 1-32 Device combinations
SIRIUS Innovations
70 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
Link modules
Link modules can be used to easily assemble feeders from individual devices. The table
below shows the different combination options for devices with screw-type and spring-loaded
connection systems:
Combination device 3RV2 motor starter 3RT2 contactors; Link modules

protectors 3RW30, 3RW40 3RV2 motor starter 3RV2 motor starter
soft starters; protectors with protectors with
3RF34 solid-state screw-type spring-loaded
contactors terminals terminals
Size Size
Link modules for connection of switching devices to 3RV2 motor starter protectors 1)
3RT2 contactors with AC or DC S00 S00 3RA1921-1DA00 3RA2911-2AA00
coil
3RT2 contactors with AC coil S0 S0 3RA2921-1AA00 3RA2921-2AA00
3RT2 contactors with DC coil S0 S0 3RA2921-1BA00 3RA2921-2AA00
3RW30 soft starters S00 S00 3RA2921-1BA00 3RA2911-2GA00
3RW30/3RW40 soft starters S0 S0 3RA2921-1BA00 3RA2921-2GA00
3RF34 solid-state switching S00 S00 3RA2921-1BA00 —
devices
Hybrid link modules for connection of contactors with a spring-loaded connection system to 3RV2 motor starter protectors
with a screw-type connection system 1)
3RT2 contactors with AC or DC S00 S00 3RA2911-2FA00 —
coil
3RT2 contactors with AC or DC S0 S0 3RA2921-2FA00 —
coil
1) The link modules and hybrid link modules cannot be used for 3RV2.21-4PA1. and 3RV2.21-4FA1. motor starter
protectors or 3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 71
System overview
1.8 Mounting and disassembly
Mounting and disassembly

Within each device size, the mounting options are identical.
Table 1- 21 Mounting options
Size Mounting Disassembly

S00, S0 Screw mounting Disassembly with a screwdriver
Snap-on mounting on 35 mm DIN Disassembly without tools
rail (according to DIN EN 60715)
1.8.1 Screw mounting
Screw mounting
SIRIUS switching devices can be screwed onto a level surface.
Push-in lugs are required in order to fasten the 3RV2 motor starter protectors with screws.
1.8.2 Snap-on mounting
Snap-on mounting
SIRIUS Innovations products in sizes S00 and S0 are snapped onto 35 mm DIN rails
according to DIN EN 60 715, without tools.
The tables below describe how to snap a component onto a DIN rail, using a contactor (size
S00) as an example. The procedure is the same for all SIRIUS switching devices.
Table 1- 22 Mounting on a DIN rail
Step Operating instruction Image

1 Position the device on the top edge of the
DIN rail. Press down until it snaps onto the
bottom edge of the DIN rail.
SIRIUS Innovations
72 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
Table 1- 23 Disassembling from a DIN rail

1 To disassemble the device, press it down,
pushing against the mounting springs.
Swivel the device to remove it.
Refer to the relevant product chapters, product manuals, or operating instructions for specific
details of how to snap the different devices onto DIN rails.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 73
System overview
1.9 Connection
1.9 Connection
1.9.1 Connection systems
1.9.1.1 Screw connection
Screw connection
Within each device size, the terminals are identical. The current which the various devices of
a particular size are able to switch is also the same. This means that the same tool, torque,
and conductor cross-section is used when working on all SIRIUS Innovations products of the
same size. The stripped lengths are identical too; this is important for pre-assembled cables.
Size S00 and S0 devices feature screw-type terminals with captive screws and terminal
washers. The screw-type terminals also allow for the connection of 2 conductors with
different cross-sections.
WARNING
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
Use the following tool to establish the connection: The screws are designed for a size PZ 2
Pozidriv screwdriver at rated currents of up to 40 A.
SIRIUS Innovations
74 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.9 Connection
1.9.1.2 Spring-loaded connection
Spring-loaded connection
Spring-loaded connection systems are found consistently on all SIRIUS Innovations
products. They make wiring quick and maintenance-free, while also meeting high demands
in terms of vibration and shock resistance.
D

① Solid
② Finely stranded
③ Stranded
④ Finely stranded with end sleeve
a Spring-loaded terminal
b Busbar
Figure 1-33 Spring-loaded terminal
The spring-loaded terminal on the switching devices clamps copper conductors from 0.25
mm2 (removable terminal) to 10 mm2 (main circuit terminal, size S0). For more details, see
the information about conductor cross-sections in the chapter titled "Conductor cross-
sections for spring-loaded connection systems (Page 82)". The conductors can be clamped
directly or you can pre-treat them to add a form of splice protection. This could involve
attaching end sleeves or pin cable lugs to the ends of the conductors; the tidiest solution is to
use conductors whose ends have been sealed by means of ultrasound.
The devices are equipped with a two-wire connection, i.e. two independent connections per
current path. Just one conductor is connected to each clamping point. The spring-loaded
terminal presses the conductor against the busbar, which curves around inside the terminal.
The high contact pressure per unit area achieved in this way is gas-tight. The spring-loaded
terminal presses flat against the conductor, but does not damage it. The spring force of the
spring-loaded terminal has been dimensioned such that the clamping force adjusts to the
conductor diameter automatically. This ensures that any conductor deformation caused by
settling, creepage, or yielding is compensated for. The clamping point cannot become loose
of its own accord. This connection is vibration- and shock-proof. Vibrations or shocks will not
damage the conductor, nor will they cause contact separation. These terminals are
particularly well suited for use with machines and systems which are subject to stresses
such as these, e.g. vibrators, rail vehicles, and elevators.
The contact pressure between the conductor and the busbar is set to an optimum level, so
this clamp connection is appropriate for high-voltage applications, as well as for transferring
voltages and currents in the mV or mA range within instrumentation and electronic
components.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 75
System overview
1.9 Connection
Catalog (LV1) offers a standard screwdriver, which can be used as the operating tool for
opening the spring-loaded connections.
The table below describes the procedure for creating a spring-loaded connection:
WARNING
Hazardous voltage.
Table 1- 24 Connecting the spring-loaded terminal

1 Insert the screwdriver into the bottommost
(A) or topmost (B) operating slot on the
right-hand side.
2 Press the screwdriver down (A) or up (B),
then push it into the operating slot as far as ~10°
$
it will go.
The screwdriver blade keeps the spring-
loaded terminal open automatically. %
~10°
3 Insert the conductor into the oval

connection slot.
4 Remove the screwdriver. The terminal
closes and the conductor is now securely
clamped.

NOTICE
Damage to the spring-loaded terminal!
If you insert the screwdriver into the central opening on the spring-loaded terminal, this
could damage the terminal.
Do not insert the screwdriver into the central opening on the spring-loaded terminal.
SIRIUS Innovations
76 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.9 Connection
Link modules
Link modules enable load feeders to be assembled without tools, simply by plugging the
relevant devices in.
$

A Link module
③ Screwdriver opening for mounting/disassembly without a link module
Figure 1-34 Link module
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 77
System overview
1.9 Connection
Insulating stop
With conductor cross-sections which are ≤ 1 mm2, you should use an insulating stop to
prevent the conductor insulation from being clamped. The insulating stop can be used with
the following devices:
Table 1- 25 Overview table - Use of insulating stop for conductor cross-sections ≤ 1 mm2
Size S00 Size S0

Main circuit Control circuit Main circuit Control circuit
3RT2/3RH2 contactors (basic 2 2 — 1
devices)
Accessories for 3RT2 — 1 — 1
contactors (e.g. auxiliary
switches)
3RF34 solid-state switching — — 2 —
devices
3RW30/40 soft starters 2 0 — 0
3RV2 motor starter protectors 2 1 — 1
(basic devices)
Accessories for 3RV2 motor — 1 — 1
starter protectors (e.g. auxiliary
switches)
3RU2 thermal overload relays — 1 — 1
3RB3 solid-state overload — 0 — 0
relays
3RA6 compact starters — — — 0
3RA27/3RA28 function — 0 — 0
modules
3RR2 current monitoring relays — 0 — 0
0: No insulating stop required
1: Insulating stop 3RT1916-4AJ02
2: Insulating stop 3RT2916-4AJ02
—: Not relevant (e.g. conductor cross-section ≤ 1 mm2) or not available
The graphic below shows how the insulating stop is used:
Figure 1-35 Insulating stop on spring-loaded connection system
SIRIUS Innovations
78 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.9 Connection
1.9.1.3 Ring cable lug connection
Ring cable lug connection

The ring cable lug connection is equipped with an M3 or M4 combination screw. A special
cover ensures finger-safety. See the information on ring cable lugs in the chapter titled
"Conductor cross-sections for ring cable lug connection system (Page 84)".
WARNING
Hazardous voltage.
Figure 1-36 Ring cable lug connection system
1.9.2 Conductor cross-sections
Conductor cross-sections
Due to SIRIUS being a modular system, the conductor cross-sections of all the devices of
one size are identical.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 79
System overview
1.9 Connection
1.9.2.1 Conductor cross-sections for screw-type connection systems
Conductor cross-sections for screw-type connection systems

The tables below define the permissible conductor cross-sections for main terminals and
auxiliary conductor connections in sizes S00 and S0 for screw-type connection systems.
Table 1- 26 Main conductors of size S00 with M3 combination screws
Motor starter protectors Contactors Overload relays 1),

current monitoring relays 1)
Tool Pozidriv size PZ 2, Ø 5 to 6 mm
Tightening torque 0.8 to 1.2 Nm

Solid and stranded 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm²
2 x (0.75 to 2.5) mm² 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) mm² 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) mm²
Max. 2 x 4 mm² Max. 2 x 4 mm² Max. 2 x 4 mm²
Finely stranded with 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm²
end sleeve 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) mm² 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) mm² 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) mm²
DIN 46228 Part 1
AWG 2 x (20 to 16) 2 x (20 to 16)
2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (18 to 14)
2 x 12 2 x 12 2 x 12
1) Only 1 conductor can be clamped on the stand-alone assembly support.
Table 1- 27 Main conductors of size S0 with M4 combination screws
Motor starter protectors Contactors Overload relays 1),

current monitoring relays 1)

Solid and stranded 2 x (1.0 to 2.5) mm² 2 x (1.0 to 2.5) mm² 2 x (1.0 to 2.5) mm²
2 x (2.5 to 10) mm² 2 x (2.5 to 10) mm² 2 x (2.5 to 10) mm²
Finely stranded with 2 x (1 to 2.5) mm² 2 x (1 to 2.5) mm² 2 x (1 to 2.5) mm²

end sleeve 2 x (2.5 to 6) mm² 2 x (2.5 to 6) mm² 2 x (2.5 to 6) mm²
DIN 46228 Part 1
Max. 1 x 10 mm² Max. 1 x 10 mm² Max. 1 x 10 mm²
AWG 2 x (16 to 12) 2 x (16 to 12) 2 x (16 to 12)
2 x (14 to 8) 2 x (14 to 8) 2 x (14 to 8)
1) Only 1 conductor can be clamped on the stand-alone assembly support.
SIRIUS Innovations
80 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.9 Connection
Table 1- 28 Auxiliary conductors of size S00/S0 with M3 combination screws
Accessories for motor Contactors, Contactors,

starter protectors, size S00 size S0
accessories for
contactors,
overload relays

Solid and stranded 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm²
2 x (0.75 to 2.5) mm² 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) mm² 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) mm²
Max. 2 x 4 mm²
Finely stranded with 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm²
end sleeve 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) mm² 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) mm² 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) mm²
DIN 46228 Part 1
AWG 2 x (20 to 16) 2 x (20 to 16) 2 x (20 to 16)
2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (18 to 14)
2 x 12
Table 1- 29 Removable terminal
Removable terminal
Tool Pozidriv size PZ 2, Ø 6 mm

Solid and stranded 1 x (0.5 to 4) mm²
2 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm²
Finely stranded with 1 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm²

end sleeve 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm²
AWG 2 x (20 to 14)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 81
System overview
1.9 Connection
1.9.2.2 Conductor cross-sections for spring-loaded connection systems
Conductor cross-sections for spring-loaded connection systems

auxiliary conductor connections in sizes S00 and S0 for spring-loaded connection systems.
Table 1- 30 Main conductors of size S00
Motor starter protectors, Overload relays,

contactors current monitoring relays
Tool Ø 3.5 x 0.5 (8WA2880/8WA2803)
Ø 3.0 x 0.5 (3RA2808-1A)
Solid and stranded 2 x (0.5 to 4.0) mm² 0.5 to 4.0 mm²
Finely stranded without end 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm² 0.5 to 2.5 mm²
sleeve
Finely stranded with end 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm² 0.5 to 2.5 mm²
sleeve (DIN 46228 Part 1)
AWG 2 x (20 to 12) 2 x (20 to 12)
Table 1- 31 Main conductors of size S0
Motor starter protectors, Overload relays,

contactors current monitoring relays
Tool Ø 3.5 x 0.5 (8WA2880/8WA2803)
Ø 3.0 x 0.5 (3RA2808-1A)
Solid and stranded 2 x (1.0 to 10) mm² 1.0 to 10 mm²
Finely stranded without end 2 x (1.0 to 6.0) mm² 1.0 to 6.0 mm²
sleeve
Finely stranded with end 2 x (1.0 to 6.0) mm² 1.0 to 6.0 mm²
AWG 2 x (18 to 8) 2 x (18 to 8)
SIRIUS Innovations
82 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.9 Connection
Table 1- 32 Auxiliary conductors of size S00/S0
Contactors, size S00, Contactors, size S0,

basic devices integrated auxiliary switches,
overload relays,
accessories for contactors,
accessories for motor starter
protectors
Tool Ø 3.5 x 0.5 (8WA2880/8WA2803)
Ø 3.0 x 0.5 (3RA2808-1A)
Solid and stranded 2 x (0.5 to 4) mm² 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm²
Finely stranded without end 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm²
sleeve
Finely stranded with end 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm²
AWG 2 x (20 to 12) 2 x (20 to 14)
Table 1- 33 Removable terminal
Removable terminal
Tool Ø 3.0 x 0.5 (3RA2808-1A)
Solid and stranded 2 x (0.25 to 1.5) mm²
Finely stranded without end 2 x (0.25 to 1.5) mm²

sleeve
Finely stranded with end 2 x (0.25 to 1.5) mm²

sleeve
AWG 2 x (24 to 16)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 83
System overview
1.9 Connection
1.9.2.3 Conductor cross-sections for ring cable lug connection system
Conductor cross-sections for ring cable lug connection system

auxiliary conductor connections in sizes S00 and S0 for ring cable lug connection systems.
Table 1- 34 Main conductors and auxiliary conductors of size S00 with M3 combination screws
SIRIUS devices
Tool Pozidriv size 2,
Ø 5 to 6 mm
Ring cable lug 1) d2 = min. 3.2 mm
d 2 d3
d3 = max. 7.5 mm
Table 1- 35 Main conductors and auxiliary conductors of size S0 with M4 combination screws
SIRIUS devices
Tool Pozidriv size 2,
Ø 5 to 6 mm
Ring cable lug 1) d2 = min. 4.3 mm
d 2 d3
d3 = max. 12.2 mm
1) The following ring cable lugs are approved for achieving the required clearances and creepage distances:
● For applications according to IEC 60947-1:
– DIN 46237 (with insulating sleeve)
– JIS CS805 type RAV (with insulating sleeve)
– JIS CS805 type RAP (with insulating sleeve)
● For applications according to UL 508:
– DIN 46 234 (without insulating sleeve)
– DIN 46225 (without insulating sleeve)
– JIS CS805 (without insulating sleeve)
A shrink-on sleeve must be used to insulate ring cable lugs without an insulating sleeve. The following
conditions must be met:
● Application temperature: -55 °C to +155 °C
● UL 224 approved
● Flame-protected
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Only use approved ring cable lugs to meet the required clearances and creepage
distances.
SIRIUS Innovations
84 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.9 Connection
1.9.3 Image database
Internal circuit diagrams

You can find the internal circuit diagrams for SIRIUS Innovations products online in the
image database (www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/bilddb).
Enter the order number of the device in the "Order number" field and, in the "Type of object"
selection menu on the left-hand side, select "Unit wiring diagram".
Figure 1-37 Image database
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 85
System overview
1.10 Connection to the higher-level control
1.10.1 Connection to the higher-level control
Connection to the higher-level control

The communication-capable SIRIUS Innovations from Siemens provide the user with a
uniform automation solution. Automation functions can be implemented consistently, from
field devices through to the control cabinet and beyond to human machine interfaces and
visualization stations. The concept is based on AS-Interface and PROFIBUS DP, two
standardized and open fieldbus systems which can be connected to almost all the control
systems provided by well-known manufacturers.
&RQWURO
66
3 5 2 ) ,% 8 6 3 5 2 ) ,1 ( 7
,($6L $6L (76ZLWK ( 7 6
/LQN SRZHU ,2/LQN
31,2 VXSSO\XQLW PDVWHU
6 6 6 3 n
6 ,5 ,8 6
5 $
6HQVRU $FWXD 6HQVRU $FWXDWRUV 6HQVRUV $FWXDWRUV $FWXDWRUV 6HQVRUV

WRU

1 Data is collected via AS-i if the devices are not all mounted together in the same place.
2 A point-to-point connection is established via IO-Link if a number of signals are grouped together.
3 Classic wiring via digital I/Os is used if the number of signals is manageable.
Figure 1-38 Options for connection to the automation level
SIRIUS Innovations
86 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
In addition to the established fieldbus systems, SIRIUS Innovations also safeguard

communication right up to the "final mile" on the actuator side. In a similar way to with
PROFIBUS DP and AS-Interface, a user organization made up of a range of renowned
manufacturers ensures that control data, status data, and diagnostics data can now be
transferred in accordance with a uniform communication standard via IO-Link intelligent
wiring, as well as via classic parallel wiring.
3RLQWWRSRLQWFRQQHFWLRQ &ODVVLFDOZLULQJ
P u n kt-zu-P u n kt V erb in d u n g K lassisch e V erd rah tu n g
(76ZLWK
E T 200S m it :LULQJV\VWHP
V erd rah tu n g ssystem E T 200S
,2/LQNPDVWHU
IO -Link M aster
6 6 6 3 n
6ZLWFKLQJ 6,5,86
S chalt- S chalt-
GHYLFHV 6ZLWFKLQJ
geräte
6,5,86
gerä te
GHYLFHV
S IR IU S S IR IU S
K 20 )LHOG
F eld -
GLVWULEXWRU
verteiler
6HQVRUV
S ensoren A$FWXDWRUV
ktoren A$FWXDWRUV
ktoren S6HQVRUV
ensoren
Figure 1-39 Connection to the higher-level control
SIRIUS switching devices can be connected to higher-level control systems using

conventional wiring, but also by means of intelligent wiring and a fieldbus:
● IO-Link
● AS-Interface
SIRIUS switching devices are linked into the Siemens Totally Integrated Automation concept
via function modules. Totally Integrated Automation offers the user uniformity in terms of
configuration, programming, data storage, and communication.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 87
System overview
SIRIUS switching devices are connected to the automation level via AS-Interface or IO-Link,
without any additional wiring. These interfaces ensure that information about the switch
position and the readiness of the feeder for operation is transferred, and that contactor
control is implemented. In addition to these three items of information relating to feeders, IO-
Link also transfers diagnostics data.
5HDG\
$FWXDWLRQ
)HHGEDFNRI
VZLWFKLQJVWDWXV
SPS
'LDJQRVWLFV SPS
Figure 1-40 Communication via AS-Interface or IO-Link
SIRIUS 3RA27 function modules or SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters can communicate with a
higher-level control either via the AS-i fieldbus or via the IO-Link wiring system. Cyclic data
transmission (DIs and DOs) is identical for both IO-Link and AS-i.
Table 1- 36 Motor starter profile
Standard motor starter profile Group diagnostics (only with IO-Link)

• 4 DI, 2 DO (per feeder) • Device fault
• 2 LEDs for "Device" and "Group fault" • No main voltage (motor starter protector
tripped)
DI 0.0 Ready
• Auxiliary voltage 24 V DC (Uaux) missing
DI 0.1 Motor ON
• Signaling limit position right/left
DI 0.2 Group fault • Manual/local mode
DI 0.3 Group warning
DO 0.0 Motor ON or Motor CW
DO 0.1 Motor CCW
SIRIUS Innovations
88 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.10.2 IO-Link
IO-Link is a new communication standard for sensors and actuators - defined by the
PROFIBUS User Organization (PNO). The IO-Link technology is based on a point-to-point
connection of the sensors and actuators to the control. Therefore, this technology is not a
bus system, but an enhanced version of a classic point-to-point connection. In addition to the
cyclic operating data, comprehensive parameters and diagnostics data are transferred for
the connected sensors and actuators. The same 3-wire connecting cable as currently used
for standard sensors is used.
IO-Link is:
● An open and standardized system for transmitting device-specific data.
● An intelligent wiring system positioned between conventional wiring and fieldbus systems.
● A system which offers advantages in the control cabinet and is integrated in the TIA
concept.
IO-Link is thus an intelligent wiring system which is fully integrated in TIA.
1.10.2.1 Overview
Components of an IO-Link system

Only 2 components are required to use IO-Link:
● IO-Link master
● IO-Link device (e.g. IO-Link sensor/switching device, IO-Link I/O module)
Compatibility of IO-Link
IO-Link guarantees compatibility between standard modules and those with IO-Link
capability as follows:
● IO-Link sensors/actuators can generally be operated on IO-Link modules (master) and on
standard I/O modules.
● Both IO-Link sensors/actuators and current standard sensors/actuators can be used on
IO-Link modules (master).
● If conventional components are used in the IO-Link system, naturally only the standard
functions are available in this case.
Expansion by means of IO-Link I/O modules

The compatibility of IO-Link means that you can connect standard (conventional)
sensors/actuators to it too. This can be implemented especially cost-effectively with IO-Link
I/O modules that permit the connection of several sensors/actuators to the controller via one
cable.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 89
System overview
Analog signals
One further advantage of the IO-Link technology is that analog signals are digitized directly
in the IO-Link sensor and are then transmitted digitally via IO-Link communication. This
prevents any interference and eliminates the need for cable shielding.
Integration in STEP 7
Integration of the device configuration into the STEP 7 environment ensures:
● Simple and fast engineering.
● Consistent data storage.
● Fast location and clearance of faults.
This raises productivity across all phases of the system lifecycle − configuration,
commissioning, and operation. With the Siemens IO-Link solution, even sensors/actuators
and switching devices below the fieldbus level are optimally integrated with their complete
performance capability in the Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) environment.
1.10.2.2 Benefits
Benefits
The IO-link system offers important benefits when connecting complex (intelligent)
sensors/actuators:
● Dynamic modification of the sensor and actuator parameters directly via the PLC.
● Possibility of device replacement during operation without a programming device/PC, by
means of re-parameterization via the consistent storage of parameters.
● Fast commissioning due to central data storage.
● Integrated diagnostics information as far as the sensor and actuator levels.
● Uniform and significantly reduced wiring of different sensors/actuators/switching devices.
● Fewer parameterization tools.
● Integrated communication: transmission of process data and service data between
sensors/actuators and the control.
● Uniform and transparent configuration and programming by means of a parameterization
tool (Port Configurator Tool, PCT) integrated into SIMATIC STEP 7.
● Transparent representation of all parameter and diagnostics data.
● Reduced costs during configuration and commissioning.
● Alarms and indicators for preventive maintenance.
SIRIUS Innovations
90 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.10.2.3 Applications
Applications
IO-Link can be used in the following applications:
● Simple connection of complex sensors/actuators with a large number of parameters to
the control.
● Optimum replacement of IO-Link modules for sensor/actuator boxes when connecting
binary sensors.
In both cases, all diagnostics data is transmitted to the higher-level control via IO-Link.
Parameter settings can be changed during operation. A sensor/actuator can be replaced
without a programming device/PC thanks to the central data storage feature.
The IO-Link range comprises:
● IO-Link master
● IO-Link module K20
● IO-Link starting controls
● IO-Link switching controls
● IO-Link sensors
$XWRPDWLRQVWUXFWXUHZLWKRXW,2/LQN $XWRPDWLRQVWUXFWXUHZLWK,2/LQN
9LVXDOLVDWLRQ 0(6 9LVXDOLVLHUXQJ 0(6

(QJLQHHULQJ (QJLQHHULQJ
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ
3 5 2 ) ,1 ( 7 ,2 3 5 2 ) ,1 ( 7 ,2
3 5 2 ) ,% 8 6 3 5 2 ) ,% 8 6
'LVWULEXWHG 'LVWULEXWHG
,2 ,2
6ZLWFKLQJGHYLFHJURXSV
3UR[LPLW\VZLWFK 6ZLWFKLQJGHYLFHV
Figure 1-41 Comparison of automation structures with and without IO-Link
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 91
System overview
SIRIUS 4SI electronic module

Ideally suited to connecting SIRIUS Innovations products to IO-Link is the IO-Link master for
SIRIUS controls: the SIRIUS 4SI electronic module for SIMATIC ET 200S.
The SIRIUS 4SI electronic module facilitates the efficient and space-saving integration of IO-
Link-capable SIRIUS switching devices into the TIA world. It connects up to 16 SIRIUS load
feeders to the higher-level control environment.
Table 1- 37 SIRIUS 4SI electronic module

Functions • Integration of IO-Link-capable SIRIUS
controls in the distributed I/O ET 200S.
• Diagnostics data.
• Status display and group fault signaling.
Dimensioning and design • Width 15 mm.
• 4 IO-Link ports.
• Connection of up to 16 load feeders.
Mounting advantages • Considerably reduced wiring and space
requirements in the control cabinet.
• Terminal modules with screw-type, spring-
loaded, and insulation displacement
connection system.
Application areas/customer benefits • Considerably lower price (50%) than the IO-
Link master if only SIRIUS devices are used.
• Reduced wiring
(5 cable connections for 4 feeders).
• Fast module selection via the ET 200
configurator.
SIRIUS Innovations
92 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
The figure below uses an example to show where the SIRIUS 4SI electronic module is
positioned within the SIRIUS controls.

IM 151-1 PM-E 4DI 4DI PM-D PM-E 4 IO-Link

STANDARD DC24V DC24V DC24V DC24V DC24V DC24V
DS1e-x
SF

ICU24
PWR
CON
6ES7 138- 6ES7 131- 6ES7 131- 6ES7 138- 6ES7 138-
4CA01-0AA0 4BD01-0AA0 4BD01-0AA0 4CA01-0AA0 4GA50-0AB0
6ES7 151-
1AA05-0AB0
P15S23-A0 P15S23-A0
6ES7 193- 6ES7 193-

4CD20-0AA0 4CD20-0AA0
1
1
E15S26-A1 E15S26-A1 1 E15S26-A1
6ES7 193- 6ES7 193- 2 6ES7 193-

4CA40-0AA0 4CA40-0AA0 4CA40-0AA0
1
3
6SL3 244-
0SA00-1AA1
P15S27-01
3RK1 903-
0AA00
ICU15
3RK1 903-
3EA10
3RK1 301-0AB10-0AA4
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 2U 4V 6W
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 1L1 3L2 5L3

DS65-S32

3RK1 903-
0AK00
1 Interface module IM...

2 Power module electronic PM-E
3 Electronic module, e.g. SIRIUS 4SI, DI, DO, AI, AO, CP, FM
4 Power module drives PM-D
5 Motor starter
6 Frequency converter ICU
7 Frequency converter IPM
8 Termination module
9 SIRIUS modular system with IO-Link (e.g. SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters)
Figure 1-42 Options for connection to the automation level
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 93
System overview
1.10.3 AS-Interface
1.10.3.1 Overview
The AS-Interface is an open, international standard in accordance with EN 50295 and
IEC 62026-2 for process communication and field communication. Leading manufacturers of
actuators and sensors worldwide support AS-Interface. The electrical and mechanical
specifications of the AS-Interface Association are disclosed to interested companies.
AS-Interface is a single master system. For the Siemens automation systems, there are
communications processors (CPs) and routers (links), which control the process or field
communication as masters, as well as actuators and sensors, which are addressed as AS-
Interface slaves.
Laptop
Remote access, e.g. PC

via teleservice
Control and Motion Control PC/PG/IPC

monitoring system Systems Database
Server
Telecontrol and
substation control
Security
Point
IWLAN Access
Notebook RCoax Cable Point
Numeric
Control
PC/PG/IPC
Field device for

intrinsically safe area
Coupler
Link
PROFIBUS PA
Access
Motion Control Point
Systems
Power Power
supply supply
LOGO! Controller
SINAMICS Drives
Sensors
G_IK10_XX_20002
KNX AS-Interface
Compact Compact
starter feeder
Sensors
Slaves Slaves
Signalling column
Figure 1-43 AS-Interface
SIRIUS Innovations
94 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.10.3.2 Benefits
An important characteristic of the AS-Interface technology is the use of a shared two-wire
cable for data transmission and distribution of auxiliary power to the sensors and actuators.
An AS-Interface power supply unit, which satisfies the requirements of the AS-Interface
transmission method, is used to distribute the auxiliary power. The AS-Interface cable is
mechanically coded, which prevents polarity reversal during wiring, and the insulation
displacement method allows for easy contacting.
Complex control cable wiring in the control cabinet and terminal blocks are replaced with AS-
Interface. Thanks to a specially developed cable and the insulation displacement method,
the AS-Interface cable can be connected anywhere. This concept is extremely flexible and
enables you to make huge savings.
1.10.3.3 Operating modes

In general, the following operating modes are distinguished between for the master
interfaces:
● I/O data exchange:
In this operating mode, the inputs and outputs of the binary AS-Interface slaves are read
and written to.
● Analog value transmission:
AS-Interface masters in accordance with AS-Interface Specification V2.1 or V3.0 support
integral analog value processing. This means that data can be exchanged using analog
AS-Interface slaves (in accordance with analog profile 7.3 or 7.4) just as easily as with
digital slaves.
● Command interface:
As well as I/O data exchange with binary and analog AS-Interface slaves, the AS-
Interface masters provide a range of other functions using the command interface. Thus,
for example, slave addresses can be allocated, parameter values can be transferred, or
diagnostics information can be read out from user programs.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 95
System overview
1.10.3.4 Process communication and field communication

The AS-Interface is used where individual actuators and sensors are distributed at different
locations on a machine (e.g. in a bottling plant or production line, etc.). AS-Interface replaces
complex cable harnesses and connects binary and analog actuators and sensors such as
proximity switches, valves, or indicator lights with a control, such as SIMATIC, or a PC.
In practice this means that the installation process is really simple, because both data and
power are transported via the same cable. No expert knowledge is required for installation
and commissioning. Furthermore, thanks to the simple cable laying procedure and the clear
cable structure, as well as the special design of the cable, you not only significantly reduce
the risk of errors, but also service and maintenance costs.
6,0$7,& 2QH$6L0DVWHULV
6,027,21 FRQQHFWHGIRUHDFK$6L
QHWZRUN
352),1(7
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
352),%86'3
'3$6L)/LQN $6,QWHUIDFHPDVWHU $6,QWHUIDFHPDVWHU
'3$6L/,1.$GYDQFHG 6
6
'3$6,QWHUIDFH/LQN(
$6,QWHUIDFH
SRZHUVXSSO\ 6,027,21&
6 6 ,($6L/,1.31,2
$6,QWHUIDFHGLVWULEXWRU $6,QWHUIDFH
$6,QWHUIDFH
ZLWKRXW$6,QWHUIDFHFKLS 5HSHDWHU SRZHUVXSSO\
9'&
/2*2 SRZHUVXSSO\
0D[$6LFDEOHOHQJWK $6,QWHUIDFHGLVWULEXWRU
SHUVHJPHQW ZLWKRXW$6,QWHUIDFHFKLS
PZLWKRXWH[WHQVLRQSOXJ
PZLWKH[WHQVLRQSOXJ
0D[$6LFDEOHOHQJWK
SHUVHJPHQW
+DQGKHOG
PZLWKRXWH[WHQVLRQSOXJ
RSHUDWRUSDQHO ,2PRGXOH
PZLWKH[WHQVLRQSOXJ
'LJLWDODQDORJ
6HFXUHVODYH
ZLWK(0(5*(1&<
6723 ORDGIHHGHU5$ZLWK
IXQFWLRQPRGXOHIRU$6,QWHUIDFH
5$FRPSDFWVWDUWHU
6LJQDO ZLWK
HYDOXDWLRQ $6LPRXQWLQJPRGXOH
*B,.B;;BE
$6LH[WHQVLRQSOXJ
IRUVHJPHQWOHQJWK
XSWRP
6DIHW\
PRQLWRU
Figure 1-44 Example of a system configuration
SIRIUS Innovations
96 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.10.3.5 System components

Numerous system components are offered to perform communication. The main
components of a system installation are:
● Master interfaces for central control units such as SIMATIC S5 and SIMATIC S7, ET 200
M distributed I/O, or routers from PROFIBUS/PROFINET to AS-Interface.
● AS-Interface shaped cable
● Network components, e.g. repeater and extension plug
● Power supply unit for powering the slaves
● Modules for connecting standard sensors/actuators
● Actuators and sensors with integrated AS-i slave
● Secure modules for transferring safety-related data over AS-Interface
● Addressing device for setting slave addresses during commissioning
$6,QWHUIDFH0DVWHU
6,0$7,&6
&3
&33
6,027,21&
&33
6,0$7,&6
&3
$6,QWHUIDFH/LQNV
'3$6L/,1.$GYDQFHG
'3$6,QWHUIDFH/LQN(
'3$6L)/LQN
352),%86 $6,QWHUIDFH
,($6L/,1.31,2
352),1(7
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW $6,QWHUIDFH
Figure 1-45 AS-Interface master and AS-Interface links
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 97
System overview
1.10.3.6 Technical data
Feature Specification
Standard EN 50295/IEC 61158
Topology Line topology, star topology, or tree topology
(same as electrical installation)
Transmission medium Unshielded twisted pair (2 x 1.5 mm2) for data
and auxiliary power
Connection system Contacting of the AS-Interface cable using
insulation displacement
Maximum cable length 100 m without repeater
200 m with extension plug
300 m with 2 repeaters connected in series
600 m with extension plugs and 2 repeaters
connected in parallel
With parallel connection, more repeaters allow for
longer cable lengths
Maximum cycle time 5 ms for maximum configuration with standard
addresses
10 ms for maximum configuration with A/B
addresses
Profile-specific for Spec 3.0 slaves
Number of stations per AS-Interface segment 31 slaves in accordance with AS-Interface Spec.
V2.0
62 slaves (A/B method) in accordance with AS-
Interface Spec. V2.1 and V3.0, integrated analog
value transmission
Number of binary sensors/actuators Max. 124 DI/124 DO acc. to Spec. V2.0
Max. 248 DI/186 DO acc. to Spec. V2.1
Max. 496 DI/496 DO acc. to Spec. V3.0
Access method Cyclic polling master/slave procedure, cyclic data
acceptance by host (PLC, PC)
Error control Identification and resending of faulty messages
SIRIUS Innovations
98 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
System overview
1.10.3.7 More information
More information
Always observe the conditions and constraints for use and the additional information
available for the modules referred to above.
AS-Interface System Manual

More information about the AS-Interface is available in the AS-Interface System Manual.
The system manual can be downloaded from the Internet free of charge:
● German version (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/26250840)
● English version (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/26250840)
The AS-Interface System Manual can also be supplied in paper format in both languages.
Internet
More information can be found on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10805888/130000).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 99
System overview
SIRIUS Innovations
100 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies 2
2.1 Standards
2.1.1 General regulations and standards
Applicable regulations, standards, and approvals

The general regulations and standards below apply to 3RT contactors and 3RH contactor
relays:
Table 2- 1 General regulations
Applications General regulations Explanation

3RT contactors and • IEC 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear -
3RH contactor relays • DIN EN 60947-1 General rules
• IEC 60947-4-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear

• DIN EN 60947-4-1 Part 4-1: Electromechanical contactors and
motor-starters
• IEC 60947-5-1 Specifically for contactor relays: Control
circuit devices and switching elements;
Electromechanical control circuit devices
(including positively driven operation)
• UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment
• CSA 22.2 14-95 Industrial Control Equipment
Table 2- 2 Applicable standards
Applications Applicable standards Explanation

3RT contactors and • EN 60335-1 EN 60335, the latest standard for
3RH contactor relays household appliances, precludes the use
of plastics of flammability class HB.
• EN 50155 Standards for railway applications
• DIN EN 60077
• IEC 61373
• CSA B44.1 Elevator and Escalator Electrical
Equipment
• SEMI F47 Requirements of the semiconductor
industry for contactors
• EC 89/336/EEC EC Directive "EMC"
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 101
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies
2.1 Standards
Reference
SENTRON - SIVACON" in the appendix always apply. You will find extracts from the most
important standards relating to the innovations of the SIRIUS modular system in the chapter
titled System Overview, under Standards (Page 23).
2.1.2 Protective separation
Definition
In order for the "protective separation" of circuits to be achieved, an individual fault must not
be able to trigger a voltage overspill from one circuit into another. The kinds of fault to be
taken into account include twisted or loose conductive parts, twisted solder pins, broken
winding wires, missing screws, or broken barriers within a device.
Protective separation for 3RT20 contactors and 3RH2 contactor relays

The term "protective separation" is used in relation to safety extra low voltage (SELV/PELV)
and functional extra low voltage (FELV). Protective separation reliably prevents a dangerous
contact voltage from spilling over to the voltage which has been protectively separated
(e.g. to a safety extra low voltage which is present or switched in the same device). If the
current paths of a contactor are operated at different voltages, "protective separation"
requirements must be met. With 3RT2 contactors and 3RH2 contactor relays, "protective
separation" is ensured up to a certain voltage.
Regulations
"Protective separation" between circuits within equipment is achieved by complying with the
basic requirements contained in standard IEC 61140
(replaces DIN VDE 0106 Part 101/IEC 536, among other standards).
Basic requirements include, for example:
● Double or reinforced insulation
● Electrically protective shielding
● Combination of double or reinforced insulation and electrically protective shielding
The insulation must be resistant to aging for the duration of the expected service life.
Circuits without a safety extra low voltage or a functional extra low voltage do not require
protective separation.
Reference
More information ... Can be found in the chapter titled ...
About "protective separation" Technical data (Page 227)
SIRIUS Innovations
102 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.1 Standards
2.1.3 Positively driven contact elements/Mirror contacts

Up until a few years ago, just one standard term, "positively driven contacts", existed for
contactors. This term was not clearly defined until the year 2000 in standard EN 60947-1 and
it applied to all contactor relays and power contactors.
Positively driven contact elements for contactor relays acc. to EN 60947-5-1, Annex L
According to EN 60947-5-1:1997+A12: 1999+A1:1999+A2:2000, Annnex L, positively driven
contact elements are a combination of "n" NO contacts and "m" NC contacts, which are
designed such that they cannot be closed simultaneously. "Positively driven operation" may
only apply to auxiliary switch elements which are contained in switching devices and whose
actuating forces are generated internally. An example of such elements are the SIRIUS
3RH2 contactor relays.
All SIRIUS 3RH2 contactor relays (with at least 1 NC contact) are tested to EN 60947-5-1
and have featured positively driven contact elements in the basic device or in the basic
device in conjunction with auxiliary switches ever since the product was launched.
Figure 2-1 Symbol for positively driven contact elements in a switching device
Mirror contact for power contactors in accordance with EN 60947-4-1, Annex F

According to EN 60947-4-1:2001+A1:2002+A2:2005, Annex F, a mirror contact is an
auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed simultaneously with a main NO contact.
Figure 2-2 Symbol for mirror contacts in a switching device
All SIRIUS 3RT2 motor contactors (with at least 1 NC contact) are tested to EN 60947-4-1
and have featured mirror contact characteristics in conjunction with auxiliary switches ever
since the product was launched.
Note
Both contact characteristics, the positively driven contact element in the contactor relay as
well as the mirror contact in the power contactor, meet the same technical requirements.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 103
2.2 Product description
2.2.1 Overview of the contactor range

The SIRIUS range offers various switching devices for the safe and functional switching of
electrical loads. The table below provides an overview of the contactor versions and
contactor assemblies available in size S00/S0 (table contains versions featuring screw-type
terminals).
Size 3RH2 contactor 3RT2 power contactors 3RA23 reversing contactor 3RA24 contactor assembly for
relays assembly star-delta (wye-delta) start
S00
S0 ---
2.2.2 Device versions

Various different switching devices are available for switching electrical loads. The contactor
is the ideal device for performing switching operations which are frequently repeated; it is the
most commonly used switching device in industry, mechanical engineering, and the
manufacture of switching stations.
The SIRIUS contactor range with a width of 45 mm (size S00/S0) comprises:
● 3RT20 power contactors for switching motors of up to 18.5 kW/400 V (AC-3) and resistive
loads of up to 50 A (AC-1)
● 3RH2 contactor relays for switching in the control circuit with contact versions of 4 NO
contacts, 3 NO contacts + 1 NC contact, and 2 NO contacts + 2 NC contacts
● 3RA23 (reversing) and 3RA24 (star-delta (wye-delta)) contactor assemblies
SIRIUS Innovations
104 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Reference

About the basic and special versions of the Configuration (Page 116)
contactor relays and power contactors
2.2.2.1 3RH2 contactor relays

3RH2 contactor relays are available in the versions detailed below. The contactors can be
supplied with AC and DC drives of between 24 V and 230 V (preferred voltages). Different
voltage versions are available on request.
Versions
Table 2- 3 Versions of the 3RH2 contactor relays
Feature Specifications Contactors for special applications

Version Contactor relay for switching in Contactor relay with extended Auxiliary coupling relay for
the auxiliary circuit operating range for switching switching auxiliary circuits
auxiliary circuits
Number of poles 4/8 4 4
Size S00
Width 45 mm
Connection systems
The contactor relays can be supplied with the connection systems detailed below.
Table 2- 4 Connection systems available for 3RH2 contactor relays
Connection system Contactor relay for Contactor relay with extended Coupling relay for switching
switching in the auxiliary operating range auxiliary circuits
circuit
Screw connection ✓ ✓ ✓
Spring-loaded connection ✓ ✓ ✓
Ring cable lug connection ✓ --- ---
Solder pin connection (only ✓ ✓ ✓
possible in conjunction with
the "solder pin adapter"
optional accessory)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 105
The illustrations below show example equipment features of the 3RH2 contactor relays for
switching in the auxiliary circuit.
3RH21 contactor relay, 4-pole
12 1& 1& 12 $

12 1& 1& 12 $
5+
1 Coil terminal on the front

2 Location hole for surge suppression
3 Location hole for 1-, 2-, and 4-pole auxiliary switch blocks
4 Labeling plate
5 Auxiliary contacts
Figure 2-3 3RH21..-..... contactor relay, 4-pole, size S00, overview
3RH22 contactor relay, 8-pole
12 1& 1& 12 $

12 1& 1& 12

12 1& 1& 12
12 1& 1& 12 $
5+

3 Labeling plate
4 Auxiliary contacts
Figure 2-4 3RH22..-..... contactor relay with auxiliary switch block on the front which cannot be
removed, 8-pole, size S00, overview
SIRIUS Innovations
106 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.2.2.2 3RT2 power contactors

The table below shows the different versions of the 3RT2 power contactors. The contactors
are equipped with AC and DC drive options. An electronic UC drive can also be ordered for
size S0. Special communication-capable contactors are available for integration via
AS-Interface or IO-Link by means of 3RA27 function modules; these contactors enable the
voltage of the main circuit to be tapped directly. The communication-capable power
contactor is supplied with a 24 V DC drive option.
Versions
Table 2- 5 Versions of the 3RT2 power contactors
Feature Specifications
Version Power contactor Power contactor Coupling relay for 3RT23 power 3RT25 power
for switching with extended switching contactor for contactor with
electrical loads operating range electrical loads switching resistive 2 NO contacts
loads and 2 NC contacts
Number of poles 3 3 3 4 2 NO contacts +
2 NC contacts
Number of S00 1 NO contact or 1 NO contact or 1 NO contact or --- ---
integrated 1 NC contact 1 NC contact 1 NC contact
auxiliary S0 1 NO contact and 1 NO contact and 1 NO contact and 1 NO contact and 1 NO contact and
contacts 1 NC contact 1 NC contact 1 NC contact 1 NC contact 1 NC contact
Size S00/S0
Width 45 mm
Connection systems
The power contactors can be supplied with the connection systems detailed below:
Table 2- 6 Connection systems available for 3RT2 power contactors
Connection Power contactor for Power contactor with Coupling relay for 3RT23 power contactor
system switching electrical extended operating switching electrical for switching resistive
loads range loads loads/3RT25 power
contactor with 2 NO
contacts and 2 NC
contacts
Screw connection ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Spring-loaded ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
connection
Ring cable lug ✓ --- --- ---
connection
Solder pin ✓ ✓ ✓ ---
connection (only (size S00 only) (size S00 only) (size S00 only)
possible in
conjunction with
the "solder pin
adapter" optional
accessory)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 107
The illustrations below show example equipment features of the 3RT2 power contactors for
switching motorized loads.
3RT2 power contactors (size S00)

/ / / 12 $

7 7 7 12 $

57

2 Openings for voltage tap of the main circuit (communication-capable power contactor only)
5 Labeling plate
6 1 integrated auxiliary contact
7 Contactor's main circuit terminal to the load/motor connection (T1, T2, T3)
8 Contactor's main circuit terminal to the power network (L1, L2, L3)
Figure 2-5 3RT201.-.....-.... power contactor, size S00, overview
SIRIUS Innovations
108 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3RT2 power contactors (size S0)

/ / /

12 1& $

12 1& $

57
7 7 7
1 Cable duct
4 Location hole for surge suppression (underneath flap)
5 Contactor's main circuit terminal to the load/motor connection (T1, T2, T3)
6 Labeling plate
7 Openings for voltage tap of the main circuit (communication-capable power contactor only)
8 2 integrated auxiliary contacts
9 Contactor's main circuit terminal to the power network (L1, L2, L3)
Figure 2-6 3RT202.-.....-.... power contactor, size S0, overview
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 109
2.2.2.3 3RA23 reversing contactor assemblies

The reversing contactor assemblies of sizes S00 and S0 are available in two versions:
● Fully wired and tested with electrical and mechanical interlock.
● As a kit for customer assembly.
The fully wired and tested reversing contactor assemblies consist of 2 contactors of the
same power rating, each with an NC contact, in the basic device, link modules, and wiring
modules. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked (NC contact interlock).
The contactor assemblies for reversing are climate-proof. They are safe to touch according
to DIN EN 61140.
Connection systems
The fully wired 3RA23 reversing contactor assembly is available either with a screw-type
connection system or a spring-loaded connection system.
The illustrations below show the fully assembled reversing contactor assemblies, in the
version with the screw-type connection system.
Table 2- 7 Illustrations of the 3RA23 reversing contactor assembly (size S00 and S0)
3RA23 reversing contactor assembly, screw connection, 3RA23 reversing contactor assembly, screw connection,
size S00 size S0
Reference

About the 3RA23 reversing contactor assemblies Operation of a motor in two directions of rotation
(3RA23 reversing contactor assembly)
(Page 132)
About the components for customers to assemble Assembly kit for reversing contactor assemblies
their own reversing contactor assemblies (Page 211)
SIRIUS Innovations
110 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.2.2.4 3RA24 contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start

The 3RA24 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start consists of three 3-pole
contactors (line contactor, star contactor, and delta contactor), main circuit wiring modules,
and plug-on function modules for the control circuit wiring.
The 3RA24 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start of sizes S00 and S0 is
available in two versions:
● Fully wired and tested with electrical and mechanical interlock.
● As a kit for customer assembly.
The fully wired 3RA24 contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start can be ordered
with the following plug-on function modules:
● Without a communication connection.
● With a communication connection.
Connection systems
The fully wired 3RA24 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start can be supplied
either with a screw-type connection system or a spring-loaded connection system.
The illustrations below show the fully assembled contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-
delta) start without a communication connection, in the version with the screw-type
connection system.
Table 2- 8 Illustrations of the 3RA24 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start (sizes S00 and S0)
3RA24 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start, 3RA24 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start,
screw connection, size S00 screw connection, size S0
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 111
Reference
About the fully wired 3RA24 contactor assembly Starting three-phase motors with reduced starting
for star-delta (wye-delta) start current peaks (3RA24 contactor assembly for
star-delta (wye-delta) start) (Page 135)
About the components for customers to assemble Assembly kit for contactor assemblies for star-
their own contactor assemblies for star-delta delta (wye-delta) start (Page 218)
(wye-delta) start
2.2.2.5 Drive options
Drive options
The following drive types are available for 3RH2 contactor relays and 3RT2 power
contactors:
AC drive DC drive UC drive

Size S00, S0 S00, S0 S0
Drive type 50 Hz 60 Hz 50/60 Hz DC DC drive with DC drives for AC or DC
standard low power input railway connection
drive applications possible
Preferred • 24 V • 24 V • 24 V
voltages • 110 V • 110 V • 110 V
• 230 V • 220 V • 220/230 V
Contactor Contactor Contactor Contactor Contactor Contactor relays Contactor relays Power contactors
specificatio relays and relays relays and relays and power and power with electronic
n power and power and contactors with contactors with DC coil control for
contactors power contactors power DC coil, coil, optimized for control with AC or
with 50 Hz contactor with contactor optimized for railway DC voltage
coil s with 50/60 Hz s with DC direct control via applications
(standard 60 Hz coil coil PLC
version for coil (standard
size S0) version for
size S00)
• 3RT20 power contactors Coupling relays Versions of the Versions of the
• 3RH2 contactor relays (versions of the 3RT2 power 3RT202 power
• 3RA23 + 3RA24 contactor assemblies 3RT2 contactors contactors and contactors
and 3RH2 3RH2 contactor
contactor relays) relays
Additional voltage versions are available on request.
SIRIUS Innovations
112 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.2.3 Applications
Utilization categories
According to DIN EN 60947-4-1, the application area of and the load applied to power
contactors can be identified by looking at the specified utilization category in conjunction with
the specified rated operational current or the motor power and the rated voltage. The table
below lists the most important utilization categories for contactors.
AC Main circuit contacts: Utilization category for AC voltages
AC-1 Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces
AC-2 Slip-ring motors: starting, switching off
AC-3 Squirrel-cage motors: starting, switching-off motors during running
AC-4 Squirrel-cage motors: starting, plugging, inching
AC-5a Switching of discharge lamp controls
AC-5b Switching of incandescent lamps
AC-6a Switching of transformers
AC-6b Switching of capacitor banks
DC Main circuit contacts: Utilization category for DC voltages

DC-1 Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces
DC-3 Slip-ring motors: starting, switching off
DC-5 Squirrel-cage motors: starting, switching-off motors during running
AC Auxiliary circuit contacts: Utilization category for AC voltages

AC-12 Control of resistive loads and solid-state loads with isolation by opto couplers
AC-14 Control of small electromagnetic loads (max. 72 VA)
AC-15 Control of electromagnetic loads (over 72 VA)
DC Auxiliary circuit contacts: Utilization category for DC voltages

DC-12 Control of resistive loads and solid-state loads with isolation by opto couplers
DC-13 Control of electromagnets
Reference

About contactor relay and power contactor Configuration (Page 116)
applications
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 113
2.2.4 Performance features

The SIRIUS range of contactors offers the following technical advantages:
Technical highlights Customer benefits

Uniform connection systems: The right connection for every application (e.g. operational
• Screw connection reliability (vibration-resistant, non-temperature-specific, etc.)
and less wiring thanks to spring-loaded connection system)
• Spring-loaded connection
• Ring cable lug connection
• Solder pin connection
Link modules for any device combination from the SIRIUS Fast, error-free installation for screw-type and spring-loaded
modular system connection system
Power contactors up to 38 A (18.5 kW) in 45 mm width Space and cost savings
Factory-fitted integrated auxiliary switches Reduced installation complexity
High contact reliability of the auxiliary switches Enhanced operational reliability (reduction of fault signals)
Joint range of accessories for size S00 and S0 Easy to configure, reduced stockkeeping
Plug-on function modules for connection without tools Fault avoidance and reduced wiring (without tools)
Connection to AS-Interface or IO-Link Reduced wiring and integration in TIA
SIRIUS Innovations
114 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.3 Product combinations

The SIRIUS contactors are part of the SIRIUS modular system and offer all the advantages
which SIRIUS users have come to expect in terms of the ability to combine any of the
system's products together with any others. These benefits are thanks to the uniform
mechanical and electrical properties used throughout the modular system and are also due
to the interplay with the higher control level.
From a mechanical point of view, the 3RT2 contactors can be mounted directly onto the
following SIRIUS devices:
● 3RV2 motor starter protectors (with 3RA2921-.. link module)
● 3RU2 thermal overload relays and 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays
● 3RR2 current monitoring relays
● 3RA28 function modules and 3RA27 function modules with a communication connection
Reference
More information ... Can be found in the chapter titled...

About the possible combinations of standard System overview,
products from the SIRIUS modular system Device combinations (Page 70)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 115
2.4 Configuration
2.4 Configuration
2.4.1 Overview of applications for contactors and contactor assemblies

The table below provides an overview of the most important applications for contactors and
contactor assemblies.
Application area Description and suitable contactor versions

Switching motorized Contactors for switching three-phase motors (utilization category AC-3)
loads • 3RT20 3-pole motor contactors
Switching resistive Contactors for switching resistive loads (utilization category AC-1)
loads • 3RT20 3-pole power contactors
• 3RT23 4-pole power contactors (4 NO contacts)
• 3RT25 4-pole power contactors (2 NO contacts + 2 NC contacts)
Changing the polarity Changing the polarity of hoisting gear motors or switching two separate loads.
of hoisting gear motors • 3RT25 4-pole contactors (2 NO contacts + 2 NC contacts)
Switching in the Switching devices for control and auxiliary circuits (utilization
auxiliary circuit categories AC-12/AC-15/AC-14/DC-12/DC-13).
• 3RH21 4-pole contactor relays
Contactors with Contactors with UC Contactors of size S0 for switching electrical loads in the main circuit with
extended operating drive a wide voltage range and extended operating range.
range • 3RT202: 3-pole motor contactors (3RT202.-.N…)
Contactors for Contactors for switching electrical loads in the main and control circuits
railway applications with extended operating and temperature ranges, e.g. for railway
applications or for use in rolling mills (special versions of contactor range
3RT20/3RH21).
• 3RT2 3-pole power contactors
• 3RT2 3-pole coupling relays
• 3RH2 4-pole auxiliary coupling relays
Coupling relays The coupling relays are tailored to the special requirements of working
with electronic controls (extended operating range and reduced coil
power). Different versions are available for main and control circuits
(special versions of contactor range 3RT20/3RH21).
• 3RT20 3-pole coupling relays
• 3RH21 4-pole auxiliary coupling relays
SIRIUS Innovations
116 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.4 Configuration
Application area Description and suitable contactor versions

Contactor assemblies
Operation of a motor in Contactor assembly for operation of a three-phase motor in two directions of rotation.
two directions of • 3RA23 reversing contactor assemblies
rotation
(3RA23 reversing
contactor assembly)
Starting three-phase Contactor assembly for reducing the starting current and starting torque when starting three-
motors with reduced phase motors.
starting current peaks • 3RA24 contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start
(3RA24 contactor
assembly for star-delta
(wye-delta) start)
2.4.2 Drive system/Coil selection

The 3RT2 power contactors and 3RH2 contactor relays can be supplied with drives for all
standard AC and DC coil voltages. In addition, 3RT2 power contactors of size S0 are
available with electronic UC drives, which feature an extended operating range (helping to
reduce variance) and have lower closing and holding powers, which enable less power to be
consumed in the control cabinet. The UC drive can be operated with either AC or DC
voltage. This is facilitated by control electronics with an upstream DC drive.
AC and DC drives Electronic drive (UC drive)

Control voltage AC control or DC control UC control
Operating range 0.8 to 1.1 x US1) 0.7 to 1.3 x US
Coil surge Optional (integrated in coupling relays) Integrated
suppressor
Preferred • 24 V • 21 to 28 V
voltages • 110 V • 95 to 130 V
• 220/230 V • 200 to 280 V2)
Reduced variance • 30 versions for AC control 3 versions for the entire AC/DC range
• 15 versions for DC control
Coil power3): AC coil DC coil AC mode DC mode
• Switch-on • 65 VA • 5.9 W • 6.5 VA • 6.7 W
• Holding • 8.5 VA • 5.9 W • 1.26 VA • 0.8 W
1) For further details, refer to the chapter titled "Technical data".
2) At 280 V: high limit = 1.1 x US.
3) Example: contactor (size S0), 7.5 kW, 24 V.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 117
2.4 Configuration
2.4.3 Application environment
2.4.3.1 3RH2 contactor relays

The following information must be taken into account when planning applications involving
3RH2 contactor relays.
Degree of protection and resistance to extreme climates

3RH2 contactor relays are suitable for use in any climate. They are safe to touch according
to DIN EN 50274. The 3RH2 contactor relays have IP20 degree of protection. The drive
system for the 3RH2 contactor relays has IP40 degree of protection.
Shock load and vibratory load

The 3RH2 contactor relays have been tested in terms of their shock resistance to sine
pulses and rectangular pulses for AC and DC operation.
Ambient temperature
The 3RH2 contactor relays are dimensioned for operation at ambient temperatures of
between -25 °C and +60 °C. The devices can be stored at temperatures within the range
from -55 °C to +80 °C.
Reference

About the environments in which contactor relays General data, rated data (CSA and UL), and data
are used relating to short-circuit protection for 3RH2.
contactor relays (Page 271)
2.4.3.2 3RT2 power contactors

3RT2 power contactors.
Degree of protection and resistance to extreme climates

3RT2 power contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are safe to touch according
to DIN EN 50274. The 3RT2 contactors have IP20 degree of protection. The drive system for
the 3RT20 contactors has IP40 degree of protection.
Shock load and vibratory load

The 3RT2 contactors have been tested in terms of their shock resistance to sine pulses and
rectangular pulses for AC and DC operation.
SIRIUS Innovations
118 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.4 Configuration
Ambient temperature
The 3RT2 contactors are dimensioned as standard for operation at ambient temperatures of
between -25 °C and +60 °C. Up to 60 °C, side-by-side mounting can be used without any
restriction. The devices can be stored at temperatures within the range from
-55 °C to +80 °C.
Size S00 and S0 contactors can be used at higher ambient temperatures, but various
constraints must be considered. The 3RT20 contactors can be operated continuously at an
ambient temperature of Ta > 60 °C, taking the following points into account:
Thermal load capacity of the main current paths
The standard contactors are dimensioned for a maximum ambient temperature of
Ta = 60 °C. In order to use the contactors at higher ambient temperatures of up to 70 °C, the
rated operational current Ie/AC-1 or Ie/DC-1 and the switching frequency z must be reduced.
The following linear dependencies can be applied here:
r& r&
,H PD[7X ,H$& ವ 7X , H PD[7X ,H'& ವ 7X
r&
] ] ವ 7X
PD[7X
Ie max., Ta = Rated operational current of the contactor at increased ambient

temperature, to be calculated
Ie/AC-1 or Ie/DC-1 = Rated operational current of the contactor for relevant utilization category
and Ta ≤ 60 °C
Ta = Actual ambient temperature Tua > 60 °C
The contactors may be operated for 1 hour at an ambient temperature of up to Ta ≤ 80 °C

without reducing the permissible currents. Nevertheless, the average ambient temperature
must not exceed Ta ≤ 60 °C for any 24 hour period. Note, however, that contactors which
contain electronic components or which are combined with electronic accessories
(e.g. integrated overvoltage attenuation, etc.) may only be operated at an ambient
temperature of up to Ta ≤ 60 °C.
Minimum clearances from adjacent components
The 3RT2 contactors are dimensioned for side-by-side mounting at temperatures of up to
+60 °C. At higher temperatures a clearance of 10 mm may be required in order to ensure
better heat dissipation with side-by-side mounting.
Operating range of the contactor drive
All SIRIUS contactors comply with the operating range limits of 0.85 to 1.1 x US (rated
control supply voltage) stipulated in standard IEC EN 60947. The majority of the devices
feature an operating range of 0.8 to 1.1 x US, on some versions it is 0.7 to 1.3 x US.
Reference

About minimum clearances from adjacent Technical data (Page 227)
components and the operating range of the
contactor drive
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 119
2.4 Configuration
Using the S00 and S0 contactors at lower ambient temperatures

The S00 and S0 contactors can be used at a minimum ambient temperature of Tu = -50 °C,
but the mechanical durability will be reduced by up to 50%. The other catalog data remains
unaffected. However, measures will need to be taken to combat condensation (e.g. control
cabinet heating). In such instances a high switching frequency and long duty cycle are
preferable to a low switching frequency and short duty cycle. Contactors which contain
electronics or which are combined with electronic accessories must not be used at
temperatures below Tu = -40 °C.
Service life
Using the contactors at higher ambient temperatures places a greater stress on molded
parts, main current paths, and the mechanism. This reduces the mechanical durability and
shortens the service life of the contactors. The service life is primarily influenced by the ON
period. The table below shows the reduced mechanical durability and shortened service life
values:
Table 2- 9 Durability and service life of 3RT20 contactors
S00 S0 S00 and S0

Ambient temperature Tu Mechanical durability [x106 operating Service life [years]
cycles]
≤ 60 °C 30 10 20
65 °C 15 5 15
70 °C 3 1 10
The specifications for the service life apply to an ON period of 100%. At an ON period
of 50%, the values double.
Reference

About the environments in which power Contactors for switching motors (3RT20)
contactors are used (Page 227)
SIRIUS Innovations
120 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.4 Configuration
2.4.3.3 Contactors for railway applications

contactors for railway applications (versions of the 3RT2 power contactors and
3RH2 contactor relays). All other data corresponds to that of the standard 3RT2 contactors
and 3RH2 contactor relays.
Resistance to extreme climates

SIRIUS 3RT20/3RH2 contactors are safe to touch according to DIN EN 50274.
Ambient temperature
When operating contactors for railway applications (versions of the 3RT20 power contactors
and 3RH21 contactor relays) at the full magnet coil operating range, the permissible ambient
temperature is between -40 °C and +70 °C.
Note
Continuous operation at temperatures > +60 °C reduces the mechanical durability, the
current carrying capacity of the current paths, and the switching frequency.
Extended operating range of the contactor drive

An important railway requirement as regards SIRIUS contactors is the extended operating
range of the contactor drive (0.7 to 1.25 x US). This must be taken into account when
selecting devices for railway applications.
Reference

About the environments in which contactors for Contactors with extended operating range
railway applications are used (Page 265)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 121
2.4 Configuration
2.4.3.4 Installation altitude

The 3RT2 power contactors (sizes S00 and S0), 3RH2 power contactors, and contactors for
railway applications are approved for installation altitudes up to 2,000 m. The reduced air
density at altitudes higher than 2,000 meters affects the contactors' electrical characteristics.
The reduction factors which have to be taken into account when using contactors at altitudes
higher than 2,000 m are specified in the table below. More information can be obtained on
request from Technical Assistance (www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-assistance).
Table 2- 10 Installation altitude for 3RT2 contactors and 3RH2 contactor relays
Installation altitude Rated operational current

2,000 m to 2,500 m 0.93 x Ie
Up to 3,000 m 0.88 x Ie
Up to 3,500 m 0.83 x Ie
Up to 4,000 m 0.78 x Ie
SIRIUS Innovations
122 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.4 Configuration
2.4.4 Switching motorized loads
Applications
3RT20 3-pole motor contactors can be used to switch three-phase motors. These contactors
feature 3 NO contacts as their main contacts.
Versions
The entire performance range of 3 to 18.5 kW/400 V (utilization category AC-3) is covered by
two sizes, S00 and S0, each with a width of 45 mm. The contactors of sizes S00 and S0 are
equipped with AC or DC magnet systems. Contactors of size S0 can also be supplied in a
UC drive version. The device floor areas are the same for all drive types. In size S0, the
installation depth for contactors with DC and UC magnet systems is 10 mm larger than that
for versions with an AC magnet system.
Connection to the automation level

3RA27 function modules can be mounted on the front of 3RT20 power contactors, thus
providing additional functionalities (e.g. star-delta (wye-delta) functionality) and enabling a
connection to be established with a control via IO-Link or AS-Interface. If 3RA27 function
modules are used, special versions of the 3RT2 power contactors (3RT2...-....-0CC0 as the
13th to 16th digits of the order number) must be used, which facilitate direct voltage tapping
of the main current paths. These communication-capable power contactors are supplied with
a 24 V DC drive option. The coil is controlled via the function module.
Rated powers
A single size covers several versions with different standard motor ratings. The specified
power (in kW) refers to the output power on the motor shaft (in accordance with the motor's
nameplate). The performance range of the 3RT20 3-pole power contactors in size S00
extends up to 7.5 kW at a voltage of 400 V. In size S0, the maximum power value is 18.5 kW
at a voltage of 400 V. All specified rated powers and rated currents refer to an ambient
temperature of 60 °C.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 123
2.4 Configuration
2.4.5 Switching resistive loads
Applications
The following contactor versions can be used to switch resistive loads:
3RT20 contactors with 3 NO contacts 3RT23 contactors with 4 NO contacts 3RT25 contactors with 2 NO contacts +
2 NC contacts
• Switching resistive loads (3-pole). • Switching resistive loads (4-pole). • Switching 2 separate 2-pole loads.
• For inductive loads as contactors • Isolation of systems with
which conduct the current, but do ungrounded or poorly grounded Note:
not have to perform switching neutral conductors.
(e.g. if used in the vicinity of 3RT25 contactors are not suitable for
• System transfers if alternative AC
frequency converters). power supplies are present. switching a load between 2 current
sources.
• For inductive loads as contactors
which conduct the current, but do
not have to perform switching. (For
example if used in the vicinity of
frequency converters).
• Switching mixed loads in
distribution systems (e.g. to supply
heaters, lamps, motors, PC power
supply units) with a cos ϕ value
> 0.8 according to IEC 60947-4-1
test conditions for utilization
category AC-1.
Versions
The entire performance range of 18 to 50 A/up to 690 V (utilization category AC-1) is
covered by two sizes, S00 and S0, each with a width of 45 mm. All 3-pole 3RT20 contactors
and 4-pole 3RT23/3RT25 contactors of sizes S00 and S0 are equipped with AC or DC
magnet systems. The device floor areas are the same for all drive types. In size S0, the
installation depth for contactors with a DC magnet system is 10 mm larger than that for
versions with an AC magnet system.
Rated powers
A single size covers several versions with different rated operational currents Ie.
The performance range of the 3-pole 3RT20 power contactors is exactly the same as that of
the 4-pole 3RT23 power contactors with 4 NO contacts. In size S00, the range extends up to
22 A at a voltage of up to 690 V. In size S0, the maximum current value is 50 A at a voltage
of up to 690 V.
The performance range of the 4-pole 3RT25 power contactors with 2 NO contacts and 2 NC
contacts in size S00 extends up to 22 A at a voltage of up to 690 V. In size S0, the maximum
current value is 40 A at a voltage of up to 690 V.
All specified rated powers and rated currents refer to an ambient temperature of 40 °C.
SIRIUS Innovations
124 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.4 Configuration
2.4.6 Changing the polarity of hoisting gear motors
Applications
The 4-pole 3RT25 contactors (2 NO contacts and 2 NC contacts) can be used for changing
the polarity of hoisting gear motors.
Note
The individual device for pole changing is not suitable for reversing operation.
Versions
The entire performance range of 3 to 11 kW/400 V (utilization category AC-3) is covered by
two sizes, S00 and S0, each with a width of 45 mm. The contactors of sizes S00 and S0 are
equipped with AC or DC magnet systems.
Rated powers
A single size covers several versions with different standard motor ratings. The specified
power (in kW) refers to the power output at the motor shaft (in accordance with the
nameplate). The performance range of the 3RT25 4-pole power contactors in size S00
extends up to 5.5 kW at a voltage of 400 V. In size S0, the maximum power value is 11 kW
at a voltage of 400 V. All specified rated powers and rated currents refer to an ambient
temperature of 60 °C.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 125
2.4 Configuration
2.4.7 Switching in the auxiliary circuit
Applications
The 3RH2 contactor relays can be used for switching in the auxiliary circuit (controlling,
signaling, interlocking).
Contactor relays must meet particular requirements by featuring clear terminal designations
and time- and cost-saving connection systems; the SIRIUS 3RH2 contactor relays (size S00)
fulfill all these demands.
Thanks to their high contact reliability at low voltages and currents, the 3RH2 contactor
relays are suitable for solid-state circuits down to a lower limit of 1 mA at 17 V.
Versions
3RH2 contactor relays are available in size S00 and can be ordered with AC or DC drives.
The external design of the 4-pole 3RH21 contactor relay is identical to that of the motor
contactor in size S00 (45 mm width). In addition, 8-pole 3RH22 contactor relays can be
supplied with a permanently mounted auxiliary switch block on the front.
Rated powers
The performance range of the 4-pole 3RH21 contactor relays in size S00 extends up to 10 A
at a voltage of up to 230 V in utilization category AC-15/AC-14 and up to 6 A at 24 V DC in
utilization category DC-12/DC-13.
Auxiliary switch blocks

The 3RH2 contactor relays can be expanded by up to 4 contacts via attachable auxiliary
switch blocks. The lateral auxiliary switches cannot be used for contactor relays.
Special version: 3RH24 latched contactor relays

In the event of a short circuit in the low-voltage system or if large drive motors are switched
on directly, the control supply voltage for the contactor relays may drop out or fall below the
permissible tolerance for a brief period. To guarantee continued operation, the
3RH24 special version of the contactor relays, with mechanical latching, may be used.
These contactor relays latch mechanically following switch-on and then remain switched on
even if there is a voltage failure. The contactor relay can be released either electrically by
means of a release solenoid, or manually via a button on the front of the attached latch.
When the voltage is recovered, the storage properties of the contactor relays mean that the
production program can be resumed straightaway without any resetting time. The contactor
coil and the coil of the release solenoid are both dimensioned for continuous operation. The
power input is the same for the contactor coil and the release coil. The number of auxiliary
contacts can be extended by means of auxiliary switch blocks on the front (up to 4 poles).
SIRIUS Innovations
126 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.4 Configuration
2.4.8 Contactors with extended operating range
2.4.8.1 Overview
Contactors with an extended operating range are available for certain applications. The table
below shows the different contactor versions and their key design features.
Table 2- 11 Overview - Contactors with extended operating range
Contactors with UC Contactors for railway applications Coupling relays

drive
Contactor versions Contactors with Contactors with Contactors with Coupling relays Coupling relays
electronic drive series resistor electronic drive for railway (sizes S00 and
(size S0) (size S00) (size S0) applications S0) and auxiliary
(sizes S00 and coupling relays
S0) (size S00)
Coil Preferred • 21 to 28 V UC • 24 V DC • 24 V UC • 24 V DC 24 V DC
voltages • 95 to 130 V UC • 110 V DC • 110 V UC • 110 V DC
• 200 to 280 V UC1)
Operating 0.7 to 1.3 x US 0.7 to 1.25 x US 0.7 to 1.3 x US 0.7 to 1.25 x US 0.7 to 1.25 x US
range
Temperature range -25 to +60 °C -40 to +70 °C -40 to +70 °C -40 to +70 °C -25 to +60 °C
1) At 280 V: high limit = 1.1 x US.
Rated powers
The various contactor versions with an extended operating range have the following rated
powers (with the exception of the coupling relays). For the 3RH21 contact relay versions the
performance range extends up to 10 A at a voltage of 230 V. For the 3RT20 motor contactor
versions the maximum power values are 5.5 kW (size S00) and 18.5 kW (size S0) at a
voltage of 400 V.
The performance range of the 3RH21 coupling relays for switching auxiliary circuits is the
same as that of the 3RH21 contactor relays. The performance range of the 3RT20 coupling
relays in size S00 extends up to 5.5 kW at a voltage of 400 V. In size S0, the maximum
power value is 15 kW at a voltage of 400 V.
2.4.8.2 Contactors with UC drive

The contactors with a UC drive (size S0) are used for switching electrical loads in the main
circuit. They feature a wide voltage range and an extended operating range of
0.7 to 1.3 x US. A temperature range of -25 to +60 °C applies to contactors with a UC drive.
Reference

About the properties of the UC drive Drive system/Coil selection (Page 117)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 127
2.4 Configuration

Special versions of the power contactors and contactor relays with an extended temperature
range are available for use in railway applications, with voltages of 24 V DC and 110 V DC in
the control circuit. Different coil voltages can be obtained on request from Technical
Assistance (www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-assistance).
The relevant requirements are met for size S00 by means of a series resistor and for size S0
via an electronic drive. Coupling relays for railway applications are also available.
The extended temperature range of -40 to +70 °C applies to all contactors for railway
applications.
Reference

About the extended operating ranges of the Overview (Page 127)
individual contactor versions
Contactors with series resistor (size S00)

The DC magnet system of these contactors is switched on with a defined overexcitation due
to the extended operating range of 0.7 to 1.25 x US. Following switch-on, the series resistor
switches over to holding excitation.
Design
The contactors are available with a plug-on module containing the series resistor (the NC
contact required for switchover is integrated in the basic device and already fully wired). The
DC magnet coils of the contactor versions are fitted with suppressor diodes to provide
protection against overvoltage as standard. The opening delay is consequently 2 ms to 5 ms
longer than for standard contactors.
The power contactors with series resistor are identified by the suffix -0LA0 as the
13th to 16th digits of the order number (3RT201.-2K.42-0LA0). The order number for
contactor relays with series resistor is 3RH2122-2K.40-0LA0.
Note
According to DIN EN 50005, these versions of contactor relays and motor contactors can be
expanded by means of a 4-pole auxiliary switch block on the front Two lateral auxiliary
switch blocks can also be mounted on the motor contactor.
Mounting instruction
Motor contactors and contactor relays of size S00 are approved for side-by-side mounting at
ambient temperatures of up to 70 °C.
SIRIUS Innovations
128 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.4 Configuration
Contactors with electronic drive (size S0)

The 3RT202.-.X.40-0LA2 motor contactors are controlled via an electronic drive, which
guarantees an operating range of 0.7 to 1.3 US at an ambient temperature of 70 °C.
Design
The contactors are supplied as complete units with integrated coil electronics and are fitted
as standard with varistors for damping opening surges in the coil. The opening delay is
consequently 2 ms to 5 ms longer than for standard contactors.
Note
Auxiliary switch blocks are fitted on contactors with an electronic drive in the same way as on
basic versions.
These contactor versions of size S0 are approved for side-by-side mounting at ambient
temperatures of up to 70 °C.
Coupling relays for railway applications (sizes S00 and S0)

These contactors have an extended operating range of 0.7 to 1.25 x US.
Design
The magnet coils of the contactor relays and motor contactors with an extended operating
range in size S00 are connected to suppressor diodes (3RT20..-2K, 3RT2017-2K.4). The
magnet coils of the motor contactors with an extended operating range in size S0 are
connected to varistors (3RT202.-2K.40). No additional series resistor is required in either
case.
Note
Coupling relays for railway applications cannot be expanded by means of auxiliary switch
blocks.
A clearance of 10 mm must be observed when using side-by-side mounting at an ambient
temperature > 60 °C < 70 °C.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 129
2.4 Configuration
2.4.8.4 Coupling relays
Applications
The coupling relays (24 V DC magnet coil) have been adapted to the specific demands
associated with system-compatible interaction with electronic controls, thanks to their
extended operating range and reduced coil power.
These are versions of the 3RT20/3RH21 contactor ranges, which are characterized by the
following features:
Wide voltage range of the magnet coil

Coupling relay Size 0.7 ... 1.25 x US 0.8 ... 1.85 x US
version
Switch-on Order number Switch-on Order number
power = holding power = holding
power power
3RH21 contactor S00 2.8 W at 24 V • 3RH21..-.HB40 1.6 W at 24 V • 3RH21..-.MB40-0KT
relay (without RC circuit) 0 (without RC circuit)
• 3RH21..-.JB40 • 3RH21..-.VB40
(with diode) (with diode)
• 3RH21..-.KB40 • 3RH21..-.WB40
(with suppressor (with suppressor
diode) diode)
3RT20 motor S00 2.8 W at 24 V • 3RT201.-.H. 1.8 W at 24 V • 3RT201.-.M.
contactor (without RC circuit) (without RC circuit)
• 3RT201.-.J. • 3RT201.-.V.
(with diode) (with diode)
• 3RT201.-.K. • 3RT201.-.S.
(with suppressor (with suppressor
diode) diode)
S0 4.5 W at 24 V • 3RT202.-1KB40 --
(with varistor)
Note
The 3RT20/3RH21 coupling relays cannot be expanded by means of auxiliary switch blocks.
SIRIUS Innovations
130 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.4 Configuration
Technical background information

The operating range of the coil for coupling relays covers a voltage range of 0.7 to 1.25 x Us
(Us = rated control supply voltage). This wide operating range has been used as a basis in
order to ensure that the supply voltage of the electronic controls stays within the required
voltage tolerances. According to DIN 19240, the supply voltage of electronic controls with
24 V DC covers a range of 20.4 V to 28.8 V. If you take an additional voltage drop of up to
3 V within the output stages into account, the contactor drive must function without errors at
voltages of between 17.4 V and 28.8 V. The 3RT20 and 3RH21 coupling relays for electronic
controls work reliably from 17 V to 30 V, which corresponds to a voltage range of
0.7 x Us to 1.25 x Us. Compared to the operating range of 0.85 to 1.1 x Us for contactors and
contactor relays according to IEC 60947, DIN EN 60947 (VDE 0660), this is a significantly
expanded operating range.
The illustration below shows the voltage ranges for electronic controls and mechanisms of
contactors and contactor relays with a rated control supply voltage Us = 24 V DC:
8
[8 V [8 V
[8 V 8 V
9
9
9 [8 V
9
8 V
9
9
[8 V 9
[8 V 9
[8 V 8 V
[8 V

1 Supply voltage range for electronic controls according to DIN 19340

2 Operating range for contactors according to (VDE 0660 Part 102)
3 Voltage range for electronic outputs at ≤ 3 V internal voltage drop
4 Operating range of contactors for electronic controls
Figure 2-7 Coupling relays, voltage ranges
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 131
2.4 Configuration
2.4.9 Operation of a motor in two directions of rotation (3RA23 reversing contactor

assembly)
Applications
The 3RA23 reversing contactor assembly is used to operate a motor in two directions of
rotation. The starting characteristics correspond to those of a direct-on-line starter. When
used in conjunction with the relevant protective devices, they facilitate the space-saving and
compact assembly of fused and fuseless feeders.
On combinations with AC operation, 50/60 Hz, a changeover delay of 50 ms must be
provided at voltages ≥ 500 V. At voltages ≥ 400 V, a changeover delay of 30 ms is
recommended. These idle times do not apply to combinations with DC operation.
Versions
The 3RA23 reversing contactor assemblies are available with a uniform performance range
of 3 kW to 18.5 kW (utilization category AC-3). The 3RA23 reversing contactor assemblies
are 90 mm wide.
The diagram below shows the fully mounted 3RA23 reversing contactor assembly size S0
with a screw-type connection system.
Figure 2-8 Reversing contactor assembly with screw-type connection system (size S0)
Reference

About the individual components for customers to Assembly kit for reversing contactor assemblies
assemble their own 3RA23 reversing contactor (Page 211)
assembly and how to mount said assembly.
Rated powers
The performance range of the 3RA23 reversing contactor assembly in size S00 extends up
to 7.5 kW at a voltage of 400 V. In size S0, the maximum power value is 18.5 kW at a
voltage of 400 V.
SIRIUS Innovations
132 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.4 Configuration
Auxiliary switch blocks

The 3RA23 reversing contactor assembly can be fitted with various auxiliary switches (on the
front or laterally). A maximum of 8 auxiliary contacts are permitted per reversing contactor
assembly:
Table 2- 12 Auxiliary switch combination options for the 3RA23 reversing contactor assembly
3RA23 reversing contactor assembly

Size Possible On the front Lateral
versions 1-pole 4-pole 2-pole
S00/S0 1 0 2 0
2 2 0 2
Main circuit (sizes S00 and S0)

L1
L2
L3
F0
Q11 1 3 5 Q12 1 3 5
2 4 6 2 4 6
F1
U1 V1 W1
M
3~
F3
Figure 2-9 Main circuit of the reversing contactor assembly (sizes S00 and S0)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 133
2.4 Configuration
Control circuit (sizes S00 and S0)
Table 2- 13 Control circuit of the reversing contactor assembly (sizes S00 and S0)
Pushbutton switch control Maintained-contact operation
L1(L+) F3 L1(L+) F3
95 95
F2 F2
96 96
S0
1 0 2
S2 S1 S2
53 53
S1 Q11 S2 Q12
54 54
22 22 22 22
Q12 Q11 Q12 Q11
21 21 21 21
A1 A1 A1 A1
Q11 Q12 Q11 Q12
A2 A2 A2 A2
N(L-) N(L-)
Table 2- 14 Legend - Control circuit of the reversing contactor assembly (sizes S00 and S0)
Abbreviation Explanation
S0 "OFF" button
S1 "ON - Clockwise rotation" button
S2 "ON - Counterclockwise rotation" button
S "Clockwise - Off - Counterclockwise" selector switch
Q11 Clockwise rotation contactor
Q12 Counterclockwise rotation contactor
F1 Fuses for main circuit
F2 Overload relay
F3 Fuses for control circuit
SIRIUS Innovations
134 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.4 Configuration
2.4.10 Starting three-phase motors with reduced starting current peaks (3RA24
contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start)
Applications
The 3RA24 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start is used for starting three-
phase motors where current peaks need to be reduced and a low load torque is required
during startup. With this circuit type, the motor's starting current is reduced by 1/3
(proportional load torque) compared with direct startup.
NOTICE
When switching over from star to delta operation, the motor may be subjected to
compensation processes (fueled by an unfavorable line frequency/rotor field constellation),
which would result in higher current peaks than would be the case if the stationary motor
were connected directly in the delta circuit. However, the preferred wiring for the
3RA24 contactor assembly minimizes this effect.
The 3RA24 contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start described below have been
dimensioned for standard applications.
Note
Contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start for special applications, such as very
heavy starting or star-delta (wye-delta) startup of special motors, must be customized. When
dimensioning combinations for special applications such as these you can obtain support
from Technical Assistance (www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-assistance).
Versions
The 3RA24 contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start are available with a uniform
performance range of 5.5 kW to 22 kW (utilization category AC-3). The 3RA24 contactor
assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start is 135 mm wide.
The fully wired and tested 3RA24 contactor assemblies consist of three 3RT20 motor
contactors (line contactor, star contactor, and delta contactor), the 3RA2816-0EW20 function
module for star-delta (wye-delta) start which can be plugged on to the contactors (without a
communication connection), and main circuit wiring modules.
The SIRIUS modular system offers 3RA27 function modules for connection to the
automation level; they are fitted with terminals for connection to AS-Interface or IO-Link.
Note
If the 3RA24 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start is to be connected to a
control, the delivery will include a contactor with a communication interface.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 135
2.4 Configuration
The function module replaces all the wiring in the control circuit and can be used in the
voltage range from 24 to 240 V AC/DC. The changeover delay of 50 ms (timing relay
functionality) is already integrated in the star-delta (wye-delta) function module.
The illustration below shows the 3RA24 contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start
without a communication connection in size S0 with a screw-type connection system:
Figure 2-10 Contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start with screw-type connection system
without a communication connection (size S0)
Rated powers
The performance range of the 3RA24 contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start in
size S00 extends up to 11 kW at a voltage of 400 V. In size S0, the maximum power value
is 22 kW at a voltage of 400 V.
Note
With the 3RA24 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start the auxiliary switches
integrated in the contactor can still be used. Additional auxiliary switch blocks cannot be
fitted with the function modules attached.
2.4.10.1 Technical background information
Starting current ratio

Star-delta (wye-delta) startup can only be used if the motor normally operates in a delta
connection or starts softly, or if the load torque is low and does not rise sharply during star
startup. In the star (wye) stage motors can be subjected to around 50% (class CL16) or
30% (CL10) of their rated torque. The starting torque falls to about 1/3 of the relevant value
during direct switch-on.
The starting current is approximately 2 to 2.7 times the rated motor current.
Switching over
The switchover from star (wye) to delta cannot be carried out until the motor has been fully
accelerated to the rated speed. The necessary changeover delay and interlock are
integrated in the contactor assembly; drives which require this switchover to be performed
earlier are not suitable for star-delta (wye-delta) start.
SIRIUS Innovations
136 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.4 Configuration
Reducing the switchover current peak by means of preferred wiring

During star-delta (wye-delta) switching of three-phase motors, the motor may be subjected to
compensation processes, which would result in higher current peaks than would be the case
if the stationary motor were connected directly in the delta circuit.
The worst-case scenario would lead to the following problems, which can be minimized by
using preferred wiring:
● Tripping of short-circuit protection devices
● Welding or substantial contact erosion of the delta contactor
● High dynamic load on the motor
Using a favorable method of connection for the main circuit will reduce the equalizing
currents and current peaks which occur when switching over from a star to a delta circuit.
Preferred wiring used

The phasor diagram below shows the voltages which occur in a motor running in the
clockwise direction when switching over from star to delta. According to the preferred wiring,
the motor terminals are connected correctly, i.e. phase L1 is connected to motor
terminals U1 and V2, L2 to V1 and W2, and L3 to W1 and U2.
/ / / / / /
8 9 : 8 9 :
8 9 : 8 9 :
Figure 2-11 Correct connection of motor phases for clockwise rotation

/
8 /ಫ1
/ಫ /ಫ
8 //
8 // 8 /ಫ1 ˂8
1
/ /
/ಫ
1 Rotating field
2 Rotor's overtravel during the current-free phase
Figure 2-12 Phasor diagram for star-delta switchover during clockwise rotation with motor phases
connected correctly
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 137
2.4 Configuration
During the current-free changeover delay, the rotor overtravels the rotating field. Its magnetic
field induces a decaying residual voltage, entered here in the voltage phasor diagram for
phase L1: UL1’-N.
On switching to delta (see diagrams above), the stator winding which is conducting this
residual voltage is connected to the line voltage UL1-L3. Thanks to the favorable vector
position of the residual voltage UL1’-N and the line voltage UL1-L3, which are roughly rectified,
the differential voltage ΔU is relatively low. As a result, the current peak generated by this
voltage will also remain low.
Preferred wiring not used

The motor also rotates clockwise if the motor terminals are connected as follows: phase L1
to motor terminals U1 and W2, L2 to V1 and U2, and L3 to W1 and V2.
/ / /
8 9 :
8 9 :
Figure 2-13 Motor phases connected incorrectly results in clockwise rotation
The remanent and decaying residual voltage becomes effective in the stator once more. The
phase winding with phasor UL1’-N is now connected to the line phase UL1-L2 on switching to
delta. However, these two voltages have totally different vectorial directions; differential
voltage ΔU is high and produces a correspondingly high switchover current peak.
A switchover from star to delta results in the phasor diagram below.

/
8 /ಫ1
/ಫ /ಫ
8 //
8 /ಫ1 8 //
1 ˂8
/ /
/ಫ
1 Rotating field
2 Rotor's overtravel during the current-free phase
Figure 2-14 Phasor diagram for motor phase connections made according to the previous diagram
results in a high switchover current peak
SIRIUS Innovations
138 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.4 Configuration
Changing the direction of rotation from clockwise to counterclockwise
NOTICE
In order to set the motor to counterclockwise rotation, it is not simply a case of swapping
over two phases at any location. This would result in the same conditions as those
described for clockwise rotation.
The wiring must be performed as follows in order to keep the switchover current peak which
occurs on switching from star (wye) to delta as low as possible here too:
/ / / / / /
8 9 :
8 9 :
8 9 :
8 9 :
Figure 2-15 Correct connection of motor phases for counterclockwise motor rotation
Table 2- 15 Device sizing during normal starting
Star contactor Line and delta contactor Overload relay

Ie motor x 0.33 Ie motor x 0.58 Ie motor x 0.58
Note
If two phases are swapped over in the network in order to change the direction of rotation,
the circuit is automatically changed/reversed from the most favorable to the least favorable.
φ = switchover current factor = switchover current peak/starting current peak

The switchover current factor has a theoretical maximum value of 2.
Example measurements:
Favorable circuit: φ = 0.8
Unfavorable circuit: φ = 1.37
Note
See the main and control circuit wiring designs below; these depict the circuit diagrams for
contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start with clockwise and counterclockwise
rotation according to the preferred wiring.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 139
2.4 Configuration
Main circuit
The diagram below shows the preferred main circuit wiring for a star-delta circuit, clockwise
and counterclockwise rotation.
///
/LQH /LQH 'HOWD 'HOWD

&&: &: &&: &: <
&&:URWDWLRQ &:URWDWLRQ
: :
/99/ /88/
9 9
/88/ 0 /99/
/::/ 8 8 /::/
ɫa
Figure 2-16 Main circuit of the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start
Control circuit
The diagram below shows the control circuit for the main circuit depicted above.
//
/LQH /LQH
<
&&: &:
7
'HOWD
&&:
<
'HOWD
&:
1/ 7LPLQJ 6WDU 'HOWD 'HOWD /LQH /LQH

UHOD\ FRQWDFWRU &&: &: &&: &:
Figure 2-17 Control circuit of the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start
SIRIUS Innovations
140 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.4 Configuration
2.4.11 Using long control cables
Malfunctions caused by long control cables

If long control cables are required for the control circuits of contactors or relays, malfunctions
may occur during switching under certain conditions. As a result of these malfunctions, the
contactors may no longer be able to switch on or off.
Switching on
Due to the voltage drop in long control cables, the control voltage applied to the contactor
may fall below the threshold value at which the contactor switches on. This affects both DC-
and AC-operated contactors.
The following counter-measures can be taken:
● Changed circuit topology to allow for the application of shorter control cables.
● Increased conductor cross-section.
● Increased control voltage.
● Use of a contactor whose magnet coil has a lower closing power.
Calculation of the maximum cable length:

The maximum permissible simple cable length lzul can be roughly calculated using the
equations given below.
Table 2- 16 Calculation of the cable length
For AC voltage For DC voltage

ຘ86ຘ X6/ ຘ86ຘ X6/
LQP LQP
, ]XO

56/ຘ3 HLQ
, ]XO

56/ຘ3 HLQ
US Rated control voltage in V

RSL Ohmic resistance per conductor and km of the control cable in Ω/km
USL Voltage drop on the control cable in %
Sein, Pein Switch-on power of the contactor in VA/W
cos ϕein Power factor of the contactor coil on switch-on
Note
A maximum cable voltage drop of uSL = 5% is permitted for SIRIUS contactors.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 141
2.4 Configuration
0D[LPXPFDEOHOHQJWKZLWKDFWLYDWLRQRI$&+]RSHUDWHGFRQWDFWRUV

&DEOHOHQJWK>P@

6ZLWFKRQSRZHU>9$@
1 400 V/2.5 mm2 9 110 V/1 mm2

2 400 V/1.5 mm2 10 42 V/2.5 mm2
3 400 V/1 mm2 11 42 V/1.5 mm2
4 230 V/2.5 mm2 12 42 V/1 mm2
5 230 V/1.5 mm2 13 24 V/2.5 mm2
6 230 V/1 mm2 14 24 V/1.5 mm2
7 110 V/2.5 mm2 15 24 V/1 mm2
8 110 V/1.5 mm2
Figure 2-18 Graphical representation, switch-on
SIRIUS Innovations
142 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.4 Configuration
0D[LPXPFDEOHOHQJWKZLWKDFWLYDWLRQRI'&RSHUDWHGFRQWDFWRUV

P

&DEOHOHQJWK>P@

:
6ZLWFKRQSRZHU>:@
1 400 V/2.5 mm2 9 110 V/1 mm2

2 400 V/1.5 mm2 10 42 V/2.5 mm2
3 400 V/1 mm2 11 42 V/1.5 mm2
4 230 V/2.5 mm2 12 42 V/1 mm2
5 230 V/1.5 mm2 13 24 V/2.5 mm2
6 230 V/1 mm2 14 24 V/1.5 mm2
7 110 V/2.5 mm2 15 24 V/1 mm2
8 110 V/1.5 mm2
Figure 2-19 Graphical representation, switch-on - Example
Example for 3RT202. contactor:

● DC-operated
● 5.8 W switch-on power
● Cross-section of the control cable 1.5 mm2
● Maximum permissible control cable length: 200 m at 24 V
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 143
2.4 Configuration
Switching off
During the switch-off of AC-operated contactors, the contactor may no longer switch off in
case of control circuit interruption due to an excessive line capacity of the control cable.
The following counter-measures can be taken:
● Changed circuit topology to allow for the application of shorter control cables.
● Application of DC-operated contactors.
● Reduced control voltage.
● Application of a contactor whose magnet coil has a higher holding power.
● Parallel connection of an ohmic resistance for increased holding power.
Sizing of the parallel resistance Power of the additional resistance

LQ˖ 86 LQ:
5S 3S
&/ 5S
For reasons of cost effectiveness, PP should be lower than 10 W.
Table 2- 17 Calculation of the maximum cable length
For pushbutton switch control For maintained-contact operation

For pushbutton switch control with a three-core cable, a line For maintained-contact operation with a two-core cable, a
capacity of 0.6 μF/km (2 x 0.3 μF/km) should be expected. line capacity of 0.3 μF/km should be expected.
1/ 1/
/ /
( & &
( &
ຘ6+ ຘ6 +

,SHUP LQP , SHUP
LQP
ຘ ຘ86 ຘ86
US Rated control supply voltage in V US Rated control supply voltage in V

SH Holding power of the contactor in VA SH Holding power of the contactor in VA
SIRIUS Innovations
144 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.4 Configuration
0D[LPXPFDEOHOHQJWK>P@LQWKHFDVHRIGLVFRQQHFWLRQYLD
SXVKEXWWRQVZLWFKFRQWURORQ$&+]RSHUDWHGFRQWDFWRUV

&DEOHOHQJWK>P@

+ROGLQJSRZHU
1 24 V
2 42 V
3 110 V
4 230 V
5 400 V
Figure 2-20 Graphical representation, switch-off
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 145
2.4 Configuration
0D[LPXPFDEOHOHQJWK>P@LQWKHFDVHRIGLVFRQQHFWLRQYLD
FRQWLQXRXVDFWXDWLRQRQ$&+]RSHUDWHGFRQWDFWRUV

&DEOHOHQJWK>P@

P

9$ +ROGLQJSRZHU>9$@
1 24 V
2 42 V
3 110 V
4 230 V
5 400 V
Figure 2-21 Graphical representation, switch-off - Example
Example for 3RT202. contactor:

● AC-operated
● 8.5 VA holding power
● Control voltage 400 V AC
● Maximum permissible control cable length: 95 m
SIRIUS Innovations
146 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.5 Mounting
2.5 Mounting
2.5.1 Mounting
2.5.1.1 Mounting options

Note the following information when mounting contactors:
● If foreign bodies (such as drillings) can reach the devices, the contactors must be
covered during mounting.
● If there is a risk of pollution, heavy dust deposits, or an aggressive atmosphere at the
mounting location, the contactors must be installed in an enclosure.
● Dust deposits must be vacuumed away.
Mounting options
The following mounting types are available for contactors in sizes S00 and S0:
● Snapping onto a 35 mm DIN rail according to DIN EN 60715.
● Screwing onto a mounting plate
2.5.1.2 Mounting position

The contactors are dimensioned for operation on a vertical mounting plane. The following
mounting positions are permitted:
Table 2- 18 Permissible mounting positions for the contactors
Mounting positions for sizes S00 and S0
r r r
Note
A lateral distance from grounded parts of over 6 mm must be observed.
Vertical mounting
A special version of the 3RH2 contactor relays and 3RT2 power contactors is required for
vertical mounting. This special version can be requested from Technical Assistance
(www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-assistance).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 147
2.5 Mounting
2.5.1.3 Mounting on mounting plate

The illustrations below show how contactors of sizes S00 and S0 are mounted on a
mounting plate:
Table 2- 19 Screw mounting for sizes S00 and S0

1 Using two M4 screws (maximum tightening
torque 1.2 to 1.6 Nm), plain washers, and
spring washers, screw the contactor tight
into the designated drill holes diagonally.
You can use the 3RT1926-4P screw
mounting adapter to make size S0
contactors easier to mount, if necessary
(e.g. in the case of vertical access when
using an insulated screwdriver). These
adapters can be rotated by 90° as you wish.
Screw mounting (size S00)
Screw mounting (size S0)
SIRIUS Innovations
148 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.5 Mounting
2.5.1.4 Snapping onto DIN rail (snap-on mounting)

Contactors of sizes S00 and S0 can be snapped onto a 35 mm DIN rail.
The illustrations below show how to snap contactors onto/off a DIN rail:
Table 2- 20 Mounting/disassembling sizes S00 and S0 (snap-on mounting)

DIN rail and press down until it snaps onto
the bottom edge of the DIN rail.
To disassemble the device, press it down,
pushing against the mounting springs, and
swivel the device to remove it.
Snapping onto/off DIN rail (size S00)
Snapping onto/off DIN rail (size S0)
2.5.2 Replacing magnet coils

The magnet coils on size S0 contactors can be replaced. The illustration below shows how
to replace the magnet coil on a size S0 contactor with an AC coil.
Note
Carefully remove the nameplate before you replace the magnet coil.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 149
2.5 Mounting
Table 2- 21 Replacing a magnet coil (size S0/AC)

1 Use a screwdriver to lift up the retaining
clips between the rear and front halves of
the contactor.
2 Push the two halves of the contactor apart.
3 Take the magnet coil out of the front half of

the contactor.
SIRIUS Innovations
150 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.5 Mounting

4 Insert the new magnet coil. In doing so,
make sure that the springs between the
magnet coil and the front half of the
contactor are properly located on the
support.
5/6 Reattach the front part of the contactor onto

the rear half until the retaining clips engage.
Write the coil voltage of the newly inserted
coil onto the label supplied and stick the
label onto the front panel of the contactor,
as shown in the diagram.
Thoroughly cross out the coil voltage stated
above terminal A1.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 151
2.6 Connection
2.6 Connection
Connection systems
The SIRIUS contactors are available with the following connection types:
● Screw-type connection system
● Spring-loaded connection system
● Ring cable lug connection system
● Solder pin connection (only possible for size S00, in conjunction with a solder pin
adapter)
Terminal designations
Terminal Designation
A1 Coil terminal +
A2 Coil terminal -
L1, L2, L3 Contactor's main circuit terminal to the power network
T1, T2, T3 Contactor's main circuit terminal to the load/motor connection
13, 14 Auxiliary contact, closing
21, 22 Auxiliary contact, opening
The auxiliary/control contacts have a two-digit designation:

● First digit: Consecutive number of the auxiliary contacts (sequence number).
● Second digit: Task of the relevant auxiliary contact (function number).
For example, 1-2 for NC contact or 3-4 for NO contact
Terminal designations of the auxiliary contacts

The terminal designations as per DIN EN 50012 apply to size S00 contactors with an
integrated auxiliary (NO) contact. Auxiliary contacts are fitted and arranged on size S0
contactors (integrated in the basic device) in accordance with the terminal designations
contained in DIN EN 50012.
Additionally, for sizes S00 and S0, complete devices with permanently mounted auxiliary
switch blocks (2 NO contacts + 2 NC contacts in accordance with DIN EN 50012) are
available.
Coil terminals
Size S00 and S0 contactors feature a coil terminal on the front. An adapter
(3RT2926-4R./. coil terminal module) can be used to move the coil terminal up or down on
size S0 contactors (compatible with 3RT102).
Reference

About the coil terminal module and how to mount Coil terminal module (Page 194)
it on a 3RT20 contactor (size S0)
SIRIUS Innovations
152 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.6 Connection
Solder pin connection

For applications where the contactors are to be soldered onto a PCB directly, a solder pin
adapter is available for SIRIUS size S00 contactors up to 5.5 kW or 12 A.
Devices with a solder pin connection have the following properties:
● The terminals are suitable for a 1-conductor connection.
● All connections can be accessed from the front and are clearly arranged.
● A maximum of 2 conductors with a cross-section of 0.25 mm2 to max. 2.5 mm2 can be
used at each connection point.
Reference

About the solder pin adapter and how to mount it Solder pin adapter (Page 192)
on a motor/contactor relay (size S00)
2-conductor connection
2 conductor ends can be connected to every main, auxiliary, and control circuit connection.
These connections are also suitable for untreated conductors, which may have varying
cross-sections. This connection system offers numerous benefits, including laying the
foundations for problem-free looping through and parallel connection without intermediate
terminals.

About conductor cross-sections Technical data (Page 227)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 153
2.7 Accessories
2.7 Accessories
2.7.1 Accessories overview

SIRIUS contactors with a width of 45 mm (size S00/S0) come with a uniform, versatile range
of auxiliary switches and accessories, which are quick to retrofit and replace. The
accessories for contactor relays and power contactors are identical in design. The
accessories can be attached on the front or the sides of devices.
The 3RH2 contactor relays can be expanded to give versions with a maximum of 8 poles by
attaching 2-pole or 4-pole auxiliary switch blocks.
Table 2- 22 Overview - Accessories for 3RT2 power contactors and 3RH2 contactor relays
Accessories 3RH2 contactor 3RT2 power 3RT2 power

relay (size S00) contactor (size S00) contactor (size S0)
Auxiliary switch blocks on the front/lateral ✓ / --- ✓/✓ ✓/✓
Auxiliary switch blocks on the front/lateral, solid-state ✓ / --- ✓/✓ ✓/✓
compatible
Surge suppressor ✓ ✓ ✓
EMC interference suppression module ✓ ✓ ---
OFF-delay device ✓ ✓ ✓
Mechanical latch --- --- ✓
Additional load module ✓ ✓ ---
Control kit for manual operation of contactor contacts ✓ ✓ ---
Coupling link for PLC --- --- ✓
LED display indicator module ✓ ✓ ✓
Solder pin adapter ✓ ✓ ---
Coil terminal module --- --- ✓
Cover for ring cable lug ✓ ✓ ✓
Sealable cover ✓ ✓ ✓
3-phase infeed terminal --- ✓ ✓
Parallel switching connector ✓ ✓ ✓
Link module for two contactors in series --- ✓ ✓
Link module for motor starter protector --- ✓ ✓
Insulating stop ✓ ✓ ✓1)
Terminal module for contactors with screw connections --- ✓ ✓
Pneumatic timer --- --- ✓
Function modules for --- ✓ ✓
• Time-delayed switching of contactors
• Switching over from star operation to delta operation
Function modules for connection to the automation level --- ✓ ✓
(AS-Interface or IO-Link)
Assembly kit for reversing contactor assembly --- ✓ ✓
SIRIUS Innovations
154 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
Accessories 3RH2 contactor 3RT2 power 3RT2 power

relay (size S00) contactor (size S00) contactor (size S0)
Assembly kit for contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start
Wiring modules for contactor assemblies for star-delta --- ✓ ✓
(wye-delta) start
Function modules for contactor assemblies for star-delta --- ✓ ✓
(wye-delta) start
1) The 3RT1916-4JA02 insulating stop can be used on the connection terminals for the auxiliary circuit of the
3RT2.2 contactors.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 155
2.7 Accessories
Fitting of auxiliary switches on 3RT2 contactors (size S00 and S0)


2 Contactor size S0
5 Auxiliary switch block for snapping onto the front, 2-pole (cable entry from above)
6 Auxiliary switch block for snapping onto the front, 2-pole (cable entry from below)
Figure 2-22 Fitting of auxiliary switches on 3RT2 contactors (size S00 and S0)
SIRIUS Innovations
156 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
Size-specific accessories for 3RT2 contactors (size S00)


9 Surge suppressor
12 Parallel switching connector, 3-pole or 4-pole, with connection terminal
13 Wiring modules on the top and bottom, for connecting the main and control current paths
14 Solder pin adapter
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 157
2.7 Accessories
Size-specific accessories for contactors (size S0)

1 Contactor size S0
6 Surge suppressor
10 Pneumatic delay block
11 Mechanical latch
SIRIUS Innovations
158 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
12 Parallel switching connector

14 Coil terminal module, top and bottom
15 Wiring modules, top and bottom, for connecting the control current paths
16 Wiring modules, top and bottom, for connecting the main current paths
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 159
2.7 Accessories
2.7.2 Auxiliary switch blocks
2.7.2.1 Description
Function
The 3RH21 contactor relays and 3RT2 power contactors in size S00 feature an integrated
auxiliary contact. The 3RT2 power contactors in size S0 have two integrated auxiliary
contacts. Attachable auxiliary switch blocks can be used to add up to four further contacts to
the auxiliary contacts already integrated in the basic devices.
Versions and designs

The auxiliary switch blocks for expanding the auxiliary contacts are available with screw-
type, spring-loaded, and ring cable lug connections, in the following designs:
● On the front (uniform for sizes S00 and S0)
● Lateral (size-specific)
The 3RT2 power contactors can be expanded by means of auxiliary switch blocks mounted
on the front or laterally. Only auxiliary switch blocks for mounting on the front can be
attached to the 3RH21 contactor relays.
The table below depicts the auxiliary switch blocks for mounting on the front, which can be
used across the board for contactors of sizes S00 and S0.
Table 2- 23 Auxiliary switch blocks for mounting on the front
Connection system Design of the auxiliary switch Order number

block
Screw connection 1-pole 3RH2911-1AA/BA
2-pole 3RH2911-1LA/MA
4-pole 3RH2911-1H/F/G
4-pole (with overlapping 3RH2911-1FB11 (11U)
contacting) 3RH2911-1FB22 (11, 11U)
3RH2911-1FC22 (22U)
Solid-state compatible 3RH2911-1NF
Spring-loaded connection 4-pole 3RH2911-2H/F/G
4-pole (with overlapping 3RH2911-2FB11 (11U)
contacting) 3RH2911-2FB22 (11, 11U)
3RH2911-2FC22 (22U)
Ring cable lug connection 4-pole 3RH2911-4H/F/G
SIRIUS Innovations
160 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
The table below depicts the size-specific auxiliary switch blocks for lateral mounting.
Table 2- 24 Laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks
Design of the Connection system Size Order number

auxiliary switch
block
2-pole Screw connection S00 3RH2911-1DA
S0 3RH2921-1DA
Spring-loaded connection S00 3RH2911-2DA
S0 3RH2921-2DA
Ring cable lug connection S00 3RH2911-4DA
S0 3RH2921-4DA
2-pole, solid-state Spring-loaded connection S00 3RH2911-2DE11
compatible S0 3RH2921-2DE11
Solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks

Solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks feature two encapsulated contacts, which are
particularly well suited to switching low voltages and currents (hard gold-plated contacts) and
for operation in dusty atmospheres. The rated operational current is Ie/AC-14 and DC-13:
1 to 300 mA, voltage: 3 to 60 V.
The solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks for mounting on the front are available with
screw-type, spring-loaded, and ring cable lug connections. The laterally mountable solid-
state compatible auxiliary switch blocks are available with spring-loaded connections.
Auxiliary switch blocks with overlapping contacting

Auxiliary switch blocks with overlapping contacting are available with screw-type and spring-
loaded connections. The table below shows the versions of the auxiliary switch blocks
available with overlapping contacting.
Table 2- 25 Auxiliary switch blocks with overlapping contacting
Sizes S00 and S0 Auxiliary switch version

3RH2911-1FC22 (22U) 22U 2 NO contacts + 2 NC contacts
3RH2911-1FB11 (11U) 11U 1 NO contact + 1 NC contact
3RH2911-1FB22 (11, 11U) 11, 11U 1 NO contact + 1 NC contact + 1 leading NO contact +
1 lagging NC contact
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 161
2.7 Accessories
Travel diagrams
The travel diagrams below for auxiliary switches in sizes S00 and S0 apply to standard
auxiliary switches and to leading/lagging contacts.
6WDQGDUG 1& RQ
DX[LOLDU\VZLWFK
RII
RQ
12 RII
1& RQ
2YHUODSSLQJ RII
DX[LOLDU\VZLWFK
OHDGLQJODJJLQJ RQ
12 RII
Figure 2-25 Travel diagrams for auxiliary switches (sizes S00 and S0)
SIRIUS Innovations
162 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
2.7.2.2 Configuration
Maximum number of auxiliary switch blocks

The maximum number of auxiliary switch blocks which can be attached is determined by
technical constraints and by the applicable standard.
Note
A maximum of four NC contacts is possible (from integrated and laterally mounted auxiliary
switch blocks combined).
For 3RT23 and 3RT25 contactors in size S0, auxiliary switches can only be fitted by means
of a lateral auxiliary switch block (on the left or right side).
The tables below show the maximum number of auxiliary switch blocks which can be
mounted on 3RT2 power contactors/3RH2 contactor relays and the available combination
options according to the applicable standard.
Table 2- 26 Auxiliary switch combination options (3RT2 power contactor)
3RT2 power contactor according to

DIN EN 50005 DIN EN 50012
Size Number of Possible On the front Lateral On the front Lateral
integrated versions 1-pole 4-pole 2-pole 1-pole 4-pole 2-pole
auxiliary
switches
S00 1 NO contact 1 1 0 1 1 0 0
or 1 NC 2 0 1 0 0 1 0
contact
3 0 0 21) 0 0 1 right
S0 1 NO contact 1 1 0 1 1 0 0
and 1 NC 2 0 1 0 0 1 0
contact
3 0 0 21) 0 0 1 right
1) 1 left + 1 right
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 163
2.7 Accessories
Table 2- 27 Auxiliary switch combination options (3RH2 contactor relay)
3RH21 contactor relay according to1)

DIN EN 50005 DIN EN 50011
Size Number of Possible On the front Lateral On the front Lateral
integrated versions 1-pole 4-pole 2-pole 4-pole 2-pole
auxiliary
switches
S00 2 NO contacts 1 1 0 1 1 0
and 2 NC 2 0 1 0 1 0
contacts or
3 NO contacts 3 0 0 22) 1 0
and 1 NC
contact or
4 NO contacts
1) Lateral auxiliary contacts without positively driven operation
2) 1 left + 1 right
Applicable standards
The auxiliary switch blocks can be fitted according to the following standards:
● DIN EN 50005: Definition of terminal designations; however, the order of the terminal
designations and the positions of the contacts can be determined by the user.
● DIN EN 50011 for contactor relays: Defined order for terminal designations and position
of contacts.
● DIN EN 50012 for power contactors: Defined order for terminal designations and position
of contacts.
Note
Standard DIN EN 50012 is no longer valid, but is still used.
Definition: DIN EN 50005

The terminal designations for contactors are defined in DIN EN 50005, which contains
general rules. The following basic rules are defined therein for the contacts of auxiliary
circuits:
● The terminals of auxiliary contacts are identified by two-digit numbers.
● The units digit is a function number (NC contact: 1 and 2, NO contact: 3 and 4).
● The tens digit is a sequence number (all contacts with the same function must have
different sequence numbers).
SIRIUS Innovations
164 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
Switching devices with a fixed number of auxiliary contacts (NO or NC contacts) may have a
two-digit identification number assigned to them. The first digit specifies the number of NO
contacts, the second the number of NC contacts. No rules have been defined as regards the
order of NO and NC contacts in the contactor/contactor relay.
Note
The identification numbers on the auxiliary switch blocks only apply to the attached auxiliary
switches.

The main standard as regards the designations of contacts for auxiliary contactors is
DIN EN 50 011, which defines the terminal designations, identification numbers, and codes
of certain contactor relays, with a specified contact layout. The number, type, and position of
the contacts must be defined by means of an identification number and a subsequent code.
For 8-pole contactor relays, the code "E" means that four NO contacts must be arranged in
the bottom (rear) contact area.

DIN EN 50012 defines the terminal designations and identification numbers for the auxiliary
contacts of certain contactors. The terminal designations of the auxiliary contacts match
those of the corresponding contactor relays with code E (according to DIN EN 50011). For
auxiliary contacts on contactors with the same identification number, the terminal
designations must be defined as per the order specified in the standard.
Switching order of auxiliary contacts

When contactors are switched on, with standard auxiliary switches the NC contacts are
opened first, then the NO contacts are closed.
RII RQ
&RQWDFWRU
1& RQ
RII
6WDQGDUG
DX[LOLDU\ RII RQ
12
VZLWFK
Figure 2-26 Switching auxiliary contacts
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 165
2.7 Accessories
Auxiliary switch blocks for contactor relays

The contactor relays with 4 contacts according to DIN EN 50011, with identification
code 40E, can be expanded by adding auxiliary switch blocks 80E to 44E, to give contactor
relays with 8 contacts according to DIN EN 50011. Identification codes 80E to 44E on the
auxiliary switch blocks apply to complete contactors. These auxiliary switch blocks (3RH29
11–1GA.) cannot be combined with contactor relays with identification code 31E or 22E;
these are coded. All contactor relays with 4 contacts according to DIN EN 50011, with
identification codes 40E to 22E, can be expanded by adding auxiliary switch blocks 40 to 02,
to give contactor relays with 6 or 8 contacts according to DIN EN 50005. The identification
numbers on the auxiliary switch blocks only apply to the attached auxiliary switch blocks.
Fully mounted 8-pole 3RH22 contactor relays are also available; the 4-pole auxiliary switch
block on the second level cannot be removed. The terminal designations comply with
DIN EN 50011.
Time-delayed auxiliary contacts

The 3RA28 function modules are available for applications which require time-delayed
auxiliary contacts.
Reference

About the time-delayed switching of contactors 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2
contactors (Page 210)
2.7.2.3 Mounting/Disassembly
The procedures for mounting and disassembling auxiliary switch blocks for mounting on the
front and laterally are described below.
Mounting the 2-/4-pole auxiliary switch block on the front (size S00)

1 Push the auxiliary switch, which is mounted
on the front, into the location hole on the
contactor. Pull it down until it engages.
SIRIUS Innovations
166 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
Disassembling the auxiliary switch on the front - 2-/4-pole auxiliary switch block (size S00)

1 Activate the release lever on the auxiliary
switch block.
2 Push the auxiliary switch block up and pull it
forward to remove it from the contactor.
Note
The procedure for mounting/disassembling the 1-pole auxiliary switch block on the front is
the same.
Mounting the lateral auxiliary switch (size S0)

1 Attach the lateral auxiliary switch to the
contactor and snap it on.
Note
The laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks according to DIN EN 50012 can only be used
if no 2-pole or 4-pole auxiliary switch blocks are snapped onto the front.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 167
2.7 Accessories
Disassembling the lateral auxiliary switch (size S0)

1 Release the lateral auxiliary switch by
pressing the chequered areas on the
auxiliary switch down.

2 Remove the auxiliary switch from the side
of the contactor.
SIRIUS Innovations
168 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
2.7.3 Surge suppressor
2.7.3.1 Description
When contactor coils are disconnected, overvoltages occur (inductive loads). Voltage peaks
of up to 4 kV can occur at a rate of rise of voltage of 1 kV/microsecond (shower discharges).
This leads to:
● Substantial erosion and, as a result, premature wear of the contacts which switch the coil.
● Injection of interfering signals, which lead to fault signals in electronic controls.
Therefore, all contactor coils should be attenuated against switching overvoltages,

particularly when working in conjunction with electronic controls.
Furthermore, the high rate of rise of the voltage waveforms generated can lead to the
capacitive coupling of significant interfering signals with adjacent systems. They necessitate
an RC circuit directly at the location where the source of interference originated, i.e. at the
contactor coil. This prevents overvoltages from occurring directly at the place of origin and
protects the electronic components which are sensitive to voltage too. It also prevents the
capacitive coupling of interfering signals with the control cables of electronic circuits.
Types of attenuation
The following RC circuit elements are commonly used for overvoltage attenuation; they are
connected in parallel with the contactor coil:
● RC element (resistor and capacitor in series)
● Freewheel diode, diode combination
● Varistors
All 3RT2 contactors and 3RH21 contactor relays can be subsequently connected to RC
elements or varistors for attenuating coil switching overvoltages. Diodes or diode
combinations (of suppression diodes and Zener diodes for short disconnecting times) can
also be used.
Coupling relays, on the other hand, do not require any additional surge suppressor and can
be used directly with electronic controls.
Reference

About coupling relays Coupling relays (Page 130)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 169
2.7 Accessories
The following surge suppressors are available for the 3RT2/3RH21 contactors:
Table 2- 28 Overview - Surge suppressors
Surge suppressor With LED Without LED

Size S00 Size S0 Size S00 Size S0
Suppression diode 3RT2916-1L --- 3RT2916-1DG00 ---
Diode combination: --- 3RT2926-1M 3RT2916-1E 3RT2926-1E
Suppression and
Zener diode
Varistor 3RT2916-1J 3RT2926-1J 3RT2916-1B 3RT2926-1B
RC element --- --- 3RT2916-1C 3RT2926-1C
Selection aid
The table below compares the effects of the different surge suppressors and specifies the
applications to which they are most suited.
Table 2- 29 Mode of operation and preferred applications of surge suppressors
Surge suppressor Suitable for Overvoltage Effect Advantages/disadvantages Preferred

Control is limited ... application
voltage
Noise DC To 0.7 V • OFF-delay Advantag • Simple Instable control
suppres- becomes es implementation commands/
sion/free considerably • Reliable control supply
wheel longer (6 to 10 voltage
times) • Non-critical
diode dimensioning
• With contactors
of size S0 or • Low induction
larger, "2-stage voltage
drop-out"1) Disadvan • Long drop-out delay
cannot be tages • Only suitable for
excluded
size S00
Diode DC To Zener • OFF-delay Advantag • Non-critical EMC-critical
combi- voltage becomes es dimensioning components in
nation: longer (2 to 6 the vicinity
times) Disadvan • Attenuation only
Noise above UZD (10 V)
tages
suppress • A 2-stage drop-
ion and out no longer
Zener occurs
diode
SIRIUS Innovations
170 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
Surge suppressor Suitable for Overvoltage Effect Advantages/disadvantages Preferred

Control is limited ... application
voltage
Varistor AC/DC To varistor • OFF-delay Advantag • Energy absorption Suitable for
voltage becomes only es • Non-critical most standard
slightly longer dimensioning applications,
(2 to 5 ms) e.g. in the
• Simple
implementation SIMATIC
environment
Disadvan • Attenuation only
tages above UVDR
RC AC/DC According • OFF-delay Advantag • RF attenuation With critical
elements to remains es • Well suited to AC operating times
dimensionin unchanged voltage
g • Rates of rise of • Attenuation
voltage are independent of
attenuated levels
Disadvan • High inrush current
tages • Sensitive to
harmonics
1) The drop-out speed falls to zero once or twice for a few milliseconds:
● Safe drop-out is always ensured during current-free switching.
● When switching with a current present, the contacts are subjected to a higher thermal
load. This can lead to an overload when switching at the high current limit.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 171
2.7 Accessories
Technical background information

The oscillograms below show what happens when contactor coils are disconnected without
and with overvoltage attenuation.
Coil without RC circuit
8 6S
8 6S >9@

W >˩V@
Figure 2-27 Disconnection of a contactor coil without RC circuit
Oscillogram of the disconnection of a contactor relay coil; the coil does not have an RC
circuit: Shower discharges are clearly visible (voltage peaks up to around 4 kV). Once the
disconnection process has started, the shower discharges occur for about 250 μs; after that,
the vibration is simply damped.
SIRIUS Innovations
172 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
RC circuit with varistor

Varistors (voltage-dependent resistors) limit the maximum level of the overvoltage, as they
become conductive above a certain threshold voltage. Shower discharges occur up to that
level, in a similar way to those seen with the magnet coil without an RC circuit, but they do
not last as long overall. Unlike an RC element, varistors do not reduce the rate of the voltage
rise. Varistors can be used for DC- and AC-operated contactors.
Note
Varistors extend the contactor's OFF time by around 2 to 5 ms.
8 6S
8 6S >9@

W >˩V@
Figure 2-28 RC circuit with varistor (AC/DC operation)
Voltage peaks still occur. They are truncated at around 400 V and do not last as long overall
(approximately 50 μs).
Note
Oscillogram is truncated; voltage drops to zero after around 3 ms.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 173
2.7 Accessories
RC circuit with RC element

RC elements are primarily used in the RC circuits of AC-operated contactors. They can also
be used with DC-operated contactors. The increase in the effective capacitance at the coil
reduces the amplitude to two to three times the control voltage, as well as the rate of rise of
the switching overvoltage, so that shower discharges no longer occur. In this way, the RC
circuit protects special dv/dt-sensitive output stages from unintentional connection.
Note
RC elements which have been selected correctly only have a minor influence on the
contactors' switching times - OFF-delay of under 1 ms.
8 6S
8 6S >9@

W >PV@
Figure 2-29 RC circuit with RC element (AC/DC operation)
The capacitor reduces the amplitude and the rate of rise of the switching overvoltage.
Shower discharges no longer occur. The voltage briefly jumps to 400 V and then decreases
gradually. This is the ideal type of attenuation. RC elements are suitable for AC and DC
operation. Only a minimal OFF-delay arises (of under 1 ms).
Disadvantage: The component is larger and more expensive than other options.
SIRIUS Innovations
174 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
RC circuit with suppression diode

Including a diode in an RC circuit ensures that switching overvoltages will no longer occur;
the diode limits the voltage to 0.7 V.
Note
However, diodes do cause the switch-off delay (the OFF time) to become 6 to 9 times
longer. This characteristic can be turned to the user's advantage if short-time voltage dips in
the range of a few milliseconds need to be bridged, for example. From a technical point of
view, it only makes sense to use freewheel diodes up to a power of 5.5 kW. For higher
power ratings we recommend an RC circuit with a diode combination.
8 6S
8 6S >9@

9
W >˩V@
Figure 2-30 RC circuit with diode (DC operation)
Advantage: No overvoltages occur during the switch-off process. The diode blocks at 0.6 V.
Disadvantage: The diode can only be used for DC operation. The contactor's break time is
extended considerably, amounting to 6 to 9 times the switch-off delay. This longer break time
can be used for control purposes if required, e.g. to bridge short-time voltage dips.
Zener diodes (diode combination) can be used for shorter break times, which will then
equate to 2 to 6 times the switch-off delay.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 175
2.7 Accessories
RC circuit with a diode combination

Equipping the contactor coil with an RC circuit featuring a diode combination, consisting of a
diode and a Zener diode, also ensures that switching overvoltages will no longer occur; the
diode combination limits the voltage to 10 V.
Note
The use of a diode combination does, however, extend the switch-off delay (the OFF time)
by a factor of 2 to 6.
The diagram below shows the voltage characteristic for the contactor relay magnet coil with
an RC circuit from the graphic named "Disconnection of a contactor coil without RC circuit",
with an appropriate diode combination.
8 6S >9@

W >PV@
Figure 2-31 RC circuit with a diode combination
SIRIUS Innovations
176 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
2.7.3.3 Mounting
Mounting a surge suppressor (size S00)
Table 2- 30 Mounting the surge suppressor (size S00)

1 Attach the surge suppressor onto the front
of the contactor. Codes help you to identify
which is the correct way up when inserting
the device.
Note:
There is sufficient space to mount the surge
suppressor next to an auxiliary switch
block.
Mounting a surge suppressor (size S0)
Table 2- 31 Mounting the surge suppressor (size S0)

1 Open the cover on the front panel of the
contactor and push the surge suppressor
into the opening until it engages.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 177
2.7 Accessories
2.7.4 EMC suppression module
2.7.4.1 Description
The EMC interference suppression module for size S00 contactors reduces the high-
frequency components and the voltage level of a "counter-source voltage" in three phases.
This results in the following advantages:
● Reduction of arcing:
The connection between the main current path and the EMC suppression module
enables arcing, which is responsible for contact erosion and the majority of clicking
noises, to be reduced; this in turn ensures an EMC-compliant design.
● Increased operational reliability:
Since the EMC suppression module achieves a significant reduction in radio-frequency
components and the voltage level in three phases, the contact durability is extended
considerably. This makes an important contribution towards enhancing the reliability and
availability of the system as a whole.
● Omission of fine graduation:
There is no need for fine graduations within each performance class, as smaller motors
inherently have a higher inductance, so that one solution is adequate for all fixed-speed
operating mechanisms up to 5.5 kW.
Versions
Two electrical versions of the EMC suppression module are available.
Table 2- 32 Versions of the EMC suppression module
Design of the EMC suppression module Order number

RC circuit 3RT2916-1PA
Varistor circuit 3RT2916-1PB
SIRIUS Innovations
178 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
Circuit diagram
The diagram below shows an RC circuit with an RC element on the left, and an RC circuit
with a varistor on the right.
/
/
/
5B/ &B/ 9B/
8
5B/ &B/ 9B/
8
5B/ &B/ 9B/
8
7 7 7 7 7 7
0 0
a a
Figure 2-32 EMC suppression module, circuit diagram
Selection aid
When motors or various inductive loads are disconnected, a counter-source voltage is
generated. This can lead to voltage peaks of up to 4,000 V with a frequency spectrum from
1 kHz to 10 MHz and a rate of voltage variation from 0.1 to 20 V/ns.
9
9
˩V W
Figure 2-33 Counter-source voltage without RC circuit
Capacitive input to various analog and digital signals makes it necessary to suppress
interference in the load circuit.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 179
2.7 Accessories
The EMC suppression module is available in two versions. The table below shows how the
individual versions of the EMC suppression module differ.
Table 2- 33 Differences between versions of the EMC suppression module
EMC suppression module Preferred application

• For reducing the rate of rise
• For RF attenuation
9 The values have been selected such that effective interference
suppression can be achieved across a broad spectrum.
9
9
˩V W
RC circuit
The varistor circuit can absorb a high level of energy and can be used
for frequencies ranging from 10 to 400 Hz (controlled operating
mechanisms). There is no limiting below the knee-point voltage.
9
9
9
˩V W
Varistor circuit
SIRIUS Innovations
180 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
2.7.4.3 Mounting
Table 2- 34 Mounting the EMC suppression module (size S00)

1 Attach both hooks of the EMC suppression
module onto the underside of the contactor.
2 Tilt the EMC suppression module up until its
pins are securely located in the contactor's
terminal openings.
3 Screw the EMC suppression module tight

with a screwdriver.

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 181
2.7 Accessories
2.7.5 OFF-delay device
2.7.5.1 Description
The OFF-delay device prevents a contactor from dropping out unintentionally when there is a
short-time voltage dip or voltage failure. The OFF-delay device supplies a downstream, DC-
operated contactor with the necessary energy during a voltage dip, ensuring that the
contactor does not drop out. The 3RT2916-. OFF-delay devices have been specially adapted
to the 3RT contactors (sizes S00 and S0) and the 3RH21 contactor relays (size S00), and
are available in the versions shown below.
Table 2- 35 Versions of the OFF-delay device
Design of the OFF-delay device (operating Order number

mechanism system)
24 V DC 3RT2916-2BE01
110 V UC 3RT2916-2BK01
220/230 V UC 3RT2916-2BL01
The OFF-delay device operates without external voltage on a capacitive basis and can be
energized with either AC or DC (24 V version for DC operation only). Voltage matching is
only required for AC operation and is performed using a rectifier bridge.
A contactor opens after a delay when the capacitors integrated in the OFF-delay device are
switched in parallel to the contactor's magnet coil. In the event of voltage failures, the
capacitors discharge via the magnet coil, thus delaying opening of the contactor.
If the command devices are located upstream of the OFF-delay device in the circuit, the
device will be activated with every opening operation. If the activation takes place
downstream of the OFF-delay device, an OFF-delay only applies if the line voltage fails. The
mean OFF-delay value is around 1.5 times the specified minimum time.
2.7.5.3 Mounting
The 3RT2916-. OFF-delay devices are available with the following mounting types:
● Screwing onto a mounting plate
● Snapping onto a 35 mm DIN rail according to DIN EN 60715.
SIRIUS Innovations
182 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
Mounting on mounting plate

The illustrations below depict screw mounting for sizes S00 and S0:
Table 2- 36 Screw mounting (sizes S00 and S0)

torque 1.2 to 1.6 Nm), plain washers, and
spring washers, screw the OFF- delay
device tight into the designated drill holes
diagonally.
Snapping onto DIN rail (snap-on mounting)

OFF-delay devices of sizes S00 and S0 can be snapped onto a 35 mm DIN rail.
The illustrations below show how to snap OFF-delay devices onto/off a DIN rail:
Table 2- 37 Mounting/disassembling sizes S00 and S0 (snap-on mounting)

2 To disassemble the device, press it down,
pushing against the mounting springs, and
swivel the device to remove it.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 183
2.7 Accessories
2.7.6 Mechanical latch
2.7.6.1 Description
The mechanical latch for the 3RT2.2 power contactors ensures that the contactor remains
switched on even if there is a voltage failure. The release coil has an ON period of 100%.
Table 2- 38 Versions of the mechanical latch
Design of the mechanical latch Order number

24 V AC/DC 3RT2926-3AB31
110 V AC/DC 3RT2926-3AF31
230 V AC/DC 3RT2926-3AP31
Table 2- 39 Mounting the mechanical latch

1/2 When snapping on, the switch position

indicator's rod must be unlocked. Unlock
the rod by pressing on the switch position
indicator and pushing the rod into the
mechanical latch as far as it will go.

3 Snap the mechanical latch onto the center

of the contactor until it engages.
SIRIUS Innovations
184 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
Table 2- 40 Disassembling the mechanical latch

1 Release the mechanical latch.
2/3/4 Unlock the mechanical latch and remove it

from the contactor.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 185
2.7 Accessories
2.7.6.3 Operation
The mechanical latch can be operated with alternating and direct current; it can be activated
and deactivated electrically and manually. The illustrations below show how to operate the
mechanical latch manually.
Table 2- 41 Operating the mechanical latch

1 To activate the latching block, press the left
plunger.
2 To deactivate it, press the right plunger. It

can only be unlocked if the contactor coil is
not excited.
SIRIUS Innovations
186 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
2.7.7 Additional load module
2.7.7.1 Description
The 3RT2916-1GA additional load module for size S00 contactors is used to increase the
permissible residual current and to limit the residual voltage of SIMATIC semiconductor
outputs.
If SIRIUS contactors and SIRIUS contactor relays of size S00 are used in conjunction with
SIMATIC output modules whose residual current on signal "0" is higher than that which is
permissible for size S00 contactors, this can sometimes result in malfunctions. The
maximum permissible residual current of the electronics for size S00 contactors with a
230 V AC drive is 3 mA; at higher residual currents the contactors will not drop out. The
additional load module is used to ensure that size S00 contactors which are directly
controlled via 230 V AC semiconductor outputs are disconnected safely by programmable
logic controllers. The additional load module also performs the function of an overvoltage
attenuation circuit.
Technical data
Rated voltage AC 50/60 Hz

180 V to 255 V
Rated power 1.65 W at 230 V
Permissible contactor types 3RT2.1 (size S00)
2.7.7.2 Mounting
The 3RT2916-1GA additional load module is connected in parallel with the contactor coil. Its
design is identical to that of the surge suppressor and it is attached to the front of the
contactor, with or without an auxiliary switch block.
Reference

About mounting the additional load module Surge suppressor (Page 169)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 187
2.7 Accessories
2.7.8 Control kit for manual operation of contactor contacts
2.7.8.1 Description
The 3RT2916-4MC00 control kit is a tool used for operating (closing) the auxiliary contacts of
the 3RT201 power contactors (size S00) manually during commissioning (load-free
switching). The module is used to check the wiring and the motor direction of rotation under
conditions of short-circuit protection.
2.7.8.2 Mounting
CAUTION
Disconnect the contactor from the power supply before you attach or remove the control kit.
Only use the control kit for test purposes during commissioning.
Table 2- 42 Mounting the control kit

1 Attach the control kit to the contactor from
the front.
2 Press the control kit down until it engages.
SIRIUS Innovations
188 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
2.7.9 Coupling link for PLC
2.7.9.1 Description
Thanks to a low control power (< 0.5 W) and an operating range of 17 to 30 V DC, the
3RH2924-1GP11 coupling link enables a size S0 contactor with a 24 V DC drive to be
connected directly to the PLC output. The control voltage for the coupling link and the rated
control supply voltage for the contactor are galvanically isolated. An LED indicates the
switching state of the coupling link. The 3RH2924-1GP11 coupling link features an
integrated surge suppressor (varistor) for the contactor coil being switched.
Scope of supply
The following components ship with the 3RH2924-1GP11 coupling link:
● Coupling link
● 3RT2926-4RA11 coil terminal module with coil terminal from above (screw-type
connection system)
Circuit diagram
3RH2924-1GP11 coupling link for control from the PLC.
% 1

8
$

$
1 Coupling link
2 Contactor
B1+/B2- Control voltage 24 V DC
L1/N Rated control supply voltage for the selected contactor
Figure 2-34 Coupling link, circuit diagram (size S0)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 189
2.7 Accessories
2.7.9.2 Mounting
Prerequisite
The 3RT2926-4R..... coil terminal module must be mounted before you can attach the
coupling link.
CAUTION
Before mounting the coupling link, disconnect the voltage from L1 to L3.

1 Attach the coupling link to the coil terminal
module using the two integrated mounting
pins.
2 Screw the coupling link tight with a
screwdriver.
SIRIUS Innovations
190 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
2.7.10 LED display indicator module
2.7.10.1 Description
The LED display indicator module can be connected to the coil terminals of size S00 and S0
contactors; it indicates the energized state of the contactors via yellow LEDs. In practice the
LED display indicator module is primarily used for 3RT2 power contactors in size S0.
Table 2- 43 LED display indicator module
Size Order number

S00/S0 3RT2926-1QT00
The LED display module can be used for voltages of 24 to 240 V AC/DC. The LEDs are
switched on a bidirectional basis in order to ensure they are protected against polarity
reversal. With AC control both LEDs light up and with DC control just one LED lights up,
depending on the polarity.
2.7.10.2 Mounting
The LED display indicator module is snapped into the location hole on the front of the
contactor, in place of the labeling plate.
Table 2- 44 Mounting the LED display indicator module (size S0)

1 Snap the LED display indicator module into
the corresponding location hole provided on
the front of the contactor.
2 Thread the conductors into coil

terminals A1 and A2 of the contactor.
3 Screw the conductors tight with a
screwdriver.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 191
2.7 Accessories
2.7.11 Solder pin adapter
The solder pin adapter can be used to solder standard contactors in size S00 up to
5.5 kW/12 A onto PCBs.
Table 2- 45 Versions of the solder pin connection
Version of the solder pin connection Order number

Without auxiliary switch block 3RT1916-4KA1
With auxiliary switch block 3RT1916-4KA2
Solder pin connection can be used:

● For motor contactors and contactor relays in size S00.
● For contactors in size S00 with an attached 4-pole auxiliary switch block.
● For the reversing wiring of S00 contactors; in this case, the reversing wiring must be
carried out before the contactors are soldered onto the PCB.
SIRIUS Innovations
192 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
2.7.11.2 Mounting
Mounting on a contactor of size S00

1/2 Position the screwdriver on the contactor as
shown in the image and press it down to
release the spring for DIN rail mounting.
3 Insert the solder pin connections into the

screw connections at the top and bottom of
the contactor.

4/5 Fold the solder pin adapters down/up onto
the contactor and screw them tight with a
screwdriver.
Mounting on a contactor of size S00 with an attached 4-pole auxiliary switch block

1 Insert the solder pin connections into the
openings provided at the top and bottom of
the contactor until they engage.
2 Screw the solder pin adapters tight with a
screwdriver.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 193
2.7 Accessories
2.7.12 Coil terminal module
The 3RT2926-4R. coil terminal module for mounting on 3RT20 power contactors in size S0
serves as an adapter for the coil and ensures the coil wiring is correct for 3RT102 contactors
(e.g. for retrofitting a 3RT10 device).
The coil terminal module is available in the following versions.
Table 2- 46 Versions of the coil terminal module
Connection system Design of the coil terminal Order number

module
Screw connection Coil terminal from above 3RT2926-4RA11
Coil terminal from below 3RT2926-4RB11
Coil terminal diagonal 3RT2926-4RC11
Spring-loaded connection Coil terminal from above 3RT2926-4RA12
Coil terminal from below 3RT2926-4RB12
SIRIUS Innovations
194 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
2.7.12.2 Mounting
Below is an example of how to mount the 3RT2926-4RA11 coil terminal module (coil
terminal from above) onto a 3RT2 power contactor of size S0.
Table 2- 47 Mounting the coil terminal module

1 Attach the coil terminal module onto the
contactor from above until it engages.
2 Open the cover on the front panel of the
contactor.
3 Thread the conductor from above into coil $
terminal A1 of the contactor.

4 Lay the conductor in the cable duct.
$
5 Thread the conductor from below into coil
terminal A2 of the contactor.
6 Close the cover on the front panel of the

contactor.
screwdriver.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 195
2.7 Accessories
2.7.13 Cover for ring cable lug
For the version with a ring cable lug connection system the SIRIUS modular system features
attachable cover caps for ensuring touch protection (finger safety) according to IEC 61140.
Both line-side and output-side covers are available.
Table 2- 48 Versions of the cover for the ring cable lug
Size Order number

S00 3RT2916-4EA13
S0 3RT2926-4EB13
Figure 2-35 3RT2 power contactor with ring cable lug cover (size S0)
SIRIUS Innovations
196 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
2.7.14 Sealable cover
When contactors and contactor relays are used in safety-oriented applications, it must be
ensured that the contactors cannot be operated manually. A sealable
cover (3RT2916-4MA10), which prevents the contactors being unintentionally operated
manually, is available as an accessory for such applications. It is a transparent molded-
plastic cap with a clip that enables the contactor to be sealed.
2.7.14.2 Mounting
Mounting the sealable cover
Table 2- 49 Contactor (size S00) with sealable cover

1 Attach the loose molded-plastic cap into the
location hole on the contactor.
2 Insert the clip into the molded-plastic cap.
3 Use a seal to secure the clip so that the
molded-plastic cap cannot be removed.

Note
Proceed in the same way to mount the sealable cover on size S0 contactors.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 197
2.7 Accessories
2.7.15 3-phase infeed terminal
The 3-phase infeed terminal is used for the parallel injection of an L1 cable at L1 to L3. The
terminal is available for mounting on 3RT20 power contactors in sizes S00 and S0 with
screw-type connection systems.
Table 2- 50 Versions of the 3-phase infeed terminal
Size Order number

S00 3RA2913-3K
S0 3RV2925-5AB
2.7.15.2 Mounting
Table 2- 51 Mounting the 3-phase infeed terminal (size S00)

1 Insert the pins of the 3-phase infeed
terminal into the contactor's terminal
openings from above until they are securely
in position.
2 Screw the 3-phase infeed terminal tight with
a screwdriver.
Note
Proceed in the same way to mount the 3-phase infeed terminal on 3RT20 contactors of
size S0.
SIRIUS Innovations
198 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
2.7.16 Parallel switching connectors
3RT2 power contactors can be connected in parallel (e.g. neutral bridge) using parallel
switching connections.
The following versions of parallel switching connections are available:
Table 2- 52 Versions of the parallel switching connectors
Size Design of the parallel switching Connection system Order number

connector
S00 3-pole, without connection Screw connection 3RT1916-4BA31
terminal Spring-loaded 3RT2916-4BA32
connection
3-pole, with connection terminal Screw connection 3RT1916-4BB31
S0 3-pole, without connection Screw connection 3RT1926-4BA31
terminal Spring-loaded 3RT2926-4BA32
connection
If the current paths of multi-pole switching devices are connected in parallel, the total current
is distributed across the individual current paths in accordance with their ohmic resistance
and their inductive interactions. The ohmic resistance is primarily generated by the contact
resistance at the contacts, the value of which can vary as a result of erosion and oxidation.
This means that the current distribution is neither even nor stable: Individual current paths
may be overloaded and the overload releases or relays will trip too early (tripping error).
Permanent load with parallel connection

Provided that the relevant catalogs do not contain any information to the contrary, the
following applies for a permanent load with parallel connection:
● If three current paths are connected in parallel, 2.5 times the continuous current can be
conducted; if two current paths are connected in parallel, 1.8 times the continuous current
can be conducted. However, it should be noted that the making and breaking capacities
do not increase, since the contacts do not close and open simultaneously, so the
contacts of one current path have to switch the entire inrush or breaking current.
● The cables should be routed such that the same cable lengths are used for each current
path.
● If a short-circuit current arises, it is divided up in accordance with the ratio of the current
path resistances.
Notice: The operating current of electromagnetic instantaneous short-circuit releases
cannot be reached in such cases.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 199
2.7 Accessories
Making capacity/breaking capacity

The table below specifies the magnitude of a contactor's making and breaking capacities, in
relation to the load currents for two or three current paths connected in parallel:
Table 2- 53 Parallel switching connections: Making capacity/breaking capacity
3-pole switching 2 current paths in 3 current paths in 4 current paths in

parallel parallel parallel
,H ,H ,H , ಬH , ಬಬH , ಬಬH

,H ,H ,H ,H ,H ,H
Making capacity 12 x Ie (utilization ຘ , ಿ H ຘ , ಿಿ H ຘ , ಿಿ H

category AC-4) ຘ , ಿ H
ຘ , ಿಿ H ຘ , ಿಿ H

Breaking capacity 10 x Ie (utilization ຘ , ಿ e ຘ , ಿಿ H ຘ , ಿಿ H

ຘ , ಿ H ຘ , ಿಿ H ຘ , ಿಿ H
category
AC-4)
2.7.16.3 Mounting
The parallel switching connectors of size S00 can all be reduced by one pole. The illustration
below shows an example of how to mount the 3-pole parallel switching connector with
connection terminal to a contactor of size S00.
Table 2- 54 Mounting the 3-pole parallel switching connector with connection terminals

1 Insert the pins of the parallel switching
connector into the contactor's terminal
openings from below until they are securely
in position.
2 Screw the parallel switching connector tight
with a screwdriver.
SIRIUS Innovations
200 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
2.7.17 Link module for two contactors in series
The link module for 2 contactors in series is a module used to connect two contactors in
series. It is used in Safety applications, for example, where two switching points located in
series are required.
The link module for 2 contactors in series is available in the following versions.
Table 2- 55 Versions of the link module
Size Order number

S00 3RA2916-1A
S0 3RA2926-1A
2.7.17.2 Mounting
Table 2- 56 Mounting the link module for 2 contactors in series (size S00)

1 Insert the pins of the link module into the
E
contactor's terminal openings from above
until they are securely in position. Make
sure that the wedge (a) engages in the
groove (b) provided on the contactor for this
purpose.
2 Attach the contactor onto the link module's

pins from above.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 201
2.7 Accessories

3 Position the contactors connected in series
via the link module on the top edge of the
DIN rail and press them down until they
snap onto the bottom edge of the DIN rail.
4 Screw the link module tight on both

contactors with a screwdriver.

Note
The procedure is the same for contactors of size S0.
SIRIUS Innovations
202 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
2.7.18 Link module for motor starter protector
Link module for motor starter protector - contactor

Link modules can be used to quickly and reliably mount a motor starter protector onto the
contactor. In this case, the link modules serve to establish an electrical and mechanical
connection between the motor starter protector and the contactor.
Table 2- 57 Versions of the link module for motor starter protector - contactor
Connection system Version of the link module Order number

Screw-type Motor starter protector – contactor in size S00 3RA1921-1D
Motor starter protector – contactor in size S0 AC 3RA2921-1A
Motor starter protector – contactor in size S0 DC 3RA2921-1B
Spring-loaded Motor starter protector – contactor in size S00 3RA2911-2A
Motor starter protector – contactor in size S0 3RA2921-2A
Reference

About link modules Fuseless load feeders, under
Link modules (Page 611)
About mounting contactors and motor starter Fuseless load feeders, under
protectors Mounting and disassembling load feeders
(Page 576)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 203
2.7 Accessories
2.7.19 Pneumatic timer
In terms of its function, the pneumatic timer is comparable with solid-state time-delayed
auxiliary switch blocks. It is available for 3RT2.2 (size S0) power contactors in the following
versions.
Table 2- 58 Versions of the pneumatic timer
Version Adjustable time range Order number Circuit diagrams

With ON-delay 0.1 to 30 s 3RT2926-2PA01
1 to 60 s 3RT2926-2PA11

With OFF-delay 0.1 to 30 s 3RT2926-2PR01

1 to 60 s 3RT2926-2PR11

The pneumatic delay block is used if electronic components are not desirable or in the
absence of a control supply voltage.
Table 2- 59 Mounting the pneumatic timer
Step Operating instruction Figure

1 Push the pneumatic timer, which is
attached on the front, into the location hole
on the contactor.
2 Pull the plunger out.
3 Pull the pneumatic timer down until it
engages.
SIRIUS Innovations
204 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
Table 2- 60 Disassembling the pneumatic timer

1 Press down the release lever on the
pneumatic timer.

2 Pull the pneumatic timer toward you and
remove it from the contactor.
Note
The pneumatic delay block is attached on the front of the contactors and its auxiliary
contacts take the form of 1 NO contact and 1 NC contact. If the pneumatic timer is mounted
on a contactor, no other auxiliary contacts are permitted.
2.7.19.3 Operation
Table 2- 61 Operating the pneumatic timer

1 Set the required time range.
2 Press the plunger to start the pneumatic
timer.
3 Once the set time has elapsed, the plunger

will snap back out.

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 205
2.7 Accessories
2.7.20 Insulating stop
The insulating stop is available in the following versions.
Table 2- 62 Versions of the insulating stop
Size Order number Can be used for

S00 3RT2916-4JA02 Basic devices 3RT2.1 and 3RH21
S0 3RT1916-4JA02 • Terminals for the auxiliary circuit and the control circuit of basic
device 3RT2.2
• Auxiliary switch blocks which can be mounted on the front and
side
The insulating stop is for contactors with spring-loaded connections. In the case of
conductors with a small conductor cross-section (≤ 1mm2), it ensures that the conductor
insulation is not clamped with the rest of the cable. An insulating stop unit comprises 5 pairs
of terminals which can be separated. The diagram below illustrates an example of how the
the 3RT2916-4JA02 insulating stop can be used on a size S00 basic device.
Figure 2-36 Insulating stop on spring-loaded connection
SIRIUS Innovations
206 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
2.7.21 Terminal module for contactors with screw connections
The terminal module for contactors with screw connections is available in the following
versions.
Table 2- 63 Versions of the terminal module for contactors with screw connections
Size Order number Version

S00 and S0 3RT1900-4RE01 Plug for contactor
S00 3RT1916-4RD01 Adapter for contactor
S0 3RT1926-4RD01 Adapter for contactor
The terminal module can be used to connect contactors with screw connections in size S00
or S0 to a motor.
2.7.21.2 Mounting
Mounting the terminal module for contactors with screw connections
Table 2- 64 Mounting the terminal module for contactors (size S00) with screw connections

1 Plug the adapter pin into the contactor from
below.
2 Insert the plug into the openings on the
adapter from the front, until it engages.
3 Screw the terminal module tight with a
screwdriver.

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 207
2.7 Accessories
Note
Proceed in the same way to mount the terminal module on size S0 contactors.
Note
Replace the contactor and the adapter together when end of service life is reached.
SIRIUS Innovations
208 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
2.7.22 3RA27 function modules for connection to the automation level (AS-Interface or
IO-Link)
Special device versions of SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors (power contactors with communication
capability) which can be expanded by attaching 3RA27 function modules provide a
straightforward means of connecting SIRIUS switching devices to the automation level
(PLC).
The function modules facilitate connection to AS-Interface or IO-Link communication
solutions and are plugged into 3RT2...-....-0CC0 power contactors with communication
capability.
The function modules are available for the following contactors and contactor assemblies.
Table 2- 65 Overview - 3RA27 function modules
AS-Interface IO-Link
Direct-on-line start 3RA2712- . AA00 3RA2711- . AA00
Reversing start 3RA2712- . BA00 3RA2711- . BA00
Star-delta (wye-delta) start 3RA2712- . CA00 3RA2711- . CA00
Reference
More information ... Can be found in the manuals ...

About the 3RA27 function modules for connection • "Function Modules for AS-Interface"
to the automation level (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/
view/en/39318922) (3ZX1012-0RA27-0AC0)
• "Function Modules for IO-Link"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/
view/en/39319600) (3ZX1012-0RA27-1AC1)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 209
2.7 Accessories
2.7.23 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
The SIRIUS modular system features 3RA28 function modules for the delayed switching of
contactors and auxiliary switches (e.g. for switching from star operation to delta operation).
3RA28 function modules are available with screw-type or spring-loaded connections in the
following versions:
● Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switches 3RA281.-..W10
With ON-delay or OFF-delay, without auxiliary voltage
● Solid-state timing relays with semiconductor output 3RA2811-.CW10 and
3RA2812-.DW10
With ON-delay or OFF-delay, with auxiliary voltage
● Star-delta (wye-delta) function module 3RA2816-0EW20
Complete module kit for star-delta (wye-delta) start
Reference
About the different versions of the 3RA28 function SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on
modules 3RT2 contactors, under Device versions
(Page 643)
About mounting 3RA28 function modules on SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on
3RT2 contactors 3RT2 contactors, under Mounting (Page 660)
SIRIUS Innovations
210 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
2.7.24 Assembly kit for reversing contactor assemblies
Users can mount the 3RA23 reversing contactor assembly using various assembly kits for
screw and spring-loaded connections.
Note
The 3RT201./3RT202. power contactors required for installing the 3RA23 reversing
contactor assembly in size S00/S0 have to be ordered separately.
Assembly kit for 3RA23 reversing contactor assembly

The following components are included in delivery with the assembly kit for 3RA23 reversing
contactor assembly:
● Mechanical interlock
● Two connecting clips for two contactors
● Wiring modules, top and bottom
The assembly kit is available in the following versions.
Table 2- 66 Versions of the assembly kit for 3RA23 reversing contactor assembly
Connection system Size Order number

Screw connection S00 3RA2913-2AA1
S0 3RA2923-2AA1
Spring-loaded connection S00 3RA2913-2AA2
S0 3RA2923-2AA2
Electrical interlock
The assembly kit for contactors (size S00 and S0) with screw-type connections contains
wiring modules for connecting the main and control current paths.
The assembly kit for contactors (size S00) with screw-type connections contains wiring
modules for connecting the main and control current paths.
For contactors (size S0) with spring-loaded connections the kit only contains wiring modules
for connecting the main circuit. If the control circuit wiring (electrical interlock) is also
required, the auxiliary switches must be wired separately as necessary. The procedure is
described in the chapter titled Mounting (Page 211).
2.7.24.2 Mounting
The reversing contactor assemblies can be built from contactors with screw connections or
spring-loaded connections:
● Standard contactor (Q 11) for direction of rotation 1 (clockwise rotation): Left
● Standard contactor (Q 12) for direction of rotation 2 (counterclockwise rotation): Right
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 211
2.7 Accessories
The illustration below shows example procedures for assembling the reversing contactor
assembly 3RA23 size S00 with screw-type connection. Operating instructions 1 to 5 show
how to assemble the contactors using the mechanical interlock and the connecting clips.
Assembling the reversing contactor assembly with screw-type connection - size S00
Table 2- 67 Assembling the reversing contactor assembly with screw-type connection (size S00)

1 Pull the adhesive label off the nameplate on
the right-hand side of contactor Q11.
2 Insert the mechanical interlock into the

opening on the right-hand side of the
contactor.
the left-hand side of contactor Q12.
4 Insert the connecting clips into the openings
on the contactor.

5 Connect contactors Q11 and Q12 together.

6 Attach the wiring modules for connecting

the main and control current paths to the
contactors from above.
the main current paths to the contactors
from below.

8 Screw the wiring modules tight with a
screwdriver.
SIRIUS Innovations
212 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
Note
Contactors with one NC contact in the basic device (3RT201.) are required for the electrical
interlock.
Assembling the reversing contactor assembly with screw-type connection - size S0

The illustrations below show the components of the assembly kit for the reversing contactor
assembly in size S0 and explain the assembly procedure. The mechanical interlock and the
connecting clips are mounted in the same way as described for size S00 with screw-type
connection.
Table 2- 68 Assembling the reversing contactor assembly with screw-type connection (size S0)

1/2 Attach the wiring modules for connecting
from above and below.

the control current paths to the contactors

screwdriver.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 213
2.7 Accessories
Assembling the reversing contactor assembly with spring-loaded connection - size S00
The mechanical interlock and the connecting clips are mounted in the same way as
described for size S00 with screw-type connection.
Table 2- 69 Assembling the reversing contactor assembly with spring-loaded connection (size S00)

from above.
the control current paths to the contactors
from above.

from below.

SIRIUS Innovations
214 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
Assembling the reversing contactor assembly with spring-loaded connection - size S0

The illustrations below show the components of the assembly kit for the reversing contactor
assembly in size S0 and explain the assembly procedure. The mechanical interlock and the
connecting clips are mounted in the same way as described for size S00 with screw-type
connection.
Table 2- 70 Assembling the reversing contactor assembly with spring-loaded connection (size S0)

3 For connecting the control current paths

strip the conductors and push them into the
contactor terminals from above and below.
Note:
The conductors required for connecting the
control current paths are not included in the
scope of supply of the assembly kit for
reversing contactor assemblies with spring-
loaded connection (size S0).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 215
2.7 Accessories
4-pole reversing contactor assembly

The illustrations below show how to mount the 4-pole reversing contactor assembly in size
S0.
Table 2- 71 Mounting the 4-pole reversing contactor assembly with screw-type connection (size S0)

1/2 Remove the 4th pin from one of the two
contacts by releasing the snap hooks.

3 Attach the 4th pin to the other side of the

same contactor by hooking it into the
openings on the contactor and snapping the
pin to the contactor.

on contactor Q12.
5 Secure the mechanical interlock on the left-
hand side of contactor Q12.

SIRIUS Innovations
216 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories

Note
As there are no wiring kits for 4-pole reversing contactor assemblies, the main and control
circuits are wired using a cable.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 217
2.7 Accessories
2.7.25 Assembly kit for contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start
Prerequisite
The following components, which have to be ordered separately, are required to mount the
contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start:
● Assembly kit for the 3RA24 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start
● Function modules with or without communication connection.
● Three power contactors 3RT20
Note
If the function modules are used, they take over the tasks associated with control circuit
wiring and the timing relay. However, an installation without function modules and with an
additional external timing relay continues to be possible. Accordingly, the scope of supply of
the assembly kit includes the wiring modules for the control circuit wiring (these are not
required if function modules are being used).
Assembly kit for 3RA24 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start
The assembly kit for customer assembly of the 3RA24 contactor assembly for star-delta
(wye-delta) start comprises the following components and is available in various versions.
Table 2- 72 Components for assembling the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start
Assembly Assembly kit components Connection system Order number

kit
Assembly • Mechanical interlock Screw connection 3RA2913-2BB1
kit for size • Four connecting clips Spring-loaded 3RA2913-2BB2
S00 • Neutral bridge connection
• Wiring modules, top and bottom
Assembly • Four connecting clips Screw connection 3RA2923-2BB1
kit for size • Neutral bridge Spring-loaded 3RA2923-2BB2
S0 • Mechanical interlock connection
• Wiring modules, top and bottom
SIRIUS Innovations
218 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
Function modules without communication connection

The function module is compatible with both sizes (S00 and S0) of the 3RA24 contactor
assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start and can be plugged in on the front of the contactors
regardless of the connection system selected. It comprises the following components, which
can be ordered as a complete module kit (3RA2816-0EW20).
● 3RA2912-0 basic module for star-delta (wye-delta) with integrated control logic and time
setting
● Two coupling modules with integrated connecting cable 3RA2911-0
Function modules with communication connection

The SIRIUS modular system offers 3RA27 function modules for connection to the
automation level; they are fitted with terminals for connection to AS-Interface (3RA2711) or
IO-Link (3RA2712).
Note
If the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start is built using communication-capable
3RA27 function modules, a 3RT2...-....-0CC0 contactor with communication connection must
be used (only the basic module's contactor has to be a communication-capable contactor).
Reference

About function modules without communication SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on
connection 3RA28 3RT2 contactors, under Device versions
(Page 643)
More information ... Can be found in the manuals ...

About function modules with communication • "Function Modules for AS-Interface"
connection 3RA27 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/
view/en/39318922) (3ZX1012-0RA27-0AC0)
• "Function Modules for IO-Link"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/
view/en/39319600) (3ZX1012-0RA27-1AC1)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 219
2.7 Accessories
2.7.25.2 Mounting
The contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start can be built from contactors with
screw connections or spring-loaded connections:
● Line contactor (Q11): Left
● Delta contactor (Q13): Center
● Star contactor (Q12): Right
This arrangement applies for all installation instructions described in this chapter.
The illustration below shows example procedures for assembling the contactor assembly for
star-delta (wye-delta) start in size S0 with screw-type connection. Operating instructions 1 to
6 show how to assemble the contactors using the components supplied in the assembly kit.
Assembling the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start with screw-type connection - size
S0
Table 2- 73 Assembling the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start with screw-type
connection (size S0)

the left-hand side of contactor Q12 and off
the nameplate on the right-hand side of
contactor Q13 (not illustrated).

on contactor Q13.

3 Secure the mechanical interlock on the left-
hand side of contactor Q12. %
5 Insert the connecting clips into the openings %

%
on contactor Q12.

6 Connect contactors Q11/Q13 and Q12 $
together.
%
SIRIUS Innovations
220 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories

7 Attach the wiring module for connecting the
main current paths to contactors Q11 and
Q13.
The wiring modules for connecting the
control current paths are not needed to

build a contactor assembly for star-delta
(wye-delta) start with function modules.
8 Attach the wiring module for the neutral
bridge to contactor Q12 from above.
the main current paths to contactors Q13
and Q12 from below.

screwdriver.

screwdriver.

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 221
2.7 Accessories
Mounting the function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start
CAUTION
Disconnect the power supply before mounting the function module for star-delta (wye-delta)
start.
Note
If you are building contactor assemblies from individual components, the function modules
take over the tasks associated with control circuit wiring and the timing relay. The wiring
modules for connecting the control current paths are not required.

1 Check that the locking
slide is engaged in the
topmost position.

2/3 Remove the interface

connection from the slot
by lifting it up and out.

4 Attach the basic

module/coupling module
to the contactor from the
front. To do this, insert the
contacts into the openings
on the contactor.
SIRIUS Innovations
222 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories

5 Push the locking slide
down with a screwdriver
until it engages.
6/7 Insert the coded module

connector into the slot in
the correct position from
above until the module

connector engages in the
locking mechanism.
Note
The function modules are mounted on the contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta)
start described below as previously described.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 223
2.7 Accessories
Assembling the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start with screw-type connection - size
S00
CAUTION
Disconnect the power supply before mounting the 3RA24 contactor assembly for star-
delta (wye-delta) start.
The mechanical interlock and the connecting clips are mounted and the function modules
are plugged in in the same way as described for size S0 with screw-type connection.
Table 2- 74 Assembling the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start with screw-type

1 Break the wiring module apart.

2/3 Attach the wiring module for connecting the

Q13 from above and below.


5/6 Screw the wiring modules tight with a
screwdriver.
SIRIUS Innovations
224 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.7 Accessories
Assembling the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start with spring-loaded connection -
size S00
Table 2- 75 Assembling the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start with spring-loaded


Q13 from above.

Q12 from below.
4 Insert the screwdriver into the rectangular

operating slot as far as it will go. The
screwdriver blade keeps the spring-loaded
terminal open automatically. Insert the
conductor into the oval connection slot and
then pull it back out again.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 225
2.7 Accessories
Assembling the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start with spring-loaded connection -
size S0
Table 2- 76 Assembling the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start with spring-loaded


Q13 from above.


the main current paths to contactors Q13
and Q12 from below.
SIRIUS Innovations
226 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
2.8 Technical data
2.8.1 Contactors for switching motors (3RT20)
2.8.1.1 Rated data for auxiliary contacts
Table 2- 77 Technical data for 3RT2 contactors - Rated data for auxiliary contacts
Type 3RT2
Size S00 S0
Rated data for auxiliary contacts
Acc. to IEC 60947-5-1/DIN EN 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200)
(Data applies to integrated auxiliary contacts and contacts in the
auxiliary switch blocks for contactors size S00 and S0.)
Rated insulation voltage Ui(pollution degree 3) V 690
Conventional thermal current Ith = A 10
Rated operational current Ie/AC-12
AC load
Rated operational current Ie/AC-15/AC-14
• at rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 101)
110 V A 101)
125 V A 101)
220 V A 101)
230 V A 101)
380 V A 3
400 V A 3
500 V A 2
660 V A 1
690 A 1
DC load
Rated operational current Ie/DC-12
• at rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 6
60 V A 6
110 V A 3
125 V A 2
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.3
600 V A 0.15
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 227
2.8 Technical data
Type 3RT2
Size S00 S0
Rated data for auxiliary contacts
Rated operational current Ie/DC-13
• at rated operational voltage Ue 24 V A 62)
60 V A 2
110 V A 1
125 V A 1
220 V A 0.3
440 V A 0.14
600 V A 0.1
Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA Frequency of contact faults <10-8 i.e. <
acc. to DIN EN 60947-5-4 1 fault per 100 million operating cycles
1) Integrated auxiliary contacts (size S0) and contacts in the auxiliary switch blocks for contactors (size S00 and S0): 6 A
2) Contacts in auxiliary switch blocks for contactors size S00 and S0:4 A
SIRIUS Innovations
228 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
2.8.1.2 Contact service life of auxiliary and main contacts
Contact service life of auxiliary contacts

This requires operating mechanisms that switch at
random, i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the %DVLF
GHYLFH
supply system.
The contact service life is essentially dependent on the

%DVLFGHYLFH
0LOOLRQRSHUDWLQJF\FOHV
breaking current. ZLWK
DWWDFKDEOH
The characteristic curves apply to:

'& '&

• Integrated auxiliary contacts on 3RT20 9 9
$&$&

• Auxiliary switch blocks 3RH2911-., 3RH2921-. for
contactors size S00 and S0 '&
9

, D $
, H '& , H '& , H $& , H '&
9 9 9 9
Legend for diagram:

Ia = Breaking current
Ie = Rated operational current
1) Integrated auxiliary contacts (size S0) and contacts in the auxiliary switch blocks for contactors (size S00 and S0): 6 A
2) Contacts in auxiliary switch blocks for contactors size S00 and S0:4 A
Contact service life of main contacts

The characteristic curves show the contact service life Size S00
of contactors when switching resistive and inductive
2SHUDWLQJF\FOHV
three-phase loads (AC-1/AC-3) as a function of IRU
breaking current and rated operational voltage. This
9
9
9
9
requires operating mechanisms that switch at &RQWDFWRU 5757 5757

N:N: bN:bbN:
W\SH
random, i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle of

the supply system.

The rated operational current Ie in accordance with

utilization category AC-4 (breaking of 6 times the

rated operational current) is specified for a contact

service life of at least 200,000 operating cycles.

If a shorter contact service life is sufficient, the rated
operational current Ie/AC-4 can be increased.

In the case of mixed operation, i.e. if normal switching

operation (breaking of rated operational current in

accordance with utilization category AC-3) is mixed

with occasional inching (breaking of the multiple rated
operational current in accordance with utilization

category AC-4), the service life of the contacts can be

calculated approximately using the following formula:

, D $
, H $
$ 31 N:
;

& $

ຘ ದ
%
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 229
2.8 Technical data
Contact service life of main contacts

Legend for formula: Size S0
• X: Contact service life for mixed operation in
2SHUDWLQJF\FOHV
operating cycles IRU
• A: Contact service life for normal operation (Ia = Ie)
9
9
9
9
&RQWDFWRU 57 57 57 57
in operating cycles W\SH N: N: N: N:

• B: Contact service life for inching (Ia = multiple of

Ie) in operating cycles

• C: Proportion of inching operations as a
5757
percentage of all operations

bN:bbN:

,D $
,H $
31N:
Legend for diagram:

PN= Rated power of squirrel-cage motors at 400 V
Ia= Breaking current
Ie= Rated operational current
SIRIUS Innovations
230 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
2.8.1.3 General data and short-circuit protection for 3RT201. contactors without overload relay
Table 2- 78 General data - 3RT201.
Type 3RT2015, 3RT2017,

3RT2016 3RT2018
Size S00
General data
Permissible mounting position • AC and DC operation
r r r
The contactors are dimensioned for
operation on a vertical mounting plane.
Vertical mounting position: • AC operation and DC

operation
Special version required.

Mechanical durability • Basic device Opera- 30 million
ting
• Basic device with 10 million
cycles
snap-on auxiliary
switch block
• Solid-state 5 million
compatible
auxiliary switch
block
Electrical durability 1)

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6
Protective separation between coil and main contacts V 400
acc. to DIN EN 60947-1, Annex N
Mirror contacts
• A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC - 3RT201., 3RT231. Yes, in the basic device as well as between
contact that cannot be closed (removable auxiliary switch the basic device and the snap-on auxiliary
simultaneously with a main NO contact. block) switch block in accordance with
DIN EN 60947-4-1, Annex F.
- 3RT201., 3RT231. Yes, in accordance with DIN EN 60947-4-
(permanently mounted 1, Annex F.
auxiliary switch block)
• No mirror contacts for the solid-state - 3RH19 11-.NF. .
compatible auxiliary switch blocks
Ambient temperature • Operation °C -25 ... + 60
• Storage °C -55 ... + 80
Degree of protection to EN 60947-1, Annex C IP20, drive system IP40
Touch protection acc. to DIN EN 50274 Finger-safe
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 231
2.8 Technical data
Type 3RT2015, 3RT2017,

3RT2016 3RT2018
Size S00
General data
Shock resistance
• Rectangular pulse • AC operation g/ms 6.7 /5 and 4.2 /10 7.3 /5 and 4.7 /10
• DC operation g/ms > 6.7 /5 and > 7.3 /5 and
> 4.2 /10 > 4.7 /10
• Sine pulse • AC operation g/ms 10.5 /5 and 6.6 /10 11.4 /5 and 7.3 /10
• DC operation g/ms > 10.5 /5 and > 11.4 /5 and
> 6.6 /10 > 7.3 /10
Conductor cross-sections 2)
1) Contact service life for main contacts is listed in the table titled "Contact service life of auxiliary and main contacts"
2) Conductor cross-sections are listed in the table titled "Conductor cross-sections - 3RT201."
Table 2- 79 Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay
Type 3RT2015, 3RT2017,

3RT2016 3RT2018
Size S00
Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay
Main circuit
• Fuse links gL/gG NH 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE acc. to
IEC 60 947-4-1/DIN EN 60 947-4-1
- Type of coordination "1" A 35 50
- Type of coordination "2" A 20 25
- Weld-free3) A 10
• Miniature circuit breakers (up to 230 V) with C characteristic short- A 10
circuit current 1 kA, type of coordination "1"
Auxiliary circuit
• Fuse links gL/gG DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE (weld-free fuse A 10
protection Ik ≥ 1 kA)
• Miniature circuit breakers up to 230 V with C characteristic short- A 6
circuit current Ik < 400 A
1) Contact service life for main contacts is listed in the table titled "Contact service life of auxiliary and main contacts"
2) Conductor cross-sections are listed in the table titled "Conductor cross-sections - 3RT201."
3) Test conditions in accordance with IEC 60 947-4-1.
SIRIUS Innovations
232 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
2.8.1.4 Actuation - 3RT201. contactors
Table 2- 80 Actuation - 3RT201. contactors
Type 3RT2015...16 3RT2017...18

Size S00
Actuation
Magnet coil operating range
• AC operation
50 Hz 0.8 to 1.1 x US
60 Hz 0.85 to 1.1 x US
• DC operation
To 50 °C 0.8 to 1.1 x US
To 60 °C 0.85 to 1.1 x US
Magnet coil power input (for cold coil and 1.0 x Us)
AC operation, 50/60 Hz
• Standard version
- Switch-on power VA 27 / 24.3 37 / 33
- cos ϕ 0.8 / 0.75
- Holding power VA 4.2 / 3.3 5.7 / 4.4
- cos ϕ 0.25 / 0.25
• AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada
- Switch-on power VA 26.4 36
- cos ϕ at switch-on power 0.81 0.8
- Holding power VA 4.4 5.9
- cos ϕ at holding power 0.24
- Switch-on power VA 31.7 43
- cos ϕ at switch-on power 0.81 0.8
- cos ϕ at holding power 0.25
• DC operation
- Switch-on power = holding power W 4
Permissible residual current of electronics (with 0 signal)
• AC operation mA < 3 mA x (239 V/US); < 4 mA x (239 V/US);
the use of the the use of the
additional load module additional load module
3RT2916-1GA00 is 3RT2916-1GA00 is
recommended at recommended at
higher residual higher residual
currents. currents.
• DC operation mA < 10 mA x (24 V/US); the use of the additional
load module 3RT2916-1GA00 is recommended
at higher residual currents.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 233
2.8 Technical data
Type 3RT2015...16 3RT2017...18

Size S00
Actuation
Switching times1)
Total break time = opening delay + arcing time
• AC operation at 0.8 to 1.1 x Us
- Closing delay ms 9 ... 35 8 ... 33
- Opening delay ms 3.5 ... 14 4 ... 15
• DC operation at 0.85 to 1.1 x Us
- Closing delay ms 30 ... 100
- Opening delay ms 7 ... 13
• Arcing time ms 10 ... 15
Switching times at 1.0 x Us1)
• AC operation
- Closing delay ms 9.5 ...24 9 ... 22
- Opening delay ms 4 ... 14 4.5 ... 15
• DC operation
1) The OFF-delay times of the NO contacts and the ON-delay times of the NC contacts increase if the contactor coils are
attenuated against voltage peaks (suppression diode 6x to 10x; diode combinations 2x to 6x; varistor +2 to 5 ms).
SIRIUS Innovations
234 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
2.8.1.5 Main circuit - 3RT201. contactors (current carrying capacity for alternating current and
direct current)
Table 2- 81 Main circuit - Current carrying capacity for alternating current (3RT201. contactors)
Type 3RT2015 3RT2016 3RT2017 3RT2018

Size S00
Main circuit - Current carrying capacity for alternating current
Utilization category AC-1, switching resistive loads
• Rated operational current Ie
At 40 °C up to 690 V A 18 22
At 60 °C up to 690 V A 16 20
• Rated powers of three-phase current loads1) cos ϕ = 0.95 (at
60 °C)
230 V kW 6.3 7.5
400 V kW 11 13
500 V kW 13.8 17
690 V kW 19 22
• Minimum conductor cross-section for loads with Ie
At 40 °C mm2 2.5
At 60 °C mm2 2.5
Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3
• Rated operational currents Ie
400 V A 7 9 12 16
440 V A 7 9 11 15
500 V A 6 7.7 9.2 12.4
690 V A 4.9 6.7 6.7 8.8
• Rated powers of slip-ring or squirrel-cage motors at 50 Hz and
at 60 Hz
230 V kW 2.2 3 3 4
400 V kW 3 4 5.5 7.5
500 V kW 3.5 4.5 5.5 7.5
690 V kW 4 5.5 5.5 7.5
Thermal load
10 s current2) A 56 72 96 128
Power loss per current path At Ie/AC-3 W 0.42 0.7 1.24 2.2
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 235
2.8 Technical data
Type 3RT2015 3RT2016 3RT2017 3RT2018

Size S00
Utilization category AC-4 (at Ia = 6 x Ie)3)
• Rated operational current Ie Up to 400 V A 6.5 8.5 8.5 11.5
• Rated powers of squirrel-cage Up to 400 V kW 3 4 4 5.5
motors at 50 and 60 Hz
• The following applies for a contact service life of approximately
200,000 operating cycles:
- Rated operational Up to 400 V A 2.6 4.1 4.1 5.5
currents Ie 690 V A 1.8 3.3 3.3 4.4
- Rated powers of At 230 V kW 0.67 1.1 1.1 1.5
squirrel-cage 400 V kW 1.15 2 2 2.5
motors at 50 Hz
and 60 Hz 500 V kW 1.45 2 2 3
690 V kW 1.15 2.5 2.5 3.5
Utilization category AC-5a, switching of gas discharge lamps, inductive ballast
Per main current path at 230 V
• Uncorrected, rated power per lamp/rated operational current per
lamp
L 18 W/0.37 A Qty. 47 52
L 36 W/0.43 A Qty. 40 48
L 58 W/0.67 A Qty. 26 28
L 80 W/0.79 A Qty. 22 24
• DUO switching (two-lamp)
L 18 W/0.22 A Qty. 90 (≙ 2 x 90 100 (≙ 2 x 100 lamps)
lamps)
L 36 W/0.42 A Qty. 47 (≙ 2 x 47 52 (≙ 2 x 52 lamps)
lamps)
L 58 W/0.63 A Qty. 31 (≙ 2 x 31 34 (≙ 2 x 34 lamps)
lamps)
L 80 W/0.87 A Qty. 22 (≙ 2 x 22 25 (≙ 2 x 25 lamps)
lamps)
SIRIUS Innovations
236 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
Type 3RT2015 3RT2016 3RT2017 3RT2018

Size S00
Switching of gas discharge lamps with correction
• Shunt compensation with inductive ballast, rated power per
lamp/capacitance/rated operational current per lamp
L 18 W/4.5 μF/0.11 A Qty. 17 22 29 39
L 36 W/4.5 μF/0.21 A Qty. 15 19 21
L 58 W/7.0 μF/0.32 A Qty. 10 14
L 80 W/7.0 μF/0.49 A Qty. 6 9
• With solid-state ballast4) single-lamp
L 18 W/6.8 μF/0.10 A Qty. 49 63 84 112
L 36 W/6.8 μF/0.18 A Qty. 27 35 46 62
L 58 W/10 μF/0.29 A Qty. 16 21 28 38
L 80 W/10 μF/0.43 A Qty. 11 14 19 26
• With solid-state ballast4) two-lamp
L 18 W/10 μF/0.18 A Qty. 27 (≙ 2 x 27 35 (≙ 2 x 35 46 (≙ 2 x 46 62
lamps) lamps) lamps) (≙ 2 x 62
lamps)
L 36 W/10 μF/0.35 A Qty. 14 (≙ 2 x 14 18 (≙ 2 x 18 24 (≙ 2 x 24 32
lamps)
L 58 W/22 μF/0.52 A Qty. 9 (≙ 2 x 9 12 (≙ 2 x 12 16 (≙ 2 x 16 21
lamps)
L 80 W/22 μF/0.86 A Qty. 5 (≙ 2 x 5 7 (≙ 2 x 7 9 (≙ 2 x 9 13
lamps)
Utilization category AC-5b, switching incandescent lamps
Per main current path at 230/220 V kW 1.3 1.7 2.2 3
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 237
2.8 Technical data
Type 3RT2015 3RT2016 3RT2017 3RT2018

Size S00
Utilization category AC-6a, switching AC transformers
- For inrush current Up to 400 V A 4 5.3 7.2 9.6
n = 20
- For inrush current Up to 400 V A 2.7 3.5 4.8 6.4
n = 30
• Rated power P
- For inrush current At 230 V kVA 1.4 2 2.9 3.8
n = 20 400 V kVA 2.5 3.5 5 6.6
500 V kVA 3.3 4.6 6.2 8.3
690 V kVA 4.3 6 8.6 11.4
- For inrush current At 230 V kVA 1 1.3 2 2.5
n = 30 400 V kVA 1.6 2.3 3.5 4.4
500 V kVA 2.2 3.1 4.6 5.5
690 V kVA 2.9 4 6 7.6
For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows: Px = Pn 30 · 30/x
attenuated against voltage peaks (suppression diode 6x to 10x; diode combinations 2x to 6x; varistor +2 to 5 ms).
2) Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1. See the chapter titled "Overload relays" for rated values for different starting conditions.
3) The data specified is valid for 3RT2516 and 3RT2517 (2 NO contacts + 2 NC contacts) only up to a rated operational
current of 400 V.
4) The number of lamps can be increased dependent upon the electronic ballast used.
SIRIUS Innovations
238 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
Table 2- 82 Main circuit - Current carrying capacity for direct current (3RT201. contactors)
Type 3RT2015 3RT2016 3RT2017 3RT2018

Size S00
Main circuit - Current carrying capacity for direct current
Utilization category DC-1, switching resistive loads (L/R ≤1 ms)
• Rated operational current Ie(at 60 °C)
- 1 current path Up to 24 V A 15 20
60 V A 15 20
110 V A 1.5 2.1
220 V A 0.6 0.8
440 V A 0.42 0.6
600 V A 0.42 0.6
- 2 current paths in series Up to 24 V A 15 20
60 V A 15 20
110 V A 8.4 12
220 V A 1.2 1.6
440 V A 1.6 0.8
600 V A 0.5 0.7
60 V A 15 20
110 V A 15 20
220 V A 15 20
440 V A 0.9 1.3
600 V A 0.7 1
Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5, shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)
60 V A 0.35 0.5
110 V A 0.1 0.15
220 V A ---
440 V A ---
600 V A ---
60 V A 3.5 5
110 V A 0.25 0.35
220 V A ---
440 V A ---
600 V A ---
60 V A 15 20
110 V A 15 20
220 V A 1.2 1.5
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 239
2.8 Technical data
Type 3RT2015 3RT2016 3RT2017 3RT2018

Size S00
440 V A 0.14 0.2
600 V A 0.14 0.2
Switching frequency
Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour
• Contactors without overload No-load switching h-1 10000
relay frequency AC
No-load switching h-1 10000
frequency DC
- Dependency of switching Rated operation
frequency z’on operational AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1000
current I’ and operational
voltage U’: AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 750
z’ = z ⋅(Ie/I’) ⋅(400 V/U’)1.5 ⋅1/h AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 750
AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 250
• Contactors with overload relay (mean value) h-1 15
SIRIUS Innovations
240 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
2.8.1.6 Conductor cross-sections - 3RT201. contactors
Table 2- 83 Conductor cross-sections - 3RT201. contactors
Type 3RT2015 3RT2016 3RT2017 3RT2018

Size S00
Main and auxiliary conductors Screw connection
(1 or 2 • Solid + stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)1) acc. to IEC 60947;
conductors max. 2 x 4
can be • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)1)
connected) for
standard • Solid or stranded, AWG cables AWG 2 x (20 to 16)1); 2 x (18 to 14)1); 2 x 12
screwdrivers
• Connection screw M3
size 2 and
Pozidriv 2 - Tightening torque Nm 0.8 to 1.2 (7 to 10.3 lb.in)
Main and auxiliary conductors Spring-loaded connection
Auxiliary conductor Main conductor
(1-wire or 2- • Solid + stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 to 4) 2 x (0.5 to 4)
wire
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) 2 x (0.5 to 2.5)
connection
possible) • Finely stranded without end mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) 2 x (0.5 to 2.5)
sleeve
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 to 12) 2 x (20 to 12)
Main and auxiliary conductors Ring cable lug connection
Connection screw M3 (Pozidriv size PZ 2)
• Operating tool mm ∅5…6
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 … 1.2
• Usable ring cable lugs mm d2 = min. 3.2
mm d3 = max. 7.5
- DIN 46237 with insulating sleeve
- JIS C2805 type RAV with
insulating sleeve
- JIS C2805 type RAP with
insulating sleeve
- DIN 46234 without insulating ≥ PP
sleeve
- DIN 46225 without insulating
1)
sleeve A shrink-on sleeve must be used to provide additional

- JIS C2805 type R without insulation for the ring cable lugs 1).
insulating sleeve • Application temperature: -55 °C/+155 °C
• UL 224 approved
• Flame-protected
1) If two different conductor cross-sections are being connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must be
located in the range indicated. If identical cross-sections are used, this restriction does not apply.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 241
2.8 Technical data
2.8.1.7 General data and short-circuit protection for 3RT202. contactors without overload relay
Table 2- 84 General data - 3RT202. contactors
Type 3RT2023 3RT2024 3RT2025 3RT2026 3RT2027 3RT2028

Size S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0
General data
Permissible • AC and DC operation
r r r
mounting position
The contactors are
dimensioned for
operation on a
vertical mounting
plane.
Vertical mounting • AC and DC operation
position:
Special version required, also applies for coupling

relays 3RT20.-.K40.
Mechanical durability • Basic device Opera- 10 million
ting
• Basic device 10 million
cycles
with snap-on
auxiliary switch
block
• Solid-state 5 million
compatible
auxiliary switch
block
Electrical durability 1)
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution V 690

degree 3)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kW 6
Protective separation between coil and V 400
main contacts (acc. to DIN EN 60947-1,
Annex N)
Mirror contacts
• A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that
cannot be closed simultaneously with a main
NO contact.
- 3RT20 2., 3RT23 2. (removable Yes, in accordance with DIN EN 60947-4-1, Annex F.
auxiliary switch block)
- 3RT20 2., 3RT23 2. (permanently Yes, in accordance with DIN EN 60947-4-1, Annex F.
mounted auxiliary switch block)
Permissible ambient • Operation °C -25 … + 60
temperature
• Storage °C -55 … + 80
SIRIUS Innovations
242 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data

Size S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0
General data
Degree of protection to EN 60947-1, IP20, drive system IP40
Annex C
Shock resistance • AC operation g/ms 7.5/5 and 4.7/10 8.3/5 and 5.3/10
rectangular pulse
• DC operation g/ms > 10/5 and > 7.5/10
Shock resistance • AC operation g/ms 11.8/5 and 7.4/10 13/5 and 8.3/10
sine pulse
• DC operation g/ms > 15/5 and > 10/10
1) Contact service life for main contacts is listed in the table titled "Contact service life of auxiliary and main contacts".
2) Conductor cross-sections are listed in the table titled "Conductor cross-sections - 3RT202.".
Table 2- 85 Short-circuit protection for 3RT202. contactors without overload relay

Size S0
Main circuit
• Fuse links gL/gG NH 3NA, DIAZED 5SB,
NEOZED 5SE acc. to
IEC 60947-4-1/DIN EN 60947-4-1
- Type of coordination "1" A 63 100 125
- Type of coordination "2" A 25 35 50
- Weld-free1) A 10 16 15
• Miniature circuit breaker with C A 25 32 40
characteristic (short-circuit current
3 kA, type of coordination "1")
Auxiliary circuit
• Fuse links gL/gG DIAZED 5SB, A 10
NEOZED 5SE (weld-free fuse
protection Ik ≥ 1 kA)
• Miniature circuit breakers with C A 10
characteristic (short-circuit
current Ik < 400 A)
1) Test conditions in accordance with IEC 60947-4-1.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 243
2.8 Technical data
2.8.1.8 Actuation - 3RT202. contactors
Table 2- 86 Actuation - 3RT202. contactors
Type 3RT2023...25 3RT2026...28

Size S0
Actuation
• AC/DC 0.8 to 1.1 x US
Magnet coil power input (for cold coil and 1.0 x US)
• AC operation, 50 Hz, standard version
- Switch-on power VA 65 77
- cos ϕ 0.82 0.82
- cos ϕ 0.25 0.25
• AC operation, 50/60 Hz, standard version
- Switch-on power VA 68 / 67 81 / 79
- cos ϕ 0.72 / 0.74 0.72 / 0.74
- Holding power VA 9.1 / 7.4 10.5 / 8.5
- cos ϕ 0.25 / 0.28 0.25 / 0.28
- cos ϕ 0.82 0.82
- cos ϕ 0.25 0.25
- cos ϕ 0.76 0.76
- cos ϕ 0.28 0.28
• DC operation
- Switch-on power = holding power W 5.9
• AC operation mA < 6 mA x (230 < 7 mA x (230
V/US) V/US)
• DC operation mA < 16 mA x (24 V/US)
SIRIUS Innovations
244 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
Type 3RT2023...25 3RT2026...28

Size S0
Actuation
Switching times at 0.8 to 1.1 x US1)
• AC operation
- Closing delay ms 9 ... 38 8 ... 40
• DC operation
- Closing delay ms 50 ... 170 50 ... 170
- Opening delay ms 15 ... 17.5
• Arcing time ms 10
• AC operation
- Closing delay ms 10 ... 18 10 ... 17
• DC operation
attenuated against voltage peaks (varistor + 2 ms to 5 ms, diode combination: 2x to 6x).
Table 2- 87 Actuation - 3RT202.-.NB3, 3RT202.-.NF3, 3RT202.-.NP3 contactors
Type 3RT202.-.NB3 3RT202.-.NF3 3RT202.-.NP3

Size S0
Actuation
Magnet coil operating range AC/DC 0.7 to 1.3 x US
• AC operation, 50 Hz, UC version
- Switch-on power VA 6.5/5.7 13.6/13.2 16.1/15.9
- cos ϕ 0.98/0.96 0.98/0.99 0.99/0.99
- Holding power VA 1.26/1.3 1.91/1.9 3.41/3.58
- cos ϕ 0.78/0.8 0.61/0.61 0.36/0.45
• DC operation, UC version
- Switch-on power W 6.7 13.2 15
- Holding power W 0.8 1.56 1.83
• AC operation mA < 7 mA x (230 V/US)
• DC operation mA < 16 mA x (24 V/US)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 245
2.8 Technical data
Type 3RT202.-.NB3 3RT202.-.NF3 3RT202.-.NP3

Size S0
Actuation
• AC operation
- Closing delay ms 60 ... 80 50 ... 70 60 ... 80
- Opening delay ms 30 ... 45 35 ... 45 35 ... 50
• DC operation
- Closing delay ms 60 ... 75 50 ... 70 50 ... 75
- Opening delay ms 30 ... 45 35 ... 45 40 ... 50
• Arcing time ms 10
• AC operation
- Closing delay ms 65 ... 80 50 ... 70 60 ... 80
- Opening delay ms 30 ... 45 35 ... 45 30 ... 50
• DC operation
- Closing delay ms 60 ... 80 56 ... 70 60 ... 80
- Opening delay ms 30 ... 45 35 ... 45 30 ... 50
attenuated against voltage peaks (varistor + 2 ms to 5 ms, diode combination: 2x to 6x).
SIRIUS Innovations
246 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
2.8.1.9 Main circuit - 3RT202. contactors (current carrying capacity for alternating current)
Table 2- 88 Main circuit - Current carrying capacity for alternating current (3RT202. contactors)

23 24 25 26 27 28
Size S0
• Rated operational current Ie At 40 °C up to 690 V A 40 50
At 60 °C up to 690 V A 35 42
• Rated powers of three-phase 230 V kW 13.3 16
current loads1) cos ϕ = 0.95
400 V kW 23 28
(at 60 °C)
500 V kW 29 35
690 V kW 40 48
• Minimum conductor cross- At 40 °C mm2 10
section for loads with Ie
At 60 °C mm2 10
• Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V A 9 12 17 25 32 38
440 V A 9 12 17 22 32 35
500 V A 6.8 12.4 17 18 32 32
690 V A 6.7 9 13 13 21 21
• Rated powers of slip-ring or Up to 110 V kW 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 4
squirrel-cage motors at 50 Hz
230 V kW 3 3 4 5.5 7.5 7.5
and at 60 Hz
400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
500 V kW 4 7.5 10 11 18.5 18.5
660 V/690 V kW 5.5 7.5 11 11 18.5 18.5
Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 80 110 150 200 260 300
Power loss per current path At Ie/AC-3 W 0.4 0.5 0.9 1.6 2.7 3.8
Utilization category AC-4 (at Ia = 6 x Ie)
• Rated operational current Ie Up to 400 V A 8.5 12.5 15.5 15.5 22 22
• Rated powers of squirrel-cage At 400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 7.5 11 11
motors at 50 and 60 Hz
The following applies for a contact service life of approximately 200,000 operating cycles:
- Rated operational Up to 400 V A 4.1 5.5 7.7 9 12 12
currents Ie Up to 690 V A 3.3 5.5 7.7 9 12 12
- Rated powers of At 110 V kW 0.5 0.73 1 1.2 1.6 1.6
squirrel-cage motors at 230 V kW 1.1 4.8 2 2.5 3.4 3.4
50 Hz and 60 Hz
400 V kW 2 2.6 3.5 4.4 6 6
500 V kW 2 3.3 4.6 5.6 7.5 7.5
690 V kW 2.5 4.6 6 7.7 10.3 10.3
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 247
2.8 Technical data

23 24 25 26 27 28
Size S0
Utilization category AC-5a, switching of gas discharge lamps, inductive ballast
Per main current path at 230 V3)
• Rated power per lamp/rated operational current per lamp
- Uncorrected L 18 W/0.37 A Qty. 95 118
L 36 W/0.43 A Qty. 81 102
L 58 W/0.67 A Qty. 52 65
L 80 W/0.79 A Qty. 44 55
- DUO switching (two- L 18 W/0.22 A Qty. 181 (≙ 2 x 181 lamps) 227 (≙ 2 x 227
lamp) lamps)
L 36 W/0.42 A Qty. 95 (≙ 2 x 95 lamps) 119 (≙ 2 x 119
lamps)
L 58 W/0.63 A Qty. 63 (≙ 2 x 63 lamps) 79 (≙ 2 x 79
lamps)
L 80 W/0.87 A Qty. 45 (≙ 2 x 45 lamps) 57 (≙ 2 x 57
lamps)
Switching of gas discharge lamps with correction
• Rated power per lamp/capacitance/rated operational current
per lamp
- Shunt L 18 W/4.5 μF/0.11 A Qty. 37 41 61 78 93
compensation, L 36 W/4.5 μF/0.21 A Qty. 30 30 51 71 71
with inductive
ballast L 58 W/7.0 μF/0.32 A Qty. 20 20 33 46 46
L 80 W/7.0 μF/0.49 A Qty. 13 13 22 30 30
- With solid- L 18 W/6.8 μF/0.10 A Qty. 105 119 175 224 266
state ballast4) L 36 W/6.8 μF/0.18 A Qty. 58 66 97 124 147
single-lamp
L 58 W/10 μF/0.29 A Qty. 36 41 60 77 91
L 80 W/10 μF/0.43 A Qty. 24 27 40 52 61
- With solid- L 18 W/10 μF/0.18 A Qty. 58 (≙ 66 (≙ 97 (≙ 124 (≙ 147 (≙
state ballast4) 2 x 58 lamps) 2 x 66 la 2 x 97 l 2 x 12 2 x 147
two-lamp mps) amps) 4 lamp lamps)
s)
L 36 W/10 μF/0.35 A Qty. 30 (≙ 34 (≙ 50 (≙ 64 (≙ 76 (≙
2 x 30 lamps) 2 x 34 la 2 x 50 l 2 x 64 l 2 x 76 l
mps) amps) amps) amps)
L 58 W/22 μF/0.52 A Qty. 20 (≙ 22 (≙ 33 (≙ 43 (≙ 51 (≙
L 80 W/22 μF/0.86 A Qty. 12 (≙ 13 (≙ 20 (≙ 26 (≙ 30 (≙
SIRIUS Innovations
248 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data

23 24 25 26 27 28
Size S0
Utilization category AC-5b, switching incandescent lamps
Per main current path at 230/220 V kW 2.8 3.2 4.7 6 7.2
Utilization category AC-6a, switching AC transformers
- For inrush current n = 20 Up to 400 V A 11.4 20.2 30.8
- For inrush current n = 30 Up to 400 V A 7.6 13.5 20.5
• Rated operational power P
- For inrush current n = 20 At 230 V kV/A 4.5 8 12.3
400 V kV/A 7.9 13.9 21.3
500 V kV/A 9.9 15.5 26.6
690 V kV/A 13.6 15.5 25
- For inrush current n = 30 At 230 V kV/A 3 5.4 8.2
400 V kV/A 5.2 9.3 14.2
500 V kV/A 6.6 11.7 17.7
690 V kV/A 9.1 15.5 24.5
For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be
recalculated as follows:
Px = Pn30 ⋅ 30/x
Utilization category AC-6b, switching low-inductance (low-loss,
metallized-dielectric) AC capacitors
• Rated operational currents Ie Up to 400 V A 5.8 10.8 15
• Rated powers for single capacitors At 230 V kvar 2.5 10.8 6
or capacitor banks (minimum
400 V kvar 4 4 10.4
inductance of 6 μH between
capacitors connected in parallel) at 500 V kvar 4 7.4 10.4
50 Hz and 60 Hz
690 V kvar 4 7.5 10.4
1) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc. (increased power consumption on heating up taken
into account).
2) Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1. See the chapter titled "Overload relays" for rated values for different starting conditions.
3) For Ie/AC-1 = 35 A (60 °C) and the corresponding minimum conductor cross-section 10 mm2.
4) The number of lamps can be increased dependent upon the electronic ballast used.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 249
2.8 Technical data
2.8.1.10 Rated data for auxiliary contacts (CSA and UL)
Table 2- 89 Rated data for auxiliary contacts (CSA and UL)
Type Screw connection and Screw connection and Screw connection and
spring-loaded spring-loaded spring-loaded
connection connection connection
Integrated or snap-on Integrated or snap-on Laterally
auxiliary switch block auxiliary switch block mountable
auxiliary switch block
Size S00 S0 S00/S0
CSA and UL rated data for auxiliary contacts
Rated voltage V AC 600 600 600
Switching capacity A 600, Q 600 A 600, Q 600 A 300, Q 600
• Continuous A 10 10 10
current at
240 V AC
SIRIUS Innovations
250 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
2.8.1.11 Main circuit - 3RT202. contactors (current carrying capacity for direct current)
Table 2- 90 Main circuit - Current carrying capacity for direct current (3RT202. contactors)

23 24 25 26 27 28
Size S0
- 1 current path Up to 24 V A 35
60 V A 20
110 V A 4.5
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.4
600 V A 0.25
- 2 current paths in series Up to 24 V A 35
60 V A 35
110 V A 35
220 V A 5
440 V A 1
600 V A 0.8
60 V A 35
110 V A 35
220 V A 35
440 V A 2.9
600 V A 1.4
Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5, shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)
Rated operational current Ie(at 60 °C)
- 1 current path Up to 24 V A 20
60 V A 5
110 V A 2.5
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.09
600 V A 0.06
60 V A 35
110 V A 15
220 V A 3
440 V A 0.27
600 V A 0.16
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 251
2.8 Technical data

23 24 25 26 27 28
Size S0
60 V A 35
110 V A 35
220 V A 10
440 V A 0.6
600 V A 0.6
Switching frequency
Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour
• Contactors without overload No-load switching h-1 5000
relay frequency AC
No-load switching h-1 1500
frequency DC
Dependency of switching AC-1 (AC/DC) h-1 1000
frequency z’on operational AC-2 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 750
current I’ and operational
voltage U’: AC-3 (AC/DC) h-1 1000 750
z’ = z ⋅(Ie/I’) ⋅(400 V/U’)1.5 ⋅1/h AC-4 (AC/DC) h-1 300 250
• Contactors with overload relay (mean value) h-1 15
SIRIUS Innovations
252 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
2.8.1.12 Conductor cross-sections - 3RT202. contactors
Table 2- 91 Conductor cross-sections - 3RT202. contactors
Type 3RT20 23 3RT20 24 3RT20 25 3RT20 26 3RT20 27 3RT20 28

Size S0
Conductor cross-sections (1-wire or 2-wire connection possible)
Main conductor Screw connection
Conductor cross-section
• Solid + stranded mm2 2 x (1 to 2.5)1); 2 x (2.5 to 10)1) acc. to IEC 60947
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (1 to 2.5)1); 2 x (2.5 to 6)1); max. 1 x 10
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (16 to 12); 2 x (14 to 8)
• Connection screws M4 (Pozidriv size PZ 2)
- Tightening torque Nm 2 to 2.5 (18 to 22 lb.in.)
(lb.in.)
Auxiliary conductor
• Solid + stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)1) acc. to IEC 60947
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)1)
• Solid or stranded AWG (2 x) AWG 2 x (20 to 16)1); 2 x (18 to 14)1)
• Connection screws M3
- Tightening torque Nm 0.8 to 1.2 (7 to 10.3 lb.in.)
(lb.in.)
Main conductor Spring-loaded connection
• Solid + stranded mm2 2 x (1 to 10)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (1 to 6)
• Finely stranded without end mm2 2 x (1 to 6)
sleeve
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 to 8)
Auxiliary conductor
• Solid + stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)
• Finely stranded without end mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)
sleeve
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 253
2.8 Technical data
Type 3RT20 23 3RT20 24 3RT20 25 3RT20 26 3RT20 27 3RT20 28

Size S0
Main conductor Ring cable lug connection
• Operating tool ∅ 5 ... 6
• Tightening torque Nm 2 ... 2.5
mm d3 = min. 12.2
- DIN 46237 with
insulating sleeve
- JIS C2805 type RAV
with insulating sleeve
- JIS C2805 type RAP
- DIN 46234 without ≥ PP
insulating sleeve
- DIN 46225 without
1)
insulating sleeve A shrink-on sleeve must be used to provide additional insulation for the ring
- JIS C2805 type R cable lugs 1).
without insulating • Application temperature: -55 °C/+155 °C
sleeve • UL 224 approved
• Flame-protected
Auxiliary conductor
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2
mm d3 = min. 7.5
- DIN 46237 with
insulating sleeve
- JIS C2805 type RAV
- JIS C2805 type RAP
- DIN 46234 without ≥ PP
insulating sleeve
- DIN 46225 without
1)
insulating sleeve A shrink-on sleeve must be used to provide additional insulation for the ring
- JIS C2805 type R cable lugs 1).
without insulating • Application temperature: -55 °C/+155 °C
sleeve • UL 224 approved
• Flame-protected
SIRIUS Innovations
254 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
2.8.1.13 Rated data (CSA and UL) for 3RT201. and 3RT202. contactors
Table 2- 92 CSA and UL rated data (3RT201. contactors)
Type 3RT20 15 3RT20 16 3RT20 17 3RT20 18

Size S00
CSA and UL rated data
Rated insulation voltage V AC 600
Continuous current, • Open and encapsulated A 20
at 40 °C
Maximum horsepower ratings
(CSA- and UL-approved values)
• Rated powers of three-phase At 200 V hp 1.5 2 3 3
motors at 60 Hz
230 V hp 2 3 3 5
460 V hp 3 5 7.5 10
575 V hp 5 7.5 10 10
Short-circuit protection1) At 600 V kA 5
(contactor or overload relay)
• Fuse class RK5 A 40
• Circuit breakers with A 50
overload protection acc. to
UL 489
• Combination motor controller type E to UL 508
- At 480 V Type --- --- --- ---
A --- --- --- ---
kA --- --- --- ---
- At 600 V Type --- --- --- ---
A --- --- --- ---
kA --- --- --- ---
1)For more detailed information about short-circuit values, e.g. for protection against high short-circuit currents, see the UL
reports (http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support) for the individual devices.
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size hp --- 0
Continuous current
- Open A --- 18
- Encapsulated A --- 18
• Rated powers of three-phase At 200 V hp --- 3
motors at 60 Hz
230 V hp --- 3
460 V hp --- 5
575 V hp --- 5
Overload relay
• Type 3RU2116/3RB3016
• Setting range A 0.11 … 16 / 0.1 ... 16
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 255
2.8 Technical data
Table 2- 93 CSA and UL rated data (3RT202. contactors)

23 24 25 26 27 28
Size S0
Rated insulation voltage V AC 600
Continuous current, • Open and A 35 42
at 40 °C encapsulated
Maximum horsepower ratings
(CSA- and UL-approved values)
• Rated powers of three-phase At 200 V hp 2 3 5 7.5 10 10
motors at 60 Hz
230 V hp 3 3 5 7.5 10 10
460 V hp 5 7.5 10 15 20 25
575 V hp 7.5 10 15 20 25 25
Short-circuit protection1) At 600 V kA 5
(contactor or overload relay)
• Fuse class RK5 A 45 45 45 70 110 110
• Circuit breakers A 70 70 70 100 100 100
with overload
protection acc. to
UL 489
• Combination motor controller type E to UL 508
- At 480 V Type 3RV202
A ---2)
kA ---2)
- At 600 V Type 3RV202
A ---2)
kA ---2)
2) Values available in October 2010.
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size hp --- 1
Continuous current
- Open A --- 27
- Encapsulated A --- 27
• Rated powers of three-phase At 200 V hp --- 7.5 7.7
motors at 60 Hz
230 V hp --- 7.5
460 V hp --- 10
575 V hp --- 10
Overload relay
• Type 3RU2126/3RB3026
• Setting range A 1.8 … 40 / 0.1 ... 40
SIRIUS Innovations
256 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
2.8.2 Contactors for specific applications (3RT23 and 3RT25)
2.8.2.1 General data, short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay and
actuation (3RT231. and 3RT232. contactors)
Table 2- 94 General data - 3RT231. and 3RT232. contactors
Type 3RT2316 3RT2317 3RT2325 3RT2326 3RT2327

Size S00 S0
General data
Permissible mounting position1)
Mechanical durability Operating 30 million 10 million
cycles
Electrical durability Operating Approx. 0.5 million
cycles
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690
(pollution degree 3)
Permissible • Operation °C -25 ... +60
ambient
• Storage °C -55 ... +80
temperature
Degree of protection to EN 60947-1, Device IP20 IP20 (terminal
Annex C compartment IP00)
1) Corresponding to the relevant 3-pole 3RT2. contactors.
Table 2- 95 Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay (3RT231. and 3RT232. contactors)
Type 3RT2316 3RT2317 3RT2325 3RT2326 3RT2327

Size S00 S0
Main circuit
Fuse links, operating • Type of A 35 63 160
class gL/gG coordination
"1"1)
NH 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, • Type of A 20 25 / 35 63
NEOZED 5SE coordination
"2"1)
Acc. to • Weld-free A 10 16 50
IEC 60947-4-1/DIN EN
60947-4-1
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 257
2.8 Technical data
Table 2- 96 Actuation of 3RT231. and 3RT232. contactors
Type 3RT2316 3RT2317 3RT2325 3RT2326 3RT2327

Size S00 S0
Actuation
Magnet coil operating range AC/DC --- 0.8 to 1.1 x US
• AC operation
50 Hz 0.8 to 1.1 x US ---
60 Hz 0.85 to 1.1 x US ---
• DC operation
Up to 0.8 to 1.1 x US ---
50 °C
Up to 0.85 to 1.1 x US ---
60 °C
- Switch-on power VA --- 77
- cos ϕ --- 0.82
- Holding power VA --- 9.8
- cos ϕ --- 0.25
• AC operation, 50/60 Hz, standard version
- Switch-on power VA 27/24.3 37/33 81/79
- cos ϕ 0.8/0.75 0.8/0.75 0.72/0.74
- Holding power VA 4.2/3.3 5.7/4.4 10.5/8.5
- cos ϕ 0.25/0.25 0.25/0.25 0.25/0.28
- Switch-on power VA 26.4 36 77
- cos ϕ 0.81 0.8 0.82
- Holding power VA 4.4 5.9 9.8
- cos ϕ 0.24 0.24 0.25
- Switch-on power VA 31.7 43 87
- cos ϕ 0.77 0.77 0.76
- Holding power VA 4.8 6.5 9.4
- cos ϕ 0.25 0.25 0.28
• DC operation
- Switch-on power = W 4 5.9
holding power
SIRIUS Innovations
258 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
Type 3RT2316 3RT2317 3RT2325 3RT2326 3RT2327

Size S00 S0
Actuation
Permissible residual current of electronics (with 0
signal)
• AC operation mA < 4 mA x (239 V/US); < 6 mA x (230 V/US)
the use of the
additional load module
3RT2916-1GA00 is
recommended at
higher residual
currents.
• DC operation mA < 10 mA x (24 V/US); < 16 mA x (24 V/US)
the use of the
additional load module
3RT2916-1GA00 is
recommended at
higher residual
currents.
• AC operation
- Closing delay ms 9 ... 35 8 ... 33 9 ... 38 8 ... 40
- Opening delay ms 3.5 ... 14 4 ... 15 4 ... 16 4 ... 16
• DC operation
- Closing delay ms 30 ... 100 30 ... 100 50 ... 170
- Opening delay ms 7 ... 13 7 ... 13 15 ... 17.5
• Arcing time ms 10 ...15 10
Switching times at 1.0 x US1)
• AC operation
- Closing delay ms 9.5 ... 24 9 ... 22 10 ... 18 10 ... 17
- Opening delay ms 4 ... 14 4.5 ... 15 4 ... 16
• DC operation
- Closing delay ms 35 ... 50 35 ... 50 55 ... 80
- Opening delay ms 7 ... 12 7 ... 12 16 ... 17
attenuated against voltage peaks (varistor +2 ms to 5 ms, diode combination: 2x to 6x).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 259
2.8 Technical data
2.8.2.2 Main circuit - 3RT231. and 3RT232. (current carrying capacity for alternating current
and direct current)
Table 2- 97 Main circuit - Current carrying capacity for alternating current (3RT231. and 3RT232. contactors)
Type 3RT2316 3RT2317 3RT2325 3RT2326 3RT2327

Size S00 S0
• Rated operational currents Ie At 40 °C, A 18 22 35 40 50
up to
690 V
At 60 °C, A 16 20 30 35 42
up to
690 V
• Rated powers of three-phase At 230 V kW 6.5 7.5 11 13 16
current loads cos ϕ = 0.95 (at
400 V kW 11 13 20 23 28
60 °C)
• Minimum conductor cross- At 40 °C mm2 2.5 10
At 60 °C mm2 2.5 10
• Rated operational currents At 60 °C, A 9 12 17
Ie(at 60 °C) up to
400 V
• Rated powers of slip-ring or At 230 V kW 3 4
squirrel-cage motors at
400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5
50 Hz and at 60 Hz
Table 2- 98 Main circuit - Current carrying capacity for direct current (3RT231. and 3RT232. contactors)
Type 3RT2316 3RT2317 3RT2325 3RT2326 3RT2327

Size S00 S0
• Rated operational currents Ie(at 60 °C)
- 1 current path Up to 24 V A 16 20 30 35 42
60 V A 16 20 20
110 V A 2.1 4.5
220 V A 0.8 1
440 V A 0.6 0.4
- 2 current Up to 24 V A 16 20 30 35 42
paths in 60 V A 16 20 30 35 42
series
110 V A 12 30 35 42
220 V A 1.6 1
440 V A 0.8 1
SIRIUS Innovations
260 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
Type 3RT2316 3RT2317 3RT2325 3RT2326 3RT2327

Size S00 S0
- 3 current Up to 24 V A 16 20 30 35 42
paths in series 60 V A 16 20 30 35 42
110 V A 16 20 30 35 42
220 V A 16 20 30 35 42
440 V A 1.3 2.9
- 4 current Up to 24 V A 16 20 30 35 42
paths in series 60 V A 16 20 30 35 42
110 V A 16 20 30 35 42
220 V A 16 20 30 35 42
440 V A 1.3 2.9
Utilization category DC-3/DC-5, shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)
60 V A 0.5 5
110 V A 0.15 2.5
220 V A --- --- 1
440 V A --- --- 0.09
- 2 current paths Up to 24 V A 16 20 30 35 42
in series 60 V A 5 30 35 42
110 V A 0.35 15
220 V A --- --- 3
440 V A --- --- 0.27
in series 60 V A 16 20 30 35 42
110 V A 16 20 30 35 42
220 V A 1.5 10
440 V A 0.2 0.6
in series 60 V A 16 20 30 35 42
110 V A 16 20 30 35 42
220 V A 1.5 30 35 42
440 V A 0.2 0.6
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 261
2.8 Technical data
2.8.2.3 General data, short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay and
actuation (3RT251. and 3RT252. contactors)
Table 2- 99 General data - 3RT251. and 3RT252. contactors
Type 3RT2516 3RT2517 3RT2518 3RT2526

Size S00 S0
General data
Permissible mounting position1)
Mechanical durability Operati 30 million 10 million
ng
cycles
Electrical durability Operati Approx. 0.5 million
ng
cycles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3) V 690
temperature
• Storage °C -55 … + 80
Degree of protection to EN 60947-1, Annex C IP20 IP20
(terminal
compartment
IP00)
Table 2- 100 Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relay (3RT251. and 3RT252. contactors)
Type 3RT2516 3RT2517 3RT2518 3RT2526

Size S00 S0
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG • Type of coordination A 35 63
"1"
NH 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, • Type of coordination A 20 35
NEOZED 5SE "2"
Acc. to • Weld-free V 10 16
IEC 60947-4-1/DIN EN 60947-4-1
SIRIUS Innovations
262 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
Table 2- 101 Actuation of 3RT251. and 3RT252. contactors
Type 3RT2516 3RT2517 3RT2518 3RT2526

Size S00 S0
Actuation
Magnet coil operating range See 3RT2316 See 3RT2317 See 3RT2326
Magnet coil power input (for cold coil and 1.0 x US) See 3RT2316 See 3RT2317 See 3RT2326
Switching times at 0.8 to 1.1 x US See 3RT2316 See 3RT2317 See 3RT2326
2.8.2.4 Main circuit - 3RT251. and 3RT252. (current carrying capacity for alternating current
and direct current)
Table 2- 102 Main circuit - Current carrying capacity for alternating current (3RT251. and 3RT252. contactors)
Type 3RT2516 3RT2517 3RT2518 3RT2526

Size S00 S0
• Rated operational currents Ie At 40 °C up to 690 V A 18 22 22 40
At 60 °C up to 690 V A 16 20 20 20
• Rated powers of three-phase At 230 V kW 6.5 7.5 7.5 15
current loads cos ϕ = 0.95 (at
400 V kW 11 13 13 26
60 °C)
• Minimum conductor cross- At 40 °C mm2 2.5 2.5 2.5 10
Utilization category AC-2 and AC-31)
• Rated operational currents Up to 400 V A 9 13 / 9 16 / 9 25
Ie(at 60 °C)
• Rated powers of slip-ring or At 230 V kW 3 3 / 2.2 4 / 2.2 5.5
squirrel-cage motors at
400 V kW 4 5.5 / 4 7.5 / 4 11
50 Hz and at 60 Hz
1) The values after the slash apply for the NC contact.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 263
2.8 Technical data
Table 2- 103 Main circuit - Current carrying capacity for direct current (3RT251. and 3RT252. contactors)
Type 3RT2516 3RT2517 3RT2518 3RT2526

Size S00 S0
- 1 current path Up to 24 V A 16 20 20 35
60 V A 16 20 20 20
110 V A 2.1 2.1 2.1 4.5
220 V A 0.8 0.8 0.8 1
440 V A 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.4
- 2 current paths in Up to 24 V A 16 20 20 35
series 60 V A 16 20 20 35
110 V A 12 12 12 35
220 V A 1.6 1.6 1.6 5
440 V A 0.8 0.8 0.8 1
Utilization category DC-3/DC-51), shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R ≤ 15 ms)
- 1 current path Up to 24 V A 16 20 20 20
60 V A 0.5 0.5 0.5 5
110 V A 0.15 0.15 0.15 2.5
220 V A 0.75 0.75 0.75 1
440 V A --- --- --- 0.09
- 2 current paths in Up to 24 V A 16 20 20 35
series 60 V A 5 5 5 35
110 V A 0.35 0.35 0.35 15
220 V A --- --- --- 3
440 V A --- --- --- 0.27
1) For US > 24 V the rated operational currents Iefor the NC contact current paths are equal to 50% of the values for the
NO contact current paths.
SIRIUS Innovations
264 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
2.8.3 Contactors with extended operating range
Table 2- 104 Contactors with series resistor and coupling relays for railway applications
Type 3RT20 17 3RT20 2.

Size S00 S0
Magnet coil operating range AC/DC 0.7 to 1.25 x US 0.7 to 1.25 x US
Contactors with series resistor
- Switch-on power W 13 ---
- Holding power W 4 ---
Coupling relays for railway applications
(contactors without series resistor)
- Switch-on power W 2.8 4.5
- Holding power W 2.8 4.5
Vertical mounting position Standard version • 3RT202.-3K.40:
Special version required
• 3RT202.-3K.44-0LA0:
Special version required
Where specifications have not been included the information and technical data for the standard contactors apply.
Table 2- 105 Contactors with electronic drive
Type 3RT202..-2XB4..-0LA2 3RT202..-2XBF4..-0LA2

Size S0
Magnet coil operating range 0.7 to 1.3 x US
Magnet coil power input (for cold coil and
1.0 x US)
- Switch-on power W 6.7 13.2
- Holding power W 0.8 1.6
Vertical mounting position Special version required
Where specifications have not been included the information and technical data for the standard contactors apply.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 265
2.8 Technical data
2.8.3.2 Coupling relays
3RH21 auxiliary coupling relays for switching auxiliary circuits
Technical data for 3RH21 auxiliary coupling relays

Unless listed below, the technical data is the same as that for 3RH21 auxiliary contactor
relays.
Table 2- 106 Technical data for 3RH21..-.HB40, 3RH21..-.JB40, 3RH21..-.KB40 contactors
Type 3RH21..-.HB40 3RH21..-.JB40 3RH21..-.KB40

Size S00
Magnet coil power input (with cold
coil)
Switch-on power = holding power
At US = 17 V W 1.4
At US = 24 V W 2.8
At US = 30 V W 4.4
Permissible residual current < 10 mA x (24 V/US)
of electronics with 0 signal
Magnet coil suppressor circuit Without With diode Suppressor diode
overvoltage
attenuation
Switching times
Switching on at 17 V
- ON-delay NO ms 40 ... 130
- OFF-delay NC ms 30 ... 80
At 24 V
At 30 V
Switching off at 17 to 30 V
- OFF-delay NO ms 70 ... 20 38 ... 65 7 ... 20
- ON-delay NC ms 20 ... 30 55 ... 75 20 ... 30
Vertical mounting position Please contact your local Siemens office for advice
SIRIUS Innovations
266 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
Table 2- 107 Technical data for 3RH21..-.MB40-0KT0, 3RH21..-.VB40, 3RH21..-.WB40 contactors
Type 3RH21..-.MB40-0KT0 3RH21..-.VB40 3RH21..-.WB40

Size S00 S00 S00
Magnet coil power input (for cold coil) W 1.6
Switch-on power = holding power at US = 24 V
Permissible residual current mA < 8 mA x (24 V/US)
of electronics with 0 signal
Magnet coil suppressor circuit Diode, varistor or RC Built-in diode Suppressor diode
element attachable
Operating times for coupling relays

Switching on at 20.5 V
At 24 V
At 44 V
Switching off at 17 to 30 V
- OFF-delay NO ms 5 ... 20 20 ... 80 5 ... 20
- ON-delay NC ms 10 ... 30 30 ... 90 10 ... 30
Vertical mounting position Please contact your local Siemens office for advice
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 267
2.8 Technical data
3RT20 coupling relays for switching motors
Technical data for 3RT20 coupling relays

Unless listed below, the technical data is the same as that for 3RT20 contactors for switching
motors.
Table 2- 108 General data and actuation for coupling relays 3RT201.-..B4. and 3RT202.-..B4.
Type 3RT201.-.HB4. 3RT201.-.JB4. 3RT201.-.KB4. 3RT202.-.KB4.

Size S00 S0
General data
Mechanical durability Operat 30 million 10 million
ing
cycles
Protective separation between coil and V 400
main contacts acc. to DIN EN 60947-1,
Annex N
Actuation
Magnet coil power At US 17 V W 1.4 2.3
input 24 V W 2.8 4.5
(for cold coil)
Switch-on power = 30 V W 4.4 7
holding power
Permissible residual current mA < 10 mA x (24 V/US) <6
of electronics (with 0 signal) mA x (24 V/US)
Magnet coil suppressor circuit Without With diode Suppressor With varistor
overvoltage diode
attenuation
8

• Switching on
- At 17 V ON-delay NO ms 40 ... 130 70 ... 270
OFF-delay NC ms 30 ... 80 60 ... 250
- At 24 V ON-delay NO ms 35 ... 60 65 ... 90
OFF-delay NC ms 25 ... 40 55 ... 80
- At 30 V ON-delay NO ms 25 ... 50 52 ... 65
OFF-delay NC ms 15 ... 30 43 ... 57
• Switching off at 17 to 30 V
OFF-delay NO ms 7 ... 20 38 ... 65 7 ... 20 19 ... 21
ON-delay NC ms 20 ... 30 55 ... 75 20 ... 30 25 ... 31
SIRIUS Innovations
268 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
Table 2- 109 General data and actuation (coupling relays 3RT201.-1MB4.-0KT0, 3RT201.-1VB4., 3RT201.-1WB4.)
Type 3RT201.-1MB4.-0KT0 3RT201.-1VB4. 3RT201.-1WB4.

Size S00
General data
Mechanical durability Operating 30 million
cycles
Protective separation between V 400
coil and main contacts acc. to
DIN EN 60947-1, Annex N
Actuation
Magnet coil power At US 24 V W 1.6
input
(for cold coil)
Switch-on power =
holding power
Permissible residual current, On request
vertical mounting position
Magnet coil suppressor circuit Without overvoltage With diode Suppressor diode
attenuation

• Switching on
- At 20.5 V ON-delay NO ms 30 ... 120
OFF-delay NC ms 20 ... 110
- At 24 V ON-delay NO ms 25 ... 90
- At 44 V ON-delay NO ms 15 ... 60
• Switching off at 17 to 30 V
OFF-delay NO ms 5 ... 20 20 ... 80 5 ... 20
ON-delay NC ms 10 ... 30 30 ... 90 10 ... 30
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 269
2.8 Technical data
2.8.4 3RH2 contactor relays
2.8.4.1 Permissible mounting position, positively driven operation of contacts and contact
reliability of 3RH2 contactor relays (4- and 8-pole)
Table 2- 110 Permissible mounting position of 3RH2 contactor relays
Type 3RH2
Size S00
Permissible mounting position
The contactors are dimensioned for • AC and DC operation
r r r
operation on a vertical mounting plane.
Vertical mounting position: • AC operation
Special version required.

• DC operation Standard version (please contact your local
Siemens office for advice regarding
3RH21 22-2K.40 coupling relays with
extended operating range)
Table 2- 111 Positively driven operation of contacts in the case of 3RH2 contactor relays
Type 3RH2
Size S00
Positively driven operation of contacts in the case of contactor relays
3RH2: Explanation:
Yes, in the basic device and the auxiliary switch block as well There is positively driven operation if it is ensured that the
as between the basic device and the snap-on auxiliary switch NC contact and the NO contact cannot be closed at the
block (removable) in accordance with: same time.
• ZH 1/457
• DIN EN 60947-5-1, Annex L ZH1/457
Safety rules for control units on power-operated presses
in the metalworking industry.
3RH22: DIN EN 60947-5-1, Annex L
Yes, in the basic device and the auxiliary switch block as well Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Specific
as between the basic device and the snap-on auxiliary switch requirements to be met by positively driven contacts.
block (permanently mounted) in accordance with:
• ZH 1/457
• DIN EN 60947-5-1, Annex L
SIRIUS Innovations
270 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
Table 2- 112 Contact reliability of 3RH2 contactor relays
Type 3RH2
Size S00
Contact reliability
Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA acc. to DIN EN 60947-5-4 Frequency of contact faults < 10-8, i.e. < 1 error per
100 million operating cycles
2.8.4.2 General data, rated data (CSA and UL), and data relating to short-circuit protection for
3RH2. contactor relays
Table 2- 113 General data – 3RH2. contactor relays
Type 3RH21, 3RH22 3R24

Size S00
General data
Mechanical durability • Basic device Opera- 30 million 5 million
ting
• Basic device with snap-on 10 million
cycles
• Solid-state compatible 5 million
Protective separation between coil and contacts in basic V 400
device acc. to DIN EN 60947-1, Annex N
temperature
• Storage °C -55 … + 80
Degree of protection to EN 60947-1, Annex C IP20, drive system IP40
Shock resistance
• Rectangular pulse AC operation/DC operation g/ms 7.3/5 and 4.7/10
g/ms > 10/5 and > 5/10
• Sine pulse AC operation/DC operation g/ms 11.4/5 and 7.3/10
g/ms > 15/5 and > 8/10
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 271
2.8 Technical data
Table 2- 114 Short-circuit protection for 3RH2. contactor relays
Type 3RH21, 3RH22 3RH24

Size S00 S00
Short-circuit protection
(weld-free fuse protection at Ik ≥1 kA)
• Fuse links, operating class gL/gG
- DIAZED, type 5SB A 10
- NEOZED, type 5SE A 10
• Or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic A 6
(short-circuit current Ik < 400 A)
Table 2- 115 CSA and UL rated data (3RH2. contactor relays)

Size S00 S00
Basic devices and auxiliary switch blocks
• Rated control supply voltage V AC max. 600
• Rated voltage V AC 600
• Switching capacity A 600, Q 600
• Continuous current at 240 V AC A 10
SIRIUS Innovations
272 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
2.8.4.3 Conductor cross-sections - 3RH2. contactor relays
Table 2- 116 Conductor cross-sections - 3RH2. contactor relays

Size S00 S00
Auxiliary conductor connections and coil terminals Screw connection
• Solid + stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5); 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) acc.
to IEC 60947; max. 2 x 4
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5); 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 to 16); 2 x (18 to 14); 2 x 12
• Connection screws M3
- Tightening torque Nm (lb.in.) 0.8 to 1.2 (7 to 10.3 lb.in.)
Auxiliary conductor connections and coil terminals (basic device) Spring-loaded connection
• Solid + stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 to 4)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5)
Auxiliary conductor connections for auxiliary switch block mounted on the front
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5)
Auxiliary conductor connections and coil terminals Ring cable lug connection
• Operating tool mm ∅5…6
mm d3 = max. 7.5
- JIS C2805 type RAV with insulating
sleeve
- JIS C2805 type RAP with insulating
sleeve
- DIN 46234 without insulating sleeve ≥ PP
- DIN 46225 without insulating sleeve

1)
- JIS C2805 type R without insulating
sleeve A shrink-on sleeve must be used to provide
additional insulation for the ring cable lugs 1).
• Application temperature: -55 °C/+155 °C
• UL 224 approved
• Flame-protected
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 273
2.8 Technical data
2.8.4.4 Actuation - 3RH2. contactor relays
Table 2- 117 Actuation - 3RH2. contactor relays
Type 3RH2.
Size S00
Actuation
AC operation At 50 Hz 0.8 to 1.1 x US
At 60 Hz 0.85 to 1.1 x US
DC operation At + 50 °C 0.8 to 1.1 x US
At + 60 °C 0.85 to 1.1 x US
- Switch-on power VA/cos ϕ 37 / 0.8
- Holding power VA/cos ϕ 5.7 / 0.25
• AC operation, 60 Hz
- Switch-on power VA/cos ϕ 33 / 0.75
- Holding power VA/cos ϕ 44 / 0.25
• DC operation
- Switch-on power = holding power W 4.0
• AC operation1) mA < 4 mA (230 V/US)
• DC operation mA < 10 mA (24 V/US)
Switching times2)
AC operation Values apply with coil in cold state
and at operating temperature for
operating range
• Switching on
- ON-delay NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x US ms 8 ... 33
1.0 x US ms 9 ... 22
Minimum operating time 3RH24 ms ≥ 35
- OFF-delay NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x US ms 6 ... 25
1.0 x US ms 6.5 ... 19
• Switching off
- OFF-delay NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x US ms 4 ... 15
1.0 x US ms 4.5 ... 15
- ON-delay NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x US ms 5 ... 15
1.0 x US ms 5 ... 15
SIRIUS Innovations
274 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
Type 3RH2.
Size S00
Actuation
DC operation
• Switching on
- ON-delay NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x US ms 30 ... 100
1.0 x US ms 20 ... 50
- OFF-delay NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x US ms 25 ... 90
1.0 x US ms 30 ... 45
• Switching off
- OFF-delay NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x US ms 7 ... 13
1.0 x US ms 7 ... 12
- ON-delay NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x US ms 13 ... 19
1.0 x US ms 13 ... 18
Arcing time ms 10 ... 15
Dependency of switching frequency z’on operational current I’ and
operational voltage U’
z’ = z ⋅ Ie/I’ ⋅ (Ue/U’)1.5 ⋅ 1/h
1) The use of the additional load module 3RT2916-1GA00 is recommended at higher residual currents.
attenuated against voltage peaks (suppression diode 6x to 10x; diode combination 2x to 6x; varistor +2 to 5 ms).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 275
2.8 Technical data
2.8.4.5 Load side of 3RH2. contactor relays
Table 2- 118 Load side - 3RH2. contactor relays
Type 3RH2.
Size S00
Load side
Rated operational currents Ie
AC-12 A 10
AC-15/AC-14 at rated operational voltage US Up to 230 V A 10
400 V A 3
500 V A 2
680 V 1
DC-12 at rated operational voltage US
• 1 current path 24 V A 6
60 V A 6
110 V A 3
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.3
600 V A 0.15
• 2 current paths in series 24 V A 10
60 V A 10
110 V A 4
220 V A 2
440 V A 1.3
600 V A 0.65
60 V A 10
110 V A 10
220 V A 3.6
440 V A 2.5
600 V A 1.8
DC-13 at rated operational voltage US
• 1 current path 24 V A 6
60 V A 2
110 V A 1
220 V A 0.3
440 V A 0.14
600 V A 0.1
SIRIUS Innovations
276 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
Type 3RH2.
Size S00
Load side
60 V A 3.5
110 V A 1.3
220 V A 0.9
440 V A 0.2
600 V A 0.1
60 V A 4.7
110 V A 3
220 V A 1.2
440 V A 0.5
600 V A 0.26
Switching frequency z
• in operating cycles/hour during rated operation for utilization AC-12/DC-12 h-1 1000
category
AC-15/AC-14 h-1 1000
DC-13 h-1 1000
• No-load switching frequency h-1 10000
Dependency of switching frequency z’on operational current I’
and operational voltage U’. z’ = z ⋅ Ie/I’ ⋅ (Ue/U’)1.5 ⋅ 1/h
1) Snap-on auxiliary switch blocks: 6 A.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 277
2.8 Technical data
2.8.5 Accessories for 3RT2 contactors and 3RH2 contactor relays
2.8.5.1 General data - Pneumatic timer 3RT2926-2P.
Table 2- 119 General data for the pneumatic delay block 3RT2926-2P.
Type 3RT2926-2P.
Pneumatic delay block1)
General data
cycles
Electrical durability at Ie Operating 1 million
cycles
Permissible ambient temperature • Operation °C -25 … + 60
• Storage °C -50 … + 80
Rated operational currents Ie acc. to DIN EN 60947 utilization categories
• AC 12 A 10
• AC 15/AC 14 at Ue Up to 230/220 V A 6
400/380 V A 4
500 V A 2.5
690/660 V A 1.5
• DC 13 at Ue 24 V A 4
48 V A 2
110 V A 0.7
220 V A 0.3
440 V A 0.15
• Solid, stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5)2) or 2 x (2.5 to 4)2)
• AWG cables AWG 2 x (22 to 14)
• Tightening torque of connection screws Nm 0.8 … 1.1
Time delay
• Accuracy ± 10 %
• Rated voltage V AC 600
• Switching capacity A 600, Q 600
1) For size S0. No other auxiliary switch blocks are permitted in addition to the pneumatic delay block.
2) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must be located in
the range specified. If identical cross-sections are used, this restriction does not apply.
SIRIUS Innovations
278 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
2.8.5.2 General data - OFF-delay device 3RT2916-2B.
Table 2- 120 OFF-delay device 3RT2916-2B.
Versions 3RT2916-2BE01 3RT2916-2BK01 3RT2916-2BL01

OFF-delay device
Connectable contactor sizes
Notice! Only contactors and contactor relays with DC
drive can be connected!
• DC supply S00/S0 S00/S0 S00/S0
• AC supply --- S00/S0 S00/S0
Type • 3RT20..-1BB4. • 3RT201.-1BF4. • 3RT201.-1BM4./
• 3RH2...-1BB40 • 3RT202.-1BF4. 1BP4.
• 3RH2...-1BF40 • 3RT202.-1BM4./
1BP4.
• 3RH2...-1BM40/
1BP40
Permissible mounting
position
r r
Rated control supply voltage US V 24 (DC) 110 (DC) 220/230 (UC)

Operating range 0.9 to 1.1 x US
Rated frequency(cies) f Hz ±5% --- 50 / 60
with AC supply
Ambient temperature, permissible:
• Operation
- Side-by-side mounting Tu °C -25 … +50
without clearance
- Side-by-side mounting with Tu °C -25 … +60
5 mm clearance
• Storage Tu °C -40 … +80
OFF-delay1) Note:
(minimum times at Usp = 0.9 x US, Tsp = 20 °C) In practice the mean value is equal to 1.5 times the minimum time.
S00 tOFF > ms 200 100 500
S0 tOFF > ms 100 80 300
Installed capacitance C
3RT2916-2B.01 μF 2000 68 68
Capacitor voltage V 35 180 350
ON-delay Note:
(maximum at Usp = 0.9 x US, Tsp = 20 °C) Total ON-delay = contactor ON time + tON
S00 tON > ms 10 60 200
S0 tON > ms 10 80 250
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 279
2.8 Technical data
Versions 3RT2916-2BE01 3RT2916-2BK01 3RT2916-2BL01

OFF-delay device
Mechanical durability Operatin 30 million
g cycles
Electrical durability, approx. Operatin > 1 million
g cycles
Switching frequency z max. (at Tu = h-1 300
60 °C)
Power loss Pvmax. approx. W 0.4 0.5 1
Surge suppression With varistor, integrated
Usp = coil voltage

Tsp = coil temperature
1) Doubling the delay time can be achieved by doubling the capacitance. Commercially available
capacitors which can be connected to terminals C+ and Z-
can be used.
2) See the table titled "Conductor cross-sections - 3RT201. contactors".
SIRIUS Innovations
280 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
2.8.5.3 General data - Terminal module for contactors with screw connection
Table 2- 121 Terminal module for contactors with screw connection 3RT1900-4RE01, 3RT1916-4RD01, 3RT1926-4RD01
Versions 3RT1900-4RE01 3RT1916-4RD01 3RT1926-4RD01

Terminal module for contactors with screw connection plugs S00, S0 adapter S00 adapter S0
General data
cycles
Electrical durability at Ie Operating 1 million
cycles
Rated operational voltage Ue V 440
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (pollution kV 6
degree 3)
Protective separation acc. to DIN EN 60947-1 V 400
Rated operational current IeAC-3 at 400 V A 25 20 25
Rated frequency f Hz 50 / 60
for AC operation
Permissible ambient temperature
• Operation °C -25 … + 60
• Storage °C -40 … + 80
Degree of protection in accordance with DIN EN 60529 IP20
Screw connection
• Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 to 6)
• Finely stranded without/with end sleeve mm2 1 x (0.5 to 6)
• Stranded mm2 1 x (0.5 to 6)
• Corresponding opening tool Cross-tip screwdriver PZ2
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 281
2.8 Technical data
Versions 3RT1900-4RE01 3RT1916-4RD01 3RT1926-4RD01

Terminal module for contactors with screw connection plugs S00, S0 adapter S00 adapter S0
General data
• Rated operational voltage Ue V 480
• Rated insulation voltage Ui V 600
• Continuous current, at 40 °C A 16 / 25 16 25
• Short-circuit protection 1)
• At 600 V kA 5
• Fuse class RK5 A 100 60 100
• Circuit breakers A 100 60 100
with overload
protection acc. to
UL 489
Combination motor controller type E to UL 508
• At 480 V Type 3RV202
A 22 --- 22
kA 65 --- 65
• At 600 V Type 3RV202
A 22 --- 22
kA 10 --- 10
SIRIUS Innovations
282 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
2.8.5.4 General data - Mechanical latch 3RT2926-3A
Table 2- 122 General data 3RT2926-3A
Contactor Type 3RT2926-3A

Size Mechanical latch for 3RT2.2 contactors
General data
Mechanical durability With 3RT2.2 Operating 3 million
(operating cycles) cycles
• Storage °C -50 … + 80
Degree of protection to EN 60947-1, Annex C IP20
at AC 50/60 Hz and DC
Release solenoid magnet coil power input W Approx. 4
(for cold coil and 1.0 x US)
AC and DC operation
Command duration for de-energizing
• AC operation ms 18 ... 31
• DC operation ms 18 ... 26
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5); 1 x 4
AWG 2 x 14; 1 x 12
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5); 1 x 2.5
AWG 2 x 14; 1 x 12
Tightening torque of connection screws Nm 0.8 ... 1.1
lb.in 7 ... 9.5
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 283
2.8 Technical data
2.8.5.5 General data - Control side and load side - coupling link 3RH2924-1GP11
Table 2- 123 General data - Coupling link 3RH2924-1GP11
Type 3RH2924-1GP11
Size Coupling link for mounting on contactors
acc. to IEC 60947/DIN EN 60947
General data
Protective separation between coil and contacts V AC Up to 300
acc. to DIN EN 60947-1, Annex N
Degree of protection to EN 60947-1, Annex C
• Connections IP20
• Enclosure IP40
• Storage °C -40 … + 80
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5)
Connection screws M3
Short-circuit protection A 6
(weld-free fuse protection at Ik ≥1 kA)
fuse links, operating class gL/gG
NH 3NA, DIAZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE
Table 2- 124 Control side - Coupling link 3RH2924-1GP11
Type 3RH2924-1GP11
Control side
Rated control supply voltage US V DC 24
Operating range V DC 17 ... 30
Power input at US W 0.5
Rated current consumption mA 20
Release voltage V ≥4
Function display Yellow LED
Surge suppressor Varistor
SIRIUS Innovations
284 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.8 Technical data
Table 2- 125 Load side - Coupling link 3RH2924-1GP11
Type 3RH2924-1GP11
Load side
Mechanical durability in million 20
operating
cycles
Electrical durability at Ie in million 0.1
operating
cycles
Switching frequency Operating h-1 5000
cycles
ON time ms Approx. 7
OFF time ms Approx. 4
Bounce time ms Approx. 2
Contact material AgSnO
Switching voltage V AC/DC 24 … 250
Permissible residual current of electronics (with 0 mA 2.5
signal)
Rated operational currents1)Conventional thermal A 6
current Ith
Rated operational currents Ie acc. to DIN EN 60947 utilization
categories
AC-15
- At 24 V A 3
- At 110 V A 3
- At 230 V A 3
DC-13
- At 24 V A 1
- At 110 V A 0.2
- At 230 V A 0.1
Switching current with resistive load acc. to
DIN EN 60255 (relay standard) and DIN EN 60947
AC-12
- At 24 V A 6
- At 110 V A 6
- At 230 V A 6
DC-12
- At 24 V A 6
- At 110 V A 0.3
- At 230 V A 0.21)
1) Capacitive loads can result in micro-welding on the contacts.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 285
2.9 Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm)
Note
All dimensions are specified in mm.
2.9.1 Contactors and contactor relays (size S00)
3RT2.1.-1 contactors (3-pole) and 3RH21..-1 contactor relays (4-pole) in screw-type connection
system with accessories mounted

1 Laterally mountable auxiliary switch block 3RH2911-1DA..

2 Auxiliary switch block for mounting on the front 3RH2911-1FA.. / -1GA.. / -1HA.. / -1NF..
Figure 2-37 3RT2.1.-1 contactor and 3RH21..-1 contactor relays (screw-type connection system) with
auxiliary switch blocks mounted

3 3-phase infeed terminal 3RA2913-3K

4 Surge suppressor 3RT2916-1...
5 Auxiliary switch block for mounting on the front 3RH2911-1AA.. / -1BA..
6 EMC suppression module 3RT2916-1P..
Figure 2-38 3RT2.1.-1 contactors and 3RH21..-1 contactor relays (screw-type connection system)
with accessories mounted
SIRIUS Innovations
286 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3RT2.1.-2 contactors and 3RH21..-2 contactor relays (4-pole) in spring-loaded connection system
with accessories mounted

1 Laterally mountable auxiliary switch block 3RH2911-2DA.. / -2DE..

Figure 2-39 3RT2.1.-2 contactor and 3RH21..-2 contactor relay (spring-loaded connection system)
with auxiliary switch blocks mounted

3 Surge suppressor 3RT2916-1...

Figure 2-40 3RT2.1.-2 contactor and 3RH21..-2 contactor relay (spring-loaded connection system)
with surge suppressor mounted
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 287
3RT2.1-4. contactors and 3RH21..-4 contactor relays (4-pole) with ring cable lug connection system
and accessories mounted


Figure 2-41 3RT2.1-4. contactor and 3RH21..-4 contactor relay (ring cable lug connection system)
with auxiliary switch blocks mounted
Latched 4-pole contactor relay 3RH24..-1 in screw-type connection system

Figure 2-42 Latched 4-pole contactor relay 3RH24..-1 (screw-type connection system)
3RH24..(0LA0) contactor relay with extended operating range in screw-type connection system

Figure 2-43 3RH24.. contactor relay with extended operating range (screw-type connection system)
SIRIUS Innovations
288 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3RH201./3RH21..(0LA0) contactor relays with extended operating range in spring-loaded connection

system

Figure 2-44 3RH201. and 3RH21.. contactor relays with extended operating range (spring-loaded
connection system)
Drilling plan for 3RT2.1.-1/3RT2.1.-4./3RT2.1.-2 contactors and 3RH21.. 1/3RH21..-4/3RH21..-

2 contactor relays
5 35
50
Figure 2-45 Drilling plan for contactors and contactor relays (size S00)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 289
2.9.2 Contactors (size S0)
3RT2.2.-1 contactors (3-pole) in screw-type connection system with accessories mounted

$&'&
$&'&

3 3-phase infeed terminal 3RV2925-5AB
Figure 2-46 3RT2.2.-1 contactors (screw-type connection system) with auxiliary switch blocks
mounted and other accessories

$&'&
$&'&
4 4-pole contactor for switching resistive loads 3RT232.

4-pole pole-changing contactor for changing 3RT252.
the polarity of hoisting gear motors (2 NO
contacts and 2 NC contacts)
5 Coil terminal module 3RT2926-4RA11/-4RB11
6 Auxiliary switch block for mounting on the front 3RH2911-1AA.. / -1BA
Figure 2-47 3RT2.2.-1 contactors (screw-type connection system) with accessories mounted
SIRIUS Innovations
290 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3RT2.2.-2/3RT202.-.....-0LA2 contactors (3-pole) in spring-loaded connection system with

accessories mounted

$&'&
$&'&
1 Laterally mountable auxiliary switch block 3RH2921-2DA.. / -2DE..

Figure 2-48 3RT2.2.-2 and 3RT202.-.....-0LA2 contactors (spring-loaded connection system) with
auxiliary switch blocks mounted

$&'&
$&'&
3 4-pole contactor for switching resistive loads 3RT232.

4-pole pole-changing contactor for changing 3RT252.
the polarity of hoisting gear motors (2 NO
contacts and 2 NC contacts)
4 Coil terminal module (from above/from below) 3RT2926-4RA12/-4RB12
Figure 2-49 3RT2.2.-2 and 3RT202.-.....-0LA2 contactors (spring-loaded connection system) with
accessories mounted
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 291
3RT2.2.-4 contactors (3-pole) in ring cable lug connection system with accessories mounted
$&'&
$&'&


Figure 2-50 3RT2.2.-4 contactors (ring cable lug connection system) with auxiliary switch blocks
mounted
Drilling plan for 3RT2.2. contactors

Figure 2-51 Drilling plan for 3RT2.2. contactors (size S0)
SIRIUS Innovations
292 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.10 Circuit diagrams

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 293
2.10.1 Contactors and contactor accessories
3RT2.1 motor contactors (size S00)
3RT201.-.A..1, 3RT201.-.B..1 3RT201.-.A..2, 3RT201.-.B..2

3RT201.-.H..1, 3RT201.-.M..1 3RT201.-.H..2, 3RT201.-.M..2
$ / / / $ / / /
$ 7 7 7 $ 7 7 7
S00 contactor, without RC circuit, 1 NO S00 contactor, without RC circuit, 1 NC

contact contact
3RT201.-.F..1, 3RT201.-.J..1 3RT201.-.F..2, 3RT201.-.J..2

3RT201.-.V..1 3RT201.-.V..2
$ / / / $ / / /
$ 7 7 7 $ 7 7 7
S00 contactor, with internal diode, 1 NO S00 contactor, with internal diode, 1 NC
contact contact
3RT201.-.K..1 3RT201.-.K..2
$ / / / $ / / /
$ 7 7 7 $ 7 7 7
S00 contactor, with internal suppressor S00 contactor, with internal suppressor
diode, 1 NO contact diode, 1 NC contact
3RT201.-.S..1 3RT201.-.S..2
$ / / / $ / / /
$ 7 7 7 $ 7 7 7
S00 contactor, with internal diode S00 contactor, with internal diode
combination, 1 NO contact combination, 1 NC contact
SIRIUS Innovations
294 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3RT201.-.Q..1, 3RT201.-.W..1 3RT201.-.Q..2, 3RT201.-.W..2

$ / / / $ / / /
8 8
$ 7 7 7 $ 7 7 7
S00 contactor, with varistor connected on S00 contactor, with varistor connected on
the front, 1 NO contact the front, 1 NC contact
Traction contactor 3RT201.-2K..2-0LA0 (size S00)
3RT201.-2K..2-0LA0
(
5Y .
. / / /
7 7 7
$
S00 traction contactor, with internal suppressor diode, 1 NC contact
Contactor with 4 main current paths 3RT23 (size S00)
3RT231.-.A..0, 3RT231.-.B..0
$ / / / /
$ 7 7 7 7
Contactor with 4 main current paths for switching resistive loads
Pole-changing contactor 3RT25 (size S00)
3RT251.-.A..0, 3RT251.-.B..0
$ 5 5
$ 5 5
Pole-changing contactor S00, 4 main current paths, 2 NO contacts, 1 NC contact
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 295
3RT2.2 (size S0) motor contactors
3RT202.-.A..0, 3RT202.-.B..0
$ / / /
$ 7 7 7
S0 contactor, without RC circuit, 1 NO contact, 1 NC contact
3RT202.-.A..4, 3RT202.-.B..4
$ / / /
$ 7 7 7
S0 contactor, without RC circuit, 2 NO contacts, 2 NC contacts
3RT202.-.F..0
$ / / /
$ 7 7 7
S0 contactor, with internal diode, 1 NO contact, 1 NC contact
3RT202.-.K..0
$ / / /
$ 7 7 7
S0 contactor, with internal varistor, 1 NO contact, 1 NC contact
3RT202.-.N..0, 3RT202.-.X..0
$ / / /
$ 7 7 7
S0 contactor, with electronic drive, 1 NO contact, 1 NC contact
SIRIUS Innovations
296 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Contactor with 4 main current paths 3RT23 (size S0)
3RT232.-.A..0, 3RT232.-.B..0
$ / / / 1
$ 7 7 7 1
S0 contactor, 4 main current paths for switching resistive loads, 4 NO contacts plus 1 NO
contact, 1 NC contact
Pole-changing contactor 3RT25 (size S0)
3RT252.-.A..0, 3RT252.-.B..0
$ 5 5
$ 5 5
Pole-changing contactor, S0, 4 main current paths, 2 NO contacts, 2 NC contacts, plus

1 NO contact, 1 NC contact
3RH2 contactor relays
3RH2122-.A..0, 3RH2122-.B..0, 3RH2131-.A..0, 3RH2131-.B..0,

3RH2122-.H..0, 3RH2122-.M..0 3RH2131-.H..0, 3RH2131-.M..0
$ $
$ $
Contactor relay, without RC circuit, Contactor relay, without RC circuit, 3 NO contacts,

2 NO contacts, 2 NC contacts 1 NC contact
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 297
3RH2140-.A..0, 3RH2140-.B..0, 3RH2244-.A..0, 3RH2244-.B..0,

3RH2140-.H..0, 3RH2140-.M..0 3RH2344-.A..0, 3RH2344-.B..0
$ $
$
$
Contactor relay, without RC Contactor relay, without RC circuit, 4 NO contacts,

4 NC contacts
circuit,4 NO contacts
3RH2262-.A..0, 3RH2262-.B..0,
3RH2362-.A..0, 3RH2362-.B..0
$
$
Contactor relay, without RC circuit, 6 NO contacts, 2 NC contacts
3RH2122-.F..0, 3RH2122-.J..0, 3RH2131-.F..0, 3RH2131-.J..0,

3RH2122-.V..0 3RH2131-.V..0
$ $
$
$
Contactor relay, with integrated diode,
2 NO contacts, 2 NC contacts Contactor relay, with integrated diode, 3 NO
contacts, 1 NC contact
3RH2140-.F..0, 3RH2140-.J..0,
3RH2140-.V..0
$
$
Contactor relay, with integrated diode,

4 NO contacts
SIRIUS Innovations
298 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3RH2122-.W..0, 3RH2122-.Q..0 3RH2131-.W..0

$ $
8 8
$ $
Contactor relay, with connected varistor, Contactor relay, with connected varistor, 3 NO
2 NO contacts, 2 NC contacts contacts, 1 NC contact
3RH2140-.W..0
$
$
Contactor relay, with connected varistor,

4 NO contacts
3RH2122-.K..0, 3RH2122-.S..0 3RH2131-.K..0, 3RH2131-.S..0

$ $
$ $
Contactor relay, with integrated suppressor Contactor relay, with integrated suppressor
diode, 2 NO contacts, 2 NC contacts diode, 3 NO contacts, 1 NC contact
3RH2140-.K..0, 3RH2140-.S..0
$
$
Contactor relay, with integrated suppressor

diode, 4 NO contacts
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 299
3RH2122-.G..0 3RH2131-.G..0
$ $
$ $
Contactor relay, with integrated full-wave Contactor relay, with integrated full-wave
rectifier, 2 NO contacts, 2 NC contacts rectifier, 3 NO contacts, 1 NC contact
3RH2140-.G..0
$
$
Contactor relay, with integrated full-wave

rectifier, 4 NO contacts
Traction contactor 3RH2122-.K...-0LA00
3RH2122-.K...-0LA00
(

5Y .

.

$
Traction contactor, with integrated

suppressor diode, 2 NO contacts, 2 NC
contacts
SIRIUS Innovations
300 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3RH24 latched contactor relays
3RH2422-.A..0, 3RH2422-.B..0 3RH2431-.A..0, 3RH2431-.B..0

( $ ( $
( $ ( $
Latched contactor relay, without RC circuit, Latched contactor relay, without RC circuit,
2 NO contacts, 2 NC contacts 3 NO contacts, 1 NC contact
3RH2440-.A..0, 3RH2440-.B..0
( $
( $
Latched contactor relay, without RC

circuit,4 NO contacts
Lateral auxiliary switches
3RH2911-.DA02 3RH2921-.DA02

Auxiliary switch block, lateral, 2 NC contacts Auxiliary switch block, lateral, 2 NC contacts
3RH2911-.DA11, 3RH2911-.DE11 3RH2921-.DA11, 3RH2921-.DE11

Auxiliary switch block, lateral, 1 NO contact, Auxiliary switch block, lateral, 1 NO contact,
1 NC contact 1 NC contact
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 301
3RH2911-.DA20 3RH2921-.DA20

Auxiliary switch block, lateral, 2 NO contacts Auxiliary switch block, lateral, 2 NO contacts
Auxiliary switch for mounting on the front, 1-pole
3RH2911-.AA01, 3RH2911-.BA01 3RH2911-.AA10, 3RH2911-.BA10

Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the
front, 1-pole, 1 NC contact front, 1-pole, 1 NO contact
Auxiliary switch for mounting on the front, 2-pole
3RH2911-.LA20, 3RH2911-.MA20 3RH2911-.NF20

Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the
Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the front, 2-pole, 2 NO contacts
front, 2-pole, 2 NO contacts
3RH2911-.NF02


front, 2-pole, 2 NC contacts
SIRIUS Innovations
302 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3RH2911-.LA11, 3RH2911-.MA11 3RH2911-.NF11

Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the front, 2-pole, 1 NO contact, 1 NC contact
front, 2-pole, 1 NO contact, 1 NC contact
Auxiliary switches for mounting on the front, 4-pole
3RH2911-.HA01 3RH2911-.HA10

front, 4-pole, 1 NC contact front, 4-pole, 1 NO contact
3RH2911-.HA02 3RH2911-.HA20

front, 4-pole, 2 NC contacts front, 4-pole, 2 NO contacts
3RH2911-.HA03 3RH2911-.HA30

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 303
3RH2911-.GA04 3RH2911-.GA40

3RH2911-.FA04 3RH2911-.FA40

3RH2911-.GA13 3RH2911-.HA13

front, 4-pole, 1 NO contact, 3 NC contacts front, 4-pole, 1 NO contact, 3 NC contacts
3RH2911-.GA31 3RH2911-.HA31

front, 4-pole, 3 NO contacts, 1 NC contact front, 4-pole, 3 NO contacts, 1 NC contact
SIRIUS Innovations
304 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3RH2911-.GA22 3RH2911-.HA22

front, 4-pole, 2 NO contacts, 2 NC contacts front, 4-pole, 2 NO contacts, 2 NC contacts
3RH2911-.FB11 3RH2911-.FC22

Auxiliary switch block, 1 x make-before- Auxiliary switch block, for mounting on the
break, 1 NO contact, 1 NC contact front, 4-pole, 2 x make-before-break, 2 NO
contacts, 2 NC contacts
3RH2911-.HA12 3RH2911-.HA21

front, 4-pole, 1 NO contact, 2 NC contacts front, 4-pole, 2 NO contacts, 1 NC contact
3RH2911-.FB22


front, 4-pole, 1 x make-before-break, 2 NO
contacts, 2 NC contacts
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 305
3RH2911-.HA11


front, 4-pole, 1 NO contacts, 1 NC contact
Magnet coil
3RT2924-5A...
$
$
Magnet coil for S0 contactors
Surge suppressor
3RT29.6-1C... 3RT29.6-.B...

8

Surge suppressor, RC element Surge suppressor, varistor
3RT29.6-1D... 3RT2926-1E...
Surge suppressor, suppression diode Surge suppressor, diode combination
SIRIUS Innovations
306 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3RT29.6-1J... 3RT29.6-1L...

8

Surge suppressor, varistor with LED Surge suppressor, suppression diode with
LED
3RT2926-1M...
Surge suppressor, diode combination with LED
LED display indicator module

3RT2926-1Q...
. .
. .
LED display indicator module for indicating the contactor function
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 307
2.10.2 Reversing contactor assembly (S00/S0)
Reversing contactor assembly, size S00

3RA231.-....
/ / /
$ $
4 4
$ $
7 7 7 1& $ 1&
Figure 2-53 Reversing contactor assembly S00
Reversing contactor assembly, size S0

3RA232.-....
/ / /
$ $
4 4
$ $
7 7 7 1& $ 1&
Figure 2-54 Reversing contactor assembly S0
SIRIUS Innovations
308 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
2.10.3 Contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start
Contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start with 3RA28 function modules for star-delta (wye-
delta) start
3RA241.-..F..
$ $ / / /
$ $
4 4 4
$ $
̹̹ ̹ ̹ ̹̹
Figure 2-55 S00 contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start, with 3RA28 function modules
for star-delta (wye-delta) start
3RA242.-..F..
$ $ / / /
$ 4 $
4 4
$ $
̹̹ ̹ ̹ ̹̹
Figure 2-56 S0 contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start, with 3RA28 function modules for
star-delta (wye-delta) start
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 309
Contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start with mounted function modules for AS-Interface
3RA241.-..H..
< < $6, $6, $8; $8; / / /
$ $ 4 $
4 4
$ $ $
̹̹ ̹ ̹ ̹̹
Figure 2-57 S00 contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start, with mounted function modules for AS-Interface
3RA242.-..H..
< < $6, $6, $8; $8; / / /
$ $ 4 $
4 4
$ $ $
̹̹ ̹ ̹ ̹̹
Figure 2-58 S0 contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start, with mounted function modules for AS-Interface
SIRIUS Innovations
310 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start with mounted function modules for IO-Link
3RA241.-..E..
/ &4 / $ $< < / / /
$ $ 4 $
4 4
$ $ $
̹̹ ̹ ̹ ̹̹
Figure 2-59 S00 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start, with mounted function modules for IO-Link
3RA242.-..E..
/ &4 / $ $< < / / /
$ 4 $
4 4
$ $
̹̹ ̹ ̹ ̹̹
Figure 2-60 S0 contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start, with mounted function modules for IO-Link
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 311
SIRIUS Innovations
312 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices 3
Correct usage
NOTICE
Radio frequency interference in residential areas
This product is a Class A device. Its use in residential areas can cause radio frequency
interference.
In this case, the user can be held liable for taking additional measures to attenuate such
interference.
Safety measures
NOTICE
Inter-phase short circuit due to overvoltage on solid-state reversing contactors
In the event of a short circuit, the switching devices in the load feeder can put persons and
property at risk.
For fused configurations, the protective device has to be replaced following a short circuit.
To reduce the risk of an inter-phase short circuit due to overvoltage, we recommend
connecting a 3TX7 462-3L type varistor between L1 and L3. We recommend a fused
design with semiconductor protection to provide short-circuit protection.
NOTICE
Inter-phase short circuit with solid-state reversing contactors in automatic mode
If the primary voltage is applied at the solid-state reversing contactors at the same time as
the control voltage is switched on, the integrated RC surge suppressor may respond in
some cases. If it does, dependent on actuation, two thyristors in the reversing circuit may
activate, thereby producing an inter-phase short circuit.
To be sure of avoiding this response, once the primary voltage has been applied, a delay of
40 ms should be allowed to elapse before the control inputs are activated.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 313
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state switching devices
CAUTION
Electromagnetic interference on the solid-state reversing contactors
Star-connected three-phase motors (particularly <1 kW) with electromechanical contactors
can cause significant electromagnetic interference. Such interference can cause solid-state
reversing contactors being used in the vicinity to malfunction.
Provision should be made for appropriate EMC surge suppressors on the sources of
interference.
SIRIUS Innovations
314 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3.1.1 Standards
Standards and approvals

● IEC 60947-4-2
● UL 508, CSA for North America 1)
● CE mark for Europe
● C-Tick approval for Australia
● CCC for China
1) Please note: Use overvoltage protection device;
max. cut-off-voltage 6000 V;

min. energy handling capability 100J.
The product meets the requirements of the following standards:
Table 3- 1 Applied standards (product)
Applications Standard
Device standard DIN IEC 60947-4-2
Terminal designations/Terminal markings DIN EN 50011
Degree of protection IP20 DIN IEC 0529
Vibration resistance DIN IEC 60068-2-6
Shock resistance DIN IEC 60068-2-27
EMC standard DIN IEC 60947-4-2; DIN IEC 61000-4-2;
DIN IEC 61000-4-6; DIN IEC 61000-4-4;
DIN IEC 61000-4-5
Resistance to extreme climates DIN IEC 60068-2-61 (sequence of tests),
DIN IEC 60068-2-30 (damp heat),
DIN IEC 60068-2-2 (dry heat),
DIN IEC 60068-2-1 (cold),
DIN IEC 60068-2-14 (temperature change)
Reference
important standards relating to the SIRIUS modular system in the chapter titled System
overview, underStandards (Page 23).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 315

Solid-state switching devices are primarily used in single-phase applications which have to
meet the following requirements:
● Very high switching frequencies (> 1,000 switching operations per hour)
● Resistive loads
The SIRIUS modular system features single- and three-phase solid-state contactors and
solid-state relays for the frequent switching of resistive loads. Three-phase solid-state
contactors and solid-state reversing contactors are available for switching motorized loads.
Standardized function modules for various applications complete the range of SIRIUS solid-
state switching devices.
The solid-state contactor and solid-state reversing contactor versions listed in this manual
are intended specifically for operation on three-phase motors up to 7.5 kW.
You can find more detailed information in the appendix More information (Page 756).
Overview
These 2-phase controlled instantaneous switching solid-state switching devices are operated
in two mounting widths in an insulating enclosure:
● In 45 mm width
– Up to 5.2 A as solid-state contactor (motor contactor) or
– Up to 5.4 A as solid-state reversing contactor and
● In 90 mm width
– Up to 16 A as solid-state contactor or
– Up to 7.4 A as solid-state reversing contactor
This means that it is possible to operate motors up to 7.5 kW.
The solid-state contactors and solid-state reversing contactors can be connected directly to a
motor starter protector with a 3RA2921-1BA00 link module. Direct mounting of a
3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relay and, in some cases, a 3RR2 current monitoring
relay, is also possible. This provides a time-saving way of implementing rapid-switching
motor feeders with and without fuses.
SIRIUS Innovations
316 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Versions
The following table provides an overview of the versions of the 3RF34 instantaneous
switching solid-state contactors for switching motors.
Table 3- 2 Versions of solid-state switching devices
Feature Versions
Version Solid-state contactor Solid-state reversing contactor
Description Complete devices in insulated enclosures for Compact design of the reversing circuit for
the frequent switching on and switching off the frequent switching on and switching off of
of AC drives. AC drives with continuous reversal of the
direction of rotation
Order numbers 3RF34..-.BB.. 3RF34..-.BD..
Size S0
Width (motor power1)/max. • 45 mm (motors up to 2.2 kW, 5.2 A) • 45 mm (motors up to 2.2 kW, 5.4 A)
rated operational current) • 90 mm (motors up to 7.5 kW, 16 A) • 90 mm (motors up to 3.0 kW, 7.4 A)
Number of poles 3 3
Connection system Screw-type and spring-loaded Screw-type
Rated operational voltage Up to 600 V Up to 480 V
Rated control supply 24 V DC and 110 to 230 V AC
voltage
Switching delay
ON-delay 1 ms (24 V DC), 5 ms (110 to 230 V AC) 5 ms (24 V DC), 20 ms (110 to 230 V AC)
OFF-delay 1 ms (24 V DC), 30 ms (110 to 230 V AC) 5 ms (24 V DC), 10 ms (110 to 230 V AC)
plus up to one half-wave plus up to one half-wave
Locking time 60 to 100 ms (24 V DC), 50 to 100 ms (110 AC to 230 V)
Enclosure Insulated (no grounding required)
Control connections Screw-type connection system and spring- Screw-type connection system, removable
loaded connection system, removable terminal for auxiliary circuit wiring (3 contacts)
terminal for auxiliary circuit wiring
(2 contacts)
1) Rating data relates to 400 V line voltage
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 317
3.2.2 Applications
Solid-state switching devices for switching motors

The solid-state contactors for the wear-free and noiseless switching of motors are designed
for the frequent switching on and switching off of AC drives up to 7.5 kW as well as for
reversing up to 3.0 kW. The devices are fully insulated and can be mounted directly on motor
starter protectors and overload relays or SIRIUS current monitoring relays, which makes
them really easy to integrate into motor feeders.
These 3-phase solid-state contactors are equipped with a 2-phase control which is
particularly suitable for typical motor circuits without a connection to the neutral conductor.
The integration of four current paths to form a single reversing circuit, accommodated in one
enclosure, makes the solid-state reversing contactor a particularly compact solution. Unlike
conventional systems which require two contactors, width can be reduced by up to 50% with
the 3-phase solid-state reversing contactors. Devices with a width of 45 mm cover motors up
to 2.2 kW and those with a width of 90 mm cover motors up to 3 kW.
Integration in the SIRIUS modular system facilitates connection to a SIRIUS motor starter
protector via a link module or to a 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relay or a 3RR2 current
monitoring relay without additional steps. As a result, fuseless or fused motor feeders can be
implemented quickly and easily.
Main features:
● Insulated enclosure with integrated heat sink
● Degree of protection IP20
● Integrated mounting foot for snapping on a DIN rail or mounting on a support plate
● Variety of connection systems
● Plug-in control connection
● LED to indicate control voltage
Reference
More information ... Can be found in the chapter titled

About link modules Description (Page 348)
About the overload relay Overload relays (Page 485)
About current monitoring relays Current monitoring relays (Page 683)
SIRIUS Innovations
318 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
General operating conditions

The following table lists the general operating conditions under which the product may be
operated.
Table 3- 3 General operating conditions
Operating conditions Value

Degree of protection IP20
Ambient temperature during operation - 25 to 60 °C
Installation altitude 0 to 1000 m;
at > 1,000 m seek advice from Technical Assistance
(www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-assistance)
Shock resistance 15 g/11 ms; acc. to DIN IEC 68-2-27
Vibration resistance 2 g; acc. to DIN IEC 68-2-6
EMC conditions Acc. to DIN IEC 60947-4-2, DIN IEC 61000-4-2,
DIN IEC 61000-4-4, DIN IEC 61000-4-5, and
DIN IEC 61000-4-6,
Insulation strength 50/60 Hz 4,000 Vrms
Reference

About operating conditions for solid-state Technical data (Page 350)
switching devices
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 319
3.2.4 Solid-state switching devices
Operator controls and equipment
Solid-state contactor

Operator control/Equipment Function

1 Solid-state contactor Frequent switching on and switching off of AC drives
2 Screw-type connection Main circuit terminals infeed/line side
system/Spring-loaded
connection system
3 LED The yellow LED lights up when the control voltage is
applied.
4 Plug-in control connection Removable terminals for the control circuit
(2 terminals)
5 Screw-type connection Main circuit terminals outgoing feeder motor/load side
system/Spring-loaded
connection system
Figure 3-1 Solid-state contactor overview - Screw-type connection system and spring-loaded
connection system
SIRIUS Innovations
320 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Solid-state reversing contactor

Operator control/Equipment Function

1 Solid-state contactor Frequent switching on and switching off of AC drives
2 Screw-type connection system Main circuit terminals infeed/line side
3 LEDs The left-hand LED lights up yellow when counterclockwise
rotation is activated (control voltage applied at terminal A1
and A2).
The right-hand LED lights up yellow when clockwise rotation
is activated (control voltage applied at terminal A3 and A2).
4 Plug-in control connection Removable terminals for the control circuit
(3 terminals)
5 Screw-type connection system Main circuit terminals outgoing feeder motor/load side
Figure 3-2 Solid-state reversing contactor overview - Screw-type connection system
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 321
3.2.5 Device labels
Device labels
/ / /

SIRIUS
9 '&

$ $

* (
5)%%

7 7 7
1 Labeling to identify the main circuit terminals infeed/line side

2 SIRIUS (device group)
3 Production date/Product version
4 Labeling to identify the main circuit terminals outgoing feeder motor/load side
5 Order designation
6 Labeling to identify the control circuit terminals and indication of the control voltage
(See also the diagrams below, "Labeling on solid-state contactors, zoom view".)
7 Circuit diagram
Figure 3-3 Labeling to identify solid-state contactors with screw-type connection system
SIRIUS Innovations
322 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
/ / /

SIRIUS
9 '&

$ $

* (
5)%%

/ / /

5 Order designation
(See also the diagrams below, "Labeling on solid-state contactors, zoom view".)
7 Circuit diagram
Figure 3-4 Labeling to identify solid-state contactors with spring-loaded terminals
9$&
$$
Figure 3-5 Labeling on solid-state contactors with AC control voltage, zoom view
9 '&

$ $
Figure 3-6 Labeling on solid-state contactors with DC control voltage, zoom view
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 323
/ / /

SIRIUS
9'&

$ $ $

* (
5)%'

7 7 7

5 Order designation
(See also the diagrams below, "Labeling on solid-state reversing contactors, zoom view".)
7 Circuit diagram
Figure 3-7 Labeling to identify solid-state reversing contactors with screw connection
9$&
$$$
Figure 3-8 Labeling on solid-state reversing contactors with AC control voltage, zoom view
9'&

$ $ $
Figure 3-9 Labeling on solid-state reversing contactors with DC control voltage, zoom view
SIRIUS Innovations
324 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3.2.6 Advantages of solid-state switching devices
Technical advantages/Customer benefits
Table 3- 4 Advantages of solid-state switching devices

Top customer benefits
Removable terminals for auxiliary circuit wiring Avoidance of wiring errors if devices need to be
replaced
Integrated electrical interlocking Cost savings and fault avoidance
All products are available in spring-loaded Improved operational reliability and quicker wiring
connection system
Wear-free switching Long contact service life avoids cyclic
replacement in applications with high switching
frequency. The system is in operation for longer.
Other customer benefits
Screw connection with practical cross-sections Flexible cable selection based on application at
hand
Link modules from motor starter protector to Fast, fault-free assembly for screw-type
switching device connection system
Noise-free switching Can be used in residential environments thank to
reduced switching noise
Integrated combination tests for fuseless and Planning reliability
fused assembly
Comprehensive approvals Global applicability
Uniform tools and torques for all devices Quick and easy installation
Only a small number of different power versions Easy configuration
up to 7.5 kW
Versions supporting wide voltage range Customer does not need as many different
110 to 230 V AC versions
Extensive CAx data provision Easy and fault-free configuration
Data sheets in 10 languages per order number Daily updated technical data available in
10 languages
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 325

Since the products from the innovative SIRIUS modular system are matched to one another
both electrically and mechanically, they can be combined quickly and easily.
3RF34 solid-state switching devices can be combined with the following devices:
● 3RV20 motor starter protectors (with 3RA2921-1BA00 link module)
● 3RB3 solid-state overload relays
● 3RR2 current monitoring relays
Reference
More information ... Can be found in...
About device combinations with solid-state The configuration guide titled "Configuring
switching devices SIRIUS Innovations - Selection data for load
feeders in fuseless and fused designs"
SIRIUS Innovations
326 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3.4 Functions
3.4 Functions
Performance features
The performance of the solid-state switching devices is essentially determined by the type of
power semiconductors used and the internal design. In the case of SIRIUS solid-state
contactors and solid-state relays, only thyristors are used in place of less powerful TRIACs.
Two of the most important features of thyristors are the blocking voltage and the maximum
load integral.
Blocking voltage
Thyristors with a high blocking voltage can also be operated without difficulty in networks
with high interference voltages. Separate protective measures, such as a protective circuit
with a varistor, are not necessary in most cases.
For example, in the case of SIRIUS solid-state switching devices, thyristors with a blocking
voltage of 800 V are fitted for operation in networks up to 230 V. Thyristors with up to 1600 V
are used for networks with higher voltages.
Maximum load integral

One of the purposes of specifying the maximum load integral (I²t) is to determine the rating
of the short-circuit protection. Only a large power semiconductor with a correspondingly high
I²t value can be given appropriate protection against destruction from a short circuit in the
form of a protective device matched to the application. However, SIRIUS solid-state
switching devices are also characterized by the optimum matching of the thyristors (I²t value)
to the rated currents. The rated currents specified on the devices according to
DIN EN 60947-4-2 have been confirmed by extensive testing.
Increased switching service life

Compared with conventional switching devices, solid-state switching devices have an
extremely long switching service life:
Table 3- 5 Comparison of conventional switching devices with solid-state switching devices
Characteristic Conventional switching devices Solid-state switching devices

Switching service life 1 to 3 million operating cycles More than 100 million operating cycles
Power loss Low High
Control power High Low
Shock/vibration resistance Average Very high
Noise development Average None
Electrical isolation Given None
Arcing Given None
Reference
About the performance features of solid-state Technical data (Page 350)
switching devices
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 327
3.4 Functions
3.4.1 Actuation of solid-state switching devices
Solid-state contactors
Solid-state contactors are used for the frequent switching on of motors. The switch-on
command is sent to the solid-state contactor when the control voltage is connected to
terminals A1/A2. The power semiconductors are actuated after a short dwell time has
elapsed.
Solid-state reversing contactors

The solid-state reversing contactors are dimensioned for the frequent reversing of motors.
Dependent upon which control input is activated, two pairs of power semiconductors are
actuated. If both inputs are activated at the same time, the device locks and no current will
flow. Changing from one direction of rotation to the other is locked for a period of approx. 50
to 100 ms.
SIRIUS Innovations
328 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3.5 Planning/configuring
3.5.1 Selecting solid-state switching devices
Selecting solid-state contactors

Solid-state contactors are selected on the basis of the line, the load, and the ambient
conditions.
The following procedure is recommended:
● Determine the rated current of the load and the line voltage.
● Select a solid-state contactor with a rated current which is higher than or at least equal to
the load.
● Check the maximum permissible switching frequency based on the characteristic curves.
To do this, you must know the starting current, the start time, and the motorized load
during the operating phase.
● If the permissible switching frequency is below the required switching frequency, it can
only be increased by overdimensioning the motor.
● Alternatively, the correct device size can be determined by entering the line data, the
motor data, the application, and the ambient conditions in the "Selection of solid-state
contactors for switching motors (https://eb.automation.siemens.com/spicecad/dc-web-
app/main/index.jsf)" tool on the Internet.
Load feeders
There is no such thing as a typical design for a load feeder with solid-state relays or solid-
state contactors. Rather, the variety of connection systems and control voltages support
universal possible applications. SIRIUS solid-state relays and solid-state contactors can be
installed in either fuseless or fused feeders.
Reference
More information ... Can be found ...

About tested load feeders The configuration guide titled "Configuring
SIRIUS Innovations - Selection data for load
feeders in fuseless and fused designs"
About the maximum permissible switching The chapter titled Technical data (Page 350)
frequency
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 329
3.5.2 Configuration: Selecting solid-state contactors for motors
Program description
Selecting solid-state switching devices with the "Selection of solid-state contactors for
switching motors" tool
The "Selection of solid-state contactors for motors" tool provides a quick and easy way of
dimensioning solid-state switching devices correctly.
Based on the details about the motor, the load cycle, and the environmental requirements,
the switching device load is calculated and a suitable type is selected. The complete order
number then appears in the "Result" field.
The program can be accessed via the following links:
● Configurator
(https://mall.automation.siemens.com/WW/guest/bizLogic/bizGotoConfig.asp?ConfigID=4
&ConfigType=3RF2&lang=en): (Selection of solid-state contactors for motors)
● Selection of solid-state contactors for switching motors
(https://eb.automation.siemens.com/spicecad/dc-web-app/main/index.jsf)
NOTICE
Dimensioning and sizing the motor and the corresponding protection devices
The user is responsible for dimensioning and sizing the motor and the corresponding
protection devices correctly. In the case of very high switching frequencies, we recommend
the use of thermistor motor protection. The use of motor starter protectors or overload
relays for motor overload protection may not be suitable under some circumstances.
SIRIUS Innovations
330 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Figure 3-10 Program desktop: "Selection of solid-state contactors for motors"
Procedure:
Start by defining the operating mode. Select "Direct start" or "Reverse operation" to launch
the calculation process. You can then proceed as you wish. The results are recalculated
every time you make an entry. Some entries will restrict other parameters which can be
selected (this is indicated by messages in the "State" field).
If your entries result in errors, these will also be displayed in the "State" field.
Once the entries have been modified accordingly and the calculation has been completed,
the order number of a suitable device will be appear in the "Result" field. The order number
can then be copied for ordering in the Mall (http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall).
Selecting a new "Operating mode" resets the tool completely. The tool can be set to the
following languages via the "Language" button: English; German; Italian; Spanish;
Portuguese.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 331
Information about input parameters

● "Operating mode"
Selection between a motor contactor or a reversing contactor
● "Usage region"
Selection of the application environment, selection of a design conforming to either IEC
standards or UL regulations
● "Protection"
The short-circuit protection of the solid-state switching devices (using circuit breakers or
fuses) affects the rated current.
● "Temperature unit"
Entries can be made in either degrees Celsius or degrees Fahrenheit.
● "Environment temperature"
The ambient temperature at the installation location. Temperatures above 40 °C / 104 °F
will impose restrictions on the rated current of the device.
● "Control voltage"
The control voltage selected determines the device type.
● "Altitude of site"
The installation altitude at the installation location. Altitudes higher than 1000 m above
sea level (amsl) will impose restrictions on the rated current of the device.
● Network parameters
– "Network voltage"
The "Network voltage" selection determines the device version.
– "Network frequency"
The entry is required so that the current load can be calculated correctly.
SIRIUS Innovations
332 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
● Motor parameters
– "Nominal current of motor"
The "Nominal current of motor" is indicated on the motor's nameplate.
– "Operating current of motor"
This value is the current actually consumed during the operating phase; a
measurement may need to be taken in order to ascertain it. Alternatively, this value
can be estimated on the basis of the load data.
– "Starting current factor of motor"
The value has to be taken from the motor's technical data. It essentially determines
the current load of the switching device during starting.
– "Starting time"
This is the time the motor needs to complete a startup process.
● "Load cycle input"
A load cycle comprises a starting phase, an operating phase and an idle phase.
The load cycle time is the sum of these phases. There are two possible ways of entering
the load cycle.
One is to enter the operating cycles and the duty cycle, the other is to enter the operating
time and the idle time.
– "Operating cycles"
The number of load cycles in an hour; in the case of reversing contactors every load
cycle counts, regardless of counterclockwise or clockwise running.
– "Duty cycle"
Ratio of the sum of the starting time and the operating time to the total load cycle time.
– "Operating time"
Time during which the rated motor current flows.
– "Idle time"
Duration of the current-free phase.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 333
3.5.3 Short-circuit protection
3.5.3.1 Mounting accessories for the load feeder conforming to IEC
3RF34 solid-state contactors - coordination 1 and 2 conforming to IEC
Combining 3RF34 solid-state contactors, type of coordination 1 (type 1), with 3RB3 overload relays
3RF34 solid-state contactors can be combined with the following 3RB3 overload relays in
conformance with type of coordination 1 (type 1):
Table 3- 6 Order designations for 3RB3 overload relays
3RF3 solid-state contactors

3RF3405-xBByz 5.2 A 3RF3410-xBByz 9.2 A 3RF3412-xBByz 12.5 A 3RF3416-xBByz 16 A
Compatible 3RB3 overload relays
3RB3.2.-N.. 0.32 - 1.25 A 3RB3.2.-N.. 0.32 - 1.25 A 3RB3.2.-N.. 0.32 - 1.25 A 3RB3.2.-N.. 0.32 - 1.25 A
3RB3.2.-P.. 1 - 4 A 3RB3.2.-P.. 1 - 4 A 3RB3.2.-P.. 1 - 4 A 3RB3.2.-P.. 1 - 4 A
3RB3.2.-S.. 3 - 12 A 3RB3.2.-S.. 3 - 12 A 3RB3.2.-S.. 3 - 12 A 3RB3.2.-S.. 3 - 12 A
– 3RB3.2.-Q.. 6 - 25 A 3RB3.2.-Q.. 6 - 25 A 3RB3.2.-Q.. 6 - 25 A
Combining 3RF34 solid-state contactors, type of coordination 2 (type 2), with 3RB3 overload relays
3RF34 solid-state contactors can be combined with the following 3RB3 overload relays in
conformance with type of coordination 2 (type 2):
3RF3 solid-state contactors

3RF3405-xBByz 5.2 A 3RF3410-xBByz 9.2 A 3RF3412-xBByz 12.5 A 3RF3416-xBByz 16 A
Compatible 3RB3 overload relays
3RB3.2.-N.. 0.32 - 1.25 A 3RB3.2.-N.. 0.32 - 1.25 A 3RB3.2.-N.. 0.32 - 1.25 A 3RB3.2.-N.. 0.32 - 1.25 A
(3RB3 determining fuse (3RB3 determining fuse (3RB3 determining fuse (3RB3 determining fuse
protection) protection) protection) protection)
3RB3.2.-P.. 1 - 4 A 3RB3.2.-P.. 1 - 4 A 3RB3.2.-P.. 1 - 4 A 3RB3.2.-P.. 1 - 4 A
(3RB3 determining fuse (3RB3 determining fuse
protection) protection)
3RB3.2.-S.. 3 - 12 A 3RB3.2.-S.. 3 - 12 A 3RB3.2.-S.. 3 - 12 A 3RB3.2.-S.. 3 - 12 A
– 3RB3.2.-Q.. 6 - 25 A 3RB3.2.-Q.. 6 - 25 A 3RB3.2.-Q.. 6 - 25 A
Table 3- 8 Supplements to order numbers:
x = type of connection system 1 = screw connection

2 = spring-loaded terminals
y = type of control voltage 0 = 24 V DC acc. to EN 61131-2
2 = 110 to 230 AC
z = type of rated control voltage 4 = 48 to 480 V
6 = 48 to 600 V
SIRIUS Innovations
334 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3RF34 solid-state reversing contactors - type of coordination 1 and 2 conforming to IEC
Combining 3RF34 solid-state reversing contactors, type of coordination 1 (type 1), with 3RB3
overload relays
3RF34 solid-state reversing contactors can be combined with the following 3RB3 overload
relays in conformance with type of coordination 1 (type 1):
3RF3403-xBDyz 3.8 A 3RF3405-xBDyz 5.4 A 3RF3410-xBDyz 7.4 A

3RB3.2.-N.. 0.32 - 1.25 A 3RB3.2.-N.. 0.32 - 1.25 A 3RB3.2.-N.. 0.32 - 1.25 A
3RB3.2.-P.. 1 - 4 A 3RB3.2.-P.. 1 - 4 A 3RB3.2.-P.. 1 - 4 A
3RB3.2.-S.. 3 - 12 A 3RB3.2.-S.. 3 - 12 A 3RB3.2.-S.. 3 - 12 A
– – 3RB3.2.-Q.. 6 - 25 A
Combining 3RF34 solid-state reversing contactors, type of coordination 2 (type 2), with 3RB3
overload relays
3RF34 solid-state reversing contactors can be combined with the following 3RB3 overload
relays in conformance with type of coordination 2 (type 2):
3RF3403-xBDyz 3.8 A 3RF3405-xBDyz 5.4 A 3RF3410-xBDyz 7.4 A

3RB3.2.-N.. 0.32 - 1.25 A 3RB3.2.-N.. 0.32 - 1.25 A 3RB3.2.-N.. 0.32 - 1.25 A
(3RB3 determining fuse protection) (3RB3 determining fuse protection) (3RB3 determining fuse protection)
3RB3.2.-P.. 1 - 4 A 3RB3.2.-P.. 1 - 4 A 3RB3.2.-P.. 1 - 4 A
3RB3.2.-S.. 3 - 12 A 3RB3.2.-S.. 3 - 12 A 3RB3.2.-S.. 3 - 12 A
3RB3.2.-Q.. 6 - 25 A
Table 3- 11 Supplements to order numbers:
x = type of connection system 1 = screw connection

2 = spring-loaded terminals
y = type of control voltage 0 = 24 V DC acc. to EN 61131-2
2 = 110 to 230 AC
z = type of rated control voltage 4 = 48 to 480 V
6 = 48 to 600 V
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 335
3.5.3.2 Mounting accessories for the load feeder conforming to UL
SCCR short-circuit current ratings
SCCR short-circuit current ratings

● The SCCR (Short Circuit Current Rating) indicates the maximum permissible short-circuit
current for a switching device. A higher value can only be achieved in combination with
protection devices such as fuses or circuit breakers.
● This rating is required for mounting accessories in control cabinets conforming to
UL 508A. The switching device or switchgear assembly with the lowest value specifies
the value for the entire control cabinet.
A low value makes engineering the supply voltage for the control cabinet difficult.
● 3RF3 solid-state switching devices have a standard short-circuit value of 5 kA conforming
to UL 508.
● Tests with a short-circuit value of 65 kA (High Capacity Short Circuit Current Ratings)
have also been carried out. The UL reports include details of possible combinations with
Class CC and Class J fuses, as well as with a number of circuit breakers.
Fuses
Fuse ratings for solid-state contactors
Table 3- 12 Fuses for protecting against high short-circuit currents
Fuses
3RF34 Max. size [A] Class Type Current [kA] Voltage [V]
3RF3405-.BB 25 J TD 65 480
3RF3405-.BB 45 J TD 65 600
3RF3410-.BB 45 J TD 65 480
3RF3410-.BB 45 J TD 65 600
3RF3412-.BB 45 J TD 65 480
3RF3412-.BB 50 J TD 65 600
3RF3416-.BB 50 J TD 65 480
3RF3416-.BB 50 J TD 65 600
SIRIUS Innovations
336 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Fuse ratings for solid-state reversing contactors
Table 3- 13 Fuses for protecting against high short-circuit currents
Fuses
3RF34 Max. size [A] Class Type Current [kA] Voltage [V]
3RF3403-.BD 45 J TD 65 480
3RF3405-.BD 45 J TD 65 480
3RF3410-.BD 45 J TD 65 480
Circuit breakers for protecting against high short-circuit currents
Table 3- 14 Circuit breaker ratings for solid-state contactors
Fuses
3RF34 Max. size [A] Type Current [kA] Voltage [V]
3RF3405-.BB 4 3RV1721 50 480
3RF3405-.BB 4 3RV1721 10 600
3RF3410-.BB 8 3RV1721 5 600
3RF3412-.BB 8 3RV1721 5 600
3RF3416-.BB 8 3RV1721 5 600
3RF3416-.BB 10 3RV1721 5 600
Table 3- 15 Circuit breaker ratings for solid-state reversing contactors
Fuses
3RF3403-.BD 4 3RV1721 50 480
3RF3405-.BD 5 3RV1721 30 480
3RF3410-.BD 8 3RV1721 5 480
NOTICE
Short-circuit currents
High short-circuit currents can occur when combining solid-state switching devices with
protective devices such as the 3RB3.
For standard short-circuit current ratings and where protection against high short-circuit
currents (HIC) is concerned (corresponding to type 1), when combining solid-state
switching devices and protective devices such as the 3RB3, the device with the lowest
rated value is decisive as regards short-circuit fuse protection.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 337
Semiconductor fuses
SITOR fuses can be used as an alternative to UL fuses. Here too, the relevant data has
been included in the UL reports. Protection of the semiconductors is much better when
SITOR semiconductor fuses are used (comparable with type of coordination type 2).
The following applies to UL applications:
SITOR fuses are not feeder protective devices but only "special purpose fuses".
Table 3- 16 Fuse protection with semiconductor fuses

Fuse
3RF3405-.BB 16 3NE1813-0 65 480
3RF3405-.BB 32 3NE4101 65 480
3RF3405-.BB 25 3NE8715-1 65 480
3RF3405-.BB 25 3NE8015-1 65 480
3RF3405-.BB 35 3NE1803-0 65 600
3RF3405-.BB 50 3NE4117 65 600
3RF3405-.BB 50 3NE8717-1 65 600
3RF3405-.BB 63 3NE8018-1 65 600
3RF3410-.BB 35 3NE1803-0 65 600
3RF3410-.BB 50 3NE4117 65 600
3RF3410-.BB 50 3NE8717-1 65 600
3RF3410-.BB 63 3NE8018-1 65 600
3RF3412-.BB 63 3NE1818-0 65 480
3RF3412-.BB 50 3NE1817-0 65 600
3RF3412-.BB 50 3NE4117 65 600
3RF3412-.BB 50 3NE8717-1 65 600
3RF3412-.BB 63 3NE8018-1 65 600
3RF3412-.BB 80 3NE1020-2 65 600
3RF3416-.BB 63 3NE1818-0 65 480
3RF3416-.BB 50 3NE1817-0 65 600
3RF3416-.BB 50 3NE4117 65 600
3RF3416-.BB 50 3NE8717-1 65 600
3RF3416-.BB 63 3NE8018-1 65 600
3RF3416-.BB 80 3NE1020-2 65 600
3RF3403-.BD 35 3NE1803-0 65 480
3RF3403-.BD 50 3NE4117 65 480
3RF3403-.BD 50 3NE8717-1 65 480
3RF3403-.BD 63 3NE8018-1 65 480
3RF3405-.BD 35 3NE1803-0 65 480
3RF3405-.BD 50 3NE4117 65 480
3RF3405-.BD 50 3NE8717-1 65 480
3RF3405-.BD 63 3NE8018-1 65 480
3RF3410-.BD 35 3NE1803-0 65 480
3RF3410-.BD 50 3NE4117 65 480
3RF3410-.BD 50 3NE8717-1 65 480
3RF3410-.BD 63 3NE8018-1 65 480
SIRIUS Innovations
338 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3.6 Application planning
Notes about integration into load feeders

Thanks to their industrial connection system and type of design, SIRIUS solid-state switching
devices can be integrated into load feeders very easily.
However, particular attention must be paid to the circumstances of installation and ambient
conditions, as the performance of the solid-state switching devices is very much dependent
on these. Each design will impose certain restrictions which have to be taken into account.
Detailed information about minimum clearances can be found in the chapter titled Technical
data (Page 350), as well as in the product data sheets.
Despite the rugged nature of the power semiconductors used, solid-state switching devices
are sensitive to short circuits in the load feeder. Consequently, special precautions have to
be taken against irreparable damage as appropriate for the type of design.
The use of SITOR semiconductor fuses is generally recommended. These fuses provide
protection against irreparable damage in the event of a short circuit even in applications
where full use is being made of solid-state contactors.
Alternatively, in the case of a lower load, protection can also be provided by standard fuses
or miniature circuit breakers. This protection is achieved by overdimensioning the solid-state
switching devices accordingly. The technical data and the product data sheets contain
information about protection based on semiconductor fuses only as well as on the use of
SIRIUS devices with conventional protective devices.
Solid-state motor and reversing contactors can easily be combined with 3RV motor starter
protectors and circuit breakers, 3RB3 solid-state overload relays and 3RR2 current
monitoring relays from the SIRIUS modular system. As a result, fuseless and fused motor
feeders can be implemented easily and without taking up too much space.
Note
Running star-connected three-phase motors (particularly with power ratings < 1 kW) with
electromechanical contactors can cause significant electromagnetic interference. Such
interference, which exceeds permissible limit values, can cause solid-state switching devices
operating in the vicinity to malfunction.
In the case of high levels of electromagnetic interference we recommend equipping motors
up to 5.5 kW which are controlled using 3RT20 1 electromechanical contactors with EMC
surge suppressors. 3-phase RC interference suppression modules like the 3RT29 16-1PA1
(up to 400 V) provide the best filtering effect. Corresponding modules for the contactors are
listed in the product chapter titled "Contactors and contactor assemblies", under
"Accessories (Page 154)". Varistor interference suppression modules should not be used, as
they are not capable of filtering out rapid transients to the required extent.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 339
3.6.1 Application areas
3.6.1.1 Switching motors

The contactors for switching motors are "instantaneous switching", since this method is
particularly suited for inductive loads. The random distribution of the ON point across the
entire sine curve of the line voltage reduces faults to a minimum.
3.6.1.2 Use in a photovoltaic plant
Advantages of using solid-state reversing contactors in a photovoltaic plant:

● Actuation of motors to track the solar panels
● Very long service life and compact design
● Space-saving installation - normal contactors require double the space and would have to
be replaced too frequently
● Minimal cabling
No solutions using frequency converters have been implemented on thermal grounds and for
reasons of cost.
SIRIUS Innovations
340 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3.7 Mounting
3.7 Mounting
3.7.1 Mounting instructions
Mounting options
The solid-state switching devices are mounted by
● Snapping them onto a DIN rail or
● Screwing them to a base plate
Minimum clearances
!
5)
5)
!
!
!
!
Figure 3-11 Clearances for stand-alone assembly (dimensions in mm)
!
5)
5)
!
!
!
Figure 3-12 Clearances for mounting side by side (dimensions in mm)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 341
3.7 Mounting
Mounting position
r r r r
Figure 3-13 Mounting position
Drill hole spacing

Figure 3-14 Drill hole spacing for screw mounting (dimensions in mm)
SIRIUS Innovations
342 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3.7 Mounting
3.7.2 Screw mounting
Screw mounting
Table 3- 17 Mounting (solid-state switching devices)

torque 1.5 Nm), plain washers, and spring
washers, screw the solid-state contactor
tight into the designated drill holes
diagonally.
3.7.3 Snapping onto/off DIN rail (snap-on mounting)
Snapping onto DIN rail
Table 3- 18 Mounting (solid-state switching devices)

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 343
3.8 Connection
3.8 Connection
Connection system
All SIRIUS solid-state switching devices are characterized by the wide variety of connection
systems they support. You can choose from the following connection systems:
Screw-type connection system

Screw-type connection system is the standard technology for industrial switching devices.
Open terminals and a plus/minus screw are just two of its features. Two conductors up to
6 mm² or one conductor with a cross-section of 10 mm² can be flexibly connected in a single
terminal.
Spring-loaded connection system

This innovative technology does not use any screw connections. As a result, it is highly
resistant to vibration. Two conductors up to 2.5 mm² can be connected per terminal.
Reference

About conductor cross-sections of solid-state • Conductor cross-sections for solid-state
switching devices contactors (Page 352)
• Conductor cross-sections for solid-state
reversing contactors (Page 353)
3.8.1 Solid-state contactor
Terminals
Table 3- 19 Solid-state contactor
L1, L2, L3 Main circuit terminals infeed/line side
T1, T2, T3 Main circuit terminals outgoing feeder motor/load side
A1∼ Control supply voltage AC operation
A1+ Control supply voltage DC operation (plus)
A2- Control supply voltage DC operation (minus)
SIRIUS Innovations
344 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3.8 Connection
3.8.2 Solid-state reversing contactor
Terminals
Table 3- 20 Solid-state reversing contactor
L1, L2, L3 Main circuit terminals infeed/line side
T1, T2, T3 Main circuit terminals outgoing feeder motor/load side
A2∼ Control supply voltage AC operation, reference potential for A1/A3
A2- Control supply voltage DC operation (minus), reference potential for A1/A3
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 345
3.9 FAQs - Frequently asked questions
3.9 FAQs - Frequently asked questions
Troubleshooting/FAQs
Table 3- 21 Questions/Answers/Solutions
Frequently asked questions Answers/Solutions

Do solid-state switching devices No, solid-state switching devices are not capable of galvanic isolation. When
galvanically isolate the main current path? the supply is disconnected, a low leakage current (approx. 10 mA) still flows.
To carry out maintenance work on the load side, an additional switching
device with isolating features has to be used.
One frequency converter is to be used to Solid-state contactors are not suitable for switching loads in circuits with
control two motors. At high switching frequency converters or soft-starting devices. The non-sinusoidal voltage
frequencies, the load switches between waveform would damage important solid-state contactor components beyond
motors 1 and 2. repair.
Are solid-state contactors suitable for this
application?
Can current paths be connected in parallel Parallel connection of current paths is not permissible. As the contact
to increase current carrying capacity? resistances of the thyristors vary greatly, the current paths would be put under
significant asymmetrical load. As a result, the current path with the lowest
contact resistance would be subject to thermal overload.
Minimum load currents are given in the The minimum load current for 3RF34 solid-state switching devices is 0.5 A.
technical data for 3RF34 solid-state Undershooting the minimum load current can cause the solid-state contactor
contactors. to shut down in each half-wave prior to zero crossing of current (current cuts
What happens if these are undershot? in and out - similar to generalized phase control). Therefore, the minimum
value should not be undershot.
Proposed solution:
Connect a load (e.g. a resistive load) in parallel to increase the load current
accordingly.
Are there auxiliary switches for the solid- We often hear requests for the switching state to be fed back to the controller.
state contactors? Since for physical reasons there are no auxiliary switches connected to the
main circuit in the case of solid-state switching devices, it is not possible to
signal the switching state directly.
The state of the switching device or, better, that of the motor, can be signaled
to the controller via the 3RR2 current monitoring module.
The solid-state contactors can be expanded for load monitoring with the
screw-on 3RR2 current monitoring relays. These relays monitor the
connected load, providing a means of feeding back the state of the entire load
feeder to the controller.
SIRIUS Innovations
346 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3.10 Accessories
3.10 Accessories

For maximum flexibility, accessories can be added to the solid-state switching devices as
required, easily, and without the need for tools.
Table 3- 22 Accessories for solid-state switching devices
Accessories Solid-state contactor Solid-state reversing

contactor
Insulated 3-phase busbar system for spring-loaded ✓ –
connection for three solid-state contactors
Insulated 3-phase busbar system for spring-loaded ✓ –
connection for four solid-state contactors
3RT2916-4JA02 insulating stop for spring-loaded ✓ –
connection
Busbar adapter for 40 mm system ✓ ✓
Busbar adapter for 60 mm system ✓ ✓
Link module for motor starter protector ✓ ✓
3.10.2 Insulating stop
The 3RT2916-4JA02 insulating stop is designed for solid-state contactors with spring-loaded
connections and ensures that the conductor insulation is kept back in the case of conductor
cross-sections up to 1 mm2. An insulating stop unit comprises 5 pairs of terminals. As
illustrated below, it plugs into the spring-loaded cable entries (max. conductor cross-section
up to 2.5 mm2).
Figure 3-15 Insulating stop 3RT2916-4JA02
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 347
3.10 Accessories
Link modules to establish the electrical and mechanical connections between solid-state
contactor and motor starter protector are required if you wish to use load feeders. The link
module for attaching the 3RV2 motor starter protector attaches easily to the contactors.
Figure 3-16 Link module 3RA2921-1BA00 for motor starter protector
Reference

About link modules SIRIUS 3RA21/3RA22 link modules, under Link
modules (Page 611) section
About mounting solid-state contactors and motor Mounting/Disassembly (Page 349)
starter protectors
SIRIUS Innovations
348 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3.10 Accessories
Mounting/disassembly of the link module for the motor starter protector

Before a motor starter protector can be attached to the solid-state contactor/solid-state
reversing contactor, a link module must be installed between the two devices. The insulated
design of the devices means that grounding is not required.
Side-by-side mounting facilitates the installation of several devices one next to the other. The
devices can be mounted with screws or snapped onto DIN rails.
The example in the figure below illustrates the mounting of the link module on a solid-state
contactor.
1 Motor starter protector

2 Link module
3 Solid-state contactor
Figure 3-17 Setup: Motor starter protector, link module, solid-state contactor
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 349
3.11 Technical data
3.11 Technical data
3.11.1 General data
Table 3- 23 Solid-state switching devices - General data
General data
Ambient temperature
Operation, derating as of 40 °C °C - 25 ... + 60
Storage °C - 55 ... + 80
Installation altitude m 0 ...1000;
at > 1,000 m seek advice from Technical Assistance
(www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-assistance)
Shock resistance according to DIN IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 15/11
Vibration resistance; acc. to DIN IEC 60068-2-6 g 2
Degree of protection IP20
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
• Emitted interference acc. to DIN IEC 60947-4-2
- Conducted interference Class A for industrial environments1)
- Emitted high-frequency interference Class A for industrial environments
voltage
• Immunity2)
- Electrostatic discharge acc. to kV Contact discharge: 4; air discharge: 8; behavior criterion 2
DIN IEC 61000-4-2 (corresponds to
severity 3)
- Induced conducted RF fields MHz 0.15 ... 80, 140 dBμV, behavior criterion 1
acc. to DIN IEC 61000-4-6
- High-frequency, electromagnetic MHz 80 ... 3,000; test level 10 V/m; behavior criterion 1
fields acc. to DIN IEC 61000-4-3
- Burst acc. to DIN IEC 61000-4-4 kV 2/5.0 kHz; behavior criterion 1
- Surge acc. to DIN IEC 61000-4-53) kV Conductor - protective conductor 2; conductor - conductor:
1; behavior criterion 2
SIRIUS Innovations
350 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3.11 Technical data
General data
Connection type
• Solid-state contactor Screw-type and spring-loaded
• Solid-state reversing contactor Screw-type connection system
Permissible mounting position r r
r r
Insulation strength at 50/60 Hz V rms 4000

(main/control circuit to floor)
1) These products are Class A products. Their use in residential areas can cause radio frequency interference. In this
case, the user can be held liable for taking additional measures to attenuate such interference.
2) Running star-connected three-phase motors (particularly < 1 kW) with electromechanical contactors can cause
significant electromagnetic interference. Such interference can cause solid-state reversing contactors being used in the
vicinity to malfunction. Provision should be made for appropriate EMC surge suppressors on the sources of interference.
Suitable surge suppressors are described in Chapter 3 of Catalog LV1.
3) For solid-state reversing contactors, the following applies: To maintain the values a 3TX7 462-3L surge suppressor (see
Catalog LV1) should be used between phases L1 and L3, as close as possible to the reversing contactor.
Reference

About the environments in which solid-state Application environment (Page 319)
switching devices are used
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 351
3.11 Technical data
3.11.2 Conductor cross-sections for solid-state contactors
Conductor cross-sections for solid-state contactors
Table 3- 24 Connection of main contacts with screw-type connection system or spring-loaded connection system
Connection, main contacts Screw connection Spring-loaded

connection
• Solid mm² 2 x (1.5 to 2.5), 2 x (1.5 to 6) 2 x (0.5 to 2.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (1.5 to 2.5), 2 x (1.5 to 6) 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 1 x 10 2 x (0.5 to 2.5)
• Solid or stranded AWG 2 x (14 to 10) 2 x (18 to 14)
Stripped length mm 10 10
Connection screw M4 —
Tightening torque Nm 2 ... 2.5 —
D 5 to 6 mm/PZ 2 Ib in 18 ... 22 —
Table 3- 25 Connection of main contacts and control contacts with screw-type connection system or spring-loaded
connection system
Connection, auxiliary contacts, and control Screw connection Spring-loaded

contacts connection
Conductor cross-section with end sleeve mm² 1 x (0.5 to 2.5), 0.5 ... 2.5
Conductor cross-section without end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.0)
AWG 20 ... 12 20 ... 12
Stripped length mm 7 10
Connection screw M3 —
Tightening torque Nm 0.5 ... 0.6 —
D 3.5/PZ 1 Ib in 4.5 ... 5.3 —
Reference

About connection systems and terminal Connection (Page 344)
designations
SIRIUS Innovations
352 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3.11 Technical data
3.11.3 Conductor cross-sections for solid-state reversing contactors
Conductor cross-sections for solid-state reversing contactors
Table 3- 26 Connection of main terminals with screw-type connection system
Connection, main contacts Screw-type connection system

• Solid mm² 2 x (1.5 to 2.5), 2 x (1.5 to 6)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (1.5 to 2.5), 2 x (1.5 to 6)
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm² 1 x 10
• Solid or stranded AWG 2 x (14 to 10)
Stripped length mm 10
Connection screw M4
Tightening torque Nm 2 ... 2.5
D 5 to 6 mm/PZ 2 Ib.in 18 ... 22
Table 3- 27 Connection of main contacts and control contacts with screw-type connection system
Connection, auxiliary contacts, and control Screw-type connection system

contacts
Conductor cross-section with end sleeve mm² 1 x (0.5 to 2.5)
Conductor cross-section without end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.5 to 1.0)
AWG 20 ... 12
Stripped length mm 7
Connection screw M3
Tightening torque Nm 0.5 ... 0.6
D 3.5/PZ 1 Ib.in 4.5 ... 5.3
Reference

designations
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 353
3.11 Technical data
3.11.4 Solid-state contactors 3RF34, 3-phase, screw connection
Solid-state contactors - instantaneous switching - 2-phase controlled
Table 3- 28 Rated operational voltage Ue 48 to 480 V
3RF3405- 3RF3410- 3RF3412- 3RF3416-

1BB04 1BB04 1BB04 1BB04
Connection type Screw connection
Rated operational current Ie A 5.2 9.2 12.5 16
Rated power at Ie and Ue 400 V kW 2.2 4.0 5.5 7.5
Rated control supply voltage Us V DC 24 acc to. EN 61131-2
Weight approx. kg 0.250 0.380 0.380 0.380
3RF3405- 3RF3410- 3RF3412- 3RF3416-

1BB24 1BB24 1BB24 1BB24
Rated control supply voltage Us V AC 110 to 230
Weight approx. kg 0.250 0.380 0.380 0.380
Table 3- 30 Rated operational voltage Ue 48 to 600 V, blocking voltage 1,600 V
3RF3405- 3RF3410- 3RF3412- 3RF3416-

1BB06 1BB06 1BB06 1BB06
Weight approx. kg 0.250 0.380 0.380 0.380
3RF3405- 3RF3410- 3RF3412- 3RF3416-

1BB26 1BB26 1BB26 1BB26
Weight approx. kg 0.250 0.380 0.380 0.380
SIRIUS Innovations
354 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3.11 Technical data
3.11.5 Solid-state contactors 3RF34, 3-phase, spring-loaded terminals
Solid-state contactors - instantaneous switching - 2-phase controlled
3RF3405- 3RF3410- 3RF3412- 3RF3416-

1BB04 1BB04 1BB04 1BB04
Connection type Spring-loaded terminals
Weight approx. kg 0.250 0.380 0.380 0.380
3RF3405- 3RF3410- 3RF3412- 3RF3416-

1BB24 1BB24 1BB24 1BB24
Weight approx. kg 0.250 0.380 0.380 0.380
3RF3405- 3RF3410- 3RF3412- 3RF3416-

1BB06 1BB06 1BB06 1BB06
Weight approx. kg 0.250 0.380 0.380 0.380
3RF3405- 3RF3410- 3RF3412- 3RF3416-

1BB26 1BB26 1BB26 1BB26
Weight approx. kg 0.250 0.380 0.380 0.380
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 355
3.11 Technical data
Reference

designations
3.11.6 Solid-state contactors - fuseless design with CLASS 10 motor starter protector
Fuseless design with CLASS 10 motor starter protector
Table 3- 36 Main circuit
Order no. 3RF34 05-.BB.. 3RF34 10-.BB.. 3RF34 12-.BB.. 3RF34 16-.BB..
Rated operational current IAC-531) acc. to IEC 60947-4-2
At 40 °C A 5.2 (4.5) 2) 9.2 12.5 16
UL/CSA at 50 °C A 4.6 (4.0) 2) 8.4 11.5 14
At 60 °C A 4.2 (3.5) 2 7.6 10.5 12.5
Power loss at IAC-53 at 40 °C W 10 (8) 2) 16 22 28
Short-circuit protection with type of coordination "1" at operational voltage Ue up to 440 V
Motor starter protector Type 3RV2 021-1GA10 3RV2 021-1JA10 3RV2 021-1KA10 3RV2 021-4AA10
Iq kA 50 5 5 3
1) Use overvoltage protection device; max. cut-off-voltage 6,000 V; min. energy handling capability 100 J
2) The reduced values in brackets apply in the case of a directly mounted motor starter protector combined with side-by-
side mounting.
SIRIUS Innovations
356 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3.11 Technical data
3.11.7 Solid-state contactors - fused design with 3RB30 overload relay
Fused design with directly mounted 3RB30 overload relay
Order no. 3RF34 05-.BB.4 3RF34 05-.BB.6 3RF34 10-.BB..

At 40 °C A 4 (3.5) 2) — 7.8
UL/CSA at 50 °C A 3.6 (3.2) 2) — 7
At 60 °C A 3.2 (2.9) 2 — 6.2
Power loss at IAC-53 at 40 °C W 7 (6) 2) — 13
Minimum load current A 0.5 — 0.5
Max. leakage current mA 10 — 10
Rated peak withstand current Itsm A 200 600 600
I2t value A 2s 200 1800 1800
Order no. 3RF34 12-.BB.4 3RF34 12-.BB.6 3RF34 16-.BB..

At 40 °C A 9.5 — 11
UL/CSA at 50 °C A 8.5 — 10
At 60 °C A 7.6 — 9
Power loss at IAC-53 at 40 °C W 16 — 18
Minimum load current A 0.5 — 0.5
Max. leakage current mA 10 — 10
I2t value A 2s 7200 6600 6600
1) Use overvoltage protection device; max. cut-off-voltage 6,000 V; min. energy handling capability 100 J
side mounting.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 357
3.11 Technical data
3.11.8 Solid-state contactors - main circuit, 2-phase controlled
Solid-state contactor, 2-phase controlled
Order no. 3RF34..- BB.4 3RF34..- BB.6

Controlled phases 2-phase 2-phase
Rated operational voltage Ue
Operating range V 40 ... 506 40 ... 660
Rated frequency Hz 50 / 60 ± 10 % 50 / 60 ± 10 %
Rated insulation voltage Us V 600 600
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6 6
Blocking voltage V 1200 1600
Voltage gradient V/μs 1000 1000
3.11.9 Solid-state contactors with control circuit
Solid-state contactor with control circuit
Table 3- 40 Control circuit A1 - A2:
Order no. 3RF34..- BB0. 3RF34..- BB2.

Method of operation DC operation AC operation
Rated control supply voltage Us V DC 24 acc to. EN 61131-2 AC 110 to 230
Rated control supply voltage, max. Us V DC 30 AC 253
Rated frequency of control supply voltage Hz — 50 / 60 ± 10 %
Typical actuating current mA 20 15
Response voltage V 15 90
Drop-out voltage V 5 < 40
Switching times
• ON-delay ms 1 5
• OFF-delay ms 1 + max. one half-wave 30 + max. one half-wave
SIRIUS Innovations
358 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3.11 Technical data
3.11.10 Solid-state reversing contactor with integration of four current paths to form a
single reversing circuit
Solid-state reversing contactor - instantaneous switching - 2-phase controlled - screw connection
Order no. 3RF34 03-1BD04 3RF34 05-1BD04 3RF34 10-1BD04

Rated operational current Ie A 3.8 5.4 7.4
Rated power at Ie and Ue 400 V kW 1.5 2.2 3.0
Weight per PU approx. kg 0.280 0.280 0.410
Order no. 3RF34 03-1BD24 3RF34 05-1BD24 3RF34 10-1BD24

Rated operational current Ie A 3.8 5.4 7.4
Rated power at Ie and Ue 400 V kW 1.5 2.2 3.0
Weight per PU approx. kg 0.280 0.280 0.410
3.11.11 Solid-state contactors - fuseless design with CLASS 10 motor starter protector
Fuseless design with CLASS 10 motor starter protector
Order no. 3RF34 03-.BD.4 3RF34 05-.BD.4 3RF34 10-.BD.4

At 40 °C A 3.8 (3.4) 5.4 (4.8) 7.4
UL/CSA at 50 °C A 3.5 (3.1) 5 (4.3) 6.8
At 60 °C A 3.2 (2.8) 4.6 (3.8) 6.2
Power loss at IAC-53 at 40 °C W 7 (6) 9 (8) 13
Short-circuit protection with type of coordination "1" at operational voltage Ue up to 440 V
Motor starter protector Type 3RV2 021-1FA10 3RV2 021-1GA10 3RV2 021-1JA10
Iq kA 50 50 10
side mounting.
2) To reduce the risk of an inter-phase short circuit due to overvoltage, we recommend connecting a 3TX7 462-3L type
varistor between phases L1 and L3, as close as possible to the switching device. We recommend a design with
semiconductor protection to provide short-circuit protection.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 359
3.11 Technical data
3.11.12 Solid-state contactor - fused design with 3RB30 overload relay
Fused design with directly mounted 3RB30 overload relay
Order no. 3RF34 03-.BD.4 3RF34 05-.BD.4 3RF34 10-.BD.4

At 40 °C A 3.8 (3.4) 5.4 (4.8) 7.4
UL/CSA at 50 °C A 3.5 (3.1) 5 (4.3) 6.8
At 60 °C A 3.2 (2.8) 4.6 (3.8) 6.2
Power loss at IAC-53 at 40 °C W 7 (6) 9 (8) 13
Minimum load current A 0.5 0.5 0.5
Max. leakage current mA 10 10 10
I2t value A 2s 1800 1800 1800
side mounting.
2) To reduce the risk of an inter-phase short circuit due to overvoltage, we recommend connecting a 3TX7 462-3L type
varistor between phases L1 and L3, as close as possible to the switching device. We recommend a design with
semiconductor protection to provide short-circuit protection.
3.11.13 Solid-state reversing contactor - main circuit, 2-phase controlled
Solid-state reversing contactor, 2-phase controlled
Order no. 3RF34..- BD.4

Controlled phases 2-phase
Rated operational voltage
Operating range Ue V 40 ... 506
Rated frequency Hz 50 / 60 ± 10 %
Rated insulation voltage Us V 600
Blocking voltage V 1200
Voltage gradient V/μs 1000
SIRIUS Innovations
360 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3.11 Technical data
3.11.14 Solid-state reversing contactor with control circuit
Solid-state reversing contactor with control circuit
Table 3- 46 Control circuit A1 - A2:
Order no. 3RF34..- BD0. 3RF34..- BD2.

Method of operation DC operation AC operation
Rated control supply voltage Us V DC 24 acc to. EN 61131-2 AC 110 to 230
Rated control supply voltage, max. Us V DC 30 AC 253
Rated frequency of control supply voltage Hz — 50 / 60 ± 10 %
Typical actuating current mA 20 15
Response voltage V 15 90
Drop-out voltage V 5 < 40
Switching times
• ON-delay ms 5 20
• OFF-delay ms 5 + max. one half-wave 10 + max. one half-wave
• Locking time ms 60 - 100 50 - 100
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 361
3.11 Technical data
3.11.15 Characteristics - switching frequency/load
3.11.15.1 Characteristics for the solid-state contactor
Switching frequency characteristic for the solid-state contactor

Motor's operating data
Ia
Ie
Ib
NSB0_01815a
ta tb
tED tp
ts
Ia Motor's direct starting current

Ie Motor's rated operational current
Ib Motor's operational current
ta Motor's start time
tb Operating time
tp Idle time
tED ON period
ts Operating cycle
t ED
ED [%] = t × 100%
s
Figure 3-18 Switching frequency characteristics - load diagram
SIRIUS Innovations
362 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3.11 Technical data
,D,H ,E,H

]>K@

W('>V@
1 ta = 0.05 s
2 ta = 0.1 s
3 ta = 0.2 s
4 ta = 0.4 s
5 ta = 0.8 s
6 ta = 1.6 s
7 ta = 3.2 s
Figure 3-19 Maximum permissible switching frequency z depending on the starting time ta and the ON period tED for
motors with a starting current of 4 to 7.2 times the rated current and with full load 1)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 363
3.11 Technical data
,D,H ,E,H

]>K@

W('>V@
1 ta = 0.05 s
2 ta = 0.1 s
3 ta = 0.2 s
4 ta = 0.4 s
5 ta = 0.8 s
6 ta = 1.6 s
7 ta = 3.2 s
motors with a starting current of 4 to 7.2 times the rated current and 60% load 1)
1)The dashed curves apply to the high currents during operation with a motor starter
protector.
SIRIUS Innovations
364 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3.11 Technical data
,D,H ,E,H

]>K@

W('>V@
1 ta = 0.05 s
2 ta = 0.1 s
3 ta = 0.2 s
4 ta = 0.4 s
5 ta = 0.8 s
6 ta = 1.6 s
7 ta = 3.2 s
motors with a starting current of up to 4 times the rated current and with full load
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 365
3.11 Technical data
,D,H ,E,H

]>K@

W('>V@
1 ta = 0.05 s
2 ta = 0.1 s
3 ta = 0.2 s
4 ta = 0.4 s
5 ta = 0.8 s
6 ta = 1.6 s
7 ta = 3.2 s
motors with a starting current of up to 4 times the rated current and 60% load
SIRIUS Innovations
366 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3.11 Technical data
3.11.15.2 Characteristics for the solid-state reversing contactor
Switching frequency characteristic for the solid-state reversing contactor

Motor's operating data
Ia
Ie
Ib
NSB0_01815a
ta tb
tED tp
ts
Ia Direct-on-line starting current

Ie Rated operational current
Ib Operating current
ta Start time
ta Operating time
tp Idle time
tED ON period
ts Operating cycle
t ED
ED [%] = t × 100%
s
Figure 3-23 Switching frequency characteristics - load diagram
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 367
3.11 Technical data
,D,H ,E,H

]>K@

W('>V@
1 ta = 0.05 s
2 ta = 0.1 s
3 ta = 0.2 s
4 ta = 0.4 s
5 ta = 0.8 s
6 ta = 1.6 s
7 ta = 3.2 s
motors with a starting current of 4 to 7.2 times the rated current and with full load
SIRIUS Innovations
368 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3.11 Technical data
,D,H ,E,H

]>K@

W('>V@
1 ta = 0.05 s
2 ta = 0.1 s
3 ta = 0.2 s
4 ta = 0.4 s
5 ta = 0.8 s
6 ta = 1.6 s
7 ta = 3.2 s
motors with a starting current of 4 to 7.2 times the rated current and 60% load
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 369
3.11 Technical data
,D,H ,E,H

]>K@

W('>V@
1 ta = 0.05 s
2 ta = 0.1 s
3 ta = 0.2 s
4 ta = 0.4 s
5 ta = 0.8 s
6 ta = 1.6 s
7 ta = 3.2 s
motors with a starting current of up to 4 times the rated current and with full load
SIRIUS Innovations
370 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3.11 Technical data
,D,H ,E,H

]>K@

W('>V@
1 ta = 0.05 s
2 ta = 0.1 s
3 ta = 0.2 s
4 ta = 0.4 s
5 ta = 0.8 s
6 ta = 1.6 s
7 ta = 3.2 s
motors with a starting current of up to 4 times the rated current and 60% load
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 371
Note
3.12.1 Solid-state switching devices
Solid-state contactor

ෘ
[

Figure 3-28 Solid-state contactor
Solid-state reversing contactor

ෘ
[

Figure 3-29 Solid-state reversing contactor
SIRIUS Innovations
372 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Accessories
Link module 3RA2921-1BA00 for 3RV20 motor starter protector

44.8
14.4 14.4 72.9
43.1
20.7
Figure 3-30 Link module for motor starter protector
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 373

SIRIUS Innovations
374 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3RF34 solid-state switching devices

3RF34..-.BB2.
/ / / $a $a
7 7 7
Figure 3-32 Solid-state contactor, 3-phase, AC control voltage
3RF34..-.BD2.
/ / / $a $a $a
7 7 7
Figure 3-33 Solid-state reversing contactor, 3-phase, AC control voltage
3RF34..-.BB0.
/ / / $ $
7 7 7
Figure 3-34 Solid-state contactor, 3-phase, DC control voltage
3RF34..-.BD0.
/ / / $ $ $
7 7 7
Figure 3-35 Solid-state reversing contactor, 3-phase, DC control voltage
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 375
Example circuit diagrams

The figures below show the example circuit diagrams for the solid-state contactors and solid-
state reversing contactors
Example circuit diagram for the solid-state contactor for motorized loads
13(+]9
/
/ '&9
/
/
/
1
3(
)
) ) )
U
6
5 2Q
4
/ / /
$
$
7 7 7
0
0
F1 - 3 Main circuit fuses (solid-state contactor recommended)
F4 Control circuit fuse
K1 3RF34 solid-state contactor for motorized loads
M1 Motor
R1 Varistor 3TX7 462-3L (recommended to maintain "surge" immunity)
S1 "ON" switch
Figure 3-36 Example circuit diagram: Fused motor feeder with solid-state contactor for motorized
loads with DC control circuit
SIRIUS Innovations
376 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Example circuit diagram for the solid-state reversing contactor

13(+]9
/
/
/
1
3(
) ) ) )
U
6
5 /HIW
4
/ / / 6
$a 5LJKW
$a
$a
7 7 7
0
0
F1 - 3 Main circuit fuses (solid-state contactor recommended)
F4 Control circuit fuse
K1 3RF34 solid-state reversing contactor
M1 Motor
R1 Varistor 3TX7 462-3L (recommended to maintain "surge" immunity)
S1 "Left" switch
S2 "Right" switch
Figure 3-37 Example circuit diagram: Fused motor feeder with solid-state reversing contactor with AC
control circuit
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 377
SIRIUS Innovations
378 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors 4
4.1 Standards
3RV2 motor starter protectors meet the requirements of the following standards:
Table 4- 1 Applicable standards
Applications Applicable standards

3RV2 motor starter protectors IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100)
IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101)
3RV2 motor starter protectors1) UL 508
3RV27/28 circuit breakers UL 489
Motor starter protectors IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
Auxiliary switches IEC 60947-5-1/VDE 0660 Part 200
Terminal designations DIN EN 50 011
Isolating function according to features • IEC 60947-2
of main and EMERGENCY OFF • IEC 60204 (VDE 0113 Part 1)
switches
Isolating features DIN EN 60947-1
Touch protection finger-safe DIN EN 50274
Degree of protection IP20 IEC 60529
1) Without 3RV27/28
Reference
Other standards that 3RV2 motor starter protectors conform to are listed in the chapter titled
Technical data (Page 453). SIRIUS components have been approved by a whole range of
bodies for various sectors (shipbuilding, etc.). An up-to-date list of approvals appears in
Chapter 20 of the Siemens Low Voltage LV1 Catalog, and more information, as well as an
option to download certificates, can be obtained on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 379
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors
4.2.1 Introduction
Applications
3RV2 motor starter protectors are compact current-limiting devices which have been
optimized for load feeders. They are used for switching and protecting three-phase motors
and other loads. The scalable setting ranges mean that a suitable motor starter protector can
provide protection for all standard motors, even at ambient temperatures of > 60 °C. All
3RV2 motor starter protectors are fitted with a rotary operating mechanism.
Functions
The motor starter protectors protect loads against overloads and short circuits. They also
feature a lockable switch to facilitate manual switching on and off (e.g. in the event of repair
work).
System integration
In both electrical and mechanical terms the motor starter protectors are compatible with 3RT
contactors, 3RF solid-state contactors, and 3RW soft starters. They can be integrated in the
feeder by means of direct mounting. 3RV2 motor starter protectors are available in two sizes,
S00 and S0.
Connection systems
The motor starter protectors are available with the following connection system options:
● Screw-type connection system (up to 40 A)
● Spring-loaded connection system (up to 32 A)
● Ring cable lug connection system (up to 32 A)
Accessories
The accessories have been tailored to the motor starter protectors; they can be mounted
easily and without the need for tools.
SIRIUS Innovations
380 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.2.2 Versions
Device versions
● Motor starter protectors, standard version (3RV20)
Overload and short-circuit protection
● Motor starter protectors with relay function (3RV21)
Short-circuit protection and auto-RESET in the event of overload in one device
● MSP for starter combinations (3RV23)
Short-circuit protection only
Combined with overload relay, large setting ranges and auto-RESET
● MSP for transformer protection (3RV24)
Standard version for transformers
● Approved devices for North America according to UL489 (3RV27/3RV28)
Overload/short-circuit protection and transformer protection
Sizes
3RV2 motor starter protectors are available in two sizes, S00 and S0.
The table below lists the sizes and the corresponding maximum rated current at a voltage of
400 V AC. The last column of the table indicates the maximum power of the three-phase
motor which is suitable for the relevant size.
Table 4- 2 Motor starter protector sizes
Size Width Max. rated current Power of three-phase motor

S00 45 mm1) 16 A 7.5 kW
S0 45 mm1) 40 A2) 18.5 kW
1) 3RV21: 65 mm
2) 3RV20 and 3RV23 only
Number of poles
3RV2 motor starter protectors have 3 poles.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 381
4.2.3 Applications
General
3RV2 motor starter protectors are used for switching and protecting the following loads:
● Three-phase motors up to 18.5 kW at 400 V AC
● Loads with rated currents of up to 40 A
Special applications
The various 3RV2 motor starter protectors are suitable for:
● Short-circuit protection
● Motor protection (also with overload relay function)
● System protection
● Short-circuit protection for starter combinations
● Transformer protection
● As main and EMERGENCY OFF switches
● Use in IT systems
● Switching direct current
● Hazardous areas (ATEX)
● Use as Branch Circuit Protection Device (BCPD) according to UL (3RV27/28)
Reference

About application areas Configuration (Page 391)
SIRIUS Innovations
382 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.2.4 Motor starter protectors

1 Terminals:
Up to two conductors with different cross-sections can be connected for the main and auxiliary
circuits. The auxiliary circuit can be connected using either screw terminals or spring-loaded
terminals. Some device versions are also available with ring cable lug connection.
2 Rotary operating mechanism:
For switching on and off, displaying a possible tripping operation, integrated locking device
3 Label
4 Connection for mounting contactors, solid-state contactors, and soft starters in various
connection systems:
• Direct mounting using link modules
• Separately using connecting cables
5 TEST function:
Facilitates the testing of the release mechanism.
6 Motor current setting:
The large rotary button provides an easy means of setting the device to the rated motor current.
Figure 4-1 Equipment, 3RV20 motor starter protectors
A sealable transparent cover can be optionally mounted (accessory). The cover prevents the
motor setting being adjusted (this option is not available for 3RV23/3RV27/3RV28).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 383

SIRIUS motor starter protectors boast the following technical advantages:
5-10% less power consumption than previous solutions • Reduced temperature rise in the control cabinet
• Cost savings during operation
Uniform connection systems: The right connection for every application (e.g. operational
• Screw connection reliability (vibration-resistant, non-temperature-
specific, etc.) and less wiring thanks to spring-loaded
• Spring-loaded connection
connection system)
• Ring cable lug connection
Link modules for any device combination from the SIRIUS Fast, error-free installation for screw-type connection
modular system system and spring-loaded connection system
Motor starter protectors up to 40 A (18.5 kW) in 45 mm width Space and cost savings
Motor starter protector combined with undervoltage release Safety solution can be implemented with just one
and contactor applicable as Cat. 3 feeder switching device
Factory-fitted integrated auxiliary switches Reduced installation complexity
Joint range of accessories for size S00 and S0 Easy to configure, reduced stockkeeping
Current values graded in accordance with all standard motors • The right motor starter protector for every standard
motor
• Integrated protection even for ambient temperatures
> 60 °C
Bimetals with extreme long-term stability Operational reliability over many years
Compatible for use in all infeed systems (combs, 3RA6, Maximum flexibility in terms of power infeed
SIRIUS infeed, 8US)
SIRIUS Innovations
384 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01

Typical combinations for fuseless and fused designs have been fully tested and approved.
Reference
About the possible combinations of standard System overview, under Device combinations
products from the SIRIUS modular system (Page 70)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 385
4.4 Functions
4.4 Functions
3RV2 motor starter protectors meet the requirements for motor and system protection
according to IEC 60947-2 / DIN VDE 0660-101.
Motor and system protection is achieved using the following functions:
● Overload protection
● Short-circuit protection
● Phase loss sensitivity
4.4.1 Overload and short-circuit protection
Overload protection
The current of the motor requiring protection is set on the setting scale. This sets the
integrated overload protection to the motor current.
The short-circuit release is factory-set to a value that is 13 times the rated current of the
motor starter protector (upper setting scale). This ensures problem-free ramping-up and safe
protection for the motor.
Release
3RV2 motor starter protectors are fitted with the following releases:
● Inverse-time delayed thermal overload release (except for the 3RV23)
● Instantaneous short-circuit release
The overload releases can be set to the load feeder.
Note
Motor starter protectors for transformer protection
The motor starter protectors and circuit breakers for transformer protection (3RV24, 3RV28)
are set to 20 times the rated current to prevent undesirable tripping due to the high inrush
current.
4.4.1.1 Tripping classes

3RV20/3RV21 motor starter protectors conform to CLASS 10 according to IEC 60947-4-1.
The tripping times according to IEC 60947-4-1 are as follows:
SIRIUS Innovations
386 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.4 Functions
Table 4- 3 Tripping times dependent upon tripping classes according to standard IEC 60947-4-1
Tripping class Tripping time tA in s at

7.2 x Ie from cold
CLASS 10 A 2 < tA ≤ 10
CLASS 10 4 < tA ≤ 10
CLASS 20 6 < tA ≤ 20
CLASS 30 9 < tA ≤ 30
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 387
4.4 Functions
4.4.1.2 Tripping characteristics

The time-current characteristic, the current-limiting characteristics, and the I2t characteristics
have been determined according to DIN VDE 0660/IEC 60947.
In the case of the time-current characteristic, the tripping characteristic of the inverse-time
delayed overload release (thermal overload release) applies for direct current and alternating
current with frequencies from 0 Hz up to 400 Hz.
The characteristics apply to the cold state; at operating temperature, the tripping times of the
thermal releases drop to approximately 25%.
In normal operation the device must be loaded at 3 poles. You are recommended to switch
all 3 main current paths in series to protect single-phase or DC loads.
With both 2- and 3-pole loading, the maximum deviation of the tripping times at and above 3
times the current setting is ± 20% and thus meets the requirements of DIN VDE 0165.
The tripping characteristics for the instantaneous, electromagnetic overcurrent releases
(short-circuit releases, 'n' releases) are based on the rated current In that is also the upper
value of the setting range for motor starter protectors with adjustable overcurrent releases. If
the current is set to a lower value the tripping current of the 'n' release is increased by a
correspondingly higher multiple.
Frequency dependence of the short-circuit release

The characteristics of the electromagnetic overcurrent release apply for frequencies of
50 Hz/60 Hz. For lower frequencies up to 16 2/3 Hz, for higher frequencies up to 400 Hz,
and for direct current, correction factors have to be taken into account accordingly.
The following characteristic curve shows the frequency dependence of the short-circuit
release.
,>@
40
30
20
10
-10
-20
-30
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 I>+]@
ΔI Change in operating current

f Frequency
SIRIUS Innovations
388 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.4 Functions
The operating current increases by approx. 40% in the case of direct voltage.
W>V@

PLQ

1

2

[,Q

,>$@
t Opening time
I Current
① 3-pole load CLASS 10
② 2-pole load CLASS 10
Figure 4-2 Schematic circuit diagram of the time-current characteristic curve for 3RV20
The characteristic curve reproduced above for the motor starter protector relates to a specific
setting range. It is, however, also valid as a schematic circuit diagram for motor starter
protectors with other current ranges.
Reference
Time-current characteristics, current-limiting characteristics, and I2t characteristics can be
requested on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support) via
"Technical Assistance".
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 389
4.4 Functions
4.4.2 Phase loss sensitivity

The phase loss sensitivity of the motor starter protector ensures that it trips in good time in
the event of a phase failure or significant phase unbalance. The motor starter protector
tripping prevents overcurrents from occurring in the remaining phases.
4.4.3 Protecting single-phase loads or DC loads

Under normal operating conditions, the three poles of the device are loaded. You are
recommended to switch all 3 main current paths of the motor starter protector in series to
protect single-phase or DC loads.
4.4.4 Test function

The TEST slide can be used to check whether the operational motor starter protector is
working correctly (not on the 3RV23/3RV27/3RV28). The tripping of the motor starter
protector can be simulated by moving the slide.
SIRIUS Innovations
390 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.5 Configuration
4.5 Configuration

The short-circuit releases on 3RV2 motor starter protectors isolate the faulty load feeder
from the supply system (three phases) in the event of a short circuit, thereby preventing
further damage.
With a short-circuit breaking capacity of 55 kA or 100 kA in the case of a voltage of
400 V AC, the motor starter protectors count as short-circuit-proof as long as higher short-
circuit currents are not anticipated in their installation location.
Backup fuses are only necessary if the short-circuit current at the installation location
exceeds the motor starter protectors' short-circuit breaking capacity.
The short-circuit breaking capacity in the case of different voltages and the dimensioning of a
fuse (if it is required) are described in the chapter titled Short-circuit breaking capacity
(Page 462).
4.5.2 Motor protection

The tripping characteristic of 3RV20/3RV21 motor starter protectors is primarily designed for
protecting three-phase motors.
The rated current In of the motor to be protected is set on the setting scale. The short-circuit
release is factory-set to a value that is 13 times the rated current of the motor starter
protector. This ensures problem-free ramping-up and safe protection for the motor.
The phase loss sensitivity of the motor starter protector ensures that it trips at the right time
in the event of phase loss and the resulting overcurrents in the other phases.
4.5.3 System protection

3RV20 and 3RV21 motor starter protectors are also suitable for protecting systems.
To prevent premature tripping caused by phase loss sensitivity, the load applied to each of
the three current paths must always be the same. With single-phase loads, the current paths
must be connected in series.
3RV27 und 3RV28 circuit breakers are also suitable for system protection; they also have
approval according to UL 489 or CSA C22.2 No.5-02.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 391
4.5 Configuration
4.5.4 Motor protection with overload relay function

3RV21 motor starter protectors with overload relay function have the same overload and
short-circuit release characteristic as 3RV20 motor starter protectors. However, the overload
releases have no effect on the motor starter protectors' breaker latching mechanism. In the
event of an overload, the motor starter protector remains on.
The overload release is linked to two auxiliary contacts (1 NO contact + 1 NC contact)
mounted on the side; these are switched in the event of an overload. The auxiliary contacts
can be evaluated or can be used to disconnect a downstream contactor. The auxiliary
contacts are reset automatically once the motor starter protector has cooled down.
CAUTION
In the overload range the motor starter protector with overload relay function does not
protect itself. Provision has to be made, therefore, to ensure that the current is safely
disconnected by a downstream switching device such as a contactor.
Note
Fixed connection: Auxiliary contacts with motor starter protector
The auxiliary contacts are connected to the right-hand side of the motor starter protector.
The connection is fixed and cannot be removed.
This means that auxiliary releases cannot be mounted on the right-hand side of 3RV21
motor starter protectors with overload relay function.
Reference
About motor starter protector operation Operation (Page 404)
4.5.5 Short-circuit protection for starter combinations
3RV23 MSP for starter combinations

3RV23 MSPs for starter combinations are motor starter protectors without overload releases.
They are always used in conjunction with a contactor and overload relay, as the motor
starter protector alone is not able to protect the motor and itself against overloads.
Function
In the event of an overload, the overload relay trips the contactor. The motor starter protector
remains on. The motor starter protector will only trip as well in the event of a short circuit in
the feeder.
Like the motor starter protectors for motor protection, the short-circuit releases are set to a
fixed value of 13 times the rated current of the device.
Advantage
In the event of tripping due to overload, an automatic or manual reset can be performed
without having to open the control cabinet.
SIRIUS Innovations
392 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.5 Configuration
4.5.6 Transformer protection
Protection against inrush currents

When control transformers are protected on the primary side, the high inrush currents
generated at the time the transformers are switched on often cause spurious tripping in the
protective devices. 3RV24 MSPs for transformer protection therefore have short-circuit
releases which are factory-set to a fixed value of approx. 20 times the rated current (upper
value on the setting scale). This enables transformers whose inrush current peak values can
reach up to 30 times the rated current to be protected on the primary side by means of motor
starter protectors.
4 AM control transformers
This version of motor starter protector is not necessary in the case of 4 AM control
transformers with low inrush current (e.g. Siemens control transformers). In such cases
3RV20 motor starter protectors can be used for motor protection.
4.5.7 Main switch

3RV2 motor starter protectors satisfy the features of main switches according to
IEC 60947-2.
3RV20 and 3RV21 motor starter protectors are also suitable for protecting systems.
To prevent premature tripping caused by phase loss sensitivity, the load applied to each of
the three current paths must always be the same. With single-phase loads, the current paths
must be connected in series.
4.5.8 Use in IT systems

3RV2 motor starter protectors are suitable for use in IT systems according to IEC 60947-2.
In the event of a 3-pole short circuit, they respond in exactly the same way as other systems:
For this reason, the same short-circuit breaking capacity Icu and Ics applies.
Function
In the case of IT systems the first fault (ground fault) does not necessarily lead to the
immediate disconnection of the system. A second unrelated fault (ground fault) can reduce
the switching capacity of the motor starter protector.
This is the case specifically if both ground faults occur in different phases and if one of the
two ground faults is on the motor starter protector's input side and the other is on its outgoing
side.
To maintain the motor starter protector's short-circuit-protection function even in the case of
two separate ground faults (known as a double line-to-ground fault), the reduced short-circuit
breaking capacity for double ground faults in IT systems IcuIT has to be taken into account.
Detecting a ground fault when it occurs (ground-fault monitoring) and dealing with it quickly
can significantly reduce the risk of a double ground fault and, as a result, that of a reduced
short-circuit breaking capacity IcuIT.
Reference
About short-circuit breaking capacity Technical data (Page 453)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 393
4.5 Configuration
4.5.9 Switching direct current

3RV2 motor starter protectors for AC current are also suitable for switching direct current.
When used for this purpose, however, the maximum permissible DC voltage per current path
must be observed. With higher voltages, series connection of 2 or 3 current paths is
required.
Response values
The response values of the overload releases remain unchanged, while the response values
of the short-circuit releases increase by up to 40% with a DC current. The following table
contains suggested circuits for switching direct current:
Table 4- 4 Switching direct current, suggested circuits
Suggested circuit Motor starter Size Max. permissible direct Meaning

protector voltage Ue
/ / 3RV2. S00/S0 150 V DC 2-pole switching, non-grounded
system (see also Note)
0 If there is no possibility of a ground

fault occurring, or if any ground fault
which does occur is dealt with
immediately (ground-fault monitoring),
then the max. permissible direct
voltage can be tripled.
/ / 3RV2. S00/S0 300 V DC 2-pole switching, grounded system
The grounded pole always has to be
0 assigned to the individual current path,
so that in the event of a ground fault
there are always 2 current paths in
series.
/ / 3RV2. S00/S0 450 V DC 1-pole switching, grounded system
3 current paths in series The grounded
pole has to be assigned to the current
0 path which is not connected.
Note
Double ground fault
In the case of the "2-pole switching, non-grounded system" circuit, it is assumed that safe
tripping will follow even in the event of a double ground fault which short-circuits two
contacts.
SIRIUS Innovations
394 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.5 Configuration
4.5.10 Devices for North America (UL/CSA)
4.5.10.1 Approved according to UL 508/CSA C22.2 No. 14

The motor starter protectors in the 3RV2 series are approved for UL/CSA and can be used
conforming to UL 508 and CSA C22.2 No.14 individually or as load feeders in conjunction
with a contactor.
These motor starter protectors can be used as "Manual Motor Controller" for "Group
Installations", as "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group
Installations", and as "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller (Type E)".
"Manual motor controller", group installation
3RV2 motor starter protector as "Manual Motor Controller"

Upstream short-circuit protection is always implemented if the motor starter protector is used
as a "Manual Motor Controller". This requires approved fuses (according to UL 248) or a
circuit breaker (according to UL 489/CSA C22.2 No. 5-02). These devices must be
dimensioned according to the National Electrical Code (UL) or Canadian Electrical Code
(CSA) installation regulation respectively.
The file numbers for the approval of the 3RV as a manual motor controller are as follows:
● UL File No. 47705, CCN: NLRV
● CSA Master Contract 165071, Product Class: 3211 05
"Manual motor controller suitable for tap conductor protection in group installations" (up to 32 A)
3RV20 motor starter protector as "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in
Group Installations"
The "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations"
application is only applicable in the case of UL.
The CSA does not recognize this approval! Upstream short-circuit protection is always
implemented if the motor starter protector is used as a "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for
Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations". This requires approved fuses (according to
UL 248) or a circuit breaker (according to UL 489).
These devices must be dimensioned according to the National Electrical Code installation
regulation.
3RV20 motor starter protectors are approved as "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for Tap
Conductor Protection in Group Installations" under the following file number:
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 395
4.5 Configuration
"Self-protected combination motor controller (type E)" (up to 32 A)
3RV20 motor starter protector as "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller (Type E)"
For approval according to UL 508, a clearance of 1 inch and a creepage distance of 2 inches
are required on the line side for a "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller".
Therefore, 3RV20 motor starter protectors in size S00/S0 are approved according to UL 508
together with the terminal block (order no. 3RV29 28-1H) or phase barriers (order
no. 3RV2928-1K).
CSA approval does not require extended clearances and creepage distances. The terminal
blocks or phase barriers can, therefore, be omitted for use as a "Self-Protected Combination
Motor Controller" according to the CSA.
3RV20 motor starter protectors are approved as "Self-Protected Combination Motor
Controller" under the following file numbers:
● UL File No. E156943, CCN: NKJH,
● CSA Master Contract 165071, Product Class: 3211 08.
4.5.10.2 Approval as "circuit breaker" according to UL 489/CSA C 22.2 No. 5-02
3RV27 and 3RV28 as "Circuit Breaker"

These devices are approved as Circuit Breaker according to UL 489 or CSA C22.2 No.5-02
with 100% rated current ("100 %-rated breaker"). As such they can be used as upstream
short-circuit protection devices for "Manual Motor Controller" and "Manual Motor Controller
Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations".
3RV27 and 3RV28 are approved as "Circuit Breaker" under the following file numbers:
● UL File No. E235044, CCN: DIVQ,
Introduction
3RV2 motor starter protectors.
Installation altitude
The motor starter protectors are approved for installation altitudes up to 2,000 m. The
reduced air density at altitudes higher than 2,000 meters affects the motor starter protectors'
electrical characteristics. The reduction factors which have to be taken into account when
using motor starter protectors at altitudes higher than 2,000 m can be obtained on request
on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
SIRIUS Innovations
396 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.5 Configuration
Operating conditions
3RV2 motor starter protectors are climate-proof. They are intended for use in enclosed
spaces in which no severe operating conditions prevail (e.g. dust, caustic vapors, hazardous
gases). If they are to be installed in dusty and damp spaces, suitable enclosures must be
provided.
3RV2 motor starter protectors can be supplied from above or below.
Ambient temperatures/Derating
The permissible ambient temperatures, maximum switching capacity, tripping currents, and
other limiting conditions relevant to application are listed in the technical data. Technical
information is available on the Internet
3RV2 motor starter protectors are temperature-compensating according to IEC 60947-4-
1/VDE 0660 Part 102 in the temperature range from –20 °C to +60 °C. At temperatures from
+60 °C to +80 °C, the upper set value of the setting range has to be reduced by a specific
factor in accordance with the table below.
Table 4- 5 Ambient temperatures for 3RV2 motor starter protectors
Ambient temperature in °C Reduction factor for the upper set value

Current ranges Current ranges
0.11 to 20 A 17 to 32 A
+60 1.0 1.0
+65 0.87 0.97
+70 0.94 0.94
+75 0.81 0.90
+80 0.73 0.86
In accordance with the table, the reduction factor is 13% at 70 °C. This factor is so low that
due to the overlapping of the current setting ranges there are no gaps before the next setting
range. This means that at 70 °C the available current range goes from 0.11 A to 32 A.
Note
Ambient temperatures > 40 A
The 36 A and 40 A versions are compatible for use in ambient temperatures of up to 40° C
maximum.
Special application environments

SIRIUS components have been approved by a whole range of bodies for various sectors
(shipbuilding, etc.). An up-to-date list of approvals appears in Chapter 20 of the Siemens
Low Voltage LV1 Catalog, and more information, as well as an option to download
certificates, can be obtained on the Internet
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 397
4.5 Configuration
4.5.12 Selecting the motor starter protectors

Since the inrush current can cause the operational currents, the starting currents, and the
current peaks to be at different levels, even where motors with the same power are being
used, the motor power values in the selection tables should be viewed as guide values only.
The actual starting characteristics and rated data of the motor to be protected are always the
decisive factors in selecting the right motor starter protectors. The same applies for motor
starter protectors to be used for transformer protection.
Explosion protection
Note
In the case of 2- and 3-pole loading, the permissible deviation of the tripping time with 300%
to 800% current setting is up to ± 20% maximum and as such meets the requirements of
DIN VDE 0165 and EN 50019.
3RV20, CLASS 10 motor starter protectors have ATEX approval according to EU Directive
94/9/EC (DMT certificate).1)
1) From 04/2010 or on request

3RV20 motor starter protectors are suitable for overload protection of explosion-protected
motors with "increased safety" type of protection EEx e.
4.5.13 Project guidelines for use downstream of frequency converters/inverters with

pulsed voltage
Using thermal motor protection devices downstream of frequency converters/inverters with
pulsed voltage affects switching devices and can cause them to trip undesirably. Practical
configuration guidelines for such applications are given below.
4.5.13.1 The effects of high-frequency currents on the thermal overload release

The thermal overload release on motor starter protectors and overload relays usually
comprises a bimetal and a heating coil through which the motor current flows, causing heat
rise. Excessive deflection of the bimetal (caused by the motor current being too high) will
cause the motor current to be disconnected.
Releases of this type are adjusted with a 50 Hz alternating current. As such, the tripping
point will only be in the required normal range range for currents whose effective heat value
is the same as or similar to this adjustment current. This is the case for alternating currents
from 0 to 400 Hz and for direct currents.
Where high-frequency currents such as those occurring downstream of converters are
concerned, there is additional heat rise of the bimetal. This can be attributed on the one
hand to eddy currents induced by harmonics and on the other to the skin effect in the heating
coil. Both cause the overload release to trip, even at reduced currents (undesirable
premature tripping!).
The effects are dependent upon the frequency of the current. The higher the frequency of
the converter and the lower the setting range/rated current, the more the tripping current will
drop.
SIRIUS Innovations
398 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.5 Configuration
To return the tripping limits to the normal range, the setting of the overload release has to be
corrected. The following table shows the adjustment correction factors for the various setting
ranges dependent upon the converter's pulse frequency.
Table 4- 6 Adjustment correction factors for different setting ranges
Setting Pulse frequency [kHz]

range/rated 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
current
3.2 to 40 A 1.00 1.07 1.12 1.16 1.18 1.19 1.21 1.22 1.23
0.5 to 2.5 A 1.00 1.08 1.13 1.17 1.21 1.24 1.26 1.28 1.29
0.32 to 0.4 A 1.00 1.09 1.15 1.21 1.25 1.29 1.33 1.35 1.37
0.16 to 0.25 A 1.00 1.10 1.17 1.24 1.28 1.33 1.38 1.42 1.46
Application example
Motor starter protector with setting range 1.1 to 1.6 A downstream of a frequency converter
with a pulse frequency of 8 kHz and motor current rms value at rated load: 1.2 A.
Setting: 1.2 A x 1.21 = 1.45 A
Making this adjustment compensates the high-frequency currents. The tripping current is in
the normal range.
NOTICE
Harmonics
The harmonics can cause the rms value of the motor current to be higher than the motor
rated current. In such cases, undesirable tripping can occur in spite of a correction being
made.
To rectify the situation, the rms value of the motor current has to be determined at rated
load and used as the base current for the correction described above. Only measuring
instruments which are able to reproduce the true rms value up to the prevailing frequencies
are suitable for determining the values. Good examples include hot-wire instruments.
Although moving-iron measuring instruments are in principle also rms instruments, they can
only be used for frequencies up to 1 kHz and, therefore, are not compatible with the
majority of the scenarios described above. Commercially available multimeters or clip-on
ammeters are generally not suitable for taking measurements in these cases.
4.5.13.2 Capacitive leakage currents

Despite adjustment correction undesirable tripping can occur in individual systems.
Extensive tests have shown that in systems with pulsed voltages other effects can transpire
which reduce the tripping current of the overload release or increase the current flowing
through the release.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 399
4.5 Configuration
Practical example
In a system supplied by an inverter with a 3 kHz pulse frequency, the motors are connected
with cables measuring 80 m in length. An analysis of the actual current flow shows that very
high-frequency currents (up to 150 kHz) are superimposed on the motor current with a peak
value of 1.5 A. In the case of these frequencies, the effect on the thermal overload release is
significantly greater than described in The effects of high-frequency currents on the thermal
overload release (Page 398). Furthermore, capacitive leakage currents occur in this system
due to the cable length and the high frequency. These increase the current flowing through
the release and cause undesirable tripping.
An alternative approach is described below for cases in which high-frequency currents
significantly higher than 16 kHz occur and the procedure described in The effects of high-
frequency currents on the thermal overload release (Page 398) no longer rectifies the
problem. When the motor is operating without overload, the overload release has to be set
so high that it will not trip. Once the motor has been running for approx. 1.5 hours at full load,
the overload release has to be reduced to the tripping limit and then this limit set value has to
be increased by approx. 10%. This compensates the effects on the system. The value
hereby obtained can also be used as the correction factor for similar systems.
4.5.13.3 Speed control of motors with characteristic-controlled frequency converters

With adjustment to linear voltage frequency characteristic and continuous boost, a reduction
in speed (< 50 Hz) combined with constant load torque can cause the motor current to
increase. The reason for this is that in the case of this adjustment the reduction in the output
voltage of the frequency converter is not in line with the output frequency.
Should this lead to undesirable tripping, and if this cannot be compensated by adjusting this
release to a higher value (taking the motor overload into account), minimizing boost or
switching to a quadratic voltage frequency characteristic may provide a remedy.
SIRIUS Innovations
400 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.6 Mounting
4.6 Mounting
4.6.1 Standard mounting
4.6.1.1 Minimum clearances and mounting position
Minimum clearances
The following clearances from grounded or live parts and from cable ducts made of molded
plastic must be observed in compliance with IEC 60947-2 when mounting motor starter
protectors.
= =
/ / / / / /

<
59 59
<
7 7 7 7 7 7
Figure 4-3 Clearances from grounded or live parts
Table 4- 7 Installation guidelines for motor starter protectors
Ue [V] Y [mm] Z [mm]

240 30 9
400 30 9
440 30 9
500 30 9
690 50 / 701) 30
1) Up to and including the setting range of 32 A, the required clearance above and below is 50 mm;
for the 36/40 A setting range, the clearance is 70 mm.
Note
Terminal block type E
In conjunction with type E terminal block 3RV2928-1H the applicable lateral clearance is
30 mm for all voltages.
Mounting position
The mounting position of 3RV2 motor starter protectors can be selected at will.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 401
4.6 Mounting
4.6.1.2 Mounting
Mounting options
The motor starter protectors are mounted by
● Snapping them onto a 35 mm DIN rail conforming to DIN EN 60715 or
● Screwing them to a base plate
Mounting
3RV2928-0B

DIN EN 60715
① Mounting on a DIN rail

② Mounting on base plate
Figure 4-4 Motor starter protector mounting
Note
Push-in lugs
The motor starter protectors can be mounted on a level surface with 2 screws. In the case of
size S00 and S0 motor starter protectors, 2 push-in lugs (3RV2928-0B) (supplied in packs of
10) are also required.
Reference
About the drilling plan Dimension drawings for 3RV2 motor starter protectors (Page 478)
SIRIUS Innovations
402 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.7 Connection
4.6.2 Mounting in limiter circuit
Installation guidelines for motor starter protectors with limiter function

The installation guidelines for motor starter protectors with limiter function can be obtained
on request on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
4.7 Connection
Infeed
3RV2 motor starter protectors can be supplied from above or below.
Connection types
The motor starter protectors are available with the following connection types:
● Ring cable lug connection system
Connection of terminals
Within the SIRIUS modular system, the conductor cross-sections are matched to one
another dependent upon size.
Reference
About connecting the SIRIUS modular system System overview, under Connection (Page 74)
About conductor cross-sections and tightening torques Conductor cross-sections main circuit
(Page 459)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 403
4.8 Operation
4.8 Operation
4.8.1 Setting the current
Procedure
Use a screwdriver to set the load's rated current (current setting) Ie on the scale on the motor
starter protector.
In the context of this setting, a distinction is made between two fundamental designs:
1. Stand-alone assembly: No directly mounted contactor and clearance of at least 10 mm to
left and right.
2. Side-by-side design: Directly mounted contactor or clearance to left and right of less than
10 mm (commonly used design).
Note the two possible setting marks on the adjusting knob:
● Dash marking: Setting mark for the motor starter protector in stand-alone design.
● Triangular marking: Setting mark for the motor starter protector in side-by-side design.
In both cases you can use the full current range up to the scale mark at the top for size
S00/S0 motor starter protectors at ambient temperatures of up to + 60 °C.
Note
Max. ambient temperature at 36 A/40 A
In the case of motor starter protectors with 36 A/40 A the maximum permissible ambient
temperature is 40 °C.
Set the relevant setting mark (dash or triangle) to the load current.
1.6 A max
max. + 60 °C $
max. + 70 °C
1.4 1.1
,H
360 ° ok
Figure 4-5 Making the current setting Ie
SIRIUS Innovations
404 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.8 Operation
Current reduction
Current reduction is required at ambient temperatures above +60 °C. The maximum
permissible current setting for an ambient temperature of +70 °C is indicated on the scale by
a slightly longer mark on the scale. You can find more information about derating in the
chapter titled Application environment (Page 396).
4.8.2 Testing the overload release

The table below shows the procedure for testing the motor starter protector's overload
release:

1 Turn the rotary button from O to I.
2/3 Insert a screwdriver into the test opening
and push it to the left.
TEST
Result
If the rotary button snaps into the tripped setting, the test was successful.
4.8.3 Testing the overload relay function (3RV21)

1 The control circuit must be energized.
Insert a screwdriver into the test opening
and push it down.
TEST
Result
The connected contactor disconnects.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 405
4.8 Operation
4.8.4 Securing
Function
You can secure the motor starter protector against unauthorized closing, for example, if
repair work needs to be carried out.
Procedure
Move the rotary switch to the OFF position. Take the cylinder out of the rotary lever. (This
locks the rotary operating mechanism.) Secure the motor starter protector against
unauthorized closing by locking the rotary switch with a padlock (shackle diameter 3.5 to
4.5 mm).
ෘಹPP
Figure 4-6 Securing the rotary switch
4.8.5 Reclosing after tripping
Tripping
When the motor starter protector trips, the rotary switch moves to the tripped setting to
indicate that it has tripped.
An option is available (in the form of an accessory) to have a signaling switch report tripping
electrically.
Reclosing
Reclosing takes place directly on the switch. The rotary operating mechanism has to be set
to O first before reclosing, to return the mechanism to readiness for operation. The motor
starter protector can then be reclosed.
SIRIUS Innovations
406 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories
4.9 Accessories
Accessories
For maximum flexibility, accessories can be added to the motor starter protector as required,
easily, and without the need for tools.
Mountable accessories
The mountable accessories for size S00/S0 3RV2 motor starter protectors are illustrated
below.
8
6
1 Signaling switch
4 Disconnector module
5 Terminal block type E
6 Undervoltage release
7 Shunt release
8 Transverse auxiliary switch
Figure 4-7 Motor starter protector size S00/S0 with mountable accessories
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 407
4.9 Accessories
Further accessories
● Phase barriers
● Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
● Enclosures and mounting accessories
● Sealable cover
● Insulated 3-phase busbar system
● 8US busbar adapter
● 3RV2917 infeed system
● Link modules for the installation of contactors, solid-state contactors or soft starters
For maximum flexibility, accessories can be added to the motor starter protector as required,
easily, and without the need for tools.
Accessories 3RV20 3RV21 3RV23 3RV24 3RV27 3RV28

Auxiliary switch ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Signaling switch ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
Undervoltage release ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Shunt release ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Disconnector module ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
Insulated 3-phase busbar system ✓ - ✓ ✓ - -
Busbar adapter ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
Door-coupling rotary operating ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
mechanism
Link modules ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
Surface-mounting enclosure ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
Flush-mounting enclosure ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
Front plate ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
Infeed system ✓ - ✓ ✓ - -
SIRIUS Innovations
408 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories
4.9.2 Installation rules/Component rules
Maximum expansion
The maximum expansion of the 3RV2 motor starter protector is one transverse auxiliary
switch, one lateral auxiliary switch with 2 contacts, one signaling switch, and one auxiliary
release.
The lateral auxiliary switch 2 NO + 2 NC can also be used as an alternative to a transverse
auxiliary switch and a lateral auxiliary switch with 2 contacts. However, in this case it will not
be possible to add a signaling switch. Accordingly, a maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts with
auxiliary switches may be mounted on each motor starter protector.
Possible combinations
The following auxiliary/signaling switch and auxiliary switch combinations are possible:
● The lateral auxiliary switch must be mounted to the left of the signaling switch.
● Transverse and lateral auxiliary switches can be combined.
● A maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts may be added.
● One auxiliary release can be mounted on the right of each motor starter protector.
● The signaling switch must be selected before the auxiliary switch.
● Once a signaling switch has been selected, only one lateral auxiliary switch with 2
contacts can be selected. It is not possible to select the lateral auxiliary switch with 4
contacts.
● The total number of auxiliary switch contacts must not exceed 4.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 409
4.9 Accessories
4.9.3 Auxiliary switch
4.9.3.1 Description
Function
The contacts of the auxiliary switch open and close along with the main contacts on the
motor starter protector.
Versions
Table 4- 8 Auxiliary switch versions
Auxiliary switch Versions Connection system Width Mountable

Transverse auxiliary switch 1 CO contact Screw connection 45 mm Front side
1 NO contact + 1 NC Screw-type/spring-
contact loaded connection,
ring cable lug
2 NO contacts Screw-type/spring-
loaded connection
Solid-state compatible 1 CO contact Screw connection 45 mm Front side
transverse auxiliary switch
for operation in dusty
atmosphere and in solid-state
circuits with low operational
currents
Cover caps for transverse - Screw connection 45 mm Front side
auxiliary switch
to ensure finger-safety
Lateral auxiliary switch 1 NO contact + 1 NC Screw-type/spring- 9 mm Left-hand side
contact loaded connection,
ring cable lug
2 NO contacts Screw-type/spring- 9 mm
loaded connection
2 NC contacts Screw-type/spring- 9 mm
loaded connection
2 NO contacts + 2 NC Screw connection 18 mm
contacts
Note
• A maximum of four auxiliary contacts with auxiliary switches can be mounted on each
• Auxiliary switches (2 contacts) and signaling switches can be mounted individually or
together.
SIRIUS Innovations
410 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories
4.9.3.2 Mounting
Note
The auxiliary switches are mounted in the same way for all sizes.
Mounting auxiliary switches
Table 4- 9 Mounting a transverse auxiliary switch

1/2 Using a screwdriver, carefully force
off the cover.
3 Slant the transverse auxiliary switch
and push it into the opening on front
of the motor starter protector.

4 Press the transverse auxiliary switch
down until you hear it engage.
Table 4- 10 Mounting a lateral auxiliary switch

1 Attach the lateral auxiliary switch to
the rear of the motor starter protector.

2 Press the auxiliary switch to the
motor starter protector until you hear
it engage.

Reference

About connection the chapter titled Circuit diagrams (Page 482)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 411
4.9 Accessories
4.9.3.3 Disassembly
Note
The auxiliary switches are disassembled in the same way for all sizes.
Disassembling auxiliary switches
Table 4- 11 Disassembling a transverse auxiliary switch

1 Slide a screwdriver underneath the
transverse auxiliary switch. Using the
screwdriver, carefully dislodge the
auxiliary switch.

2 Pull the transverse auxiliary switch
out at an angle and remove it from
the motor starter protector.
Table 4- 12 Disassembling a lateral auxiliary switch

1 Press the clips on the top and bottom
of the lateral auxiliary switch together.
2 Run a screwdriver between the motor
starter protector and the lateral
auxiliary switch. Dislodge the auxiliary
switch from the motor starter
protector by carefully turning the

screwdriver.
3 Remove the lateral auxiliary switch
from the side of the motor starter
protector.

SIRIUS Innovations
412 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories
4.9.4 Signaling switch
4.9.4.1 Description
Function
The signaling switch has two contact systems:
● One contact system (1 NO contact + 1 NC contact) signals general tripping irrespective of
whether this was caused by a short circuit, an overload, or an auxiliary release.
● The other contact system (1 NO contact and 1 NC contact) only switches in the event of
short-circuit release.
To be able to reclose the motor starter protector after a short circuit, once the cause of the
error has been dealt with, the signaling switch has to be reset by hand.
Versions
Signaling switch Versions Connection Width Mountable

system
Signaling switch 2 contact systems Screw-type/spring- 18 mm Left-hand side
each with 1 NO loaded
contact and 1 NC connection, ring
contact cable lug
Note
• A signaling switch can be mounted on the side of the motor starter protector.
• An auxiliary switch (2 contacts) and a signaling switch can be mounted individually or
together.
• The signaling switch cannot be used with 3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 413
4.9 Accessories
4.9.4.2 Mounting
Mounting signaling switches

Table 4- 13 Mounting a signaling switch

1 Press and hold down the transport
lock on the inside of the signaling
switch.
2 Then also press the blue RESET
button on the front of the signaling
switch until it engages.
3 Attach the signaling switch to the rear
of the motor starter protector.
4 Press the signaling switch to the
motor starter protector until you hear
it engage.

Reference
About connection the chapter titled Circuit diagrams (Page 482)
4.9.4.3 Disassembly
Disassembling signaling switches
Table 4- 14 Disassembling a signaling switch

of the signaling switch together.
2 Run a screwdriver between the motor

starter protector and the signaling
switch. Dislodge the signaling switch
from the motor starter protector by
carefully turning the screwdriver.
3 Remove the signaling switch from the
side of the motor starter protector.

SIRIUS Innovations
414 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories
4.9.4.4 Operation and diagnostics
Overview
The signaling switch supplies two signals:
● A tripped signal (short circuit, overload or tripping by shunt release)
● A short-circuit signal (short circuit only)
Signaling switch display
Table 4- 15 Signaling switch with tripped and short-circuit signal
Figure State Procedure

Tripped signal Open (move to O) and then
• Motor starter protector reclose (move to I) the motor
starter protector.
– In tripped setting
• Signaling switch
– Display is red
– RESET button (blue)
remains pressed down

Short-circuit signal Press the RESET button

• Motor starter protector (blue) on the signaling switch,
then open the motor starter
– In tripped setting
protector (move to O) before
• Signaling switch reclosing it (move to I).
– Display is red
– RESET button (blue)
is not pressed down

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 415
4.9 Accessories
4.9.5 Auxiliary release
4.9.5.1 Description
Auxiliary release
The releases, which are not size-specific, are available in three versions:
● Undervoltage release
● Undervoltage release with leading auxiliary contacts (2 NO contacts)
● Shunt release
The releases are mounted on the right-hand side of the motor starter protector and have a
width of 18 mm. They are available for all commonly used voltages all over the world. They
can be installed inside molded-plastic enclosures.
Note
• One auxiliary release can be mounted on each motor starter protector.

• No accessories can be mounted on the right-hand side of 3RV21 motor starter protectors
with overload relay function.
Shunt release
For remote-controlled tripping of the motor starter protector
● Via PLC: The release's coil should only be energized for a brief period.
Undervoltage release
The undervoltage release trips the motor starter protector in the event of voltage interruption
(e.g. if the power supply fails) and prevents the motor from being unintentionally restarted
when the voltage is restored. The motor starter protector then has to be reclosed by hand.
Particularly suitable for EMERGENCY OFF disconnection via corresponding EMERGENCY
OFF pushbutton according to IEC 60204-1 (VDE 0113)
SIRIUS Innovations
416 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories
Undervoltage release with leading auxiliary contacts

The undervoltage release with leading auxiliary contacts has the same function as the
undervoltage release without auxiliary contacts.
Additional functions:
● The auxiliary contacts ensure that the undervoltage release is only energized during the
motor starter protector's ON time.
● The auxiliary contacts isolate the overvoltage release from the line on both sides when
the voltage is disconnected or in the event of tripping, thereby preventing vagabond
voltages from getting into the control circuit when the switch is set to OFF. This requires a
conductive connection between outputs D2 and 08.
● Because the contacts are leading contacts, the power supply to the undervoltage release
is assured before the remaining steps involved in switching on are carried out.
4.9.5.2 Auxiliary release voltage ranges
Table 4- 16 Undervoltage release voltage ranges
Auxiliary release Frequency

DC 50 Hz AC 60 Hz AC
Undervoltage release 24 V 24 V -
110 V 120 V
- 208 V
230 V 240 V
400 V 440 V
415 V 480 V
500 V 600 V
Undervoltage release with leading - 230 V 240 V
auxiliary contacts 400 V 440 V
415 V 480 V
Table 4- 17 Shunt release voltage ranges
Auxiliary release Frequency

50/60 Hz AC 50/60 Hz AC; DC
100% ED 1) 5 s ED 2)
Shunt release 20 to 24 V 20 to 70 V
90 to 110 V 70 to 190 V
210 to 240 V 190 to 330 V
350 to 415 V 330 to 500 V
500 V 500 V
1) The voltage range is valid for 100% (infinite) ON period. The response voltage lies at 0.9 of the lower limit of the voltage
range.
2) The voltage range is valid for 5 s ON period at 50 Hz/60 Hz AC and DC. The response voltage lies at 0.85 of the lower
limit of the voltage range.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 417
4.9 Accessories
4.9.5.3 Mounting
Mounting the shunt release
Table 4- 18 Mounting a shunt release

1 Attach the shunt release to the rear of
the motor starter protector.

2 Press the shunt release to the motor
starter protector until you hear it
engage.

4.9.5.4 Disassembly
Disassembling the shunt release
Table 4- 19 Disassembling a shunt release

of the shunt release together.
2 Run a screwdriver between the shunt
release and the motor starter
protector. Dislodge the shunt release

from the motor starter protector by
carefully turning the screwdriver.
3 Remove the shunt release from the
side of the motor starter protector.
SIRIUS Innovations
418 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories
4.9.6 Disconnector module
4.9.6.1 Description
Disconnector module
The disconnector module is mounted on the motor starter protector on the infeed side. The
disconnector module can be used to form a visible isolating distance. To set up the isolating
distance, the plug connector is removed from the enclosure. The isolating plug can only be
removed with the supply disconnected.
The touch-proof isolating point is clearly visible and is secured with a padlock so that the
plug connector cannot be inserted during maintenance work, for example.
The disconnector module is compatible for use with all motor starter protector sizes.
Note
• The disconnector module cannot be used with 3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers.
• The disconnector module covers the connection screws on the transverse auxiliary
switch. Therefore, if you are using the disconnector module, we recommend that you use
the lateral auxiliary switches or wait until the transverse auxiliary switches have been
wired before mounting the disconnector module.
• The disconnector module must not be used in conjunction with the 3-phase busbar
3RV1915.
4.9.6.2 Mounting
Mounting sequence
Note
Mounting sequence for disconnector module and transverse auxiliary switch
The disconnector module covers the connection screws on the transverse auxiliary switch.
Therefore, we recommend that you use the lateral auxiliary switches or wait until the
transverse auxiliary switches have been wired before mounting the disconnector module.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 419
4.9 Accessories
Mounting the disconnector module
Table 4- 20 Mounting the disconnector module

1 Set the rotary button on the motor
starter protector to O.
2 Remove the protective cover from the
terminal lugs on the disconnector
module.
3 Set the disconnector module down on
the motor starter protector. Make sure

that the terminal lugs on the
disconnector module slot into the
corresponding openings.
4 Slide the closing lockout down.

5 Screw the main conductor terminals
tight on the motor starter protector.

6 Slide the closing lockout up.

starter protector to I.
8 Secure the disconnector module so
that the isolating plug cannot be
removed when the motor starter
protector is active.

SIRIUS Innovations
420 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories
4.9.6.3 Isolation and shut-off
Creating and securing the isolating distance
Table 4- 21 Creating and securing the isolating distance


starter protector to O.
2 Slide the closing lockout down.
3 Slide the isolating plug forward and
out of the disconnector module.
4 Slide the closing lockout up.

5 Secure the closing lockout so that the
isolating plug cannot be inserted or
pushed further in.

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 421
4.9 Accessories
4.9.7 Phase barriers/UL 508 "type E" terminals
4.9.7.1 Description
"Self-protected combination motor controller (type E)" according to UL 508

Controller" (Type E) according to UL508.
The increased clearances and creepage distances required for this application on the input
side of the device (1 inch and 2 inches respectively) are achieved by adding terminal blocks.
1. The 3RV29 28-1H terminal block is screwed to the basic device.
2. The 3RV2928-1K phase barriers are connected to the device.
The terminal block is recommended for the connection of larger conductor cross-sections.
Note
CSA
CSA approval does not require extended clearances and creepage distances.
Function
To ensure optimum protection against flashover between the connected conductors in the
event of a short circuit, phase barriers/terminals can be used. The phase barriers/terminals
are required to increase the clearances and creepage distances in conjunction with
prevailing switching overvoltages during motor starter protector switching. The phase
barriers/terminals increase the insulation strength between the motor starter protector's
connection contacts.
Restriction
The terminal block and the phase barriers cannot be used simultaneously with 3RV19.5 3-
phase busbars. If phase barriers are being used, the motor starter protectors can only be
mounted on DIN rails.
Versions
The terminal block and the phase barriers are only available in screw designs. They can only
be mounted on the motor starter protector using screw-type connection systems.
SIRIUS Innovations
422 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories
4.9.7.2 Mounting UL 508 "type E" terminals

The 3RV2928-1H terminal block can only be mounted on a motor starter protector using
screw-type connection system.
Table 4- 22 Mounting a UL 508 "type E" terminal

1 Attach the terminal to the motor
starter protector from above.
2 Screw the terminal tight by screwing
the main conductor terminals of the
motor starter protector tight.
4.9.7.3 Mounting phase barriers
Table 4- 23 Mounting phase barriers

1 Attach the phase barriers to the motor
starter protector from the front. Tilt 1
the phase barriers back and down
until they snap onto the motor starter
protector.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 423
4.9 Accessories
4.9.8 Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
4.9.8.1 Description
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism

Motor starter protectors with a rotary operating mechanism can be installed in the control
cabinet and operated externally by means of a door-coupling rotary operating mechanism.
The mechanism engages when the control cabinet door closes. If the motor starter protector
is active, the coupling locks, thereby preventing the door opening unintentionally. This lock
can be deactivated by maintenance personnel. In the OFF setting, the rotary operating
mechanism can be secured against reclosing with up to 3 padlocks. The padlocks prevent
the door from opening unintentionally.
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms

The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms comprise a knob, a coupling driver, and an
extension shaft 130/330 mm in length (6 x 6). They are dimensioned for IP65 degree of
protection. The interlocking of the door prevents the unintentional opening of the control
cabinet door when the switch is set to ON. The OFF setting can be locked with up to 3
padlocks.
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism for arduous conditions

The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms comprise a knob, a coupling driver, and an
extension shaft 300 mm in length (8 x 8 mm), a spacer and two metal brackets, which are
used to mount the motor starter protector.
The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms are dimensioned for IP65 degree of
protection. The interlocking of the door reliably prevents the unintentional opening of the
control cabinet door when the switch is set to ON. The OFF setting can be locked with up
to 3 padlocks.
Laterally mountable auxiliary releases and 2-pole auxiliary switches can be used. The door-
coupling rotary operating mechanisms meet the requirements for isolating function according
to IEC 60947-2.
Versions
Door-coupling rotary Versions Width Mountable
operating mechanism
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms
Door-coupling rotary Black Depending on version Depending on version
operating mechanism
EMERGENCY STOP Red/yellow Depending on version Depending on version
door-coupling rotary
operating mechanism
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism for arduous conditions
Door-coupling rotary Gray Depending on version Depending on version
operating mechanism
EMERGENCY STOP Red/yellow Depending on version Depending on version
door-coupling rotary
operating mechanism
SIRIUS Innovations
424 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories
4.9.8.2 Mounting
Mounting the door-coupling rotary operating mechanism

min. 16 mm
max. 20 mm
Figure 4-8 Mounting the door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
Note
Remember to observe the mechanical coding of the connecting rod!
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 425
4.9 Accessories
4.9.8.3 Operating the door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
Opening the door

The following table shows how to open the control cabinet door with the door-coupling rotary
operating mechanism:
Table 4- 24 Opening control cabinet doors with door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
Diagram Procedure
To open the control cabinet door, set the motor
starter protector to O (OFF). This will release the
extension shaft from the rotary operating
mechanism so that you can open the door.
2
If you need to open the control cabinet door
during operation, press the knob next to the
rotary knob to "override" the interlock (Step 1).
To close the door during operation, press this
knob again so that the extension shaft can re-
engage.
1
SIRIUS Innovations
426 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories
Opening the door with significant force
Note
If the motor starter protector is set to ON and the door is opened with a force of
> 150 to 200 N, the extension shaft cap will break away from the rotary switch on the motor
starter protector to prevent irreparable damage to the motor starter protector. The motor
starter protector remains set to ON.
FD1
The extension shaft then needs to be re-attached to the motor starter protector and the door-
coupling rotary operating mechanism as described below:
Table 4- 25 Attaching the extension shaft
Diagram Procedure
Switch off the motor starter protector (O) and turn
the rotary switch on the door-coupling rotary
operating mechanism to OFF.

Attach the extension shaft cap to the rotary
switch on the motor starter protector and then
insert the extension shaft into the cap.

Close the control cabinet door.
1
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 427
4.9 Accessories
Locking
In the OFF position, the rotary operating mechanism can be secured by attaching up to
3 locks to the handle outside of the control cabinet, e.g. while maintenance work is carried
out on the system. In this case too, the motor starter protector must be set to the O position
first, before the locks are attached. The locking device on the handle is then pulled forward.
Up to three padlocks with a maximum shackle diameter of 8 mm can be attached to this
locking device.
SIRIUS Innovations
428 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories
4.9.8.4 Operating the door-coupling rotary operating mechanism for arduous conditions
Mounting the door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for arduous conditions
Step Operating instruction

1/2 Unscrew the cover from the door-coupling rotary
operating mechanism and remove the cover.
3/4 Screw the base of the door-coupling rotary operating

mechanism tight to a level surface and connect to
ground.

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 429
4.9 Accessories

5/6 Mount a DIN rail in the center of the base of the door-

coupling rotary operating mechanism. Attach the
deactivated motor starter protector to the DIN rail from
above and snap the motor starter protector onto the
DIN rails.
7/8 Replace the cover on the base of the door-coupling

rotary operating mechanism. When doing this, make
sure that the motor starter protector is set to "OFF" and
that the shaft slot is on the right.
Opening the door

To open the control cabinet door, set the motor starter protector to O. This will release the
extension shaft from the rotary operating mechanism so that you can open the door.
Opening the door with significant force
Note
Opening the door with a force of ≥ 800 N when the motor starter protector is set to I can
damage the mechanism beyond repair. The motor starter protector remains active. The
mechanism will keep the door closed up to a force of 800 N.
SIRIUS Innovations
430 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories
Locking

∅ 3,5 ... 4,5 mm
The mechanism can be locked inside the control cabinet with a padlock. The motor starter
protector must be set to the O position first, before the lock is attached.

The mechanism can also be locked outside the control cabinet via the handle.
In this case too, the motor starter protector must be set to the O position first, before the
locks are attached. The locking device on the handle is then pulled forward. Up to five
padlocks with a maximum shackle diameter of 6 mm or three padlocks with a maximum
shackle diameter of 8.5 mm can be attached to this locking device.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 431
4.9 Accessories
4.9.9 Enclosures and mounting accessories
4.9.9.1 Description
General
Plastic enclosures for surface mounting and molded-plastic enclosures for flush mounting
are available in various dimensions for the stand-alone assembly of size S00 (In max = 16 A)
and S0 (In max = 32 A) motor starter protectors.
In the case of installation in molded-plastic enclosures the rated operational voltage Ue of the
motor starter protectors is 500 V.
The enclosures for surface mounting have IP55 degree of protection and those for flush
mounting also meet the requirements for IP55 degree of protection at the front (the flush-
mounted section complies with IP20).
Enclosures
All enclosures are equipped with N and PE terminals. They have 2 knockout cable entry
openings for cable glands at the top and 2 at the bottom, along with corresponding cable
entries scored on the rear. There is a knockout on the top of the enclosure for indicator lights
which are available as accessories.
The slim-line enclosure can accommodate a motor starter protector without accessories, with
transverse and lateral auxiliary switches. There is no provision for installing a motor starter
protector with signaling switch.
In the case of size S00 and S0 motor starter protectors, the molded-plastic enclosures are
fitted with a rotary operating mechanism.
The enclosures are available either with a black rotary operating mechanism or with an
EMERGENCY STOP rotary operating mechanism with red/yellow handle.
In the OFF setting, all rotary operating mechanisms can be locked with up to three padlocks.
Front plates
Many applications require motor starter protectors to be actuated in any type of enclosure.
Front plates equipped with a rotary operating mechanism are available for size S00 and S0
motor starter protectors for this purpose.
A holder for size S00 and S0 motor starter protectors is available for the front plates (the
motor starter protectors snap into the holder).
SIRIUS Innovations
432 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories
4.9.9.2 Mounting
Various enclosures are available for the motor starter protectors.
Enclosure mounting
Table 4- 26 Mounting the enclosure

1/2 Mount the lower part of the enclosure on a
level surface.
Make sure that the arrow (A) is pointing up.
3/4 Snap the motor starter protector onto the rail
in the enclosure as illustrated in the diagram.
Next, screw the enclosure top part to the
lower part of the enclosure (tightening torque
1.2 to 1.5 Nm).
$
The enclosure can also be sealed with leads
on the bottom right and/or top left.

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 433
4.9 Accessories
Mounting flush-mounting enclosures
Table 4- 27 Mounting the flush-mounting enclosure

1/2 A cutout measuring 157 x 87 mm and with a 87
radius of the corners of R3 is required to
mount the flush-mounting enclosure. The R3
enclosure is 96 mm deep.
$
Snap the motor starter protector onto the rail
in the enclosure as illustrated in the diagram.
Make sure that the arrow (A) is pointing up.

3 Position the lower part of the enclosure in the
157
cutout.

1

4 Secure the enclosure as shown in the zoom

view to prevent it from sliding out.
5 Position the seal between the enclosure and
the mounting surface as illustrated in the
diagram.
6 Next, screw the enclosure top part to the
lower part of the enclosure (tightening torque
1.2 to 1.5 Nm).
SIRIUS Innovations
434 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories
Mounting front plates
Table 4- 28 Mounting front plates

1 Insert the rotary operating mechanism into the M3

front plate.
2 Snap the motor starter protector onto the
holder.
3 Connect the motor starter protector.
4 Screw the front plate and the rotary operating
mechanism tight to the holder (use M3
screws).

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 435
4.9 Accessories
Sealable cover
A sealable cover compatible for use with all sizes is available for the motor starter protectors.
This cover can also be used for the 3RU21 thermal overload relay.
The sealable cover can be used to secure the rotary button for setting the rated motor
current against unauthorized manipulation.
4.9.10.2 Mounting
Table 4- 29 Mounting the sealable cover on the motor starter protector

1/2 Attach the hooks on the cover to the openings on the

motor starter protector and fold the cover down.
3 Seal the cover to secure it against unauthorized
removal.

SIRIUS Innovations
436 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories
4.9.11 Insulated 3RV19 3-phase busbar system
Insulated 3-phase busbar system

The 3-phase busbar systems provide a straightforward, time-saving, and transparent means
of supplying power to 3RV2 motor starter protectors with screw terminals. They can be used
for the various types of motor starter protector.
Note
Exceptions
The 3RV19 15 3-phase busbar systems are generally unsuitable for 3RV21 motor starter
protectors with overload relay function and for 3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers
conforming to UL 489/CSA C22.2 No.5-02. Neither can they be used with the 3RV2928-1A
disconnector module.
Extending the busbars

The busbars are designed for between 2 and 5 motor starter protectors. They can be
extended at will by clamping the terminal lugs of a second busbar (rotated by 180°)
underneath the terminals of the last respective motor starter protector on the first busbar.
Combination of sizes S0 and S00

It is possible to combine motor starter protectors of different sizes. Power is fed in via
corresponding infeed terminals.
Touch protection and short-circuit stress

The 3-phase busbar systems have finger-safe shock protection. They have been
dimensioned to withstand the level of short-circuit stress that can occur on the output side of
the connected motor starter protectors.
Type E starters
The 3-phase busbar systems can also be used to build "type E starters" in size S00, S0
according to UL/CSA. However, special infeed terminals have to be used for this purpose.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 437
4.9 Accessories
4.9.11.2 Versions
3-phase busbar versions

For the infeed of several motor starter protectors with screw terminals for side-by-side
mounting on DIN rails, insulated, with touch protection
Table 4- 30 3-phase busbars1)
Order no. Number of motor starter protectors that can be connected Incl. auxiliary Rated current In at
release 690 V
Modular spacing Without lateral Incl. lateral
[mm] accessories auxiliary switch
3RV19 15-1.. 45 2/3/4/5 - - 63
3RV19 15-2.. 55 - 2/3/4/5 - 63
3RV19 15-3.. 63 - - 2/4 63
1) Not suitable for 3RV21 motor starter protectors for motor protection with overload relay function and for 3RV27 and
3RV28 circuit breakersconforming to UL 489/CSA C22.2 No.5-02.
3-phase infeed terminal:

The infeed terminal supports larger conductor cross-sections than is the case with direct
connection on the motor starter protector.
● Infeed terminal from above
● Infeed terminal from below
Note
Space requirements of the infeed terminal
The infeed terminal with connection from below is connected instead of a motor starter
protector. You will, therefore, need to take the space requirements into account when
configuring the 3-phase busbars.
Order no. Conductor cross-section Tightening For motor

torque starter protector
Solid or Finely AWG cables,
size
stranded stranded with solid or
end sleeve stranded
mm² mm² AWG Nm
Connection from above
3RV29 25-5AB 2.5 ... 16 2.5 ... 16 10-4 3 ... 4 S00, S0
Connection from below1)
3RV29 15-5B 2.5 ... 16 2.5 ... 16 10-4 Input: 4, S00, S0
Output:
2 ... 2.5
1) This terminal is connected in place of a switch, please take the space requirement into
account.
SIRIUS Innovations
438 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories
3-phase infeed terminal for installing "type E starters"

● Infeed terminal from above
Order no. Conductor cross-section Tightening For motor starter

torque protector size
Solid or Finely AWG cables,
stranded stranded solid or stranded
with end
sleeve
mm² mm² AWG Nm
Connection from above
3RV29 25-5EB 2.5 ... 16 2.5 ... 16 10-4 3-4 S00, S0
Cover cap for terminal lugs

Cover caps provide touch protection for reserve slots in sizes S00 and S0 (order no.
3RV19 15-6AB). These cover caps need to be removed before extending the busbars.
4.9.11.3 Mounting
Mounting with 3-phase busbars
NOTICE
Current carrying capacity
When extending the busbars, please take their current carrying capacity into account.
The diagrams below illustrate the mounting procedure for the 3-phase busbar system:
3RV1915-..B
3RV2925-5AB
3RV1915-6AB
3RV2915-5B
Figure 4-9 Mounting with 3-phase busbar
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 439
4.9 Accessories
4.9.12 8US busbar adapter
8US 3-phase busbar adapter

To save space when installing the motor starter protectors and to save time and money
when implementing the infeed, busbar adapters are used to attach the motor starter
protectors directly to busbar systems with center-to-center clearance of 60 mm.
The busbar adapters for busbar systems with a center-to-center clearance of 60 mm are
suitable for copper busbars in widths of 12 mm through 30 mm. The busbars can be 5 mm or
10 mm thick.
The motor starter protectors snap onto the adapter and are connected at the input side. This
ready-to-use unit plugs directly onto the busbar systems, thereby taking care of mechanical
fastening and electrical connection at the same time.
Reference
For more information about busbar adapters, see Catalog LV 1.
4.9.12.2 Versions
Busbar systems for 60 mm system

For copper busbars according to DIN 46433:
● Width: 12 mm and 30 mm
● Thickness: 5 mm and 10 mm
● and for T and I special profiles
Order no. Size Rated current Connecting Adapter length Adapter width Rated voltage
cable
A AWG mm mm V
for motor starter protectors with screw terminals
8US12 51-5DS10 S00 16 12 200 45 690
8US12 51-5NT10 S0 32 10 260 45 690
for motor starter protectors with spring-loaded terminals
8US12 51-5DT11 S00 16 12 260 45 690
8US12 51-5NT11 S0 32 10 260 45 690
SIRIUS Innovations
440 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories
Accessories
The following accessories are available for busbar adapters:
● Device holder for lateral mounting on busbar adapters
Order no. Adapter length Adapter width

mm mm
8US12 50-5AS10 200 45
8US12 50-5AT10 260 45
● Lateral modules that can be attached on both sides for widening adapters
Order no. Adapter length Adapter width

mm mm
8US19 98-2BJ10 200 9
● Spacer to fix the feeder onto the busbar adapter (order no. 8US19 98-1BA10)
● Vibration and shock kit for increased vibration and shock load (order no.
8US19 98-1CA10)
Reference

About load feeders on busbar systems Fuseless load feeders (Page 563)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 441
4.9 Accessories
4.9.12.3 Mounting
Prerequisites
DANGER
Hazardous voltage!
Electrical voltage can cause electric shocks or burns.
Before starting work, disconnect the systems and devices from the power supply.
Adjusting the 8US busbar adapter for the busbar system

The busbar adapter can be adjusted to suit the following busbar thicknesses:
● 5 mm (delivery condition)
● 10 mm

1 Push the 3 fastening blocks down.
2 Adjust the fastening blocks in
accordance with the busbar thickness
(5 mm/10 mm). 5 mm
3 Push the fastening blocks up until they
engage.
10 mm
SIRIUS Innovations
442 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories
Mounting the motor starter protector on the busbar adapter

The diagrams below illustrate how the motor starter protector is mounted on the busbar
adapter (8US) based on the example of a motor starter protector with screw-type terminals:

1 Press the button on the top of the
busbar adapter to release the holder.
The holder (A) should flip out from the
front of the busbar adapter.
$

2 Snap the motor starter protector onto the

DIN rail, connecting it to the busbar
adapter.
3 Connect the wiring from the busbar
adapter to the motor starter protector's
main circuit terminal.
4 Tighten the screw on the screw terminal.
Check that the cable is clamped tight.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 443
4.9 Accessories
4.9.12.4 Disassembly
Prerequisites
DANGER
Hazardous voltage!
Mounting sequence
Note
The motor starter protector/feeder can be disassembled from the 8US busbar adapter either
before or after the 8US busbar adapter has been removed from the busbars.
Disassembly of the busbar adapter from the busbar system

The diagrams below illustrate how the busbar adapter is disassembled from the busbar
system:

1 From the front, insert a screwdriver
into the right-hand opening on the
busbar adapter and lock the
holder (A). The button on the top of
the busbar adapter should spring up.
SIRIUS Innovations
444 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories

2 Remove the busbar adapter from the
busbars. To do this, you will first need
to push it up slightly so that you can
remove it by pulling it off toward you.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 445
4.9 Accessories
4.9.13 3RV2917 infeed system
Overview
The 3RV29 infeed system provides a convenient means of feeding in and distributing power
for a group of several motor starter protectors or complete load feeders with screw and
spring-loaded connections in size S00 and S0 (exception: this system cannot be used with
3RV21 motor starter protectors and 3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers). .
The system is based on a basic module complete with a lateral infeed (3-phase busbar with
infeed). This infeed with spring-loaded connections is attached on the left or right depending
on the version and can be fed in with a maximum conductor cross-section of 25 mm2 (with
end sleeve). A basic module has two slots onto each of which a motor starter protector can
be snapped.
Expansion modules (3-phase busbars for system expansion) are available for expanding the
system. An expansion plug is used to connect the individual modules.
The electrical connection between the 3-phase busbars and the motor starter protectors is
established using connectors. The complete system can be installed on a TH 35 DIN rail
conforming to DIN EN 60715 and can be expanded at will up to the maximum current
carrying capacity of 63 A.
The simple and time-saving plug-in connections mean that the system can be set up easily
and in next to no time. The lateral infeed means that the system does not take up as much
space in the control cabinet either. The additional overall height required for the infeed is just
30 mm. The option to have the infeed on both sides maximizes flexibility where the
configuration of the control cabinet is concerned: Infeed on left-hand or right-hand side as
well as infeed on one side and outfeed on the other side to supply further loads with power
are all possible. As well as the integration of SIRIUS motor starter protectors, a terminal
block with spring-loaded-connections in conjunction with a DIN rail also supports the
integration of 1-/2-/3-phase components such as 5SY miniature circuit breakers or SIRIUS
relay components.
SIRIUS Innovations
446 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories
3b
5
3a
5
1
2
5
3-phase busbars with infeed (3RV2917-1A, 3RV2917-1E) ①

A 3-phase busbar with infeed is required for connecting the energy supply. These modules
comprise an infeed module and 2 slots for each motor starter protector. A choice of two
versions with infeed on the left- or right-hand side is available. Power is fed in via spring-
loaded connections. The spring-loaded terminals support an infeed of up to 25 mm2 with end
sleeve. An end cover is also supplied with every module.
3-phase busbars for system expansion (3RV2917-4A, 3RV2917-4B) ②

The 3-phase busbars for system expansion enable the system to be expanded. Users can
choose modules with 2 or 3 slots. The system can be expanded as required up to a
maximum current carrying capacity of 63 A. An expansion plug is also supplied with each
module.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 447
4.9 Accessories
Expansion plug (3RV2917-5BA00) ③a

The expansion plug is used to establish the electrical connection of adjacent 3-phase
busbars. The current carrying capacity of this plug is 63 A. An expansion plug is also
supplied with each 3-phase busbar for system expansion. Additional expansion plugs are,
therefore, only required as spare parts.
Extra-wide expansion plug (3RV2917-5E) ③b

The extra-wide expansion plug establishes the electrical connection between two 3-phase
busbars. As such, it performs the same function as the 3RV29 17-5BA00 expansion plug;
the electrical characteristics (e.g. current carrying capacity 63 A) are identical.
This 3RV29 17-5E expansion plug is 10 mm wider than the 3RV29 17-5BA00 expansion
plug and as such there is a distance of 10 mm between the connected 3-phase busbars
when the plug is connected. This distance can be used to lay the auxiliary and control
current wiring ("wiring duct"). Motor starter protectors and contactors can be wired from
below, which means that the complete cable duct above the system can be omitted.
End cover (3RV2917-6A) ④

The end cover is used to cover the 3-phase busbars at the open end of the system. This
cover is therefore only required one for each system. An end cover is supplied with each 3-
phase busbar with infeed. Additional end covers are, therefore, only required as spare parts.
Connector ⑤
The connectors are used to establish the electrical connection between the 3-phase busbar
and the 3RV2 motor starter protector. There are various versions:
● 3RV2 motor starter protector, size S00
– With screw terminals (3RV2917-5CA00)
– With spring-loaded terminals (3RV2917-5AA00)
● 3RV2 motor starter protector, size S0
– With screw terminals (3RV1927-5AA00)
– With spring-loaded terminals (3RV2927-5AA00)
Contactor base (3RV2927-7AA00) ⑥

The contactor bases can be used to install load feeders in the system. The contactor bases
are suitable for size S00 and S0 contactors with spring-loaded terminals and screw terminals
and are simply snapped onto the 3-phase busbars. Both direct-on-line and reversing starters
are possible. One contactor base is required for direct-on-line starters and two for reversing
starters.
To assemble load feeders for reversing feeders, the contactor bases can be arranged next to
one another (overall width 90 mm). (In this case, mechanical interlocking of the contactors is
possible.) The contactor bases are also suitable for soft starters in sizes S00 and S0 with
screw connection.
SIRIUS Innovations
448 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories
The infeed system has been designed for installation on a 35 mm DIN rail with 7.5 mm
overall depth. These DIN rails provide the contactor base with a stable mounting surface.
When using DIN rails with a depth of 15 mm, the spacer connected to the underside of the
contactor base has to be knocked out and attached to the counterpart, which is also located
on the underside. This stabilizes the contactor base on the mounting surface. When using
DIN rails with a depth of 7.5 mm, the spacer has no function and can be removed.
The link modules are used for direct feeders, so it is not absolutely necessary to use a
contactor base. The motor starter protector and contactor assemblies can then be snapped
directly onto the slots in the 3-phase busbars. The corresponding link modules
(3RA19 21-1...., 3RA29 21-1...., 3RA29 11-2. or 3RA29 21-2....) should generally be used for
size S00 and S0 feeders.
Terminal block (3RV2917-5D) ⑦

The 3RV29 17-5D terminal block can be used to integrate additional 1-, 2-, and 3-phase
components alongside the SIRIUS motor starter protector. With the aid of the terminal block,
the 3 phases can be fed out of the system, thereby enabling even single-phase loads to be
integrated into the system. As the terminal block plugs into the slot on the expansion plug,
the outfeed can be positioned in the center or at the end of the infeed system. The terminal
block can be rotated through 180° and interlocked with the infeed system's support modules.
So that the 1-, 2-, and 3-phase components can be plugged into the infeed system, the
45 mm 3RV19 17-7B DIN rail (which is screwed onto the support plate) is available.
4.9.13.2 Derating
Derating for fuseless load feeders S00/S0 in the 3RV (63 A) CC infeed system
Size Rated current Max. permissible rated operating Max. ambient temperature
Ie [A] current Ie [%] T [°C]
S00 ≤ 14 100 60
> 14 ... 16 87 60
> 14 ... 16 100 40
S0 ≤ 16 100 60
> 16 ... 25 87 60
> 16 ... 25 100 40
> 25 ... 32 87 40
> 32 Not permissible
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 449
4.9 Accessories
4.9.13.3 Mounting
Mounting the 3RV2917 infeed system
3RV2917-1A
3RV2917-4A
3RV2917-4B

m
7,5 m
3RV2917-5BA00
RSWLRQDO TH35-7.5
3RV2917-5E TH35-15
DIN EN 60715

m
3RV2917-6A 15 m

3RV2927-7AA00 F
D
M4 x 16 mm
Mt = 1,5 Nm
180º E

1 Snap the busbar onto the DIN rail.
2 Slide the individual busbars together.
3 Connect the individual busbars with the expansion plug to establish an electrical
connection between the busbars.
4 Fit the end cover to cover the terminal connections at the end of the busbars.
5 You need the contactor base to mount load feeders. Connect this to the underside
of the busbar, as illustrated in the diagram.
If you are using DIN rails with a depth of 15 mm, spacers are attached to the
contactor base (a). Remove the spacer (b) and attach it to the designated opening
(c).
6 Screw the contactor base tight with M4 screws, tightening torque 1.5 Nm.
SIRIUS Innovations
450 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.9 Accessories
The diagram below shows an example mounting scenario based on the attachment of the
3RV2 motor starter protector with spring-loaded terminals, size S0, to the 3RV2917 infeed
system.

1 Snap the motor starter protector onto the infeed system.
2 Establish the electrical connection between the infeed system and the motor starter
protector by inserting the connector into the corresponding socket contacts as
shown in the zoom view.
Keep hold of the device as you do this.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 451
4.9 Accessories
4.9.14 Link module for attaching a contactor
Link module for motor starter protector - contactor

Link modules to establish the electrical and mechanical connections between motor starter
protector and contactor/solid-state contactor or soft starter are required if you wish to use
load feeders.
Function of link modules

The link modules have the following functions:
● Electrical connection between motor starter protector and contactor/solid-state contactor
or soft starter
● Mechanical connection between motor starter protector and contactor/solid-state
contactor or soft starter
Depending on the connection system of the individual parts there are three different types of
link module for load feeders:
● Link modules with screw-type connection system
The motor starter protector and the contactor/contactors have a screw connection.
● Link modules for individual devices with spring-loaded connection system
The motor starter protector and the contactor/contactors have a spring-loaded
connection.
● Link modules for hybrid connection
The motor starter protector has a screw connection and the contactor/contactors have a
spring-loaded connection.
4.9.14.2 Mounting
Reference

About mounting link modules Load feeders, under Mounting (Page 572)
SIRIUS Innovations
452 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.10 Technical data
4.10 Technical data
Table 4- 31 Performance features of 3RV2 motor starter protectors
Feature 3RV20 3RV21 3RV23 3RV24 3RV27 3RV28

Applications
• System protection ✓1) ✓1) -- -- ✓ ✓
• Motor protection ✓ -- -- -- -- --
• Motor protection with overload -- ✓ -- -- -- --
relay function
• Starter combinations -- -- ✓ -- -- --
• Transformer protection -- -- -- ✓ ✓ ✓
Size S00, S0 S00, S0 S00, S0 S00, S0 S00 S00
Rated current In
• Size S00 A Up to 16 Up to 16 Up to 16 Up to 16 Up to 15 Up to 15
• Size S0 A Up to 40 Up to 32 Up to 40 Up to 25 -- --
Rated operational voltage Ue V 690 AC2) 690 AC2) 690 AC2) 690 AC2) AC 690 AC 690
acc. to IEC
Rated frequency Hz 50 / 60 50 / 60 50 / 60 50 / 60 50 / 60 50 / 60
Tripping class CLASS 10 CLASS 10 -- CLASS 10 -- --
Thermal overload release A 0.11 to 0.16 0.11 to 0.16 Without3) 0.11 to 0.16 0.16 ... 15 0.16 to 15
to to to fixed setting fixed
34 to 40 27 to 32 20 to 25 setting
Overcurrent release 13x 13x 13x 20x 13x 20x
Multiple of the rated current
Short-circuit breaking capacity kA 20 / 55 / 55 / 100 20 / 55 / 100 55 / 100 4) 4)
Icu at 400 V AC 100

✓ = Supports this function
-- = Does not support this function
1) If all 3 phases are under symmetrical load
2) With molded-plastic enclosure 500 V AC
3) Appropriate overload relays must be provided for motor overload protection
4) Acc. to UL 489 at 480 V/277 V AC: 65 kA
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 453
4.10 Technical data
4.10.2 3RV2 motor starter protectors
Type 3RV2. 1 3RV2. 2

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
Standards
• IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100) Yes
• IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101) Yes
• IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) Yes
• UL 489, CSA C22.2-No.5-02 Yes
Number of poles 3
Max. rated current In max A 16 40
(= max. rated operational current Ie)
• Storage/transport °C –50 ... +80
• Operation ... 32 A °C –20 ... +701)
36 to 40 A °C -20 ... +40
Permissible rated current at internal cubicle temperature
• +60 °C % 100
• +70 °C % 87
Motor starter protector in enclosure ≤ 32 A
Permissible rated current at housing ambient temperature
• +35 °C % 100
• +60 °C % 87
Rated operational voltage Ue
• acc. to IEC V AC 6902)
• acc. to UL/CSA V AC 600
Rated frequency Hz 50 / 60
Utilization category
• IEC 60947-2 (motor starter protectors) A
• IEC 60947-4-1 (motor starters) AC-3
Tripping class CLASS acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 10
Direct current short-circuit breaking capacity(time constant t = 5 ms)
• 1 current path 150 V DC kA 10
• 2 current paths in series 300 V DC kA 10
• 3 current paths in series 450 V DC kA 10
Power loss Pv per motor starter In: ... 0.63 A W 5
protector dependent upon rated In: 0.8 to 6.3 A W 6
SIRIUS Innovations
454 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.10 Technical data
Type 3RV2. 1 3RV2. 2

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
current In (upper setting range) In: 8 to 16 A W 7
Rper current path = P/I2 x 3
In: ... 16 A -- 7
In: 20 to 25 A W -- 8
In: 28 to 32 A W -- 11
In: ... 40 A W 14
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 25/11 (rectangular pulse and sine pulse)
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60529 IP203)
Temperature compensation acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 °C –20 ... +60
Phase loss sensitivity acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 Yes
Explosion protection – safe operation of motors with Yes for 3RV20
"increased safety" explosion protection type
• EC type examination certificate number conforming to Directive On request
94/9/EC (ATEX)
Isolating function acc. to IEC 60947-2 Yes
Main and EMERGENCY OFF switch characteristics4) Yes
acc. to IEC 60204-1 (VDE 0113)
Protective separation between the main circuit and the auxiliary circuit necessary for PELV applications
acc. to DIN EN 60947-1
• Up to 400 V + 10% Yes
• Up to 415 V + 5% (higher voltage on request) Yes
Permissible mounting position Any, acc. to IEC 60447 start command "I" right
or top
Mechanical durability Operating cycles 100 000
Electrical durability Operating cycles 100 000
Max. switching frequency per hour (motor starts) 1/h 15
1) Current reduction above +60 °C
2) With molded-plastic enclosure 500 V
3) Terminal compartment IP00 (exception: 3RV20 11-..2. motor starter protectors with spring-loaded terminals, degree of
protection IP20)
4) With appropriate accessories
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 455
4.10 Technical data
4.10.3 Rated data for auxiliary and signaling switches
Type 3RV29 Lateral auxiliary switch with Signaling Transverse auxiliary switch with
1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO, 2 NC, switch 1 CO contact 1 NO + 1 NC,
2 NO + NC 2 NO
Max. rated voltage
• Acc. to NEMA (UL) V AC 600 250
• Acc. to NEMA (CSA) V AC 600 250
Continuous current A 10 10 5 2.5
Switching capacity 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO, 2 NC: A600, B600, R300 C300, R300
A600, Q300; Q300
2 NO + 2 NC: A300, Q300
4.10.4 Auxiliary switches, front-mounted, transverse
Switching capacity for different voltages

1 CO contact 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO
Rated operational current Ie
• AC-15, alternating voltage
- 24 V A 4 2
- 230 V A 3 0.5
- 400 V A 1.5 --
- 690 V A 0.5 --
• AC-12 = Ith, alternating voltage
- 24 V A 10 2.5
- 230 V A 10 2.5
- 400 V A 10 --
- 690 V A 10 --
• DC-13, direct voltage L/R 200 ms
- 24 V A 1 1
- 48 V A -- 0.3
- 60 V A -- 0.15
- 110 V A 0.22 --
- 220 V A 0.1 --
Minimum load capacity V 17
mA 1
SIRIUS Innovations
456 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.10 Technical data
4.10.5 Auxiliary switches, transverse, solid-state compatible
1 CO contact
Rated operational voltage Ue alternating voltage V 125
Rated operational current Ie/AC-14 at Ue = 125 V A 0.1
Rated operational voltage Ue direct voltage L/R 200 ms V 60
Rated operational current Ie /DC-13 at Ue = 60 V A 0.3
mA 1
4.10.6 Auxiliary switches, lateral and signaling switches
Switching capacity for different voltages:

Lateral auxiliary switch 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO, 2 NC, 2 NO +2 NC;
signaling switch
• AC-15, alternating voltage
- 24 V A 6
- 230 V A 4
- 400 V A 3
- 690 V A 1
• AC-12 = Ith, alternating voltage
- 24 V A 10
- 230 V A 10
- 400 V A 10
- 690 V A 10
• DC, direct voltage L/R 200 ms
- 24 V A 2
- 110 V A 0.5
- 220 V A 0.25
- 440 V A 0.1
mA 1
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 457
4.10 Technical data
4.10.7 Auxiliary releases
Undervoltage release Shunt release

Power input
• During pick-up
- Alternating voltages VA/W 20.2 / 13 20.2 / 13
- Direct voltages W 20 13 ... 80
• During continuous operation
- Alternating voltages VA/W 7.2 / 2.4 --
- Direct voltages W 2.1 --
Response voltage
• Tripping V 0.35 to 0.7 x Us 0.7 to 1.1 x Us
• Pick-up V 0.85 to 1.1 x Us --
Maximum opening time ms 20
4.10.8 Short-circuit protection for auxiliary and control circuits
Undervoltage release Shunt release

gL/gG melting fuses A 10
Miniature circuit breaker, C characteristic A 61)
1) Prospective short-circuit current < 0.4 kA
SIRIUS Innovations
458 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.10 Technical data
4.10.9 Conductor cross-sections main circuit
Type 3RV2.11 3RV2.21 3RV27 11,

3RV28 11
Size S00 S0 S00
Width 45 mm 45 mm 45 mm
• Connection screw M3, Pozidriv size 2 M4, Pozidriv size 2 M4 Pozidriv size 2
• Operating tool mm ∅ 5 ... 6 ∅ 5 ... 6 ∅ 5 ... 6
• Specified tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5 2.5 ... 3
• Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1-wire or 2-wire connection possible
- Solid mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)1), 2 x (1 to 2.5)1), 1 ... 10,
2x4 2 x (2.5 to 10)1) max. 2 x 10
- Stranded mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)1), 2 x (1 to 2.5)1), 1.5 ... 25,
2x4 2 x (2.5 to 10)1) max. 10 + 25
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)1), 2 x (1 to 2.5)1), 1 ... 16,
(DIN 46228 Part 1) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)1) 2 x (2.5 to 6)1) max. 6 + 16
1 x 10
- AWG cables, solid or stranded AW 2 x (18 to 14)1), 2 x 12 2 x (16 to 12)1), 2 x (14 to 10)
G 2 x (14 to 8)1)
• Operating tool mm ∅ 3.0 x 0.5; ∅ 3.5 x 0.5
- Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 to 4) 2 x (1 to 10) --
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) 2 x (1 to 6) --
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) 2 x (1 to 6) --
- AWG cables, solid or stranded AW 2 x (20 to 12) 2 x (18 to 8) --
G
Max. outer diameter of the conductor insulation mm 3.6 3.6 --
Connection type Ring cable lug connection
• Connection screw M3, Pozidriv size 2 M4, Pozidriv size 2 --
• Operating tool mm ∅ 5 ... 6 ∅ 5 ... 6 --
• Specified tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5 --
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 459
4.10 Technical data
Type 3RV2.11 3RV2.21 3RV27 11,

3RV28 11
Size S00 S0 S00
Usable ring cable lugs mm d22) = min. 3.2, d22) = min. 4.3, --
• DIN 46234 without insulating sleeve d32) = max. 7.5 d32) = max. 12.2
• DIN 46225 without insulating sleeve

• DIN 46237 with insulating sleeve
• JIS C2805 type R without insulating sleeve
• JIS C2805 type RAV with insulating sleeve
• JIS C2805 type RAP with insulating sleeve
2)
d3
d2
4.10.10 Conductor cross-sections auxiliary and control circuits
Type 3RV2.11 3RV2.21 3RV27 11,

3RV28 11
Size S00 S0 S00
Connection screw M3, Pozidriv size 2
Operating tool mm ∅ 5 ... 6
Specified tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2
Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1-wire or 2-wire connection possible
• Solid or stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)1), 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)1)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)1), 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)1)
(DIN 46228 Part 1)
• AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 to 14)1), 2 x (20 to 16)1)
Operating tool mm ∅ 3.0 x 0.5 ∅ 3.5 x 0.5
SIRIUS Innovations
460 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.10 Technical data
Type 3RV2.11 3RV2.21 3RV27 11,

3RV28 11
Size S00 S0 S00
Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1-wire or 2-wire connection possible
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5)
(DIN 46228 Part 1)
Max. outer diameter of the conductor mm 3.6
insulation
Usable ring cable lugs mm d22) = min. 3.2, d32) = max. 7.5
2)
d3
d2
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 461
4.10 Technical data
4.10.11 Short-circuit breaking capacity
4.10.11.1 Short-circuit breaking capacity for motor starter protectors
Short-circuit breaking capacity Icu, Ics acc. to IEC 60947-2

The table lists the rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Icu and the rated service
short-circuit breaking capacity Ics for 3RV2 motor starter protectors at different operating
voltages dependent on the rated current In of the protectors.
Power can be fed in to the motor starter protectors via the terminals at the top or at the
bottom without restricting the rated data. If the short-circuit current at the installation location
exceeds the motor starter protector's specified rated service short-circuit breaking capacity,
you will need to use a backup fuse. It is also possible to install an upstream motor starter
protector with a limiter function.
The maximum rated current of this backup fuse is indicated in the tables. The rated ultimate
short-circuit breaking capacity then applies as specified on the fuse.
Table 4- 32 Short-circuit breaking capacity ICU, ICS acc. to IEC 60947-2 - Part 1
Motor starter Rated current Up to 240 V AC Up to 400 V/415 V AC

protector In Icu Ics Max. fuse (gL/gG) Icu Ics Max. fuse (gL/gG)
Type A kA kA A kA kA A
Size S00
3RV2.1 0.16 ... 1.25 100 100 - 100 100 -
1.6 100 100 - 100 100 -
2 100 100 - 100 100 -
2.5 100 100 - 100 100 -
3.2 100 100 - 100 100 -
4 100 100 - 100 100 -
5 100 100 - 100 100 -
6.3 100 100 - 100 100 -
8 100 100 - 100 100 -
10 100 100 - 100 100 -
12.5 100 100 - 100 100 -
16 100 100 - 55 30 100
SIRIUS Innovations
462 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.10 Technical data
Motor starter Rated current Up to 240 V AC Up to 400 V/415 V AC

protector In Icu Ics Max. fuse (gL/gG) Icu Ics Max. fuse (gL/gG)
Type A kA kA A kA kA A
Size S0
3RV2.2 16 100 100 - 55 25 100
20 100 100 - 55 25 125
22 100 100 - 55 25 125
25 100 100 - 55 25 125
28 100 100 - 55 25 125
32 100 100 - 55 25 125
36 100 100 - 20 10 125
40 100 100 - 20 10 125
Table 4- 33 Short-circuit breaking capacity ICU, ICS acc. to IEC 60947-2 - Part 2
Motor Rated current Up to 440 V /460 V AC Up to 500 V /525 V AC Up to 690 V AC

starter In Icu Ics Max. fuse Icu Ics Max. fuse (gL/gG) Icu Ics Max.
protector (gL/gG)3) fuse
(gL/gG)
Type A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A
Size S00
3RV2.1 0.16 ... 1.25 100 100 - 100 100 - 100 100 -
1.6 100 100 - 100 100 - 100 100 -
2 100 100 - 100 100 - 10 10 25
2.5 100 100 - 100 100 - 10 10 25
3.2 100 100 - 100 100 - 10 10 32
4 100 100 - 100 100 - 6 4 32
5 100 100 - 100 100 - 6 4 32
6.3 100 100 - 100 100 - 6 4 50
8 50 50 63 42 42 63 6 4 50
10 50 50 80 42 42 63 6 4 50
12.5 50 50 80 42 42 80 6 4 63
16 50 10 80 10 5 80 4 4 63
Size S0
3RV2.2 16 50 10 80 10 5 80 4 2 63
20 50 10 80 10 5 80 4 2 63
22 50 10 100 10 5 80 4 2 63
25 50 10 100 10 5 80 4 2 63
28 30 10 125 10 5 100 4 2 100
32 30 10 125 10 5 100 4 2 100
36 12 8 125 6 3 100 3 2 100
40 12 8 125 6 3 100 3 2 100
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 463
4.10 Technical data
4.10.11.2 Short-circuit breaking capacity for motor starter protectors in the IT system
Short-circuit breaking capacity IcuIT in the IT system

3RV2 motor starter protectors are suitable for use in IT systems. The values of Icu and Ics
apply for the three-pole short circuit. In the case of a double ground fault in different phases
(input and output side of a motor starter protector), the special short-circuit breaking capacity
IcuIT applies. The specifications listed in the table below apply for 3RV2 motor starter
protectors.
In some ranges IcuIT is 100 kA and 50 kA respectively. As such the motor starter protectors
are short-circuit-proof in this range.
If the short-circuit current at the installation location exceeds the motor starter protector's
specified rated service short-circuit breaking capacity, you will need to use a backup fuse.
The maximum rated current of this backup fuse is indicated in the tables. The rated short-
circuit breaking capacity then applies as specified on the fuse.
Table 4- 34 Short-circuit breaking capacity IcuIT in the IT system part 1
Rated current In Up to 240 V AC Up to 400 V2)/415 V3) AC

IcuIT Max. fuse (gL/gG)4) IcuIT Max. fuse (gL/gG)4), 5)
A kA A kA A
Size S00
0.16 ... 0.4 100 1) 100 1)
0.5 100 1) 100 1)
0.63 100 1) 100 1)
0.8 100 1) 100 1)
1 100 1) 100 1)
1.25 100 1) 100 1)
1.6 100 1) 100 1)
2 100 1) 8 25
2.5 100 1) 8 25
3.2 100 1) 8 32
4 100 1) 4 32
5 100 1) 4 32
6.3 100 1) 4 50
8 100 1), 4 50
10 100 1) 4 50
12.5 100 1) 4 63
16 55 80 4 63
SIRIUS Innovations
464 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.10 Technical data
Rated current In Up to 240 V AC Up to 400 V2)/415 V3) AC

IcuIT Max. fuse (gL/gG)4) IcuIT Max. fuse (gL/gG)4), 5)
A kA A kA A
Size S0
16 55 80 4 63
20 55 80 4 63
22 55 80 4 63
25 55 80 4 63
28 55 80 2 63
32 55 80 2 63
36 20 80 2 63
40 20 80 2 63
1) No backup fuse required, as short-circuit-proof up to 100 kA
2) 10 % overvoltage
3) 5 % overvoltage
4) Backup fuse only required if short-circuit current at installation location is > IcuIT
5) Alternatively, fuseless limiter combinations can be used for 690 V AC
Table 4- 35 Short-circuit breaking capacity IcuIT in the IT system part 2
Rated current In Up to 440 V2)/460 V3) AC Up to 500 V2)/525 V3) AC Up to 690 V6) AC
IcuIT Max. fuse IcuIT Max. fuse (gL/gG)4), 5) IcuIT Max.
(gL/gG)4), 5) fuse
(gL/gG)4)
A kA A kA A kA A
Size S00
0.16 ... 0.4 100 1) 100 1) 100 1)
0.5 100 1) 100 1) 0.5 4

0.63 100 1) 100 1) 0.5 6
0.8 100 1) 100 1) 0.5 6
1 8 10 8 10 2 10
1.25 8 16 8 16 2 16
1.6 8 20 8 20 2 16
2 8 25 8 25 2 20
2.5 8 25 8 25 2 20
3.2 8 32 8 32 2 25
4 2 32 2 32 2 25
5 2 32 2 32 2 25
6.3 2 40 2 40 1.5 35
8 2 40 2 40 1.5 35
10 2 40 2 40 1.5 40
12.5 2 50 2 50 1.5 40
16 2 50 2 50 1.5 40
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 465
4.10 Technical data
Rated current In Up to 440 V2)/460 V3) AC Up to 500 V2)/525 V3) AC Up to 690 V6) AC
IcuIT Max. fuse IcuIT Max. fuse (gL/gG)4), 5) IcuIT Max.
(gL/gG)4), 5) fuse
(gL/gG)4)
A kA A kA A kA A
Size S0
16 2 50 2 50 1.5 40
20 2 50 2 50 1.5 50
22 2 50 2 50 1.5 50
25 2 50 2 50 1.5 50
28 2 63 2 63 1.5 63
32 2 63 2 63 1.5 63
36 2 63 2 63 1.5 63
40 2 63 2 63 1.5 63
1) No backup fuse required, as short-circuit-proof up to 100 kA
2) 10 % overvoltage
3) 5 % overvoltage
4) Backup fuse only required if short-circuit current at installation location is > IcuIT
5) Alternatively, fuseless limiter combinations can be used for 690 V AC
6) Overvoltage category II applies for applications in IT systems > 600 V
SIRIUS Innovations
466 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.10 Technical data
4.10.11.3 Short-circuit breaking capacity for motor starter protectors with limiter function
Short-circuit breaking capacity for motor starter protectors with limiter function for 500 V AC and
690 V AC according to IEC 60947-2
The data for the short-circuit breaking capacity of motor starter protectors with limiter
function can be obtained on request on the Internet.
See also
Service & Support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support)
4.10.12 Permissible rated data of approved devices for North America (UL/CSA)
4.10.12.1 Approved according to UL 508/CSA C22.2 No. 14

The motor starter protectors in the 3RV2 series are approved for UL/CSA and can be used
conforming to UL 508 and CSA C22.2 No.14 individually or as load feeders in conjunction
with a contactor.
These motor starter protectors can be used as "Manual Motor Controller" for "Group
Installations", as "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group
Installations", and as "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller (Type E)".
Horsepower data
Operating Voltage
current
115 V 200/208 V 230/240 V 460/480 V 575/600 V
1-phase 3-phase 1-phase 3-phase 1-phase 3-phase 1-phase 3-phase 1-phase 3-phase
3RV2011/3RV2111/3RV2311/3RV2411 size S00
0.11...0.16 - - - - - - - - - -
0.14...0.2 - - - - - - - - - -
0.18...0.25 - - - - - - - - - -
0.22...0.32 - - - - - - - - - -
0.28...0.4 - - - - - - - - - -
0.35...0.5 - - - - - - - - - -
0.45...0.63 - - - - - - - - - -
0.55...0.8 - - - - - - - - - -
0.7...1 - - - - - - - - - 1/2
0.9...1.25 - - - - - - - 1/2 - 1/2
1.1...1.6 - - - - 1/10 - - 3/4 - 3/4
1.4...2 - - - - 1/8 - - 3/4 - 1
1.8...2.5 - - 1/6 1/2 1/6 1/2 - 1 - 1 1/2
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 467
4.10 Technical data
Operating Voltage
current
115 V 200/208 V 230/240 V 460/480 V 575/600 V
1-phase 3-phase 1-phase 3-phase 1-phase 3-phase 1-phase 3-phase 1-phase 3-phase
2.2...3.2 1/10 - 1/6 1/2 1/4 3/4 - 1 1/2 - 2
2.8...4 1/8 - 1/4 3/4 1/3 3/4 - 2 - 3
3.5...5 1/6 1/2 1/3 1 1/2 1 - 3 - 3
4.4...6.3 1/4 1/2 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 - 3 - 5
5.5...8 1/3 3/4 3/4 2 1 2 - 5 - 5
7...10 1/2 1 1 2 1 1/2 3 - 5 - 7 1/2
9...12.5 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 3 2 3 - 7 1/2 - 10
11...16 1 2 2 3 2 5 - 10 - -
3RV2021/3RV2121/3RV2321/3RV2421 size S0
11...16 1 2 2 3 2 5 - 10 - -
14...20 1 1/2 3 3 5 3 5 - 10 - -
17...22 1 1/2 3 3 5 3 7 1/2 - 15 - -
20...25 2 3 3 5 (200 V) 3 7 1/2 - 15 - -
7 1/2 (208 V)
23...28 2 3 3 7 1/2 5 10 - 20 - -
27...32 2 5 3 (200 V) 7 1/2 (200 V) 5 10 - 20 - -
5 (208 V) 10 (208 V)
30...36 3 5 5 10 5 10 - 25 - -
34...40 3 5 5 10 7 1/2 10 - 30 - -
SIRIUS Innovations
468 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.10 Technical data
"Manual motor controller", group installation
3RV2 motor starter protector as "Manual Motor Controller"

Upstream short-circuit protection is always implemented if the motor starter protector is used
as a "Manual Motor Controller". This requires approved fuses (according to UL 248) or a
circuit breaker (according to UL 489/CSA C22.2 No. 5-02). These devices must be
dimensioned according to the National Electrical Code (UL) or Canadian Electrical Code
(CSA) installation regulation respectively.
The file numbers for the approval of the 3RV as a manual motor controller are as follows:
● CSA Master Contract 165071, Product Class: 3211 05
Motor starter protector hp-rating1) for FLA2)

max.
Type V 1-phase 3-phase
Size S00
3RV20 11, 3RV21 11, 3RV23 11, 3RV24 11
FLA2) max. 16 A, 480 V 115 1 2
12.5 A, 600 V 200 2 3
230 2 5
460 -- 10
575/600 -- 10
Size S0
3RV20 21, 3RV21 23, 3RV23 21, 3RV 21, 3RV24 21
FLA2) max. 40 A, 480 V 115 3 5
200 5 10
230 7 1/2 10
460 -- 30
575/600 -- --
1) hp-rating= power in horse power(maximum motor power).
2) FLA= Full Load Amps/motor full-load current
Rated current 240 V AC 480 V AC 600 V AC

UL CSA UL CSA UL CSA
In Ibc Ibc Ibc Ibc Ibc Ibc
A kA kA kA kA kA kA
Size S00
0.16 ... 1.25 65 65 65 65 30 30
1.6 65 65 65 65 30 30
2 65 65 65 65 30 30
2.5 65 65 65 65 30 30
3.2 65 65 65 65 30 30
4 65 65 65 65 30 30
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 469
4.10 Technical data
Rated current 240 V AC 480 V AC 600 V AC

A kA kA kA kA kA kA
5 65 65 65 65 30 30
6.3 65 65 65 65 30 30
8 65 65 65 65 30 30
10 65 65 65 65 30 30
12.5 65 65 65 65 30 30
16 65 65 65 65 - -
Size S0
20 65 65 65 65 - -
22 65 65 65 65 - -
25 65 65 65 65 - -
28 65 65 50 50 - -
32 65 65 50 50 - -
36 65 65 12 12 - -
40 65 65 12 12 - -
SIRIUS Innovations
470 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.10 Technical data
"Manual motor controller suitable for tap conductor protection in group installations" (up to 32 A)
3RV20 motor starter protector as "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in
Group Installations"
The "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations"
application is only applicable in the case of UL.
The CSA does not recognize this approval! Upstream short-circuit protection is always
implemented if the motor starter protector is used as a "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for
Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations". This requires approved fuses (according to
UL 248) or a circuit breaker (according to UL 489).
These devices must be dimensioned according to the National Electrical Code installation
regulation.
3RV20 motor starter protectors are approved as "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for Tap
Conductor Protection in Group Installations" under the following file number:

max.
Size S00
3RV20 11
FLA2) max. 16 A; 480 V 115 1 2
12.5 A; 600 V 200 2 3
230 2 5
460 -- 10
575/600 -- 10
Size S0
3RV20 21
FLA2) max. 115 2 5
32 A, 480 V 200 3 7 1/2
230 5 10
460 -- 20
575/600 -- --
1) hp-rating= power in horse power (maximum motor power).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 471
4.10 Technical data
Rated current 240 V AC 480 V/277 V AC 600 V/347 V AC

UL UL UL
In Ibc Ibc Ibc
A kA kA kA
Size S00
0.16 ... 1.25 65 65 30
1.6 65 65 30
2 65 65 30
2.5 65 65 30
3.2 65 65 30
4 65 65 30
5 65 65 30
6.3 65 65 30
8 65 65 30
10 65 65 30
12.5 65 65 30
16 65 65 -
Size S0
20 65 65 -
22 65 65 -
25 65 65 -
28 50 50 -
32 50 50 -
SIRIUS Innovations
472 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.10 Technical data
"Self-protected combination motor controller (type E)" (up to 32 A)
3RV20 motor starter protector as "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller (Type E)"
For approval according to UL 508, a clearance of 1 inch and a creepage distance of 2 inches
are required on the line side for a "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller".
Therefore, 3RV20 motor starter protectors in size S00/S0 are approved according to UL 508
together with the terminal block (order no. 3RV29 28-1H) or phase barriers (order
no. 3RV2928-1K).
CSA approval does not require extended clearances and creepage distances. The terminal
blocks or phase barriers can, therefore, be omitted for use as a "Self-Protected Combination
Motor Controller" according to the CSA.
Controller" under the following file numbers:
● UL File No. E156943, CCN: NKJH,

max.
Size S00
3RV20 11
FLA2) max. 115 1 2
16 A, 480 V 200 2 3
12.5 A, 600 V
230 2 5
460 -- 10
575 / 600 -- 10
Size S0
3RV20 21
FLA2) max. 115 2 5
32 A, 480 V 200 3 7 1/2
230 5 10
460 -- 20
575/600 -- --
1) hp-rating= power in horse power(maximum motor power).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 473
4.10 Technical data
Rated current 240 V AC 480 V/277 V AC 600 V/347 V AC

A kA kA kA kA kA kA
Size S00
0.16 ... 1.25 65 65 65 65 30 30
1.6 65 65 65 65 30 30
2 65 65 65 65 30 30
2.5 65 65 65 65 30 30
3.2 65 65 65 65 30 30
4 65 65 65 65 30 30
5 65 65 65 65 30 30
6.3 65 65 65 65 30 30
8 65 65 65 65 30 30
10 65 65 65 65 30 30
12.5 65 65 65 65 30 30
16 65 65 65 65 - -
Size S0
20 65 65 65 65 - -
22 65 65 65 65 - -
25 65 65 65 65 - -
28 50 50 50 50 - -
32 50 50 50 50 - -
SIRIUS Innovations
474 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.10 Technical data
Connection data for 3RV29 28-1H terminal blocks
Table 4- 36 Connection data for 3RV29 28-1H terminal blocks
Type 3RV29 28-1H

Specified tightening torque Nm 2.5 ... 3
Front clamping point connected
• Solid mm² 1 ... 10
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 1 ... 16
• Stranded mm² 2.5 ... 25
• AWG cables, solid or stranded mm² 14 ... 3
Connection screw M4
Rear clamping point connected
• Solid mm² 1 ... 10
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 1 ... 16
• Stranded mm² 1.5 ... 25
• AWG cables, solid or stranded mm² 16 ... 3
Connection screw M4
Both clamping points connected
• Front clamping point:
- Solid mm² 1 ... 10
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 1 ... 10
- Stranded mm² 2.5 ... 10
- AWG cables, solid or stranded mm² 14 ... 6
- Connection screw M4
• Rear clamping point:
- Solid mm² 1 ... 10
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 1 ... 10
- Stranded mm² 5 ... 25
- AWG cables, solid or stranded mm² 16 ... 3
- Connection screw M4
Reference
More information about accessories is available in the chapter titled Phase barriers/UL 508
"type E" terminals (Page 422).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 475
4.10 Technical data
4.10.12.2 Approval as "circuit breaker" according to UL 489/CSA C 22.2 No. 5-02
3RV27 and 3RV28 as "Circuit Breaker"

These devices are approved as Circuit Breaker according to UL 489 or CSA C22.2 No.5-02
with 100% rated current ("100 %-rated breaker"). As such they can be used as upstream
short-circuit protection devices for "Manual Motor Controller" and "Manual Motor Controller
Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations".
3RV27 and 3RV28 are approved as "Circuit Breaker" under the following file numbers:
● UL File No. E235044, CCN: DIVQ,
3RV2711
Rated current 480 V/277 V AC 600 V/347 V AC

UL CSA UL CSA
In Ibc Ibc Ibc Ibc
A kA kA kA kA
0.16 ... 1.25 65 65 10 10
1.6 65 65 10 10
2 65 65 10 10
2.5 65 65 10 10
3.2 65 65 10 10
4 65 65 - -
5 65 65 - -
6.3 65 65 - -
8 65 65 - -
10 65 65 - -
12.5 65 65 - -
15 65 65 - -
SIRIUS Innovations
476 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
4.10 Technical data
3RV2811
Rated current 480 V/277 V AC 600 V/347 V AC

UL CSA UL CSA
In Ibc Ibc Ibc Ibc
A kA kA kA kA
0.16 ... 1.25 65 65 10 10
1.6 65 65 10 10
2 65 65 10 10
2.5 65 65 10 10
3.2 65 65 - -
4 65 65 - -
5 65 65 - -
6.3 65 65 - -
8 65 65 - -
10 65 65 - -
12.5 65 65 - -
15 65 65 - -
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 477
Note
4.11.1 Dimension drawings for 3RV2 motor starter protectors
Motor starter protector with screw-type connection system

Figure 4-10 Motor starter protector with screw-type connection system S00

Figure 4-11 Motor starter protector with screw-type connection system S0
SIRIUS Innovations
478 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Motor starter protector with spring-loaded connection system

Figure 4-12 Motor starter protector with spring-loaded connection system S00

Figure 4-13 Motor starter protector with spring-loaded connection system S0
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 479
Motor starter protector with ring cable lug connection system

Figure 4-14 Motor starter protector with ring cable lug connection system
Circuit breaker acc. to UL 489

Figure 4-15 Circuit breaker acc. to UL 489
SIRIUS Innovations
480 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Drilling plan

Figure 4-16 Drilling plan
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 481

SIRIUS Innovations
482 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3RV2 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers acc. to UL 489
3RV20.1-...0, 3RV24.1-...0, 3RV23.1-...0

3RV27.1-...0, 3RV28.1-...0
/ / / / / /

, , , , , ,

7 7 7 7 7 7
Motor starter protectors for motor Motor starter protector for starter protection
protection/transformer protection/system
protection
3RV20.1-...5, 3RV24.1-...5
/ / /
,! ,! ,!
7 7 7
Motor starter protectors for motor protection/transformer protection with transverse auxiliary
switch
3RV21.1-...0
7(67
/ / /

, , ,

7 7 7
Motor starter protectors for motor protection with overload relay function
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 483
3RV29 auxiliary switches
Lateral auxiliary switches

3RV2901-.A 3RV2901-.B 3RV2901-.C

1 NO contact, 1 NC 2 NO contacts 2 NC contacts

contact
Transverse auxiliary switches

3RV2901-1D 3RV2901-.E 3RV2901-.F 3RV2901-.J

1 CO contact 1 NO contact, 1 NC 2 NO contacts 2 NO contacts, 2 NC

contact contacts
Auxiliary releases and signaling switches
Auxiliary release
3RV2902-.A.. 3RV2922-.C.. 3RV2902-.D..
' ' &
8
8
&
' '
Undervoltage release Undervoltage release with leading Shunt release

auxiliary contacts, 2 NO
Signaling switch
3RV2921-.M

,!

Signaling switch
SIRIUS Innovations
484 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays 5
5.1 Standards
5.1.1 Standards
3RU21 thermal overload relays and 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays meet the
requirements of the following standards:
Table 5- 1 Standards
Device standards • IEC/EN 60947-1

• IEC/EN 60947-4-1
• IEC/EN 60947-5-1
• IEC 61000-4; UL 508/CSA C 22.2
EMC standard 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays also meet the requirements of EMC
standards. These standards are not relevant in the case of the 3RU21 thermal
overload relay.
Resistance to The overload relays are climate-proof according to IEC 60721-3.
extreme climates
Touch protection Overload relays are safe to touch according to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100.
Terminal covers may have to be fitted onto the connecting bars, depending on
the assignment to other devices.
Reference
Other standards that 3RU21 and 3RB30/3RB31 overload relays conform to are listed in the
chapter titled Technical data (Page 536). SIRIUS components have been approved by a
whole range of bodies for various sectors (shipbuilding, etc.). An up-to-date list of approvals
appears in Chapter 20 of the Siemens Low Voltage LV1 Catalog, and more information, as
well as an option to download certificates, can be obtained on the Internet
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 485
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 overload relays
5.2.1 Introduction
3RU21 thermal overload relays

3RU21 thermal overload relays up to 40 A have been designed to provide current-dependent
protection for loads with normal starting against impermissibly high temperature rises due to
overload, phase asymmetry or phase failure. An overload or phase failure results in an
increase of the motor current beyond the set rated motor current.
Via heating elements, this current rise increasingly heats up the bimetal strips located inside
the device. The deflection of these bimetal strips eventually activates the auxiliary contacts
via a release mechanism. The contacts then disconnect the load via a contactor. (The
contactor function is not an integral component of the overload relay.)
3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays

3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays up to 40 A have been designed to provide current-
dependent protection for loads with normal and heavy-duty starting against impermissibly
high temperature rises due to overload, phase asymmetry or phase failure.
An overload, phase asymmetry or a phase failure results in an increase of the motor current
beyond the set rated motor current.
This current rise is detected by the current transformers integrated in the devices and
evaluated by corresponding solid-state circuits which then supply a pulse to the auxiliary
contacts. The contacts then disconnect the load via a contactor. (The contactor function is
not an integral component of the overload relay.)
In addition to current-dependent protection for loads against impermissibly high temperature
rise caused by overload, phase asymmetry, and phase failure, 3RB31 solid-state overload
relays feature internal ground-fault detection (not possible in conjunction with contactor
assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start). This provides protection of loads against high-
impedance faults to ground caused by damaged insulation, moisture, condensation, etc.
System integration
The overload relays have been matched to the contactors in the 3RT series both electrically
and mechanically and can be integrated in the feeder by means of direct mounting. The
thermal and the solid-state overload relays are available in two sizes, S00 and S0.
Connection systems
The overload relays are available with the following connection system options:
● Ring cable lug connection system (3RU21 only)
SIRIUS Innovations
486 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Accessories
The accessories have been tailored to the overload relays; they can be mounted easily and
without the need for tools.
5.2.2 Versions
Sizes, setting ranges, and device versions

The table below provides an overview of the various sizes in which 3RU21 thermal overload
relays and 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays are available. The maximum rated
currents, the minimum and maximum setting ranges, and the available tripping classes are
listed for each individual size.
Table 5- 2 Sizes
Size 3RU21 thermal overload 3RB30 solid-state overload 3RB31 solid-state

(width 45 mm each) relay relay overload relay
Rated operational voltage Ue 690 V AC 690 V AC 690 V AC
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Tripping classes CLASS 10 CLASS 10 or 20 (fixed) CLASS 5, 10, 20, 30
(adjustable)
Current ranges 0.11 to 0.16 A - -
for thermal overload releases to
34 to 40 A
Current ranges - 0.1 to 0.4 A 0.1 to 0.4 A
for solid-state overload releases to to
10 to 40 A 10 to 40 A
Rated operational power for three- 0.04 kW 0.04 kW 0.04 kW
phase motors at 400 V AC to to to
18.5 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW
3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays have the same dimensions as 3RU21 thermal
overload relays. This means that thermal overload relays can easily be substituted with solid-
state versions if increased overload protection is required (wide setting ranges (1:4), for
example, or even reduced power loss and, as a result, minimized energy consumption).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 487
5.2.3 Applications
Table 5- 3 Overview of applications
Applications 3RU21 3RB30/3RB31

System protection ✓1) ✓1)
Motor protection ✓ ✓
Alternating current, 3-phase ✓ ✓
Alternating current, 1-phase ✓ -
Direct current ✓ -
1) In the main circuit, the devices provide overload protection for the assigned electrical loads (e.g.
motors), feeder cable, and other switching and protection devices in the respective load feeder.
The 3 phases have to be under symmetrical load.

3RU21 thermal overload relays have been designed to protect three-phase loads, DC loads,
and single-phase AC loads.
Note
Protection of DC loads/single-phase AC loads
If a 3RU21 thermal overload relay is to be used to protect DC loads or single-phase AC
loads, all the bimetal strips have to be heated. Therefore, all of the relay's main current paths
have to be connected in series.

3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays are designed to protect three-phase loads in
sinusoidal 50/60 Hz voltage supplies.
Note
DC loads/Single-phase AC loads
The relay is not suitable for protecting DC loads or single-phase AC loads. In the case of
loads with single-pole load, the 3RU21 thermal overload relay or the 3RB22/3RB23 solid-
state overload relay (only suitable for the protection of single-phase AC loads) should be
used.
Reference

About overload relay applications Configuration (Page 503)
SIRIUS Innovations
488 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
The advantages of load feeders with overload relays

Installing load feeders with overload relays (fuses + contactor + overload relay or MSP for
starter combinations/circuit breaker (acc. to UL) + contactor + overload relay) has the
following advantages over configurations without overload relays (motor starter protector +
contactor):
● Overload release and short-circuit release are signaled separately. In the event of a short
circuit the fuses or the MSP for starter combinations/circuit breaker (acc. to UL) limit the
short-circuit current and in the event of an overload the overload relay disconnects the
contactor (and thus the load).
● At voltages higher than 400 V, fuses have a short-circuit breaking capacity of more than
100 kA. Therefore, the fused option comprising fuses + contactor + overload relay is often
used in 690 V supplies.
● An automatic RESET can be performed easily in conjunction with an overload relay. As a
result, the feeder does not have to be powered back up locally following an overload
release.
● Attachable electrical and mechanical RESET modules which are compatible for use with
all sizes enable 3RU21 thermal overload relays to be reset remotely. Mechanical RESET
modules which are compatible for use with all sizes can also be attached to
3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays. An electrical remote RESET is an integral
component of the 3RB31.
● Lengthy start times can be achieved with 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays.
● 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays support wide setting ranges of 1:4.
● MSP for starter combinations/circuit breaker (acc. to UL) + contactor + overload relay
combinations have the advantage that the load feeder can be isolated easily and all three
poles can be disconnected in the event of a short circuit.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 489
5.2.4 3RU21 thermal overload relays

1 Connection for contactor mounting:

In terms of their electrical and mechanical features and their design, these pins are perfectly
compatible with the contactors and soft starters for the direct mounting of overload relays.
Stand-alone assembly is also an option (in conjunction with a stand-alone assembly module).
2 Switch position indicator and TEST function for wiring:
Indicates a trip and facilitates testing of the wiring.
The large rotary button provides an easy means of setting the device to the rated motor
current.
4 Control circuit terminal::
A screw-type, spring-loaded or ring cable lug connection system can be used to connect the
control circuit.
Information about the date of manufacture and product version appears below.
5 Main circuit terminal:
A screw-type, spring-loaded or ring cable lug connection system can be used to connect the
main circuit terminal.
6 STOP button:
Pressing the button opens the NC contact, thereby disconnecting the downstream contactor.
The NC contact closes again when the button is released.
7 Selector switch for manual/automatic RESET and RESET button:
This switch is used to choose between manual and automatic RESET. A device set to manual
RESET can be reset locally by pressing the RESET button. The device can be reset remotely
using the RESET modules (accessories) which are compatible for use with all sizes.
8 Label
Figure 5-1 Equipment, 3RU21 overload relay
A sealable transparent cover can be optionally mounted (accessory). It stops the motor
setting being tampered with.
Auxiliary contacts
3RU21 thermal overload relays are equipped with an NO contact for the "tripped" message
and an NC contact for disconnecting the contactor.
SIRIUS Innovations
490 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.2.5 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays


compatible with the contactors and soft starters for the direct mounting of overload relays.
Stand-alone assembly is also an option (in some cases in conjunction with a stand-alone
assembly module).
2 Switch position indicator and TEST function for wiring:
Indicates a trip and facilitates testing of the wiring.
3 RESET button
A device set to manual RESET can be reset locally by pressing the RESET button. On the
3RB31 an electronic remote RESET is integrated.
4 Tripping class setting/Internal ground-fault detection (3RB31 only):
This rotary switch is used to set the required tripping class dependent upon the starting
conditions and activate internal ground-fault detection.
5 Electronics test (device test):
Enables a test of all major device components and functions.
6 Control circuit terminal (removable):
A screw-type or spring-loaded system can be used to connect the control circuit terminal.
A screw-type or spring-loaded system can be used to connect the main circuit terminal.
8 Selector switch for manual/automatic RESET and RESET button:
The slide switch is used to choose between manual and automatic RESET. A device set to
manual RESET can be reset locally by pressing the RESET button. On the 3RB31 an electrical
remote RESET is integrated.
The large rotary button provides an easy means of setting the device to the rated motor current.
10 Label
Figure 5-2 Equipment, 3RB30/3RB31 overload relays
A sealable transparent cover can be optionally mounted (accessory). It stops the motor
setting being tampered with.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 491
Auxiliary contacts
3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays are equipped with an NO contact for the "tripped"
message and an NC contact for disconnecting the contactor.
SIRIUS Innovations
492 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01

Reference

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 493
5.4 Functions
5.4 Functions
5.4.1 Protection against overload, phase failure, and phase asymmetry
5.4.1.1 Functional principle

Overload relays are used for the current-dependent protection of electrical consumers
(such as motors) against excessive temperature rises, which may be caused by overloading,
asymmetrical power consumption, a phase failure in the line supply conductor or a locked
rotor.
In the event of an overload, phase asymmetry or a phase failure, or if a rotor locks, the motor
current will rise beyond the set rated motor current. This increased current - which, if
sustained over a long period, may damage or even destroy the load - is detected by the
overload relay and evaluated with the assistance of a thermal motor model.
Two functional principles are possible here:
● Thermal
● Solid-state
Functional principle of 3RU21 thermal overload relays

The current rise caused by the overload causes increased heat rise affecting the heating
elements. The bimetals respond by deflecting, and actuate the auxiliary contacts via the
release mechanism.
Functional principle of 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays

The current rise is detected by the integrated current transformers and evaluated by
corresponding solid-state circuits which then supply a pulse to the auxiliary contacts. The
contactor and the load are disconnected via the auxiliary contacts.
Note
Protection of DC loads and single-phase AC loads
Only 3RU21 thermal overload relays can provide an assurance of protecting DC loads and
single-phase AC loads against overload.
If a 3RU21 thermal overload relay is to be used to protect DC loads or single-phase AC
loads, all the bimetal strips have to be heated. Therefore, all of the relay's main current paths
have to be connected in series.
Phase-failure protection
3RU21 thermal overload relays and 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays feature phase
loss sensitivity (see the chapter titled Tripping characteristics (Page 496)) to minimize load
temperature rise in two-phase operation.
SIRIUS Innovations
494 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.4 Functions
5.4.1.2 Time-delayed overload release

The time-delayed overload release is based on a thermal motor model and will trigger a
release dependent upon the extent of the overload.
3RU21 thermal overload relays and 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays compensate
temperature up to 60 °C according to IEC 60947-4-1.
5.4.1.3 Tripping classes

The tripping classes describe time intervals within which the overload relays have to trip in
the case of a symmetrical, 3-pole load from the cold state with 7.2 times the current setting.

3RU21 thermal overload relays are available for normal starting conditions in tripping class
CLASS 10. 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays can be used for heavy-duty starting
conditions.
The tripping times according to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 are as follows:
Table 5- 4 Tripping times dependent upon tripping classes according to standard IEC/EN 60947-4-1

7.2 x Ie from cold
CLASS 10 A 2 < tA ≤ 10
CLASS 10 4 < tA ≤ 10
CLASS 20 6 < tA ≤ 20
CLASS 30 9 < tA ≤ 30

3RB30 solid-state overload relays are available for normal starting conditions in tripping
class CLASS 10 or for heavy-duty starting conditions in tripping class CLASS 20 (all fixed
settings).
3RB31 solid-state relays are suitable for normal and heavy-duty starting conditions. A rotary
switch is used to set the required tripping class (CLASS 5, 10, 20 or 30) dependent upon the
prevailing starting conditions.
The tripping times according to IEC/EN 60947-4-1, tolerance band E, are as follows:
Table 5- 5 Tripping times dependent upon tripping classes according to standard

IEC/EN 60947-4-1, tolerance band E

7.2 x Ie from cold
CLASS 5 3 < tA ≤ 5
CLASS 10 5 < tA ≤ 10
CLASS 20 10 < tA ≤ 20
CLASS 30 20 < tA ≤ 30
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 495
5.4 Functions
5.4.1.4 Tripping characteristics
Introduction
The tripping characteristic curves map the relationship between tripping time and tripping
current as a multiple of the current setting Ie ; they are specified for symmetrical 3-pole and
for 2-pole loading from cold.
The lowest current at which tripping will occur is known as the minimum tripping current.
According to IEC/EN 60947-4-1/VDE 0660 Part 102, this current has to lie within specific
defined limits.
The limits for the total tripping current in the case of 3RU21/3RB30/3RB31 overload relays
with symmetrical 3-pole loading are between 105 and 120 % of the current setting.
Tripping characteristics
The limit tripping current determines the progression of the tripping characteristic curve up to
higher tripping currents based on the characteristics of the tripping classes (CLASS 10,
CLASS 20 etc., see the chapter titled Tripping classes (Page 495)).
The tripping classes describe time intervals within which the overload relays have to trip in
the case of a symmetrical, 3-pole load from the cold state with 7.2 times the current setting
Ie.
SIRIUS Innovations
496 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.4 Functions
Tripping characteristic curves for the 3RU21 thermal overload relay

The tripping characteristic curve for the 3RU21 thermal overload relay loaded at 3 poles (see
the figure below) applies subject to the prerequisite that all three bimetal strips are loaded
with the same current at the same time. If only two bimetal strips are heated following a
phase failure, these two strips alone have to generate the force required to trigger the
release mechanism and would need a longer tripping time or a higher current if no additional
action was taken. If these higher currents are applied over a longer period of time, they
usually cause damage to the load. To avoid damage, 3RU21 overload relays feature phase
loss sensitivity, which uses a corresponding mechanism to induce accelerated tripping in
accordance with the characteristic curve for 2-pole loading from the cold state.
Compared with a cold load, a load at operating temperature obviously has a lower
temerature reserve. 3RU21 thermal relays take account of this fact by reducing the tripping
time to approximately a quarter following prolonged loading with the setting current Ie.
W>V@
PLQ

,>$@
t [s] Tripping time

I [A] Current
1 3-pole load
2 2-pole load
Figure 5-3 Time-current characteristic curve, schematic diagram
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 497
5.4 Functions
Tripping characteristic curves for 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays

The tripping characteristic curve for an overload relay loaded at 3 poles from cold (see
Figure 1) applies subject to the prerequisite that all three phases are loaded with the same
current at the same time. In the event of a phase failure, the 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state
overload relays disconnect the contactor more quickly to minimize the load's temperature
rise in accordance with the tripping characteristic curve for 2-pole loading from the cold state
(see Figure 2). In the event of phase asymmetry, the devices disconnect dependent upon
the extent of the asymmetry between the two characteristic curves.
Compared with a cold load, a load at operating temperature obviously has a lower
temerature reserve. It is for this reason that the tripping time of 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state
overload relays is reduced to approximately 30 % following prolonged loading with the
current setting Ie.
t [s] t [s]
CLASS 30
CLASS 30
CLASS 20
CLASS 20
CLASS 10
CLASS 10
CLASS 5
CLASS 5
0,6 0,6
I [A] I [A]
Figure 1 Figure 2
t [s] Tripping time

I [A] Current
Reference
The figures are schematic representations of the characteristic curves. The characteristic
curves for the individual overload relays can be downloaded from the Internet
SIRIUS Innovations
498 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.4 Functions
5.4.2 Ground-fault protection (3RB31 only)
Introduction
In addition to current-dependent protection for loads against impermissibly high temperature
rise caused by overload, phase asymmetry, and phase failure, 3RB31 solid-state overload
relays feature internal ground-fault detection (not possible in conjunction with contactor
assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start). This provides protection of loads against high-
impedance faults to ground caused by damaged insulation, moisture, condensation, etc.
Ground-fault protection
In the event of a ground fault, the device trips immediately, disconnecting the contactor (and
thus the load) by means of the auxiliary contacts. To also protect the load and the system
against ground faults caused by damaged insulation, moisture, condensation, etc., the
overload relays support ground-fault monitoring by means of internal ground-fault detection.
Note
Contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start
Internal ground-fault detection is not possible with contactor assemblies star-delta (wye-
delta) start.
Table 5- 6 Ground-fault detection
Type of ground-fault detection Application

Internal ground-fault detection For motors with three-wire connection for the detection of fault
currents ≥ 75 % of the current setting Ie in operation
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 499
5.4 Functions
5.4.3 Auxiliary contacts
Function
The auxiliary contacts control the contactor and signal overloads.
Auxiliary contact Response to overload

NC contact (NC 95-96) Disconnects the contactor, thereby protecting:
• The contactor
• The cables
• The load
NO contact (NO 97-98) Sends a signal, e.g. to the:
• Control system
• Lamp
• Other actuators
Note
Contact rating
The contact rating of the auxiliary switches to be taken into account is specified in the
Technical data (Page 536).
Reference

About the response of auxiliary contacts The chapter titled Response of the auxiliary
contacts (Page 522)
SIRIUS Innovations
500 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.4 Functions
5.4.4 Indication of the operating state

The prevailing operating state of the 3RU21/3RB30/3RB31 relays is indicated by the position
of the marker on the "TEST function/Switch position indicator" slide.
If the relays are operating without errors, the slide marker will be set to "I". When a device
trips, the slide marker moves to "0". An overload relay can trip for the following reasons:
● Overload,
● Phase asymmetry,
● Phase failure, or
● Ground fault (3RB31)
● Internal error (3RB30/3RB31)
Resetting
The relay is reset manually or automatically after a recovery time has elapsed.
Reference
Additional information... Can be found in the chapter titled...
About resetting RESET after release (Page 517)
5.4.5 Self-monitoring (3RB30/3RB31 only)

3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays constantly monitor their ability to operate (self-
monitoring) and trip in the event of an internal error.
In such cases you need to contact Technical Assistance on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 501
5.4 Functions
5.4.6 Additional functions
RESET function
There are various ways to reset the device following an overload release.
Table 5- 7 RESET options for for overload relays
Overload relay Auto RESET Manual Mech. remote RESET (accessory) Elect. remote
RESET RESET
Release slide Cable release
3RU21 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(accessory)
3RB30 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ -
3RB31 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(built-in)
The relay cannot be reset until after the recovery time has elapsed.
Stop function (3RU21 only)

Pressing the STOP button on the 3RU21 thermal overload relay opens the NC contact,
thereby disconnecting the downstream contactor and thus the load. The load is switched
back on via the contactor when the STOP button is released. In the case of maintained-
contact operation in the auxiliary circuit, the load is switched back on via the contactor when
the red STOP button is released.
Test function for the 3RU21 thermal overload relay

The TEST slide can be used to check whether the operational 3RU21 thermal overload relay
is working properly. The tripping of the relay can be simulated by moving the slide. This
simulation process opens the NC contact (95-96) and closes the NO contact (97-98), thereby
checking that the auxiliary circuit has been wired to the overload relay correctly.
Test function for the 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relay

The correct function of the relay when ready for operation can be checked by pressing the
TEST button with the motor current flowing (device/electronics test). Current sensing, the
motor model, and the tripping unit are tested.
The switch position indicator slide can be used to test the auxiliary contacts and the control
current wiring. The tripping of the relay can be simulated by moving the slide, thereby
providing a means of checking that the auxiliary circuit has been wired correctly.
Reference

About the RESET function The chapter titled RESET after release
(Page 517)
About the test function The chapter titled TEST function (Page 520)
SIRIUS Innovations
502 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.5 Configuration
5.5 Configuration
5.5.1 Overload relays in motor feeders
5.5.1.1 Overload relays in motor feeders

The individual overload relay families protect the following loads against the consequences
of an overload, a phase failure, and phase asymmetry.
Table 5- 8 Overload relays in motor feeders
For the protection of 3RU21 3RB30/3RB31

Three-phase current loads ✓ ✓
DC loads ✓ -
Single-phase AC loads ✓ -
Note
In the case of three-phase current loads, only 3-pole circuits (3 phases) are permitted.
4-pole circuits (3 phases + neutral conductor) are not permitted.
NOTICE
Design of motor feeders
An overload relay alone cannot protect a load against overload. The overload relay simply
detects the current, evaluates it, and switches the auxiliary contacts according to the
relevant tripping characteristic curve. The connected contactor, and thus the load, are
disconnected via the auxiliary contacts.
A protective device such as a motor starter protector/circuit breaker (acc. to UL) or fuses
must be installed upstream of the load to provide protection against short circuits.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 503
5.5 Configuration
Appropriate contactors are required to protect loads. The table below provides an overview
of the assignments between overload relays and contactors, along with their power ratings.
Table 5- 9 Overload relay with contactor assemblies
Overload relay Current range Contactors

(type, size, rating in kW)
Type [A] 3RT201 3RT202
S00 3/4/5.5/7.5 S0 5.5/7.5/11/15 /18.5
3RU2111) 0.11 … 16 ✓ -
3RU2121) 1.8 … 40 - ✓
3RB3011) 0.1 … 16 ✓ -
3RB3021) 0.1 … 40 - ✓
3RB3111) 0.1 … 16 ✓ -
3RB3121) 0.1 … 40 - ✓
1) If you are using the overload relays in feeders, see Technical data (Page 536)
The configuration guide titled "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations - Selection data for load
feeders in fuseless and fused designs" (order no. 3ZX1012-0RA21-1AC0) provides
information about the assembly of type-tested motor feeders according to IEC/EN 60947-4-1
with type of coordination 1 or 2.
5.5.1.2 Normal and heavy-duty starting
Normal starting
Selecting the right overload relay means considering the start time as well as the rated motor
current. The start time refers to the time required by the motor between switching on and
reaching its rated speed.
Table 5- 10 Normal starting
Designation Start time

Normal starting < 10 s
Heavy-duty starting > 10 s
Heavy-duty starting
Note
Special overload relays with corresponding tripping classes are required to protect heavy-
duty-starting motors (for the acceleration of large centrifuges, for example). In the case of
heavy-duty starting, the cables and contactors also have to be dimensioned specifically on
account of the increasing thermal load.
SIRIUS Innovations
504 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.5 Configuration
5.5.1.3 Contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start
Overload relays in contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start

When using overload relays in conjunction with contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-
delta) start, you need to bear in mind that only 1/√3 times the motor current flows through the
line contactor. An overload relay mounted onto a line contactor has to be set to this 0.58-
times motor current.
NOTICE
Internal ground-fault detection on the 3RB31
If you are using the 3RB31 solid-state overload relay in conjunction with contactor
assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start, internal ground-fault detection must not be
activated due to the occurrence of transient current peaks when switching over from star
(wye) to delta operation. These can cause ground-fault monitoring to respond.
5.5.1.4 Operation with frequency converters

3RU21 thermal overload relays are suitable for operation with frequency converters.
Depending on the frequency of the converter, eddy current and skin effects that occur mean
that in some cases, a current higher than the motor current has to be set.

3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays are suitable for frequencies of 50/60 Hz and their
associated harmonics. This makes it possible to use a 3RB30/3RB31 on the input side of the
frequency converter. If motor protection is required on the outgoing side of the frequency
converter, we recommend the 3RN thermistor motor protection devices or 3RU21 thermal
overload relays.
Reference
About the currents to be set Project guidelines for use downstream of
frequency converters/inverters with pulsed
voltage (Page 398)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 505
5.5 Configuration

Either fuses (fused design) or motor starter protectors/circuit breakers (acc. to UL) (fuseless
design) must be used for short-circuit protection. The types of coordination must also be
considered when selecting load feeders from the tables.
References
More information Can be found in the chapter titled
About the assignments of corresponding short- Technical data (Page 536) and in the
circuit protective devices to overload relays with configuration guide titled "Configuring SIRIUS
contactor Innovations - Selection data for load feeders in
fuseless and fused designs" (order no.:
3ZX1012-0RA21-1AC0)
5.5.3 Protecting explosion-protected motors

SIRIUS components meet a wide range of requirements for operation in hazardous areas
(ATEX explosion protection). An up-to-date type overview of approved devices appears in
the Siemens Low Voltage LV1 Catalog. More information and certificates for download are
available on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).

overload relays.
The overload relays are approved for installation altitudes up to 2,000 m. The reduced air
density at altitudes higher than 2,000 meters affects the overload relays' electrical
characteristics. The reduction factors which have to be taken into account when using
overload relays at altitudes higher than 2,000 m can be obtained on request from our
Technical Assistance on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
Operating conditions and resistance to extreme climates

The overload relays are climate-proof.
The overload relays are not sensitive to external influences such as shocks, corrosive
ambient conditions, ageing, and temperature fluctuations.
SIRIUS Innovations
506 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.5 Configuration
Ambient temperatures for 3RU21 overload relays

3RU21 thermal overload relays compensate temperature in the temperature range from –
40 °C to +60 °C according to IEC/EN 60947-4-1. At temperatures from +60 °C to +80 °C, the
upper set value of the setting range has to be reduced by a specific factor in accordance with
the table below.
Table 5- 11 Ambient temperature for 3RU21 overload relays
Ambient temperature in °C Reduction factor for the upper set value

Current ranges Current ranges 17 to 40
0.11 to 20 A A
+60 1.0 1.0
+65 0.87 0.97
+70 0.94 0.94
+75 0.81 0.90
+80 0.73 0.86
Ambient temperatures for 3RB30/3RB31 overload relays

3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays compensate temperature in the temperature range
from –25 °C to +60 °C according to IEC/EN 60947-4-1.
The reduction factors which have to be taken into account when using solid-state overload
relays at an ambient temperature higher than 60°C can be obtained on request from our
Technical Assistance on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
Derating during heavy-duty starting for 3RB30/3RB31 overload relays

There is no derating during heavy-duty starting in size S00 (up to 16 A).
The following derating has to be taken into account in size S0 (up to 40 A).
Table 5- 12 Derating during heavy-duty starting, 3RB30/3RB31 overload relays
CLASS Rated current

CLASS 20 Ie max = 32 A
CLASS 30 Ie max = 25 A

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 507
5.6 Mounting
5.6 Mounting
5.6.1 Mounting options
Mounting options for the 3RU21

3RU21 thermal overload relays are matched to 3RT contactors in terms of their electrical
and mechanical features. As a result, direct mounting can be achieved easily. Alternatively,
the devices are suitable for stand-alone assembly.
Mounting options for the 3RB30/3RB31

3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays are suitable for space-saving, direct mounting onto
3RT contactors as well as for stand-alone assembly.
5.6.2 Minimum clearances and mounting position
Minimum clearance
A minimum lateral clearance of > 6 mm must be maintained from grounded parts.
Mounting position for 3RU21 thermal overload relay

The diagrams below illustrate the permissible mounting positions for contactor mounting and
stand-alone assembly in the case of 3RU21 thermal overload relays.
Table 5- 13 Permissible mounting positions for the 3RU21
Overload relay, stand-alone assembly Contactor + overload relay
r r
,H[ ,H
,H[
,H[
The set value is 1.1 times the motor current for a mounting position in the hatched area.
Mounting position for 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relay

For 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays any mounting position can be chosen as
required.
SIRIUS Innovations
508 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.6 Mounting
5.6.3 Mounting/Disassembly
Direct mounting on 3RT contactor

The diagram below shows an example mounting scenario based on mounting the
3RU21 thermal overload relay, size S0, on the 3RT2 contactor. The contactor/overload relay
combinations can be snapped onto 35 mm DIN rails according to DIN EN 50022.
Table 5- 14 Mounting the 3RU21 overload relay with a screw-type connection system

1 Push the overload relay into the contactor
from below. Attach the two hooks on the
overload relay to the two openings on the rear
of the contactor. This pushes the main current
contacts into the corresponding socket
contacts on the contactor.
2 Screw the contacts tight.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 509
5.6 Mounting
Table 5- 15 Mounting the 3RU21 overload relay with a spring-loaded connection system

1 Insert the contacts (a) into the central opening
of the main conductor terminals on the
contactor (see below, a), with the contacts
flush to the right. Make sure that the guide
tabs are inserted into the designated slots on
the contactor.
The overload relay will sit flush with the
contactor on the left- and right-hand sides.
D

The table below shows the openings of the main conductor terminals on the contactor into
which the overload relay contacts have to be inserted.
Main conductor terminals on the contactor (a) Main conductor terminals on the contactor (a)
(S00): (S0):
Note
Ring cable lug connection system
The procedure for mounting the overload relays with ring cable lug connection system is
similar to that for mounting with screw-type connection system.
SIRIUS Innovations
510 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.6 Mounting

Screw mounting on a mounting plate is an alternative option to DIN rail mounting. For screw
mounting, the contactor first has to be fastened with screws and then the overload relay
mounted on the top of the contactor as shown in the figures.
Disassembly
To disassemble the contactor/relay combination from the DIN rail, press the contactor down
and pull it toward you.
Table 5- 16 Overload relay disassembly, screw-type connection system

1 Undo the screw on the main conductor
terminals.
2 Pull the overload relay down and away from
the contactor.

Table 5- 17 Overload relay disassembly, spring-loaded connection system

1 Position the screwdriver on the overload relay
as shown in the figure. Carefully dislodge the
overload relay from the contactor.
2 Pull the overload relay toward you and away
from the contactor.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 511
5.6 Mounting
Note
Ring cable lug connection system
The procedure for disassembling the overload relays with ring cable lug connection system
is similar to that for disassembly with screw-type connection system.
SIRIUS Innovations
512 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.7 Connection
5.7 Connection
Connection types
The overload relays are available with the following connection types for the main and
auxiliary current paths:
● Ring cable lug connection system (3RU21 only) with optional terminal covers
(accessories)
The conductor cross-sections of the devices in the SIRIUS modular system are matched to
one another on a size-specific basis. For more information, see the chapter titled Connection
(Page 74).
Coil repeat and auxiliary switch repeat terminal

In the case of size S00 3RU21 thermal overload relays and 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state
overload relays, direct contactor mounting involves feed-through of the auxiliary switch and
coil terminals A2 on the contactor. This makes wiring much easier.
Touch protection
Please observe the information in the chapter titled Technical data (Page 536) with regard to
touch protection for 3RU21 thermal overload relays and 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload
relays (according to IEC 61140). Devices with screw-type and spring-loaded connection
systems are finger-safe. To achieve finger safety in the case of ring cable lug connection
systems, the addition of terminal covers (accessories) is required.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 513
5.7 Connection
5.7.1 Connection of 3RU21 overload relay
Control circuit
An additional power supply is not required for the operation of 3RU21 thermal overload
relays.
2T1 Main circuit terminals
4T2
6T3
95 NC contact (NC 95-96)
96
97 NO contact (NO 97-98)
98
14/22 Feed-through contactor auxiliary switch (S00 only)
A2 Feed-through contactor coil terminal (S00 only)
Reference

About conductor cross-sections and tightening Conductor cross-sections main circuit (Page 541)
torques
SIRIUS Innovations
514 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.7 Connection
5.7.2 Connection of 3RB30/3RB31 overload relays
Control circuit
3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays have an intrinsic supply; i.e. an additional power
supply is not required.
4T2
6T3
95 NC contact (NC 95-96)
96
97 NO contact (NO 97-98)
98
14/22 Feed-through contactor auxiliary switch (S00 only)
A2 Feed-through contactor coil terminal (S00 only)
Reference

torques
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 515
5.8 Operation
5.8 Operation
5.8.1 Setting the current
Setting the rated motor current on 3RU21/3RB30/3RB31 overload relays

3RU21 thermal overload relays and 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays are set to the
rated motor current with a rotary knob. The scale on the rotary knob is in amperes.
NOTICE
The overload relays may only be set between the setting marks at the top and the bottom of
the scale; in other words, a setting above or below the setting scale is not permitted.
The figure below shows how to set the rated motor current based on the example of the
3RU21 thermal overload relay, size S0.
max. + 60 °C A
max. + 70 °C
Ie
Figure 5-4 Setting the current Ie
SIRIUS Innovations
516 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.8 Operation
5.8.2 Setting the tripping class/ground-fault detection (3RB31)

In the case of the 3RB31 solid-state overload relay, it is also possible to select the tripping
class (CLASS 5, 10, 20 or 30) via a second rotary knob using a screwdriver and activate or
deactivate internal ground-fault monitoring.
There are 8 possible settings:
● CLASS 5 , 10, 20, and 30 without ground-fault detection (STANDARD)
● CLASS 5 , 10, 20, and 30 with ground-fault detection (Gnd-FAULT)
5.8.3 RESET after release
Manual and automatic reset

If manual reset is selected, resetting can be carried out directly on the device by pressing the
RESET button.
T
SE
RE
A remote reset (remote RESET) is possible in conjunction with the mechanical and electrical
RESET modules, which are available as accessories. If automatic RESET is set on the
overload relay, the relay will be reset automatically. A relay can only ever be reset after the
recovery time has elapsed.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 517
5.8 Operation
CAUTION
Automatic RESET
An overload relay set to "automatic RESET" mode will be reset automatically after the
recovery time has elapsed, without the RESET button being pressed. An additional ON
button has to be used to ensure that the motor does not start up automatically following
tripping. If, in the event of an overload release, the overload relay is used without separate
thermistor protection, the motor may only be switched in by skilled personnel. "Automatic
RESET" mode must not be used in applications where there is a risk of personal injury or
property damage if the motor restarts unexpectedly.
Recovery time following overload release

This time gives the load a chance to cool down.
● 3RU21 thermal overload relays
The device cannot be reset until the bimetal strips have cooled down. The recovery time
is dependent upon the tripping characteristic curve and the extent of the tripping current.
● 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays
In the case of the 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays, the recovery time is stored
as a fixed value and is 3 minutes following a current-dependent release with automatic
RESET selected.
If manual RESET is selected, the 3RB30/3RB31 relays can be reset immediately after
tripping.
Setting the RESET function on the 3RU21 thermal overload relay

On the 3RU21 thermal overload relay, automatic and manual resetting is selected by
pressing and turning the blue button (RESET button). The figure below shows how to switch
between automatic and manual reset on the 3RU21 thermal overload relay, size S0.
Table 5- 18 Switching between manual and automatic on the 3RU21 thermal overload relay

1 Press the blue RESET button down with a
screwdriver.
2 Turn the blue RESET button to M (manual
reset) or A (automatic reset).
MANUAL
AUTO
SIRIUS Innovations
518 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.8 Operation
Setting the RESET function on the 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relay

In the case of the 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays, a slide switch can be used to
choose between automatic and manual reset.
As an alternative to the reset options, an electrical remote RESET (manual/automatic) can
be implemented on 3RB31 solid-state overload relays by applying a 24 V DC voltage at
terminals A3 and A4. When a voltage of 24 V is applied at terminals A3/A4 of the 3RB31, a
current flows for approx. 20 ms which can be 200 mA for a short time. After the 20 ms, the
current drops to less than 10 mA. The voltage needs to be applied for at least 200 ms.
Table 5- 19 Switching between manual and automatic on 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays

1 Using a screwdriver, slide the switch to the
required position.
AUTO
Reset
MANUAL
Reset
Reference

About optional mechanical and electrical RESET The chapter titled Accessories (Page 523)
modules
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 519
5.8 Operation
5.8.4 TEST function
Test function for the 3RU21 thermal overload relay

The TEST slide can be used to check whether the operational 3RU21 thermal overload relay
is working properly. The tripping of the relay can be simulated by moving the slide with a
screwdriver. This simulation process opens the NC contact and closes the NO contact,
thereby checking that the auxiliary circuit has been wired to the overload relay correctly.
TEST
Figure 5-5 Testing the TEST function
Resetting
If the overload relay has been set to automatic RESET, the overload relay is automatically
reset when the TEST slide is released. The relay must be reset with the RESET button if it
has been set to manual RESET.
T
SE
RE
Figure 5-6 Resetting the TEST function
SIRIUS Innovations
520 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.8 Operation
Test function for the 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relay

The correct function of the relay when ready for operation can be checked by pressing the
TEST button with the motor current flowing (device/electronics test). Current sensing, the
motor model, and the tripping unit are tested. If these components are OK, the device is
tripped in accordance with the table below. In the event of an error, the device is not tripped.
Tripping class Required loading with Tripping within

the rated current prior to
pressing the TEST button
CLASS 5 3 min 30 s
CLASS 10 5 min 1 min
CLASS 20 10 mins 2 mins
CLASS 30 15 mins 3 min
Note
The TEST button must be held down throughout the test. In this case the motor current must
be > 80% of the current setting Ie and equal to at least the value of the lower current setting.
The switch position indicator slide can be used to test the auxiliary contacts and the control
current wiring. The tripping of the relay can be simulated by moving the slide. This simulation
process opens the NC contact and closes the NO contact, thereby checking that the auxiliary
circuit has been wired correctly. The relay is reset after a test trip by pressing the RESET
button.
The user test has been completed successfully if:
● The device trips within the maximum permissible time and
● Contact 95-96 is open (test for welding)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 521
5.8 Operation
5.8.5 Response of the auxiliary contacts
Auxiliary contacts
The overload relay is equipped with an NO contact (NO 97-98) for the "tripped" signal and an
NC contact (NC 95-96) for disconnecting the contactor. The auxiliary contacts have high
contact reliability; this makes them suitable for PLCs. Furthermore, the high switching
capacity facilitates direct switching of the contactor coil.
The table below shows how the auxiliary contacts respond when the TEST, STOP (3RU21
only), and RESET buttons are pressed.
READY TEST STOP RESET

NC 95/96
NO 97/98
TRIP 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
SIRIUS Innovations
522 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.9 Accessories
5.9 Accessories
5.9.1 Accessories
For maximum flexibility, accessories can be added to the overload relays as required, easily,
and without the need for tools.
Accessories 3RU21 3RB30 3RB31

Terminal support for stand-alone assembly ✓ ✓ ✓
Release slide (mechanical remote RESET), compatible ✓ ✓ ✓
for use with all sizes
Release slide (mechanical remote RESET), compatible ✓ ✓ ✓
for use with all sizes
Electrical remote RESET module in three voltage ✓ -- ✓
variants, compatible for use with all sizes integrated in
device
Terminal cover for ring cable lug connections, ✓ -- --
compatible for use with all sizes
Sealable cover ✓ ✓ ✓
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 523
5.9 Accessories
5.9.2 Terminal support for stand-alone assembly
5.9.2.1 Description
Modules for stand-alone assembly

3RU21 thermal overload relays and 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays can also be
installed individually with the corresponding terminal supports for stand-alone assembly.
The terminal supports for stand-alone assembly are available for both screw-type and
spring-loaded connection systems.
The terminal supports can be snapped onto 35 mm DIN rails according to DIN EN 50022.
They can also be screw-mounted.
The figure below shows how the terminal support for stand-alone assembly is mounted,
based on the example of a 3RU21 thermal overload relay.
Table 5- 20 Mounting the terminal support (screw-type connection system)

1 Guide the overload relay into the terminal
support from below.
Screw the contacts tight.

SIRIUS Innovations
524 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.9 Accessories
Table 5- 21 Mounting the terminal support (spring-loaded connection system)

1 Insert the contacts (a) into the central
opening of the main conductor terminals on
the terminal support, with the contacts flush
to the right.
Make sure that the guide tabs are inserted
into the designated slots on the terminal
support.
D
Disassembly
Table 5- 22 Disassembling the terminal support (screw-type connection system)

1 Undo the screws on the main conductor
terminals.

2 Release the overload relay by pushing
down the clip on the underside of the
terminal support.
3 Use a screwdriver to dislodge the terminal

support from the overload relay.
4 Pull the overload relay down and away from
the terminal support.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 525
5.9 Accessories
Table 5- 23 Disassembling the terminal support (spring-loaded connection system)

1 Release the overload relay by pushing
down the clip on the underside of the
terminal support.
2 Position the screwdriver on the terminal
support as shown in the figure. Carefully
dislodge the overload relay from the
contactor.
3 Pull the overload relay forward and away
from the terminal support.

SIRIUS Innovations
526 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.9 Accessories
5.9.3 Mechanical remote RESET (release slide)
5.9.3.1 Description
Preliminary observation: Mechanical remote RESET

A mechanical remote reset option is also available for thermal overload relays and solid-
state overload relays. There are two options for the mechanical remote RESET:
● Release slide
● Cable release with holder for built-in overload relays which are hard to reach (Page 529)
Release slide
There is one release slide for thermal overload relays and one for solid-state overload relays;
both are compatible for use with all sizes. The release slide with holder and former is used to
activate the RESET from the control cabinet door; it is shortened to the required length. A
pushbutton with extended travel and an extension plunger for compensation of the distance
between the pushbutton and the relay's unlocking button are available for the release slide.
The figure below shows how the release slide, the holder, the former, and the pushbutton
are mounted based on the example of a size S0 3RU21 thermal overload relay:
Prerequisite
Before the release slide can be mounted, the release slide and the optional extension
plunger have to be shortened to the required length.
Table 5- 24 Mounting the release slide

1 Attach the hook on the release slide to the
designated opening on the overload relay.
2 Fold the module up so that the locking latch 2
snaps into the overload relay.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 527
5.9 Accessories

3 Attach the former to the release slide.
3 Fit the pushbutton (3SB3000-0EA11) in the
front cover.
4 (Optional) Attach the pushbutton to the
extension plunger (3SX1335).
3
5 3SX1335
3SB3000-0EA11
4
Disassembly
The figure below shows how to disassemble the holder based on the example of the
3RU21 thermal overload relay:
Table 5- 25 Disassembling the release slide

1 Press the locking latch down.
2 Tilt the module toward you and take it off the
overload relay.
SIRIUS Innovations
528 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.9 Accessories
5.9.4 Mechanical remote RESET (cable release)
5.9.4.1 Description
Preliminary observation: Mechanical remote RESET

A mechanical remote reset option is also available for thermal overload relays and solid-
state overload relays. There are two options for the mechanical remote RESET:
● Release slide (Page 527)
● Cable release with holder for built-in overload relays which are hard to reach
Cable release (compatible for use with all sizes)

There is one cable release with holder for built-in overload relays which are hard to reach for
thermal overload relays and another for solid-state relays; both are compatible for use with
all sizes.
The cable is available in the following lengths:
● 400 mm and
● 600 mm
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 529
5.9 Accessories
The figure below shows how the cable release with holder is mounted based on the example
of a size S00 3RU21 thermal overload relay:
Table 5- 26 Mounting the cable release

1 Attach the hook on the release slide to the
designated opening on the overload relay.
2 Fold the module up so that the locking latch
snaps into the overload relay.
3 Fit the actuating element in the front cover.

4 Attach the pushbutton to the former and the
connection wire.
5/6 Insert the cable release into the appropriate
opening and turn to tighten.
Ø 6.5 mm

≤ 8 mm
Disassembly
The figure below shows how to disassemble the holder for the cable release based on the
example of the 3RU21 thermal overload relay:
Table 5- 27 Cable release disassembly

2 Tilt the module toward you and take it off the
overload relay.
SIRIUS Innovations
530 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.9 Accessories
5.9.5 Module for electrical remote RESET (3RU21 only)
5.9.5.1 Description
Function
An electrical remote RESET module which is compatible for use with all sizes is available for
the 3RU21 thermal overload relay. This module enables the overload relay to be reset
electrically from the control room following tripping. The module's coil is dimensioned for an
operating duration of 0.2 s to 4 s; maintained-contact operation is not permissible.
5.9.5.2 Connecting the remote RESET
Connection
The screw connections on the terminals of the electrical remote RESET module have the
same format as the screw connections on the auxiliary contacts of the 3RU21 overload relay.
Table 5- 28 Connection data for the remote RESET
Operating range The operating range of the coil is 0.85 to 1.1 x Us

Power input The power input of the electrical remote RESET module is: 80 V AC,
70 W DC
Switching frequency 60/h
Voltages The electrical remote RESET module is available for the following voltages:
• 24 to 30 V AC/VDC
• 110 to 127 V AC/VDC
• 220 to 250 V AC/VDC
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 531
5.9 Accessories
The figure below shows how to assemble the electrical remote RESET module based on the
example of size S0.
Table 5- 29 Mounting the electrical remote RESET module on the thermal overload relay

1 Attach the hook to the designated opening.
2 Fold the module up so that the locking latch snaps
into the overload relay.
Disassembly
Table 5- 30 Disassembling the electrical remote RESET module from the thermal overload relay

2 Tilt the module toward you and take it off the overload
relay.

SIRIUS Innovations
532 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.9 Accessories
5.9.6.1 Description
Sealable cover
There is one sealable cover for thermal overload relays and one for solid-state relays; both
are compatible for use with all sizes. The 3RV2908-0P cover can be used as an accessory
for 3RU2 thermal overload relays and 3RV2 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers (acc. to
UL).
The sealable cover can be used to protect the rotary button for setting the rated motor
current and the CO contact for the tripping classes (3RB31 only) against unauthorized
manipulation.
5.9.6.2 Mounting
Table 5- 31 Mounting the sealable cover on the 3RU21 overload relay

overload relay and fold the cover down.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 533
5.9 Accessories

removal.
Table 5- 32 Mounting the sealable cover on the 3RB30/3RB31 overload relay

overload relay and fold the cover up.
removal.

SIRIUS Innovations
534 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.9 Accessories
5.9.7 Covers for ring cable lug connections
5.9.7.1 Description
Function
Covers must be fitted to thermal overload relays with ring cable lug connection system to
achieve finger-safety according to IEC 61140. Both line-side and output-side covers are
available.
Additional covers are not required for devices with spring-loaded and screw-type connection
systems.
58%- 58%-
57($ 57($
58%- 59$$
Size S00, 3RU2116 Size S0, 3RU2126
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 535
5.10 Technical data
5.10 Technical data
5.10.1.1 General data
Table 5- 33 General data for 3RU21 and 3RB30/3RB31 overload relays
Feature Description 3RU21 3RB30/3RB31

Sizes • Are matched to the dimensions, S00/S0 S00/S0
connections and technical features of the
other devices in the SIRIUS modular
system (contactors, soft starters, etc.)
• Permit the mounting of slim-line and
compact load feeders in widths of 45 mm
(S00), 45 mm (S0)
• Make configuration easier
Seamless current range • Allows straightforward and consistent 0.11 to 40 A 0.1 to 40 A
configuration with one series of overload
relays (for small to large loads)
5.10.1.2 Protection functions - overview
Table 5- 34 Protection functions supported by 3RU21 and 3RB20/3RB31 overload relays
Feature Description 3RU21 3RB30/3RB

31
Tripping in the event of overload • Provides optimum current-dependent protection of ✓ ✓
loads against impermissibly high temperature rise
due to overload
Tripping in the event of phase • Provides optimum current-dependent protection of ✓ ✓
asymmetry loads against impermissibly high temperature rise
due to phase asymmetry
Tripping in the event of phase failure • Minimizes the temperature rise of the three-phase ✓ ✓
motor in the event of a phase failure
Protection of single-phase loads • Enables single-phase loads to be protected ✓ --
Tripping in the event of ground fault • Provides optimum protection of loads in the event -- ✓
by means of of high-impedance faults to ground caused by (3RB31
internal ground-fault detection (can moisture, condensation, damaged insulation, etc.
only)
be activated) • Eliminates the need for additional special
equipemnt
• Saves space in the control cabinet
• Reduces wiring outlay and costs
SIRIUS Innovations
536 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.10 Technical data
5.10.1.3 Equipment
Table 5- 35 Equipment on 3RU21 and 3RB20/3RB31 overload relays

31
RESET function • Enables manual or automatic resetting of the relay ✓ ✓
Remote RESET function • Enables remote resetting of the relay ✓ ✓
(by means (3RB31 only
of separate with
module) 24 V DC)
TEST function for auxiliary contacts • Allows easy checking of function and wiring ✓ ✓
TEST function for electronics • Allows checking of the electronics -- ✓
Status display • Indicates the current operating state ✓ ✓
Integrated auxiliary contacts • Allow the load to be disconnected in the event of ✓ ✓
(1 NO + 1 NC) an irregularity
• Can be used to output signals
5.10.1.4 Configuration of load feeders
Table 5- 36 Configuration of load feeders 3RU21 and 3RB30/3RB31

31
Short-circuit-proof up to 100 kA at • Provides optimum protection of the loads and ✓ ✓
690 V operating personnel in the event of short circuits
(in conjunction with the appropriate due to insulation faults or faulty switching
fuses or the appropriate motor starter operations
protector)
Electrical and mechanical matching • Simplifies configuration ✓ ✓
to 3RT2 contactors • Reduces connection outlay and costs
• Enables stand-alone assembly as well as space-
saving direct mounting
Spring-loaded connection system for • Enables fast connections ✓ ✓
main circuit • Ensures that connections are vibration-resistant
• Enables maintenance-free connections
Spring-loaded connection system for • Enables fast connections ✓ ✓
auxiliary circuits • Ensures that connections are vibration-resistant
• Enables maintenance-free connections
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 537
5.10 Technical data
5.10.1.5 Features of overload relays
Table 5- 37 Other characteristics of 3RU21 and 3RB30/3RB31 overload relays

31
Temperature compensation • Allows the use of the relays without derating even ✓ ✓
at high temperatures
• Prevents premature tripping
• Allows compact control cabinet installation without
clearance between the devices/load feeders
• Simplifies configuration
• Enables space to be saved in the control cabinet
High long-term stability • Provides reliable protection of loads even after ✓ ✓
years under severe operating conditions
Wide setting ranges • Reduce the number of variants -- ✓
• Minimize the engineering outlay and costs (1:4)
• Enable savings to be made where storage
overheads, storage costs, and tied-up capital are
concerned
Tripping class CLASS 5 • Enables solutions for motors which start up very -- ✓
quickly and require special protection measures (3RB31
only)
Tripping class > CLASS 10 • Enable solutions for heavy-duty starting -- ✓
Low power loss • Reduces power consumption (power consumption -- ✓
is up to 98% less than with thermal overload
relays) and thus energy costs
• Minimizes the temperature rise of the contactor
and the control cabinet - in some cases this may
eliminate the need for control cabinet cooling
• Enables space to be saved through direct
mounting on the contactor even at high motor
currents (i.e. no heat decoupling is required)
Intrinsic supply • Eliminates the need for configuration and --1) ✓
connecting an additional control circuit
Variable setting of tripping classes • Reduces the number of variants -- ✓
(The required tripping class can be • Minimizes the engineering outlay and costs (3RB31
set dependent upon the prevailing • Enables savings to be made where storage only)
starting conditions using a rotary overheads, storage costs, and tied-up capital are
switch.) concerned
1) As SIRIUS 3RU21 thermal overload relays work on the basis of the bimetal principle, they
do not require a control supply voltage.
SIRIUS Innovations
538 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.10 Technical data
5.10.2 3RU21
5.10.2.1 General technical data
Table 5- 38 General technical data for 3RU21 overload relays
Type 3RU21 16 3RU21 26

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
Tripping in the event of Overload and phase failure
Tripping class according to IEC/EN 60947-4- CLASS 10
1
Phase loss sensitivity Yes
Overload warning No
Resetting and recovery
• Reset options following tripping Manual, automatic, and remote RESET1)
• Recovery time
- Automatic RESET min Depending on the level of the tripping current and the tripping
characteristic curve
- Manual RESET min Depending on the level of the tripping current and the tripping
- Remote RESET min Depending on the level of the tripping current and the tripping
Equipment
• Display of operating state on device Yes, by means of TEST function/switch position indicator slide
• TEST function Yes
• RESET button Yes
• STOP button Yes
Safe operation of motors with
• EC type examination certificate number On request
according to Directive 94/9/EC
Ambient temperature
• Storage/transport °C -55 ... + 80
• Operation °C -40 ... + 70
• Temperature compensation °C Up to 60
• Permissible rated current at internal cubicle temperature
- Up to 60 °C % 100 (current reduction is required above +60 °C)
- 60 °C to 70 °C % 87
Repeat terminals
• Coil repeat terminal Yes Not required
• Auxiliary switch repeat terminal Yes Not required
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 539
5.10 Technical data
Type 3RU21 16 3RU21 26

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60529 IP20
Touch protection acc. to IEC 61140 Screw connection and spring-loaded terminals: finger-safe
Ring cable lug connection: finger-safe only with optional
terminal covers
Shock resistance with sine g/ms 8 / 10
acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Immunity
• Conducted interference suppression
- Burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 kV EMC immunity is not relevant in the case of thermal overload
(corresponds to severity 3) relays
- Surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5 kV EMC immunity is not relevant in the case of thermal overload
(corresponds to severity 3) relays
• Electrostatic discharge acc. to kV EMC immunity is not relevant in the case of thermal overload
IEC 61000-4-2 relays
(corresponds to severity 3)
• Field-related interference suppression to V/m EMC immunity is not relevant in the case of thermal overload
IEC 61000-4-3 relays
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) EMC immunity is not relevant in the case of thermal overload
- Emitted interference relays
Resistance to extreme climates - Humidity % 90
Dimensions See Dimension drawings (dimensions in mm) (Page 552)
Installation altitude above sea level m Up to 2,000; above this, please contact us
Mounting position See Minimum clearances and mounting position (Page 508)
Type of fixing Direct mounting/stand-alone assembly with terminal support2)
1) Remote RESET in conjunction with the appropriate accessory
2) For screw and snap-on mounting onto DIN rail TH 35
5.10.2.2 Main circuit
Table 5- 39 Technical data for the main circuit, 3RU21 overload relays
Type 3RU21 16 3RU21 26

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
Type of current
• DC current Yes
• AC current Yes, frequency range up to 400 Hz
SIRIUS Innovations
540 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.10 Technical data
Type 3RU21 16 3RU21 26

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
Current setting A 0.11 to 0.16 to 1.8 to 2.5 to
11 to 16 34 to 40
Power loss per device (max.) W 3.9 ... 6.6 3.9 ... 6
• With fuse without contactor See "Selection and ordering data" in Catalog
LV 1 N SIRIUS Innovations
• With fuse and contactor See the chapter titled "Motor starter protectors (Page 379)"
Protective separation between main and V 440
auxiliary courrent paths
acc. to IEC/EN 60947-1
5.10.2.3 Conductor cross-sections main circuit
Table 5- 40 Technical data for the main circuit connection, 3RU21 overload relays
Type 3RU21 16 3RU21 26

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
• Connection screw M3, Pozidriv size 2 M4, Pozidriv size 2
• Operating tool ∅ 5 ... 6 ∅ 5 ... 6
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5
- Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)1) 2 x (1 to 2.5)1)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5)1) 2 x (2.5 to 10)1)
2 x (0.5 to 4)1)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)1) 2 x (1 to 2.5)1)
(DIN 46228 Part 1) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)2) 2 x (2.5 to 6)1)
max. 1 x 10
- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 to 16)1) 2 x (16 to 12)1)
2 x (18 to 14)1) 2 x (14 to 8)1)
2 x 12
Connection type Spring-loaded connection
• Operating tool ∅ 3.0 x 0.5 ∅ 3.5 x 0.5
• Conductor cross-sections (min./max.)
- Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 to 4) 1 x (1 to 10)
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 1 x (0.5 to 2.5) 1 x (1 to 6)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 x (0.5 to 2.5) 1 x (1 to 6)
(DIN 46228 Part 1)
- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 1 x (20 to 12) 1 x (18 to 8)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 541
5.10 Technical data
Type 3RU21 16 3RU21 26

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
Connection screw M3, Pozidriv size 2 M4, Pozidriv size 2
Operating tool mm ∅ 5 ... 6 ∅ 5 ... 6
Specified tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5
Usable ring cable lugs mm d22) = min. 3.2, d22) = min. 4.3,
• DIN 46234 without insulating sleeve d32) = max. 7.5 d32) = max. 12.2

2)
d3
d2
SIRIUS Innovations
542 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.10 Technical data
5.10.2.4 Auxiliary circuit
Table 5- 41 Technical data for the auxiliary circuit connection, 3RU21 overload relays
Type 3RU21 16 3RU21 26

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
Number of NO contacts 1
Number of NC contacts 1
Auxiliary contacts - Assignment 1 NO for the "tripped" signal;
1 NC for disconnecting the contactor
Contact rating of the auxiliary contacts
• NC with alternating current AC-14/AC-15,
rated operational current Ie at Ue
- 24 V A 4
- 120 V A 4
- 125 V A 4
- 230 V A 3
- 400 V A 2
- 600 V A 0.75
- 690 V A 0.75
• NO with alternating current AC-14/AC-15,
- 24 V A 3
- 120 V A 3
- 125 V A 3
- 230 V A 2
- 400 V A 1
- 600 V A 0.75
- 690 V A 0.75
• NC, NO with direct current DC-13,
- 24 V A 1
- 60 V A 1)
- 110 V A 0.22
- 125 V A 0.22
- 220 V A 0.11
• Conventional thermal current Ith A 6
• Contact reliability Yes
(suitability for PLC, 17 V, 5 mA)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 543
5.10 Technical data
Type 3RU21 16 3RU21 26

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
• With fuse
- Operating class gL/gG A 6
- Quick-response A 10
• With miniature circuit breaker A 62)
(C characteristic)
Protective separation between auxiliary V 440
current paths
CSA, UL, and UR rated data
Auxiliary circuit – Switching capacity B600, R300
1) On request
2) Up to Ik≤ 0.5 kA; ≤ 260 V
5.10.2.5 Conductor cross sections, auxiliary circuit
Table 5- 42 Technical data for the auxiliary circuit connection, 3RU21 overload relays
Type 3RU21 16 3RU21 26

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
• Connection screw M3, Pozidriv size 2
• Operating tool mm ∅ 5 ... 6
• Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1-wire or 2-wire
- Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)1)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)1)
(DIN 46228 Part 1)
- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 to 16)1), 2 x (18 to 14)1)
• Operating tool mm ∅ 3.0 x 0.5. ∅ 3.5 x 0.5
- Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5)
- Finely stranded without end mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)
sleeve
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)
(DIN 46228 Part 1)
- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 to 14)
SIRIUS Innovations
544 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.10 Technical data
Type 3RU21 16 3RU21 26

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
Usable ring cable lugs mm d22) = min. 3.2, d32) = max. 7.5
2)
d3
d2
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 545
5.10 Technical data
5.10.3 3RB30/3RB31
Table 5- 43 General technical data for 3RB30/3RB31 overload relays
Type 3RB30 1., 3RB31 1. 3RB30 2., 3RB31 2.

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
Tripping in the event of Overload, phase failure, and phase asymmetry +
ground fault (3RB31 only)
Tripping class acc. to CLASS 3RB30: 10 / 20,
IEC/EN 60947-4-1 3RB31: Select from 5, 10, 20, and 30
Overload warning No
• Reset options following tripping Manual, automatic, and remote RESET (depending on the version)
• Recovery time
- Automatic RESET min approx. 3 min
- Manual RESET min Immediately
- Remote RESET min Immediately
Equipment
• Display of operating state on device Yes, via switch position indicator slide
• TEST function Yes, electronics can be tested by pressing the TEST button/
auxiliary contacts and wiring of control circuit are tested by
moving the switch position indicator slide/
self-monitoring
• RESET button Yes
• STOP button No
Explosion protection – safe operation of motors with
• EC type examination certificate number PTB 09 ATEX 3001 II (2) GD
conforming to Directive 94/9/EC (ATEX)
Ambient temperatures
• Storage/transport °C -40 ... +80
• Operation °C -25 ... +60
• Temperature compensation °C +60
• Permissible rated current
- At internal cabinet % 100 1001)
temperature 60 °C
- 70 °C % On request
SIRIUS Innovations
546 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.10 Technical data
Type 3RB30 1., 3RB31 1. 3RB30 2., 3RB31 2.

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
Repeat terminals
Touch protection acc. to IEC 61140 Finger-safe
Shock resistance with sine g/ms 15 / 112)
acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
- Burst acc. to kV 2 (power ports), 1 (signal ports)
IEC 61000-4-4
(corresponds to
severity 3)
- Surge acc. to kV 2 (line to ground), 1 (line to line)
IEC 61000-4-5
(corresponds to
severity 3)
• Electrostatic discharge acc. to kV 8 (air discharge), 6 (contact discharge)
IEC 61000-4-2
• Field-related interference V/m 10
suppression to IEC 61000-4-3
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Severity B acc. to EN 55011 (CISPR 11) and
– Emitted interference EN 55022 (CISPR 22)
Resistance to extreme climates - % 95
Humidity
Installation altitude above sea level m Up to 2,000
Mounting position Any
Type of fixing Direct mounting/stand-alone assembly with terminal support
1) Permissible rated current in the case of heavy-duty starting S0 at 10 to 40 A:
- CLASS 20, Iemax = 32 A,
- CLASS 30, Iemax = 25 A
2) Signaling contact 97/98 in "tripped" position: 4/11 g/ms
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 547
5.10 Technical data
Table 5- 44 Technical data for the main circuit, 3RB30/3RB31 overload relays
Type 3RB30 1., 3RB30 2.,

3RB31 1. 3RB31 2.
Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
Type of current
• DC current No
• AC current Yes, 50/60 Hz ± 5%
Current setting A 0.1 to 0.4 to 0.1 to 0.4 to
4 to 16 10 to 40
Power loss per device (max.) W 0.05 ... 0.2
LV 1 N SIRIUS Innovations.
Protective separation between main and V 6901)
auxiliary current paths acc. to IEC/EN 60947-1
1) For grounded networks, otherwise 600 V
SIRIUS Innovations
548 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.10 Technical data
Table 5- 45 Technical data for the main circuit connection, 3RB30/3RB31 overload relays
Type 3RB30 1., 3RB30 2.,

3RB31 1. 3RB31 2.
Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
Connection type Screw terminals with box terminal
• Operating tool ∅ 5 ... 6 ∅ 5 ... 6
- Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)1) 2 x (1 to 2.5)1)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5)1) 2 x (2.5 to 10)1)
2 x (0.5 to 4)1)
- Finely stranded with end mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)1) 2 x (1 to 2.5)1)
sleeve 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)1) 2 x (2.5 to 6)1)
max. 1 x 10
2 x (18 to 14)1) 2 x (14 to 8)1)
2 x 121)
• Operating tool ∅ 3.0 x 0.5 and ∅ 3.5 x 0.5
- Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 to 4) 1 x (1 to 10)
- Finely stranded without end mm2 1 x (0.5 to 2.5) 1 x (1 to 6)
sleeve
- Finely stranded with end mm2 1 x (0.5 to 2.5) 1 x (1 to 6)
- AWG cables, solid or AWG 1 x (20 to 12) 1 x (18 to 8)
stranded
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 549
5.10 Technical data
Table 5- 46 Technical data for the auxiliary circuit connection, 3RB30/3RB31 overload relays
Type 3RB30 1., 3RB30 2.,

3RB31 1. 3RB31 2.
Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
Number of NO contacts 1
Number of NC contacts 1
Auxiliary contacts - Assignment 1 NO for the "tripped" signal;
1 NC for disconnecting the contactor
• NC with alternating current AC-14/AC-15,
24 V A 4
120 V A 4
125 V A 4
250 V A 3
• NO with alternating current AC-14/AC-15,
24 V A 4
120 V A 4
125 V A 4
250 V A 3
• NC, NO with direct current DC-13,
24 V A 2
60 V A 0.55
110 V A 0.3
125 V A 0.3
250 V A 0.11
• Conventional thermal current Ith A 5
• Contact reliability Yes
(suitability for PLC, 17 V, 5 mA)
• With fuse operating class gL/gG A 6
SIRIUS Innovations
550 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
5.10 Technical data
Type 3RB30 1., 3RB30 2.,

3RB31 1. 3RB31 2.
Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
Ground-fault protection (3RB31 only) The information refers to sinusoidal fault currents at 50/60 Hz
• Tripping value IΔ > 0.75 x Imotor
• Operating range I Lower current setting < Imotor < 3.5 x upper current setting
• Response time ttrip (in steady-state s <1
condition)
Integrated electrical remote reset (3RB31 only) 24 V DC, max. 20 mA for approx. 20 ms, thereafter < 10 mA
Connection terminals A3, A4
Protective separation between auxiliary V 300
current paths
Auxiliary circuit – Switching capacity 3RB30: B600, R300; 3RB31: B300, R300
Table 5- 47 Technical data for the main circuit connection, 3RB30/3RB31 overload relays
Type 3RB30 1., 3RB30 2.

3RB31 1. 3RB31 2.
Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
• Connection screw Pozidriv, size 2
- Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 to 4); 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)
- Finely stranded with end mm2 1 x (0.5 to 2.5); 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)
sleeve
• Operating tool ∅ 3.0 x 0.5
- Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 to 1.5)
- Finely stranded with end mm2 2 x (0.25 to 1.5)
sleeve
- Stranded mm2 2 x (0.25 to 1.5)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 551
Note
5.11.1 Dimension drawings for 3RU21 thermal overload relays
3RU2116-..B0 (S00)
45 5 76
29
118
33
Figure 5-7 3RU2116-..B0
3RU2116-4.B1 (S00)
45 75
56
37
89
5 36
Figure 5-8 3RU2116-4.B1
SIRIUS Innovations
552 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3RU2116-..C0 (S00)
45 94
35
136
64
Figure 5-9 3RU2116-..C0
3RU2116-..C1 (S00)
45 80
60
51
102
5 56
Figure 5-10 3RU2116-..C1
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 553
3RU2126-..B0 (S0)
45 5 a
43
152
a AC: 92; DC: 102

b AC: 34; DC: 44
Figure 5-11 3RU2126-..B0
3RU2126-4.B1 (S0)
45 5 90
62
44
97
44
Figure 5-12 3RU2126-4.B1
SIRIUS Innovations
554 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3RU2126-..C0 (S0)
45 5 a
51
185
a AC: 93; DC: 103

b AC: 76; DC: 86
Figure 5-13 3RU2126-..C0
3RU2126-4.C1 (S0)
92
45 5 72
55
114
73
Figure 5-14 3RU2126-4.C1
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 555
5.11.2 Dimension drawings for 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays
3RB3.1.-..B0 (S00)

Figure 5-15 3RB3.1.-..B0
3RB3.1.-..B0 and 3RU2916-3AA01 (S00)

Figure 5-16 3RB3.1.-..B0 and 3RU2916-3AA01
3RB3.1.-..E0 (S00)

Figure 5-17 3RB3.1.-..E0
SIRIUS Innovations
556 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3RB3.1.-..E0 and 3RU2916-3AC01 (S00)

Figure 5-18
3RB3.1.-..E0 and 3RU2916-3AC01
3RB3.2.-..B0
D

a AC: 87; DC: 97

Figure 5-19 3RB3.2.-..B0
3RB3.2.-..B0 and 3RU2926-3AA01 (S0)

Figure 5-20 3RB3.2.-..B0 and 3RU2926-3AA01
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 557
3RB3.2.-..E0 (S0)
D

a AC: 93; DC: 103

b AC: 88; DC: 98
Figure 5-21 3RB3.2.-..E0
3RB3.2.-..E0 and 3RU2926-3AC01 (S0)

Figure 5-22 3RB3.2.-..E0 and 3RU2926-3AC01
SIRIUS Innovations
558 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 559
Internal circuit diagrams for 3RU21

3RU2116-..B., 3RU2116-..J.
5(6(7
6723
7(67
/ / /
7 7 7 $
Figure 5-24 Thermal overload relay, screw-type and ring cable lug connection systems, S00
3RU2116-..C.
5(6(7
6723
7(67
/ / /
7 7 7
Figure 5-25 Thermal overload relay, spring-loaded connection system, S00
3RU2126-....
5(6(7
6723
7(67
/ / /
7 7 7
Figure 5-26 Thermal overload relay, S0
SIRIUS Innovations
560 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Internal circuit diagrams for 3RB30

3RB3016-..B.
5(6(7
7(67
/ / /
7 7 7 $
Figure 5-27 3RB30 solid-state overload relay, screw-type connection system, S00
3RB3016-..E.
5(6(7
7(67
/ / /
7 7 7
Figure 5-28 3RB30 solid-state overload relay, spring-loaded connection system, S00
3RB3026-....
5(6(7
7(67
/ / /
7 7 7
Figure 5-29 3RB30 solid-state overload relay, S0
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 561
Internal circuit diagrams for 3RB31

3RB3113-..B.
5(6(7
7(67
/ / / $
9
7 7 7 $ $
Figure 5-30 3RB31 solid-state overload relay, screw-type connection system, S00
3RB3113-..E.
5(6(7
7(67
/ / / $
9
7 7 7 $
Figure 5-31 3RB31 solid-state overload relay, spring-loaded connection system, S00
3RB3123-....
5(6(7
7(67
/ / / $
9
7 7 7 $
Figure 5-32 3RB31 solid-state overload relay, S0
SIRIUS Innovations
562 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders 6
6.1 Standards
Fuseless load feeders are manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC 60947 – Part 1
and Part 2.
Types of coordination
Types of coordination are important selection criteria for fuseless load feeders. They are
defined in the appendix, under .
Approvals/Test reports
Extensive approvals and test certificates are available for 3RA2 pre-assembled complete
devices. All approvals and test certificates for the individual devices involved apply if load
feeders are being self-assembled.
Reference
important standards relating to the innovations of the SIRIUS modular system in the chapter
titled System Overview, under Standards (Page 23).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 563
SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders
6.2.1 Overview
Fuseless load feeders

Fuseless load feeders are device combinations comprising a 3RV motor starter protector for
overload and short-circuit protection and a 3RT contactor for normal switching. The SIRIUS
portfolio features two different configuration options for fuseless load feeders.
● 3RA2 tested pre-assembled complete devices
● Tested combinations of individual devices

The modular standard components in the SIRIUS modular system are ideally matched and
support the configuration of fuseless load feeders. The load feeders are also available as
3RA2 complete devices.
Both options are characterized by the following features.
● Type of coordination 1 or 2
● Rated control supply voltage
● Mounting on busbar or DIN rail
A detailed overview of the fuseless load feeders product range appears below.
Fuseless load feeders up to 38 A (discrete configuration of individual devices) and 32 A (pre-
assembled complete devices) can be configured in sizes S00 and S0. The overall width is
45 mm for all individual devices.
The table below lists the maximum power of the three-phase motor for pre-assembled
3RA2 complete devices based on the type of coordination at a voltage of 400 V AC.
Table 6- 1 Motor starter protector sizes
Size Type of coordination Power of three-phase motor

S00 1 0.06 to 7.5 kW
2 0.06 to 1.5 kW
S0 1 7.5 to 15 kW
2 1.5 to 15 kW
SIRIUS Innovations
564 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Reference

About approved load feeders The configuration guide titled "Configuring
feeders in fuseless and fused designs" (order no.:
3ZX1012-0RA21-1AC0)
Auxiliary contacts
The following auxiliary contacts are integrated into fuseless load feeders dependent upon
size.
Table 6- 2 Integrated auxiliary contacts
Size Direct feeder Reversing feeder

S00 1 NO contact is integrated in the 1 NC contact is integrated in the contactor.
contactor.
S0 1 NO contact and 1 NC contact are 1 NO contact and 1 NC contact are
integrated in the contactor. The user integrated in the contactor. The NC contact
can decide how the NC contact is is assigned to the interlock.
assigned.
Mounting
The devices are prepared for DIN rail mounting, for mounting on a 60 mm busbar or for
mounting directly on a wall. The smaller sizes can be snapped directly onto a DIN rail without
the need for adapters.
Table 6- 3 Mounting options
Starter combination Direct-on-line starter Reversing starter

Size S00 S0 S00 S0
Mounting on a DIN rail
Snap-on mounting without adapter ✓ ✓ ✓
With DIN rail adapter ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Busbar mounting
With busbar adapter ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Wall mounting
Direct ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
With DIN rail adapter ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 565
6.2.2.1 Pre-assembled complete devices
Pre-assembled complete devices

3RA2 fuseless load feeders are pre-assembled complete devices; they are delivered ready-
wired and with all mechanical connections established. The devices are available in
sizes S00 and S0 for direct-on-line starting or reversing operation. The fuseless load feeders
can be ordered with or without pre-assembled busbar adapters for mounting on a DIN rail or
busbar.
Connection systems
3RA2 fuseless load feeders are available with the following connection system options.
Table 6- 4 Connection systems available for 3RA2 fuseless load feeders
Connection system 3RA2 pre-assembled complete devices

Screw connection ✓1)
Spring-loaded connection ✓
Ring cable lug connection ---
1) The link module for the S00 load feeder can also be used to mount an S00 contactor on an
S0 motor starter protector.
Rated powers
3RA2 pre-assembled feeders are dimensioned for the following powers:
● Direct-on-line starters up to 15 kW (32 A)
● Reversing starters up to 15 kW (32 A)
Control supply voltages of 3RA2 load feeders

3RA2 pre-assembled feeders are suitable for the following rated control supply voltages:
● 230 V AC / 50/60 Hz
● 24 V DC
SIRIUS Innovations
566 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.2.2.2 Self-assembled load feeders
Assembly of load feeders from individual devices

Self-assembly load feeders comprising individual devices are available as an alternative to
the 3RA2 complete device. The following components can be combined via the intermediary
of a link module.
● Motor starter protector and contactor
● Motor starter protector and soft starter
● Motor starter protector and solid-state contactor
The modularity of the SIRIUS system means that the standard devices are perfectly matched
from both a mechanical and an electrical point of view. Wiring kits for contactor assemblies
for reversing and star-delta (wye-delta) start in various connection systems provide a
straightforward means of assembling starter combinations. Assembly kits are available for
mounting self-assembled load feeders on DIN rails or busbars.
Reference

About assembly kits for fuseless load feeders Accessories (Page 609)
Connection systems
Self-assembled fuseless load feeders are available with the following connection system
options.
Table 6- 5 Connection systems available for self-assembled fuseless load feeders
Connection system Self-assembled fuseless load feeders

Screw connection ✓
Spring-loaded connection ✓
Ring cable lug connection ✓ 1)
1) These versions can be snapped onto a DIN rail. Mounting on a busbar adapter is not possible.
Rated powers
The pre-assembled feeders are dimensioned for the following powers:
● Direct-on-line starters up to 17.5 kW (38 A)
● Reversing starters up to 17.5 kW (38 A)
Control supply voltages of load feeders

The individual devices can be ordered with different rated control supply voltages as
appropriate for the application area of the fuseless load feeders.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 567
6.2.3 Applications
Fuseless load feeders can be used anywhere in industrial electrical applications where fuse,
contactor, and overload relay combinations were previously used. The increased
functionality of the motor starter protector (unlike a fuse combination, it can be used as an
EMERGENCY OFF and as a disconnector) means that a fuseless load feeder is capable of
solving numerous applications easily.

3RA2 load feeders are climate-proof. They are designed for use in enclosed spaces in which
no severe operating conditions prevail (e.g. dust, caustic vapors, hazardous gases).
If they are to be installed in dusty or damp rooms, suitable enclosures must be provided.
Reference

About the application environments of fuseless Technical data (Page 616)
load feeders
SIRIUS Innovations
568 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01

The SIRIUS modular system supports the assembly of load feeders for a whole variety of
requirements. The individual devices which can be combined are matched to one another
from both an electrical and a mechanical point of view.
The following fuseless device combinations have been tested according to IEC 60947-4-1:
Table 6- 6 Fuseless load feeders tested according to IEC 60947-4-1
Device combination
Motor starter protector Contactor1)
Motor starter protector Contactor Thermal or solid-state overload
relay1)
Motor starter protector Contactor SIMOCODE pro1)
Motor starter protector Contactor SIRIUS 3RR monitoring relay1)
Motor starter protector Reversing contactor assembly1)
Motor starter protector Contactor assembly for star- Thermal or solid-state overload
delta (wye-delta) start relay2)
Motor starter protector Contactor assembly for star- SIMOCODE pro2)
delta (wye-delta) start
Motor starter protector 3RW30, 3RW40, 3RW44 soft starters
Motor starter protector Solid-state contactor or solid-state reversing contactor
Motor starter protector Solid-state contactor SIRIUS 3RR monitoring relay
1) Also with 3RA27 communication connection
2) Also with 3RA27 communication connection or 3RA28 logic module
The configuration manual contains detailed information about individual device
combinations. The configuration manual describes fuseless and fused load feeders for
various line voltages.
Reference

About approved load feeders In the configuration guide titled "Configuring
3ZX1012-0RA21-1AC0)
About matching link modules In the chapter titled Link modules (Page 611)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 569
6.4 Functions
6.4 Functions
Pre-assembled load feeders
In the 3RA2 fuseless load feeder, the 3RV2 motor starter protector takes on the dual
function of overload protection and short-circuit protection. Upstream protective devices such
as melting fuses or limiters are superfluous, as the motor starter protector is capable of
withstanding short circuits up to 150 kA at 400 V.
The 3RT2 contactor is suitable for extremely complex switching tasks requiring maximum
durability.
Tripping class CLASS 10 is a fixed setting on all pre-assembled 3RA2 feeders.
Self-assembled load feeders

● Soft start
● Star-delta (wye-delta) start
● Configuration with solid-state switching devices for high switching frequencies
In the case of a configuration with overload relay, a tripping class up to CLASS 30 can be
set. In the case of a configuration with SIMOCODE, a tripping class up to CLASS 40 can be
set.
Reference
About the functions of motor starter protectors SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors, under
Functions (Page 386)
SIRIUS Innovations
570 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.5 Configuration
6.5 Configuration
Application planning
You will find detailed information about configuration in the configuration manual. The
configuration manual describes fuseless and fused load feeders for various line voltages.
Reference
About applications involving contactors In the chapter titled
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies,
under Overview of applications for contactors and
contactor assemblies (Page 116)
About applications involving motor starter In the chapter titled SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter
protectors protectors, under Configuration (Page 391)
About configuration In the configuration guide titled "Configuring
3ZX1012-0RA21-1AC0)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 571
6.6 Mounting
6.6 Mounting
6.6.1 Installation guidelines
6.6.1.1 Minimum clearances (400 V AC)

The following clearances must be maintained when installing the combinations:
Table 6- 7 Installation instructions for 400 V AC
Motor starter protector Clearance from grounded or live parts as well as from molded-plastic
in combination with contactors cable ducts according to IEC 60947-4
Motor Contactor Rated operational Y X21) Z
starter voltage mm mm mm
protector
3RV2.1 3RT201 400 20 10 9
3RV2.2 3RT201 400 30 10 9
3RT2.2 400 30 10 9
Z Z
Y
1L1 3L2 5L3
3RV2... 3RV2...
2T1 4T2 6T3
1L1 3L2 5L3

X2
3RT2... 3RT2...
2T1 4T2 6T3
1) Minimum clearance from contactor at the front. There is no minimum clearance requirement at the front for the motor
starter protector.
SIRIUS Innovations
572 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.6 Mounting
The following table lists the installation guidelines for fuseless load feeders (size S00 and S0).
Table 6- 8 Installation guidelines - Fuseless load feeders (size S00 and S0)
Combination
Power
Clearance between feeders
Permissible installation: h = horizontal, v = vertical
Max. ambient temperature:
Vibration and shock1)
A mm h, v °C
Motor starter protector and contactor
3RA21 direct-on-line starter, screw
connection, DIN rail or wall
S00 ≤ 14 0 h, v 60 Unlimited
14 … 16 10 h 60
0 h, v 40
S0 ≤ 29 0 h, v 60 DIN rail adapter required
29 … 32 10 h 60
0 h, v 40
3RA21 direct-on-line starter, screw
connection, busbar
S00 16 2) 2) Vibration and shock kit 8US19 98-1CA10
required
required
3RA22 reversing starter, screw
14 … 16 10 h 60
0 h, v 40
29 … 32 10 h 60
0 h, v 40
3RA22 reversing starter, screw
connection, busbar
required
required
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 573
6.6 Mounting
Combination
Power
A mm h, v °C
3RA21 direct-on-line starter, spring-
loaded connection, DIN rail or wall
14 … 16 10 h 60
0 h, v 40
29 … 32 10 h 60
0 h, v 40
3RA21 direct-on-line starter, spring-
loaded connection, busbar
required
required
3RA22 reversing starter, spring-loaded
14 … 16 10 h 60
0 h, v 40
29 … 32 10 h 60
0 h, v 40
3RA22 reversing starter, spring-loaded
connection, busbar
required
required
SIRIUS Innovations
574 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.6 Mounting
Combination
Power
A mm h, v °C
Motor starter protector and soft starter,
screw connection, DIN rail or wall
S00 16 2) 2) The feeder must be screwed tight to the
top of the motor starter protector with two
screws and fastened to the bottom of the
soft starter with a self-locking screw. Not
approved for railways, power plants, or
shipbuilding.
shipbuilding.
Motor starter protector and soft starter,
spring-loaded connection, DIN rail or wall
shipbuilding.
shipbuilding.
Motor starter protector and solid-state
contactor, screw connection, DIN rail or
wall
Direct-on-line starter Unlimited Not approved for railways,
power plants, or shipbuilding.
Reversing starter Unlimited Not approved for railways,
power plants, or shipbuilding.
1)Vibration and shock tests are carried out in accordance with SN 31205 as well as with the relevant standards for
railways, shipbuilding, and power plants.
2) Please consult Technical Assistance (www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-assistance).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 575
6.6 Mounting
6.6.2 Mounting and disassembling load feeders
6.6.2.1 Overview
Please proceed as per the mounting instructions below for self-assembly of 3RA2 load
feeders.
Connection systems
Sizes S0 and S00 support three connection systems:
● Screw connection
● Spring loaded
● Hybrid connection
The hybrid connection system combines screw-type and spring-loaded connection
technology. Motor starter protectors with screw connection and contactors with spring-loaded
connection can be installed together in the load feeder.
The modular system has suitable link modules for each connection system.
Reference

About matching link modules Link modules (Page 611)
Direct-on-line starter and reversing starter

The reversing starter is mounted in the same way as the direct-on-line starter. The reversing
contactor assembly is used on the link module instead of the individual contactor.
Reference

About installing reversing contactor assemblies SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies,
under Assembly kit for reversing contactor
assemblies (Page 211)
SIRIUS Innovations
576 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.6 Mounting
6.6.2.2 Load feeder with screw-type connection system
Mounting an S00 load feeder with screw-type connection system
Table 6- 9 Mounting an S00 load feeder with screw-type connection system

1 Mount the link module on the contactor.
2 Insert the pins into the corresponding main
conductor terminals.
3 Screw the main conductor terminals tight.
4 Attach the contactor and the link module to
the bottom of the motor starter protector.
Insert the guide tabs into the slots on the
5 Insert the pins into the corresponding main
conductor terminals.

Note
Mounting the S0 motor starter protector and S00 contactor with screw-type connection
system
The link module for the S00 load feeder can also be used to mount an S00 contactor on an
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 577
6.6 Mounting
Mounting an S0 load feeder with screw-type connection system
Table 6- 10 Mounting an S0 load feeder with screw-type connection system

1 Mount the link module on the contactor.
2 Insert the connectors into the
corresponding main conductor terminals.
4 Attach the contactor and the link module to
the bottom of the motor starter protector.
Insert the guide tabs into the slots on the
motor starter protector. Insert the
connectors into the corresponding main
conductor terminals at the same time.


Note
Reverse the above sequence to disassemble both sizes S00 and S0.
SIRIUS Innovations
578 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.6 Mounting
6.6.2.3 Load feeder with spring-loaded connection system
Mounting an S00 load feeder with spring-loaded connection system
Table 6- 11 Mounting an S00 load feeder with spring-loaded connection system

1 Insert the connectors (a) on the link module into the corresponding main conductor
terminals (a) on the contactor. Make sure that the guide tabs are inserted into the slots (c)
on the contactor.
The link module will sit flush with the contactor on the left- and right-hand sides.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 579
6.6 Mounting
E

2 Insert the connectors on the link module (b) into the corresponding main conductor
terminals on the motor starter protector.
Insert the guide tabs (c) into the designated slots at the same time.
The link module will sit flush underneath the motor starter protector on the left- and right-
hand sides.
Table 6- 12 Main conductor terminals on contactor and motor starter protector (size S00)
Main conductor terminals on the contactor (a) Main conductor terminals on the motor starter
(S00): protector (b) (S00):
D D D
E E E
SIRIUS Innovations
580 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.6 Mounting
Disassembling an S00 load feeder with spring-loaded connection system
E
D
D
Table 6- 13 Disassembling an S00 load feeder with spring-loaded connection system

1a Slide the screwdriver into the opening on the link module as shown in the figure and press it
down.
1b Position the screwdriver on the link module as shown in the figure and press it down to
release the spring-loaded terminals.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 581
6.6 Mounting

2 Pull the link module and the contactor attached to it toward you to remove it.

3 Push the release slide on the rear of the link module up.
SIRIUS Innovations
582 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.6 Mounting

4 Take the link module off the contactor.
Note
Proceed in the same way to disassemble the reversing starter (size S00).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 583
6.6 Mounting
Mounting an S0 load feeder with spring-loaded connection system
Table 6- 14 Mounting an S0 load feeder with spring-loaded connection system

terminals (a) on the contactor. Make sure that the guide tabs are inserted into the slots on
the contactor.
Insert the guide tabs (c) on the link module into the slots on the contactor at the same time.
SIRIUS Innovations
584 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.6 Mounting
E
$&

2 Insert the connectors on the link module (b) into the corresponding main conductor
terminals on the motor starter protector.
Insert the guide tabs (c) into the designated slots at the same time.
The link module will sit flush underneath the motor starter protector on the left- and right-
hand sides.
Table 6- 15 Main conductor terminals on contactor and motor starter protector (size S0)
Main conductor terminals on the contactor (a) Main conductor terminals on the motor starter
(S0): protector (b) (S0):
D D D
E E E
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 585
6.6 Mounting
Note
Contactor size S0 alternating current (AC)
S0 contactors with AC operation and spring-loaded connection system need a spacer (d) for
DIN rail or busbar adapter mounting.
Disassembling an S0 load feeder with spring-loaded connection system
E
D
D
Table 6- 16 Disassembling an S0 load feeder with spring-loaded connection system

1a Slide the screwdriver into the opening on the link module as shown in the figure and press it
down.
1b Position the screwdriver on the link module as shown in the figure and press it down to
release the spring-loaded terminals.
SIRIUS Innovations
586 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.6 Mounting

2 Pull the link module and the contactor attached to it toward you to remove it.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 587
6.6 Mounting

3 Push the release slide on the rear of the link module up.

4 Take the link module off the contactor.
Note
Proceed in the same way to disassemble the reversing starter (size S0).
SIRIUS Innovations
588 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.6 Mounting
6.6.2.4 Load feeder with hybrid connection
Mounting an S00 load feeder with hybrid connection system
Table 6- 17 Mounting an S00 load feeder with hybrid connection system

the contactor.
Insert the guide tabs (c) into the corresponding slots at the same time.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 589
6.6 Mounting


2 Attach the contactor and the link module to the bottom of the motor starter protector. Check
the guide tabs.
3 Insert the pins into the corresponding main conductor terminals.
4 Screw all connectors tight.
Table 6- 18 Main conductor terminals on the contactor (size S00)
Main conductor terminals on the contactor (a) (S00):
D D D
Note
Mounting the S0 motor starter protector and S00 contactor with hybrid connection system
The link module for the S00 load feeder can also be used to mount an S00 contactor on an
SIRIUS Innovations
590 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.6 Mounting
Mounting an S0 load feeder with hybrid connection system
Table 6- 19 Mounting an S0 load feeder with hybrid connection system

the contactor.
Insert the guide tabs (c) into the corresponding slots at the same time.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 591
6.6 Mounting

G
$&

2 Attach the contactor and the link module to the bottom of the motor starter protector. Check
the guide tabs.
3 Insert the pins into the corresponding main conductor terminal.
4 Screw all connectors tight.
Table 6- 20 Main conductor terminals on the contactor (size S0)
Main conductor terminals on the contactor (a) (S0):
D D D
SIRIUS Innovations
592 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.6 Mounting
Note
Contactor size S0 alternating current (AC)
S0 contactors with AC operation and spring-loaded connection system need a spacer (d) for
DIN rail or busbar adapter mounting.
Note
Reverse the above sequence to disassemble both sizes S00 and S0.
6.6.3 Mounting and disassembling the assembly types

Fuseless load feeders can be mounted on the following assembly systems:
Table 6- 21 Assembly systems
Assembly system Mounting

35 mm DIN rail acc. to DIN EN 50 022 • Can be snapped directly onto DIN rail
• Mounting with DIN rail adapter. Size S0 reversing
starters have to be mounted with an adapter.
Busbar with 60 mm busbar center-to- Mounting with busbar adapter
center spacing
Screw mounting on mounting plate • Direct screw mounting on mounting plate
• Mounting on DIN rail adapter and screw mounting of
the adapter on mounting plate.
6.6.3.1 On DIN rail without DIN rail adapter
DIN rail mounting without adapter

Fuseless load feeders in the following sizes can be snapped onto DIN rails without adapters:
● Direct-on-line and reversing starters in size S00
● Direct-on-line starters in size S0
No tools are required for mounting and disassembly.
Mounting with a DIN rail adapter is also possible.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 593
6.6 Mounting
NOTICE
Vibration or shock load on size S00 reversing starters
In the case of vibration or shock load (such as in railway applications, for example), the
fuseless load feeder (size S00 reversing starter) has to be mounted on a DIN rail adapter to
protect the individual devices against damage.
Figure 6-1 Mounting on DIN rail without adapter
6.6.3.2 On DIN rail with DIN rail adapter

All feeders can be mounted on DIN rails with DIN rail adapters.
CAUTION
Possible damage to load feeder.
If the load feeder is mounted directly on the DIN rail without a DIN rail adapter, there is no
guarantee that the fastening will be vibration-proof.
Size S0 reversing starters have to be mounted with DIN rail adapters. However, DIN rail
adapters can be omitted when using busbar adapters.
SIRIUS Innovations
594 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.6 Mounting
Types of adapter
The DIN rail adapter is the same for all devices. A pair of adapters is required for mounting a
reversing contactor assembly.
Figure 6-2 DIN rail adapters, individual and as a pair
Connecting the adapters for reversing contactor assemblies

The DIN rail adapters can be connected without the need for tools. Link wedges simply need
to be plugged in on the rear of the adapters.
Two link wedges are required to connect two DIN rail adapters.
[
Figure 6-3 Connecting DIN rail adapters with link wedges
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 595
6.6 Mounting
Mounting the DIN rail adapter on the DIN rail

The DIN rail adapter snaps onto the DIN rail (no tools are required).
Mounting the feeder on the DIN rail

The figure below illustrates how the size S0 reversing starter with spring-loaded connection
system and screw-type connection system is mounted on a DIN rail. The devices are
snapped onto the DIN rail adapter.

Left Size S0 reversing starter with DC operation and spring-loaded connection system
Right Size S0 reversing starter with DC/AC operation and screw-type connection system
SIRIUS Innovations
596 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.6 Mounting

1 Attach a connecting piece to each of the two DIN rail adapters. Insert each of the
connecting pieces into the left-hand line of holes.
2 Snap the feeder onto the DIN rail adapter. Insert the tabs on the connecting pieces
into the fastening holes on the contactors.
3 Screw the feeder to the DIN rail adapter:
• Use two screw holders for the screw mounting.
• Attach a screw holder underneath each connecting piece, flush with the
contactor's mounting base.
• Screw the screw holder to the adapter.
The feeder sits tight on the adapter.
Mounting the size S0 reversing starter with AC operation and spring-loaded connection system on
DIN rail

1 Mount the spacer (d) on the contactor (if this has not been done already).
2 Snap the feeder onto the DIN rail adapter.
3 Screw the feeder to the DIN rail adapter:
• Use one screw to fasten the left-hand contactor and another to fasten the right-
hand contactor.
• Push the screw through the lower left-hand fastening hole and the adjacent
spacer (d).
Do not use any connecting pieces to fasten the connection.
The feeder sits tight on the adapter.
Disassembling the feeder from the DIN rail adapter

To disassemble the feeder, unscrew the screws and pull the feeder down to remove it.
Disassembling the DIN rail adapter from the DIN rail

To disassemble the adapter, press on it then pull it down to remove it.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 597
6.6 Mounting
6.6.3.3 On busbar system

All device combinations can be mounted on busbars. Busbar adapters have to be used for
busbar mounting. One adapter is required for direct-on-line starters; a pair of adapters is
required for reversing contactor assemblies.
Figure 6-4 Size S0 reversing starter with spring-loaded connection system mounted on busbar
The busbar adapters and the associated mounting parts can be purchased as accessories.
● Part of the assembly kit.
● Part of the pre-assembled load feeders.
SIRIUS Innovations
598 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.6 Mounting
Types of adapter
Busbar adapters and device holders: Busbar adapters are available with or without pre-
assembled connecting cables. Busbar adapters without connecting cables are known as
"device holders".
Busbar adapters and device holders are available in mounting heights of 200 mm and
260 mm. All device combinations can be mounted on the long adapter. The short adapter
can only be used for size S00 devices with screw-type connection systems.

1 Busbar adapter
2 Device holder
Figure 6-5 Busbar adapter and device holder, two mounting heights
Pairs of adapters: A pair of adapters comprising a busbar adapter and a device holder is
required for the busbar mounting of a reversing contactor assembly. The pair of adapters
can be assembled from individual components without the need for tools.
Figure 6-6 Pair of adapters for reversing contactor assembly (busbar adapter and device holder)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 599
6.6 Mounting
Connecting the adapters for reversing contactor assemblies

A pair of adapters is required to mount a reversing contactor assembly on a busbar. Busbar
adapters and device holders can be connected without tools. Link wedges simply need to be
plugged in on the rear of the adapters.
Figure 6-7 Connecting the adapters for mounting reversing contactor assemblies
The link wedges are included in the assembly kit for reversing operation or can be ordered
separately as accessories.
SIRIUS Innovations
600 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.6 Mounting
Adapting the busbar adapter to the busbar system
DANGER
Hazardous voltage!
The busbar adapter and the device holder can be adjusted to suit the following busbar
thicknesses:
● 5 mm (delivery condition)
● 10 mm
Table 6- 22 Adjusting the busbar adapter to suit the busbar thickness

1 Push the 3 fastening blocks down.
2 Adjust the fastening blocks in
accordance with the busbar thickness
(5 mm/10 mm). 5 mm
3 Push the fastening blocks up until they
engage.
10 mm
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 601
6.6 Mounting
Mounting the busbar adapter on the busbar

Attaching the busbar adapter to the busbar is a very straightforward process. The busbar
hooks on the rear of the adapter will hold the structure securely on the bar even under
severe ambient conditions.
Table 6- 23 Mounting the busbar adapter on the busbar

1 Press the button on the top of the busbar
adapter to release the holder. The holder
should flip out from the front of the busbar
adapter.
2 Attach the busbar adapter to the busbars

from above.
SIRIUS Innovations
602 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.6 Mounting
Disassembly of the busbar adapter from the busbar system

The diagrams below illustrate how the busbar adapter is disassembled from the busbar
system:
Table 6- 24 Disassembling the busbar adapter from the busbar

1 From the front, insert a screwdriver
into the right-hand opening on the
busbar adapter and release the
holder. The button on the top of the
busbar adapter should spring up.

2 Remove the busbar adapter from the

busbars. To do this, you will first need
to push it up slightly so that you can
remove it by pulling it off toward you.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 603
6.6 Mounting
Mounting components on the busbar adapter

The load feeder components can be attached to the busbar adapter without tools.
Use the connecting piece (a) to connect the component at the bottom to the adapter. Make
sure that the connecting piece is inserted into the 4th, 5th, and 6th openings from the bottom
on the adapter, as shown in the figure.
S0 contactors with AC operation and spring-loaded connection system need a spacer (d).
Figure 6-8 Busbar mounting
The connecting piece and spacer are included in the assembly kit or can be ordered
separately.
The table below lists the openings on the adapter into which the connecting piece for the
various types of feeder need to be inserted.
SIRIUS Innovations
604 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.6 Mounting
Table 6- 25 Insertion of the connecting piece into the busbar adapter/device holder
Type of feeder Size Connection system Order number Opening from the bottom
Direct-on-line starter S00 Screw connection • 3RA2110-..D..-0AP0 3., 4. and 5th (200 mm
• 3RA2110-..D..-0BB4 adapter)
Spring-loaded connection • 3RA2110-..H..-0AP0 10th, 11th, and 12th

• 3RA2110-..H..-0BB4
S0 Screw connection • 3RA2120-..D..-0AP0 10th, 11th, and 12th
• 3RA2120-..D..-0BB4
Spring-loaded connection • 3RA2120-..H..-0AP0 4., 5. and 6th
• 3RA2120-..H..-0BB4
Reversing starter S00 Screw connection • 3RA2210-..D..-2AP0 3., 4. and 5th (200 mm
• 3RA2210-..D..-2BB4 adapter)
Spring-loaded connection • 3RA2210-..H..-2AP0 10th, 11th, and 12th

• 3RA2210-..H..-2BB4
S0 Screw connection • 3RA2220-..D..-0AP0 10th, 11th, and 12th
• 3RA2220-..D..-0BB4
Spring-loaded connection • 3RA2220-..H..-0AP0 4., 5. and 6th
• 3RA2220-..H..-0BB4
6.6.3.4 Wall mounting
Wall mounting
All load feeder components are delivered ready for wall mounting. The components' size
dictates whether they are mounted on the wall with or without DIN rail adapters.
Table 6- 26 Wall mounting with or without DIN rail adapter, depending on size
Wall mounting Size

Direct-on-line starter Reversing starter
Without DIN rail adapter S00, S0 S00
With DIN rail adapter S00, S0 S00, S0
Wall mounting without DIN rail adapter

All size S00 direct-on-line starters and reversing starters may be mounted directly on the
wall.
The load feeder is screwed to the wall. The device enclosures contain fastening holes, as
well as openings for screw-mounted push-in lugs.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 605
6.6 Mounting
NOTICE
Short-circuit hazard
In the case of screw-mounting on the wall without DIN rail adapter, the feeder must not be
screwed to a conductive base. Insulation is necessary to prevent a short circuit to the base
plate as a result of a motor starter protector short circuit.
Note
2 x M4 screws (1.2 to 1.6 Nm) should be used to fasten the contactors.
SIRIUS Innovations
606 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.6 Mounting
Wall mounting with DIN rail adapter

Wall mounting with DIN rail adapter is permissible for all device combinations. Size S0
reversing starters have to be mounted with DIN rail adapters.
The DIN rail adapters contain fastening holes for the screw mounting.
Note
2 x M4 screws (1.2 to 1.6 Nm) should be used to fasten the DIN rail adapters.
Disassembling the feeder from the DIN rail adapter

To disassemble the feeder, unscrew the screws and pull the feeder down to remove it.
Disassembling the DIN rail adapter from the wall

To disassemble the DIN rail, unscrew the screws and remove the adapter.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 607
6.7 Connection
6.7 Connection
The conductor cross-sections are the same as those of the individual devices.
Reference

About conductor cross-sections Technical data (Page 616)
About connecting the terminals SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies,
under Connection (Page 152) and
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors, under
Connection (Page 403)
6.8 Operation
Operator controls on a motor starter protector
Reference

About motor starter protector operation SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors, under
Operation (Page 404)
SIRIUS Innovations
608 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.9 Accessories
6.9 Accessories
6.9.1 Overview
Accessories for individual devices

The accessories for 3RV2 motor starter protectors, as well as those for 3RT2 contactors, can
be used to install fuseless load feeders.
Reference

About accessories for contactors SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies,
under Accessories (Page 154)
About accessories for motor starter protectors SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors, under
Accessories (Page 407)
Special accessories for fuseless load feeders

Accessories are also available which have been optimized for fuseless load feeders. These
include the transverse auxiliary switches with 1 CO contact or 1 NO contact + 1 NC contact,
which are connected to the motor starter protector from above.
There are also special snap-on auxiliary switch blocks for the contactor, which are connected
from below.
These two accessories enable the fuseless load feeders to be wired simply, without the
cables having to be routed through the devices.
Reference

About the auxiliary switch blocks for contactors SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies,
under Auxiliary switch blocks (Page 160)
About the auxiliary switches for motor starter SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors, under
protectors Auxiliary switch (Page 410)
Accessories for the configuration of fuseless load feeders

The following optional accessories can be ordered as individual parts for the configuration of
fuseless load feeders:
● Accessories for starter combinations
● Accessories for DIN rail mounting
● Accessories for busbar mounting
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 609
6.9 Accessories
6.9.2 Accessories for starter combinations

The following accessories are available for starter combinations:
● Wiring kit for reversing operation
Electrical and mechanical connection for reversing contactors. Can be combined with link
module. Integrated electrical and mechanical interlock option.
● Wiring kit for star-delta (wye-delta) start.
Electrical and mechanical connection for 3 contactors of the same size.
● Link module for the electrical and mechanical connection between motor starter protector
and contactor with screw-type, spring-loaded or hybrid connection system.
Reference

About the wiring kit for reversing operation SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies,
under Assembly kit for reversing contactor
assemblies (Page 211)
About wiring kit for contactor assemblies for star- SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors/contactor assemblies,
delta (wye-delta) start under Assembly kit for contactor assemblies for
star-delta (wye-delta) start (Page 218)
SIRIUS Innovations
610 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.9 Accessories
6.9.3 Link modules

The SIRIUS modular system features link modules to facilitate combinations involving the
following devices:
● Motor starter protector and contactor
● Motor starter protector and soft starter
● Motor starter protector and solid-state contactor
Function
The link module establishes the electrical and mechanical connection between motor starter
protector and contactor/soft starter/solid-state contactor. There are three different types
according to connection system:
● Link module for devices with screw-type connection system
● Link module for devices with spring-loaded connection system
● Link module for hybrid connection
Versions
Table 6- 27 Link module versions
Connection Link module version Order number

system
Screw-type Motor starter protector – contactor in size S00 3RA1921-1D
connection
system
Motor starter protector – contactor in size S0 AC 3RA2921-1A
Motor starter protector – contactor in size S0 DC 3RA2921-1B

Motor starter protector – soft starter in size S00
Motor starter protector – soft starter in size S0
Motor starter protector – solid-state contactor
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 611
6.9 Accessories

system
Spring- Motor starter protector – contactor in size S00 3RA2911-2A
loaded
connection
system
Motor starter protector – contactor in size S0 3RA2921-2A
Motor starter protector – soft starter in size S00 3RA2911-2G
Motor starter protector – soft starter in size S0 3RA2921-2G
SIRIUS Innovations
612 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.9 Accessories

system
Hybrid Motor starter protector – contactor in size S00 3RA2911-2F
connection
system1)
Motor starter protector – contactor in size S0 3RA2921-2F
1) The motor starter protector has a screw connection. The contactor has a spring-loaded connection.
Reference

About mounting device combinations with Mounting and disassembling load feeders
connecting piece (Page 576).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 613
6.9 Accessories
6.9.4 Accessories for DIN rail mounting

As well as the DIN rail adapter which can be ordered separately, the following kits are
available for DIN rail mounting?
Table 6- 28 Assembly kit for reversing operation for DIN rail (size S0)
Screw-type connection system Spring-loaded connection system

3RA2923-1BB1 3RA2923-1BB2
Wiring modules (top and bottom) Wiring modules (top and bottom)
Auxiliary wiring module (top and bottom) Auxiliary wiring stranded wires
Connection clips (2 x) Connection clips (2 x)
Mechanical interlock Mechanical interlock
DIN rail adapter (2 x) DIN rail adapter (2 x)
Link wedge (2 x) Link wedge (2 x)
Screw holder (2 x) Screw holder (2 x)
Screw (2 x) Screw (2 x)
Screw (2 x) for AC feeders
Spacer (2 x)
Reference

About mounting the assembly kit for the DIN rail On DIN rail with DIN rail adapter (Page 594).
SIRIUS Innovations
614 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.9 Accessories
6.9.5 Accessories for busbar mounting

The following kits for reversing operation are available for busbar mounting in various
connection systems and sizes.
Table 6- 29 Assembly kit for reversing operation for busbar (size S00)

3RA2913-1DB1 3RA2923-1EB1 3RA2913-1DB2
--- Auxiliary wiring module Auxiliary wiring module (top)
(top and bottom)
Busbar adapter Busbar adapter
Device holder Device holder
Table 6- 30 Assembly kit for reversing operation for busbar (size S0)

3RA2923-1DB1 3RA2923-1DB2
Auxiliary wiring module (top and bottom) Auxiliary wiring stranded wires
Busbar adapter Busbar adapter
Device holder Device holder
Spacer (2 x)
The following accessories can also be ordered separately.

● Busbar adapter:
For 60 mm busbar center-to-center spacing. 2 lengths, 200 mm and 260 mm. With
connecting cables.
● Device holder:
For 60 mm busbar center-to-center spacing. 2 lengths, 200 mm and 260 mm. Without
connecting cables.
● Vibration and shock kit 8US19 98-1CA10 for busbar mounting under severe ambient
conditions.
Reference
About mounting the assembly kit for the busbar On busbar system (Page 598).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 615
6.10 Technical data
6.10 Technical data
6.10.1 General data
Table 6- 31 3RA2 fuseless load feeders - General data
Type 3RA2.1 3RA2.2

Size S00 S0
Number of poles 3 3
General data
Standards • IEC 60947-1, DIN EN 60947-1
(VDE 0660 Part 100)
• IEC 60947-2, DIN EN 60947-2
(VDE 0660 Part 101)
• IEC 60947-4-1, DIN EN 60947-4-1
(VDE 0660 Part 102)
Maximum rated current In max A 16 32
(= maximum rated operational current Ie)
Permissible ambient temperature °C -20 to +60 for operation
°C -55 to +80 for storage/transport
Rated frequency Hz 50 / 60
Tripping class (CLASS) acc. to IEC 60947-4-1, 10
DIN EN 60947-4-1
(VDE 0660 Part 102)
Rated short-circuit Iq at AC 50/60 Hz 400 V acc. to kA 153
IEC 60947-4-1, DIN EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
Types of coordination acc. to IEC 60947-4-1, 1)
DIN EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)

Power loss Pv maxof all main up to 1.25 A W 2
current paths dependent on 1.6 to 6.3 A W 2.3
rated current In (upper
setting range) 8 to 12 A W 3.5
16 A W 4.3
5 ... 6.3 W 2.3 W
8 ... 12 A W 3.5 W
16 to 32 A W 4.3 W
SIRIUS Innovations
616 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.10 Technical data
Type 3RA2.1 3RA2.2

Size S00 S0
Number of poles 3 3
General data
Magnet coil power input for contactors 3RT2015 ... 3RT2017 ... 3RT2024 3RT2026 ...
With cold coil and Us’ 50 Hz 16 18 3RT2028
• AC operation Switch-on power VA 27 / 24.3 37 / 33 65 77
cos φ 0.8 / 0.75 0.82
Holding power VA 4.2 / 3.3 5.7 / 4.4 8.5 9.8
cos φ 0.25 0.28 0.25 0.27
• DC operation Switch-on power = holding W 4 5.9
power
Dependent on the rated motor power P of the motor
• Up to 4 kW Switch-on power VA 27 ---
cos φ 0.8 ---
Holding power VA 4.2 ---
cos φ 0.25 ---
• 5.5 kW to 7.5 kW Switch-on power VA 37 ---
cos φ 0.8 ---
Holding power VA 5.7 ---
cos φ 0.25 ---
• Up to 5.5 kW Switch-on power VA --- 65
cos φ --- 0.82
Holding power VA --- 8.5
cos φ --- 0.25
• 7.5 kW to 15 kW Switch-on power VA --- 77
cos φ --- 0.82
Holding power VA --- 9.8
cos φ --- 0.25
Magnet coil operating range for contactors 0.8 to 1.1 x Us
Lower limit at 55 °C 0.8 x Us ---
At 60°C 0.85 x Us ---
Motor starter protector durability
• Mechanical durability Operating cycles 100000
• Electrical durability Operating cycles 100000
• Maximum switching frequency per hour (motor starts) 1/h 15
Contactor durability
• Mechanical durability Operating cycles 30 million 10 million
• Electrical durability Operating cycles See the durability characteristic curves for the
contactors (technical data in chapter titled "Contactors
and contactor assemblies").
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 617
6.10 Technical data
Type 3RA2.1 3RA2.2

Size S00 S0
Number of poles 3 3
General data
Shock resistance (sine) acc. to g 6
IEC 60086 Part 2-27
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60947-1 IP20
Phase loss sensitivity of the acc. to IEC 60947-1, Yes
motor starter protector DIN EN 60947-1
(VDE 0660 Part 102)
Isolating features of the acc. to IEC 60947-2, Yes
motor starter protector DIN EN 60947-2
(VDE 0660 Part 101)
Main and EMERGENCY acc. to IEC 60204-1, Yes (with overvoltage releases of category 1 under
STOP switch features of DIN EN 60204-1 conditions of proper use)
motor starter protectors and (VDE 0113 Part 1)
accessories
Protective separation acc. to DIN EN 60947-1, V Up to 400
between main and auxiliary Annex N
circuit
Mirror contacts on contactors Yes Yes, from main contact to
auxiliary NC contact
1) See selection and ordering data
SIRIUS Innovations
618 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.10 Technical data
6.10.2 Conductor cross-sections - main circuit
Table 6- 32 3RA2 fuseless load feeders - Conductor cross-sections (main circuit)
Type 3RA2.1 3RA2.2

Size S00 S0
Number of poles 3 3
Conductor cross-sections - main circuit
Standards • IEC 60947-1, DIN EN 60947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100)
• IEC 60947-2, DIN EN 60947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101)
• IEC 60947-4-1, DIN EN 60947-4-1
(VDE 0660 Part 102)
Connection screw M3 (Pozidriv size PZ 2) M4 (Pozidriv size PZ 2)
(1-wire or 2- - Tightening torque Nm 0.8 to 1.2 (7 to 10.3 lb.in) 2 to 2.5 (18 to 22 lb.in.)
wire connection (lb.in)
possible) • Solid and stranded mm2 2 x (0.75 to 2.5), max. 2 x 4 2 x (1.0 to 2.5),
2 x (2.5 to 10)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5), 2 x (1 to 2.5),
(DIN 46228 Part 1) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) 2 x (2.5 to 6), max. 1 x 10
• Solid or stranded, AWG cables AWG 2 x (18 to 14), 2 x 12 2 x (16 to 12), 2 x (14 to 8)
(1-wire or 2- • Solid and stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 to 4) 2 x (1.0 to 10)
wire connection
• Finely stranded without end mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) 2 x (1.0 to 6)
possible)
sleeve
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) 2 x (1.0 to 6)
(DIN 46228 Part 1)
• Solid or stranded, AWG cables AWG 2 x (20 to 12) 2 x (18 to 8)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 619
6.10 Technical data
Type 3RA2.1 3RA2.2

Size S00 S0
Number of poles 3 3
Conductor cross-sections - main circuit
• Operating tool mm ∅5…6 ∅5…6
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 to 1.2 (7 to 10.3 lb.in) 2 to 2.5 (18 to 22 lb.in.)
(lb.in)
• Usable ring cable lugs mm d2 = min. 3.2 d2 = min. 4.3
mm d3 = max. 7.5 d3 = max. 12.2
sleeve
sleeve

1)
insulation for the ring cable lugs 1).
• UL 224 approved
• Flame-protected
SIRIUS Innovations
620 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
6.10 Technical data
6.10.3 Conductor cross sections - auxiliary circuit
Table 6- 33 3RA2 fuseless load feeders - Conductor cross-sections (auxiliary circuit)
Type 3RA2.1 3RA2.2

Size S00 S0
Number of poles 3 3
Conductor cross-sections - auxiliary circuit (size S00 and S0 contactors)
Standards • IEC 60947-1, DIN EN 60947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100)
• IEC 60947-2, DIN EN 60947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101)
• IEC 60947-4-1, DIN EN 60947-4-1
(VDE 0660 Part 102)
(1-wire or 2- - Tightening torque Nm 0.8 to 1.2 (7 to 10.3 lb.in)
wire connection (lb.in)
possible) • Solid and stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5), 2 x (0.5 to 1.5),
2 x (0.75 to 2.5) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5), 2 x (0.5 to 1.5),
(DIN 46228 Part 1) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)
• Solid or stranded, AWG cables AWG 2 x (20 to 16), 2 x (20 to 16),
2 x (18 to 14) 2 x (18 to 14)
(1-wire or 2- • Solid and stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 to 4) 2 x (0.5 to 2.5)
wire connection
• Finely stranded without end mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)
possible)
sleeve
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)
(DIN 46228 Part 1)
• Solid or stranded, AWG cables AWG 2 x (20 to 12) 2 x (20 to 14)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 621
6.10 Technical data
Type 3RA2.1 3RA2.2

Size S00 S0
Number of poles 3 3
Conductor cross-sections - auxiliary circuit (size S00 and S0 contactors)
• Operating tool mm ∅5…6 ∅5…6
• Tightening torque Nm 0.8 to 1.2 (7 to 10.3 lb.in) 2 to 2.5 (18 to 22 lb.in.)
(lb.in)
• Usable ring cable lugs mm d2 = min. 3.2 d2 = min. 4.3
mm d3 = max. 7.5 d3 = max. 12.2
sleeve
sleeve

1)
insulation for the ring cable lugs 1).
• UL 224 approved
• Flame-protected
SIRIUS Innovations
622 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Note
3RA2 fuseless load feeders – Size S00 for DIN rail

Figure 6-9 S00 direct-on-line starter, AC/DC, screw-type connection system

3RA2110-..A

Figure 6-10 S00 direct-on-line starter, AC/DC, spring-loaded connection system

3RA2110-..E
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 623

Figure 6-11 S00 direct-on-line starter, AC/DC, hybrid connection system, link
module 3RA2911-2FA00
Note
The version of the fuseless load feeder (S00 direct-on-line starter, AC/DC) with hybrid
connection system is not available as a 3RA2 pre-assembled combination.

Figure 6-12 S00 reversing starter, AC/DC, screw-type connection system

3RA2210-..A
SIRIUS Innovations
624 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01

Figure 6-13 S00 reversing starter, AC/DC, spring-loaded connection system

3RA2210-..E
3RA2 fuseless load feeders – Size S0 for DIN rail

Figure 6-14 S0 direct-on-line starter, AC, screw-type connection system

3RA2120-..A
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 625

Figure 6-15 S0 direct-on-line starter, DC, screw-type connection system

3RA2120-..A

Figure 6-16 S0 direct-on-line starter, AC, spring-loaded connection system

3RA2120-..E
SIRIUS Innovations
626 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01

Figure 6-17 S0 direct-on-line starter, DC, spring-loaded connection system

3RA2120-..E

Figure 6-18 S0 direct-on-line starter, AC, hybrid connection system, link module 3RA2921-2FA00
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 627

Figure 6-19 S0 direct-on-line starter, DC, hybrid connection system, link module 3RA2921-2FA00
Note
The versions of the fuseless load feeder (S0 direct-on-line starter, AC and DC) with hybrid
connection system are not available as 3RA2 pre-assembled combinations.

Figure 6-20 S0/S0 and S00/S0 reversing starters, AC, screw-type connection system
3RA2220-..B..-0AP0
SIRIUS Innovations
628 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01

Figure 6-21 S0 reversing starter, AC with spring-loaded connection system

3RA2220-..F..-0AP0

Figure 6-22 S0/S0 and S00/S0 reversing starters, DC, screw-type connection system
3RA2220-..B..-0BB4
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 629

Figure 6-23 S0 reversing starter, DC, spring-loaded connection system

3RA2220-..F..-0BB4
3RA2 fuseless load feeders – Size S00 for 60 mm busbar systems

Figure 6-24 S00 direct-on-line starter, AC/DC, screw-type connection system

3RA2110-..D
SIRIUS Innovations
630 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01

Figure 6-25 S00 reversing starter, AC/DC, screw-type connection system

3RA2210-..D

Figure 6-26 S00 direct-on-line starter, AC/DC, spring-loaded connection system

3RA2110-..H
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 631

Figure 6-27 S00 reversing starter, AC/DC, spring-loaded connection system

3RA2210-..H
3RA2 fuseless load feeders – Size S0 for 60 mm busbar systems

Figure 6-28 S0/S0 and S00/S0 direct-on-line starters, AC, screw-type connection system
3RA2120-..D..-0AP0
SIRIUS Innovations
632 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01

Figure 6-29 S0/S0 and S00/S0 reversing starters, AC, screw-type connection system
3RA2220-..D..-0AP0

Figure 6-30 S0 direct-on-line starter, AC, spring-loaded connection system

3RA2120-..H..-0AP0
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 633

Figure 6-31 S0 reversing starter, AC, spring-loaded connection system

3RA2220-..H..-0AP0

Figure 6-32 S0/S0 and S0/S00 direct-on-line starters, DC, screw-type connection system
3RA2120-..D..-0BB4
SIRIUS Innovations
634 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01

Figure 6-33 S0/S0 and S00/S0 reversing starters, DC, screw-type connection system
3RA2220-..D..-0BB4

Figure 6-34 S0 direct-on-line starter, DC, spring-loaded connection system

3RA2120-..H..-0BB4
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 635

Figure 6-35 S0 reversing starter, DC, spring-loaded connection system

3RA2220-..H..-0BB4
SIRIUS Innovations
636 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 637
3RA2 load feeders

3RA2110-....
$ / / / 12
)
4
,! ,! ,!
4
$ 7 7 7 12
Figure 6-37 Fuseless load feeder, direct-on-line starter, S00
3RA2120-....
/ / /
)
4
,! ,! ,!
4
$ 7 7 7
Figure 6-38 Fuseless load feeder, direct-on-line starter, S0
3RA2210-....
/ / /
)
4
,! ,! ,!

$ $
4
4
$ $
7 7 7 1& $ 1&
Figure 6-39 Fuseless load feeder, reversing starter, S00
SIRIUS Innovations
638 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
3RA2220-....
/ / /
)
4
,! ,! ,!

$ $
4
4
$ $
7 7 7 1& $ 1&
Figure 6-40 Fuseless load feeder, reversing starter, S0
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 639
SIRIUS Innovations
640 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on
3RT2 contactors 7
7.1 Standards
Applicable regulations, standards, and approvals

The following general regulations and standards apply for the 3RA28 timing relay:
General regulations Explanation

IEC 61812-1/DIN VDE 0435 Part 2021 Electrical relays, timing relays
IEC 61000-6-2/IEC 61000-6-4 Electromagnetic compatibility
IEC 60947-5-1; DIN VDE 0660 Part 200 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
IEC 60721-3-1 / -3 Environmental conditions
IEC 60529 Degree of protection
CE/UL/CSA/CCC/C-Tick/shipbuilding approval The timing relays have UL and CSA approval for
use all over the world. They have also been
prototype-tested by the GL, LRS, and DM
shipbuilding companies.
Approvals/Test reports
Confirmation of approvals, along with test certificates and declarations of conformity, can be
obtained on the Internet from Technical Assistance (www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-
assistance).
Reference
important standards relating to the SIRIUS modular system in the chapter titled System
overview, underStandards (Page 23).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 641
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
Applications
Function modules are used to perform various control jobs on automatic production lines and
for processing machines. They are suited to all time-delayed switching operations in control,
starting, protection, and regulation circuits, and ensure a high degree of repeat accuracy for
delay times, once they have been set.
Function modules are divided into those with a communication connection and those without
a communication connection.
Function modules
3RA28 function modules Solid-state timing relays with semiconductor
output
Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switches
Function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start
3RA27 function modules with communication Function modules for AS-Interface
connection Function modules for IO-Link
This chapter describes 3RA28 function modules without a communication connection. You
will find information about function modules with a communication connection in the
corresponding manuals (see Reference).
Function
Function modules are used to delay switching functions.
System integration
The 3RA28 function modules have been matched to the contactors in the 3RT2 and 3RH2
series both electrically and mechanically and can be integrated in the feeders by directly
mounting them on contactors. The function modules can be used for size S00/S0 contactors.
The 3RA27 function modules can only be used for communication-capable contactors.
Connection system
Users can choose either function modules with screw-type connection system or function
modules with spring-loaded connection system.
Reference
About 3RA27 function modules for AS-Interface Manual "Function Modules for AS-Interface"
/en/39318922) (3ZX1012-0RA27-0AC0)
About 3RA27 function modules for IO-Link Manual "Function Modules for IO-Link"
/en/39319600) (3ZX1012-0RA27-1AC1)
About function modules for reversing starting The chapter titled SIRIUS 3RT2
contactors/contactor assemblies (Page 110)
SIRIUS Innovations
642 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Device versions
● Function modules for direct-on-line start
– Solid-state timing relays with semiconductor output
– Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switches
● Function modules for star-delta (wye-delta) start
● Function modules for reversing starting, see 3RA23 reversing contactor assemblies in the
chapter titled Contactors (Page 110)
Characteristics
The table below provides an overview of the versions of 3RA28 function modules for
mounting on 3RT2 and 3RH2 contactors.
Feature Versions
Function modules for direct-on-line start Function module for
star-delta (wye-delta) start
Solid-state timing relay with Solid-state time-delay auxiliary
semiconductor output switch
Function ON-delay and OFF-delay with ON-delay and OFF-delay Star-delta (wye-delta) function
auxiliary voltage with/without auxiliary voltage
Order 3RA2811-.CW10/ 3RA2813-..W10/ 3RA2816-0EW20 comprising:
numbers 3RA2812-.DW10 3RA2814-..W10/ 1 basic module (3RA2912-0)
3RA2815-..W10 2 coupling modules (3RA2911-0)
Size One module for contactor sizes S00 and S0
Width 45 mm 135 mm (3 x 45 mm)
Connection Screw-type, spring-loaded Without terminals (can be used for
system contactor screw-type and spring-
loaded connection systems)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 643
3RA28 version overview
MLFB Function Output

Screw connection
3RA2811-1CW10 ON-delay, two-wire Thyristor
3RA2812-1DW10 OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage PowerMOS
3RA2813-1AW10 ON-delay 1 CO contact
3RA2813-1FW10 ON-delay 1 NO contact
1 NC contact
3RA2814-1AW10 OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage 1 CO contact
3RA2814-1FW10 OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage 1 NO contact
1 NC contact
3RA2815-1AW10 OFF-delay without auxiliary voltage 1 CO contact
3RA2815-1FW10 OFF-delay without auxiliary voltage 1 NO contact
1 NC contact
Spring-loaded connection
3RA2811-2CW10 ON-delay, two-wire Thyristor
3RA2812-2DW10 OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage PowerMos
3RA2813-2AW10 ON-delay 1 CO contact
3RA2813-2FW10 ON-delay 1 NO contact
1 NC contact
3RA2814-2AW10 OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage 1 CO contact
3RA2814-2FW10 OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage 1 NO contact
1 NC contact
3RA2815-2AW10 OFF-delay without auxiliary voltage 1 CO contact
3RA2815-2FW10 OFF-delay without auxiliary voltage 1 NO contact
1 NC contact
Plug-in, without terminals
3RA2816-0EW20 Star-delta (wye-delta) function module 2 NO contacts
(internal)
3RA2912-0 Star-delta (wye-delta) basic module —
3RA2911-0 Star-delta (wye-delta) coupling module 1 NO contact
(internal)
3RA2910-0 Sealable cover cap —
The 8th digit of the MLFB designates the terminal type:
0: No terminals
1: Screw-type terminals
2: Spring-loaded terminals
SIRIUS Innovations
644 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Features
The function modules have the following features:
Function module Features

Function modules Solid-state timing relays • ON-delay (1 NO contact)
for direct-on-line with semiconductor • OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage (1 NO contact)
start output • Versions with screw-type and spring-loaded connection systems
Solid-state time-delay • ON-delay (1 NO contact + 1 NC contact or 1 CO contact)
auxiliary switches • OFF-delay with/without auxiliary voltage (1 NO contact + 1 NC contact
or 1 CO contact)
• Versions with screw-type and spring-loaded connection systems
Function modules Star-delta (wye-delta) • Control exclusively via contactor A1/A2 – no further control circuit
for star-delta (wye- start wiring required
delta) start • No control circuit wiring (plug-in system and connecting cables)
• Interchange proof construction
• Timing function for switching over from star to delta in basic module
• Electrical interlock without additional wiring
• Changeover delay time set to a non-adjustable value of 50 ms
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 645
7.2.3 Applications
7.2.3.1 Function modules for direct-on-line start
Applications
The function modules for direct-on-line start are used for the time-delayed switching of
contactors. The following different function modules are available:
● Solid-state timing relay with semiconductor output
● Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch with 1 CO contactor or 1 NC contact/1 NO contact
Features of direct-on-line starters

The function module for direct-on-line start has the following features:
● All modules with wide control voltage range
● Integrated varistor (surge suppressor)
● One module for both sizes S00 and S0
● Wide voltage range (24 to 240 V AC/DC)
● 3 selectable time ranges (1 s, 10 s, 100 s)
● Operating time adjustment from 5 to 100% per time range
● Switch position indicator for the contactor below (plunger)
Reference

About application areas The chapter titled Configuration (Page 656)
SIRIUS Innovations
646 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
7.2.3.2 Function modules for star-delta (wye-delta) start
Applications
The function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start is used to switch from star (wye) to delta
operation.
Features
The function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start has the following features:
● All modules with wide control voltage range
● Integrated varistor (surge suppressor)
● One module kit for contactor screw-type and spring-loaded connection systems
● One module kit for both S00 and S0 size contactors (options only with main circuit
connecting comb)
● Wide voltage range (24 to 240 V AC/DC) and
● 3 selectable time ranges (10 s, 30 s, 60 s)
● Operating time adjustment from 5 to 100% per time range (corresponds to 0.5 s to 60 s)
● Changeover delay set to a non-adjustable value of 50 ms
● Switch position indication for the contactor below in the form of a mechanical switch
position indicator (plunger)
● Control exclusively via A1/A2 on the line contactor below
● No further wiring required
The wide voltage and the wide time range ensure advanced use of the function modules.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 647
3RA2816-0EW20 function module for contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start
The function module for plugging into contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start for
size S00 and S0 comprises the following devices:
● 1 basic module with time setting
● 2 coupling modules with corresponding connecting cable to coupling or function module
Figure 7-1 Star-delta (wye-delta) starter, completely assembled
The function module replaces the entire control circuit wiring and combines the functions of
the following devices and tasks:
● Timing relay star-delta (wye-delta) function
● Auxiliary switches
● Auxiliary conductor wiring
● Electrical interlock
● Switch position indicator for the contactor below (plunger)
SIRIUS Innovations
648 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
7.2.4 3RA28 function modules
Function module for direct-on-line start (solid-state timing relays with semiconductor output/solid-state
time-delay auxiliary switches)
1 Timing relay attachment

2 Time range selector switch: Sets the time base (1 s, 10 s, 100 s)
3 Operating time adjustment switch: Sets the relative time (5 to 100%)
4 Mechanical plunger: Indicates the switching state of the contactor
5 Screw-type/spring-loaded The terminals are available as both screw-type and
connections: spring-loaded connections.
Figure 7-2 Solid-state timing relay with semiconductor output/solid-state time-delay auxiliary
switches

The function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start comprises a basic module with integrated
control logic and two coupling modules of the same type.

1 Basic module with integrated control logic

2 Coupling module
3 Coil control: Basic module: Voltage measurement at the line contactor
Coupling module: Controls the contactor below
4 Ribbon cable: Electrical connection of modules
5 Slot for connecting cable: Routes the supply voltage and electrical interlock
6 Time range selector switch: Sets the time base (10 s, 30 s, 60 s)
7 Operating time adjustment switch: Sets the relative time (5 to 100%)
8 Mechanical plunger: Indicates the switching state of the contactor
Figure 7-3 Basic module and coupling modules for the contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta)
start
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 649
7.3.1 Product combinations
Product combinations
The 3RA28 function modules are dimensioned for 24 to 240 V AC/DC contactors (0.85 to
1.1 Us), size S00 and S0. You can mount the function modules on the front of SIRIUS
3RT2/3RH2 contactors or 3RA24 contactor assemblies.
3RA24 pre-wired assemblies are available for star-delta (wye-delta) start.
Reference

About the possible combinations of standard The chapter titled System overview (Page 19)
products from the SIRIUS modular system
About the pre-wired contactor assembly for star- The chapter titled SIRIUS 3RT2
delta (wye-delta) start contactors/contactor assemblies (Page 101)
SIRIUS Innovations
650 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
7.4 Functions
7.4 Functions
7.4.1 Overvoltage protection

All function modules feature an integrated varistor which attenuates the contactor coil below.
7.4.2 Time-delayed switching of contactors

Solid-state timing relays with semiconductor output (3RA2811-.CW10 / 3RA2812-.DW10) or
solid-state time-delay auxiliary switches (3RA2813-...W10 / 3RA2814-...W10 / 3RA2815-
...W10) are used for the time-delayed switching of contactors. The wide voltage range and
the selectable time ranges ensure the advanced use of the function modules.
7.4.2.1 Response delay
Contacts
Function modules are available with the following contacts:
3RA2811-.CW10: 1 semiconductor output (NO contact)

3RA2813-.AW10: 1 CO contact
3RA2813-.FW10: 1 NC contact and 1 NO contact
Time ranges
The function modules support time-delayed switching from 0.05 to 100 s.
NOTICE
Rated operational current, residual current in the case of non-switched output and voltage
drop in the case of switched output need to be taken into account.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 651
7.4 Functions
Function charts
3RA2811-.CW10 3RA28
A3/A2
Q
3RA2813-.AW10 A1/A2
15/18
15/16
t
3RA2813-.FW10 A1/A2
27/28
35/36
t
Method of operation
The set operating time t starts when the solid-state timing relay (3RA2811) with
semiconductor output is connected to the supply voltage via A3 (timing relay) and A2
(contactor). Once the time has elapsed, the semiconductor switches through and controls
the contactor below.
The supply voltage is connected to the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch (3RA2813) via
A1/A2 (contactor). The set operating time t starts when the supply voltage is connected. The
output relay switches once the time has elapsed.
SIRIUS Innovations
652 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
7.4 Functions
7.4.2.2 OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage
Contacts
3RA2812-.DW10: 1 semiconductor output (NO contact)

Time ranges
Function charts
3RA2812-.DW10 A3/A4
≥35 ms
B1/A4
Q
t
3RA2814-.AW10 A3/A2
B1/A2
≥ 35 ms
15/18
15/16
t
3RA2814-.FW10 A3/A2
B1/A2
≥ 35 ms
27/28
35/36
t
Method of operation
On the solid-state timing relay (3RA2812), the supply voltage is connected via terminals
A3/A4. If the control voltage is connected to start contact B1, the semiconductor will switch
through and control the contactor below. The operating time t starts when the start contact is
disconnected. The minimum ON duration of 35 ms must be observed.
The supply voltage is connected to the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch (3RA2814) via
terminals A3 and A2 (contactor). The output relay switches when the control voltage is
connected to the start contact B1. The operating time t starts when the start contact is
disconnected. The minimum ON duration of 35 ms must be observed.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 653
7.4 Functions
7.4.2.3 OFF-delay without auxiliary voltage
Contacts
Time ranges
Function charts
3RA2815-.AW10 ≥200 ms
A1/A2
15/18
15/16
t
3RA2815-.FW10 ≥200 ms
A1/A2
27/28
35/36
t
Method of operation
When the voltage is connected to A1/A2 (contactor), the solid-state time-delay auxiliary
switch (3RA2815) switches the output relay. The operating time t starts when the voltage is
disconnected. The relay switches back to the idle state at the end of the operating time t.
There is an assurance that if the minimum ON duration is not observed either the time lapse
will not start or, if the time lapse has started, it will always be completed in an orderly
fashion. Users can rely on intermediate states of the functional sequence, such as "no relay
dropout", being detected. The minimum ON duration of 200 ms must be observed.
SIRIUS Innovations
654 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
7.4 Functions
7.4.2.4 Star-delta (wye-delta) function
Contacts
The function module (comprising basic module with integrated control logic and 2 coupling
modules) has 2 internal NO contacts.
Time ranges
The start time in star operation can be set between 0.5 and 60 s. The changeover delay is
set to a non-adjustable value of 50 ms.
Function chart
3RA2816-0EW20
4
<4
˂4
VV PV
Method of operation
The function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start is responsible for the electrical interlock
and the timing relay function (dead interval from star (wye) operation to delta operation).
Control is exclusively via A1/A2 on the line contactor below. Additional wiring is therefore not
required. The supply voltage is routed via a ribbon cable, eliminating the need for control
circuit wiring.
The instantaneous star contact and the time-delayed delta contact share the same contact
root.
To avoid inter-phase short circuits, the changeover delay from star (wye) to delta is 50 ms.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 655
7.5 Configuration
7.5 Configuration
7.5.1 Configuration
3RA2811-.CW10
/ 3RA28
$ $ A3/A2
5$ 4 Q
$
t
1
The 3RA2811 solid-state timing relay with semiconductor output is connected to the
contactor coil in series.
Note
Contactor coil terminal A1 must not be connected.
3RA2812-.DW10
/ A3/A4
6 ≥35 ms
$ % $
B1/A4
5$ 4
$ $
Q
1
t
If the 3RA2812 solid-state timing relay with semiconductor output is fitted, the contactor coil
is contacted through the timing relay.
Note
Contactor coil terminals A1 and A2 must not be connected.
SIRIUS Innovations
656 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
7.5 Configuration
3RA2813
L1(+) A1/A2
S1
A1
15/18
15 15/16
Q t
16 18
A2
N(-)
L1(+) A1/A2
S1
A1
27/28
27 35 35/36
Q t
28 36
A2
N(-)
The 3RA2813 solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch has the following features:
● The voltage is supplied through the plug-in contacts directly via the contactor's coil
terminals, parallel to A1/A2.
● The timing function is activated by switching on the contactor on which the delayed
auxiliary switch is mounted.
● A varistor is integrated in the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch to attenuate contactor
coil switching overvoltages.
3RA2814
L1(+) A3/A2
S1
A3 B1/A2
A1 = B1
15
≥ 35 ms
Q 15/18
16 18 15/16
A2
N(-) t
L1(+) A3/A2
S1 B1/A2
A1 = B1 A3
27 35
≥ 35 ms
Q 27/28
28 36 35/36
A2
N(-) t
● Voltage is supplied directly through plug-in contact A2 through the contactor's coil
terminals and terminal A3 on the timing relay.
auxiliary switch is mounted, via A1 on the contactor coil.
● The 3RA2814 works with auxiliary voltage.
● The minimum ON duration at the start contact is 35 ms.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 657
7.5 Configuration
3RA2815-..W10
L1(+) ≥200 ms
S1
A1 A1/A2
15
15/18
Q 15/16
16 18 t
A2
N(-)
L1(+) ≥200 ms
S1
A1 A1/A2
27 35
27/28
Q 35/36
28 36 t
A2
N(-)
auxiliary switch is mounted.
● The 3RA2815 solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch works without auxiliary voltage.
● The minimum ON duration is 200 ms.
Note
The setting of the output contacts is not defined in as-supplied state (bistable relay).
Connect the control voltage and then disconnect it again to set the contacts to the normal
position.
SIRIUS Innovations
658 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
7.5 Configuration
3RA2816-0EW20
$&+]'&9

//
) 5$ 5$ 5$

) 7LPH

s %

4 4 4

$
1/ $
4
<4
˂4
VV PV
The 3RA2816 function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start has the following features:
● The start time in star operation is activated by switching on the contactor.
● The changeover delay is 50 ms (this is a non-adjustable value).
● A varistor is integrated in the basic module to attenuate contactor coil switching
overvoltages.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 659
7.6 Mounting
7.6 Mounting
7.6.1 Mounting instructions
Solid-state timing relays with semiconductor output/solid-state time-delay auxiliary switches
Note
For the "OFF-delay without auxiliary voltage" function
The setting of the output contact is not defined in as-supplied state (bistable relay). Connect
the control voltage and then disconnect it again to set the contact to the normal position.
Note
The solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch cannot be attached to coupling relays.
7.6.2 Minimum clearances and mounting position
Minimum clearances and mounting position

The minimum clearances and the mounting position are set dependent upon the type of
mounting.
See Mounting position in the chapter titled Contactors/Contactor assemblies (Page 147).
7.6.3 Mounting
output/solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch)
DANGER
Hazardous voltage
Can Cause Death, Serious Injury or Property Damage
Before starting work, therefore, disconnect the system and devices from the power supply.
The function modules for direct-on-line start (solid-state timing relay with semiconductor
output/solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch) are connected to the front of the contactors.
SIRIUS Innovations
660 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
7.6 Mounting

1 Check that the interlock slide is

engaged in the uppermost position.
2 Attach the function module to the

contactor from the front.
3 Push the interlock slide down with a

screwdriver (3 mm blade width) until it
engages.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 661
7.6 Mounting
7.6.3.2 Function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start
DANGER
Hazardous voltage
Prerequisite for mounting the function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start
Note
To mount the timing relay for star-delta (wye-delta) start you need to disassemble the link
modules (which will vary depending on the connection system) used to connect the control
current paths of the pre-wired contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start.
Figure 7-4 Removal of the wiring modules for connecting the control current paths
(shown using the example of a contactor reversing assembly with screw-type
connections of size S0)
SIRIUS Innovations
662 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
7.6 Mounting
Mounting the function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start

1 Check that the interlock slide is
engaged in the uppermost position.
2 Release the cover cap on the interface

connection.
3 Remove the cover cap for the interface
connection from the connector by lifting
it up and out.
4 Attach the basic module/coupling

module to the contactor from the front.
To do this, insert the contacts into the
openings on the contactor.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 663
7.6 Mounting

5 Push the interlock slide down with a
screwdriver until it engages.
6 Insert the coded module connector into

the slot in the correct position from
above until the module connector
engages in the locking mechanism.

7 To complete the process, lock the
module connector.

SIRIUS Innovations
664 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
7.6 Mounting
7.6.4 Disassembly
output/solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch)
DANGER
Hazardous voltage

1 Push the interlock slide up with a
screwdriver.
2 Pull the function module toward

you and away from the
contactor.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 665
7.6 Mounting
7.6.4.2 Function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start
DANGER
Hazardous voltage

1 Remove the locking mechanisms.
2 Remove the module connecter from
the connector by lifting it up and out.

3 Push the interlock slide up with a

screwdriver.
SIRIUS Innovations
666 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
7.6 Mounting

4 Pull the basic module and the two
coupling modules toward you and
away from the contactors.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 667
7.6 Mounting
7.6.5 Replacing the removable terminal
DANGER
Hazardous voltage

1 Press the interlock.

2 Remove the terminal.
3 Attach the new terminal and press the

terminal into the device until the interlock
audibly engages.
SIRIUS Innovations
668 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
7.7 Connection
7.7 Connection
7.7.1 Connecting the function modules for direct-on-line start
7.7.1.1 Connecting the solid-state timing relay with semiconductor output
Connection types
The solid-state timing relay with semiconductor output is connected via removable terminals
with the following connection options:
● Screw-type
● Spring-loaded
Connection
The Connection systems (Page 74) section of the chapter titled System overview describes
how the screw-type/spring-loaded connections are made.
Note
During the mounting process, the solid-state timing relay is connected to coil terminals A1
and A2 at the same time (by means of plug-in contacts). Contactor coil terminals which are
not required are not covered by the timing relay enclosure.
Avoid incorrect connection.
NOTICE
The 3RA2811 timing relay with ON-delay is connected to the contactor coil in series.
Contactor coil terminal A1 must not be connected.
Designation Terminal Circuit diagram

3RA2811-.CW10 A3 (+) /
ON-delay
$ $
5$ 4
$
1
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 669
7.7 Connection
NOTICE
If the 3RA2812 timing relay with OFF-delay is fitted, the contactor coil is contacted through
the timing relay.
Contactor coil terminals A1 and A2 must not be connected.

3RA2812-.DW10 B1 (+) /
OFF-delay with A4 (-) 6
auxiliary voltage A3 (+)
$ % $
5$ 4
$ $
1
Reference

About conductor cross-sections Conductor cross-sections (Page 79)
SIRIUS Innovations
670 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
7.7 Connection
7.7.1.2 Connecting the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch
Connection types
The solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch is connected via removable terminals with the
following connection options:
● Screw-type
● Spring-loaded
Connection
The Connection systems (Page 74) section of the chapter titled System overview describes
how the screw-type/spring-loaded connections are made.

3RA2813-.AW10 18 NO L1(+)
ON-delay, 1 CO 15 NC S1
contact 16 NC A1
15
Q
16 18
A2
N(-)
3RA2813-.FW10 27 NO L1(+)
ON-delay, 1 NC 28 NO S1
contact/1 NO contact 35 NC A1
27 35
36 NC
Q
28 36
A2
N(-)
3RA2814-.AW10 18 NO L1(+)
OFF-delay, 1 CO 15 NC S1
A3
contact 16 NC A1 = B1
15
A3 (+)
Q
16 18
A2
N(-)
3RA2814-.FW10 27 NO L1(+)
OFF-delay with 28 NO S1
A3
auxiliary voltage, 1 NC 35 NC A1 = B1
27 35
contact/1 NO contact 36 NC
A3 (+)
Q
28 36
A2
N(-)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 671
7.7 Connection

3RA2815-.AW10 18 NO L1(+)
OFF-delay without 15 NC S1
auxiliary voltage, 1 CO 16 NC A1
15
contact
Q
16 18
A2
N(-)
3RA2815-.FW10 27 NO L1(+)
OFF-delay without 28 NO S1
auxiliary voltage, 1 NC 35 NC A1
27 35
contact/1 NO contact 36 NC
Q
28 36
A2
N(-)
Reference

About conductor cross-sections Conductor cross-sections (Page 79)
7.7.2 Connecting the function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start
Control
Control is exclusively via terminals A1 and A2 on the line contactor; no further control circuit
wiring is required.

3RA2816-0EW20 —
a+]'&9 7LPH
//
) s
%
)

5$ 5$ 5$
4 4 4

$
1/ $
SIRIUS Innovations
672 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
7.8 Operation
7.8 Operation
7.8.1 Setting the times
Setting options for function modules

On function modules for direct-on-line start (solid-state timing relays with semiconductor
output/solid-state time-delay auxiliary switches), use the time range selector switch to set the
time base to 1 s, 10 s or 100 s. Use the operating time adjustment switch to set the relative
time between 5 and 100%
(to support operating times between 0.05 s and 100 s).
On the function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start, you can preset the dead interval from
star to delta operation to10 s, 30 s or 60 s and the operating time to between 0.5 s and 60 s
(using the adjustment switch). The changeover delay from star (wye) to delta operation is set
to a non-adjustable value of 50 ms.
1 Time range selector switch (1 s, 10 s, 100 s or 10 s, 30 s, 60 s)

2 Operating time adjustment switch (5 to 100%)
Example time setting

Time base on time range selector switch = 100 s, relative time on operating time adjustment
switch = 50%:
This results in an operating time of 50 s.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 673
7.9 Accessories
7.9 Accessories
7.9.1 Sealable cover cap
Description
Sealable covers are transparent molded-plastic caps with a break-off clip (preset breaking
point).
You can use a sealable cover cap to protect 3RA27 and 3RA28 function modules against
unauthorized operation.
Mounting the sealable cover cap

1 Break off the clip on the sealable cover cap
(preset breaking point).
2 Insert the clip into the opening on the
function module, until it engages.
3 Insert the sealable cover cap into the
openings on the function module.
4 Seal the clip to secure it against
unauthorized removal.

SIRIUS Innovations
674 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
7.10 Technical data
7.10 Technical data
Function modules for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
Type 3RA2811 3RA2812 3RA2813 3RA2814 3RA2815 3RA2816

Solid-state timing Solid-state time-delay Star-delta (wye-delta)
relay with auxiliary switches module kit
semiconductor output
Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 300
Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category III
Rated impulse withstand voltage
Operating range of excitation 0.85 to 1.1x Us
0.95 to 1.05 times the rated frequency
Rated power W 1 1
Power input at 230 V AC, 50 Hz VA 1 2
• AC-140 at 24 to 240 V, 50 Hz A 0.4 —
• DC-13 at 24 to 240 V A 0.4 —
• AC-15 at 24 to 250 V, 50 Hz A — 3
• DC-13 at 24 V A — 1
• DC-13 at 125 V A — 0.2
• DC-13 at 250 V A — 0.1
DIAZED fuse operating class gG A — 4
Switching frequency under load
• With Ie AC 230 V h-1 2500 —
• With 3RT2 contactor; 230 V AC h-1 2500 —
Recovery time ms 50 150
Minimum ON duration ms — 35 — 35 200 —
Residual current max. mA 5 —
Voltage drop when switched- max. V 3.5 —
through
Short-time loading capacity up to A 10 —
10< ms
Setting accuracy typ. % ±10
in relation to full-scale value
Repeat accuracy max. % ±1
Mechanical durability (operating cycles) 100 x 10 6 10 x 10 6
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 675
7.10 Technical data

• Operation °C -25 to +60
• Storage °C -40 to +80
Degree of protection to DIN EN 60947--1, Annex C IP20
Permissible mounting position Any
Shock resistance with half-sine acc. to g/ms 15 / 11
IEC 60068-2-27
Vibration resistance (IEC 60068-2-6) Hz/mm 10-55 / 0.35
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) acc. to IEC 61000-6-2/IEC 61000-6-4/IEC 61812-1
Overvoltage protection Varistor, integrated
Table 7- 1 Conductor cross-sections with screw-type connection system
Type 3RA2811, 3RA2812, 3RA2813, 3RA2814, 3RA2815

Solid mm² 1 x (0.5 to 4)/2 x (0.5 to 2.5)
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 1 x (0.5 to 2.5)/2 x (0.5 to 1.5)
AWG cable, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 to 14)
Connection screw M3 (for standard screwdriver size 2 and Pozidrive 2)
Tightening torque Nm 0.8...1.2
Table 7- 2 Conductor cross-sections for spring-loaded connection system
Type 3RA2811, 3RA2812, 3RA2813, 3RA2814, 3RA2815

Solid mm² 2 x (0.25 to 1.5)
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm² 2 x (0.25 to 1.5)
AWG cable, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (0.25 to 1.5)
SIRIUS Innovations
676 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
7.11 Dimension drawings
Note
7.11.1 Solid-state timing relays with semiconductor output and solid-state time-delay
auxiliary switches
D H F

G
E

① Timing relay (mounted)

② Contactor
Figure 7-5 Solid-state timing relay with spring-loaded terminal
MLFB a b c d e
3RT2.1.-2 45 70 142 35 5
3RT2.2.-2 (AC) 45 101.5 166 51 5
3RT2.2.-2 (DC) 45 101.5 176 51 5
D H F

G
E

① Timing relay (mounted)

② Contactor
Figure 7-6 Solid-state timing relay with screw connection
MLFB a b c d e
3RT2.1.-1 45 57.5 142 28 5
3RT2.2.-1 (AC) 45 85 166 41 5
3RT2.2.-1 (DC) 45 85 176 41 5
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 677
7.11.2 Star-delta (wye-delta) modules

D H F

G
E

① Star-delta (wye-delta) function module (mounted)

② Contactor
③ Coupling modules
④ Basic module
Figure 7-7 Star-delta (wye-delta) function module with spring-loaded terminal
MLFB a b c d e
3RT2.1.-2 135 84 142 43 5
3RT2.2.-2 (AC) 135 114 166 59 5
3RT2.2.-2 (DC) 135 114 176 59 5
D H F

G
E

① Star-delta (wye-delta) function module (mounted)

② Contactor
③ Coupling modules
④ Basic module
Figure 7-8 Star-delta (wye-delta) function module with screw connection
MLFB a b c d e
3RT2.1.-1 135 68 142 36 5
3RT2.2.-1 (AC) 135 101 166 53 5
3RT2.2.-1 (DC) 135 101 176 53 5
SIRIUS Innovations
678 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 679
7.12.1 Internal circuit diagrams
3RA28 function modules
3RA2811-.CW10
$
$
$
ON-delay, semiconductor output
3RA2812-.DW10
$ %
$
$
$
OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage, semiconductor output
3RA2813-.AW10 3RA2813-.FW10
$ $
$ $
ON-delay, 1 CO contact ON-delay, 1 NC contact, 1 NO contact
3RA2814-.AW10 3RA2814-.FW10
% %
$ $
OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage, 1 CO OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage, 1 NC

contact contact, 1 NO contact
3RA2815-.AW10 3RA2815-.FW10
$ $
$ $
OFF-delay without auxiliary voltage, 1 CO OFF-delay without auxiliary voltage, 1 NC

contact contact, 1 NO contact
SIRIUS Innovations
680 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
7.12.2 Example circuit diagrams

Momentary-contact circuit
a+]'&9

//
) 7LPH

) s
%

6
5$ 5$ 5$

6 4 4 4

$
1/ $
Figure 7-10 Function module (3RA28), momentary-contact circuit
Maintained-contact circuit
a+]'&9 7LPH

//
) s
%
)

5$ 5$ 5$
4 4 4

$
1/ $
Figure 7-11 Function module (3RA28), maintained-contact circuit
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 681
Main circuit
/ a+]9
/
/
4
,!! ,!! ,!!
4 4 4

)
8 9 :
0
a
0
a
Figure 7-12 Circuit diagram, main circuit
SIRIUS Innovations
682 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays 8
8.1 Standards
8.1.1 Standards
3RR21 analog setting current monitoring relays and 3RR22 digital setting current monitoring
relays meet the requirements of the following standards:
Table 8- 1 Standards
Device standards • IEC/EN 60947-5-1

• IEC/EN 60947-4-1
EMC standard 3RR21/22 current monitoring relays also meet the requirements of EMC
standards.
Resistance to 3RR21/22 current monitoring relays are climate-proof according to IEC 60721-
extreme climates 3.
Touch protection 3RR21/22 current monitoring relays are safe to touch according to
DIN VDE 0106 Part 100. Terminal covers may have to be fitted onto the
connecting bars, depending on the assignment to other devices.
Reference
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 683
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays
8.2.1 Introduction
Overview
SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays are suitable for current monitoring of motors or other
loads. They are capable of two- or three-phase monitoring of the rms value of AC currents,
checking that the values do not overshoot or undershoot set threshold values.
Whereas apparent current monitoring is primarily used in the rated torque range or for
overload, active current monitoring can be used to observe and evaluate the degree of
loading across a motor's entire torque range.
The 3RR2 current monitoring relays can be integrated directly in the feeder by mounting
them on 3RT2 contactors, thereby eliminating the need for the main circuit to be wired
separately. Separate transformers are not required.
For a stand-alone assembly or if an overload relay is being used at the same time, terminal
supports for stand-alone assembly are available for separate DIN rail mounting.
System integration
The current monitoring relays have been matched to the contactors in the 3RT2 series both
electrically and mechanically and can be integrated in the feeder by means of direct
mounting. This eliminates the need for the main circuit to be wired separately and no
additional transformers are required.
The current monitoring relays are available in two sizes, S00 and S0.
Connection systems
The current monitoring relays are available with the following connection system options:
● Screw-type
● Spring-loaded
Accessories
The accessories have been tailored to the current monitoring relays; they can be mounted
easily and without the need for tools.
SIRIUS Innovations
684 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.2.2 Versions
There are two different device versions:
● Basic version: Analog setting current monitoring relay 3RR214.-.A.30
With two-phase apparent current monitoring, one changeover output, and analog
adjustment, basic version relays provide a high level of monitoring reliability particularly in
the rated and overload ranges.
● Standard version: Digital setting current monitoring relay 3RR224.-.F.30
Standard version relays support three-phase current monitoring with active current
monitoring available for selection as an option. They support further diagnostic options
such as residual current and phase sequence monitoring, and are also be used to
monitor motors even below rated torque. The devices have an additional separate
semiconductor output, an actual-value display, and support digital adjustment.
8.2.3 Applications
The various 3RR2 current monitoring relays are suitable for:
● Monitoring for current overshoots and undershoots
● Monitoring for cable breaks
● Monitoring for no-load operation and load shedding (as might be the case, for example, in
the event of a torn V belt)
● Underload monitoring in the lower performance range (if a pump was running in no-load
operation, for example)
● Monitoring for overload (as might affect pumps with a soiled filter system, for example)
● Monitoring the performance of electrical loads such as heaters
● Monitoring for incorrect phase sequences on mobile equipment such as compressors or
cranes
● Monitoring for high-impedance faults to ground (caused by damaged insulation or
moisture, for example)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 685
8.2.4 The advantages of current monitoring relays

● Can be mounted directly on 3RT2 contactors; in other words, there is no need for
additional wiring in the main circuit
● Ideally matched to the technical properties of 3RT2 contactors
● No need for separate current transformers
● Versions with wide-range power supply
● Can be adjusted to monitor for overshoot or undershoot, or to support range monitoring
● Freely parameterizable delay times and RESET behavior
● Display of actual value and status messages
● All versions have removable control circuit terminals
● All versions have screw terminals or, alternatively, innovative spring-loaded terminals
● Threshold values can be calculated with ease by means of direct reference to actually
measured values under setpoint load
● Range monitoring and selectable active current measurement mean that only one device
is needed to monitor a motor along the entire torque curve
● Other types of monitoring supported in addition to current monitoring include monitoring
for cable breaks, phase failure, phase sequence, residual current, and motor blocking
● An adapter can be used to implement stand-alone assembly, or enable an overload relay
to be integrated in the feeder at the same time
SIRIUS Innovations
686 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.2.5 3RR214.-.A.30 Basic analog setting current monitoring relay

,Ⴃ

,Ⴍ

2 ,
BBB
a

7 7 7 $

In terms of their electrical and mechanical features and their design, these pins are perfectly compatible
with the 3RT2 contactors for the direct mounting of overload relays with screw-type or spring-loaded
terminals. Stand-alone assembly is also an option in conjunction with a stand-alone assembly module
(accessory).
2 Threshold value for current overshoot:
The rotary knob is used to set a threshold value for current overshoot. Setting the button to "OFF"
deactivates this function.
3 Threshold value for current undershoot:
The rotary knob is used to set a threshold value for current undershoot. Setting the button to "OFF"
deactivates this function.
4 Slide switch to select manual/automatic RESET with RESET function:
The slide switch is used to choose between manual and automatic RESET. The device can be reset by
switching between manual and automatic RESET.
The control circuit can be connected using either the screw-type or the spring-loaded connection system.
The main circuit can be connected using either the screw-type or the spring-loaded connection system.
7 Label
8 Device order number
9 ON-delay time "onDel (s)":
The rotary knob is used to set the ON-delay time. Monitoring for current overshoots and undershoots
starts when the relay detects current flow once this time has elapsed. Cable break/phase failure
monitoring is always active.
10 Delay time "Del (s)":
The rotary knob is used to set the delay time. Once this time has elapsed, the output relay will switch to
the fault condition if the current is overshot or undershot. Cable break/phase failure monitoring is active
immediately.
11 Status display via LEDs "Ready" for auxiliary voltage and "Fault" for the switching state
Figure 8-1 Analog current monitoring relay
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 687
8.2.6 3RR224.-.F.30 Standard digital setting current monitoring relay

3RR2241-1FA30


compatible with the 3RT2 contactors for the direct mounting of overload relays with screw-type
or spring-loaded terminals. Stand-alone assembly is also an option in conjunction with a stand-
alone assembly module (accessory).
2 Arrow keys for menu navigation
3 Shift key for menu navigation
4 Legend for menu
The control circuit can be connected using either the screw-type or the spring-loaded
connection system.
The main circuit can be connected using either the screw-type or the spring-loaded connection
system.
7 Label
8 Device order number
9 Display for parameterization, actual-value indication, and diagnostics
Figure 8-2 Digital current monitoring relay
SIRIUS Innovations
688 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01

Typical combinations for fuseless and fused designs have been fully tested and approved.
Reference

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 689
8.4 Functions
8.4 Functions
8.4.1 Functions and parameters
Function
The 3RR2 current monitoring relay is supplied with a 24 V DC/AC or 24 to 240 V DC
auxiliary voltage and monitors the current for overshoots, undershoots or both (range
monitoring) in accordance with the parameters set. In the event of a fault, it trips at the end
of the set delay times.
System protection by means of true rms measurement (tRMS)

SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays are used for load monitoring of motors or other
loads. They are also capable of two- or three-phase monitoring of the true rms value (tRMS)
of AC currents for overshooting and/or undershooting set threshold values.
The 3RR2 current monitoring relay works with an electronic measuring method which
calculates the actual (effective) value of an alternating current, regardless of whether the
current's waveform is purely sinusoidal or distorted.
The current monitoring relay responds immediately even to minor changes in the current
value. It provides a means of ensuring that the processes in the machine are monitored
continuously and protects the system against damage.
Functions and parameters of the 3RR2 current monitoring relays
Table 8- 2 Functions and parameters of the 3RR2 current monitoring relays
Functions/Parameters Basic current monitoring relay Standard current monitoring relay

3RR2141-.A.30 3RR2142-.A.30 3RR2241-.F.30 3RR2242-.F.30
Lower threshold value OFF/1.6 to 16 A OFF/4 to 40 A OFF/1.6 to 16 A OFF/4 to 40 A
(I▼/I!▼)
Upper threshold value 1.6 to 16 A/OFF 4 to 40 A/OFF 1.6 to 16 A/OFF 4 to 40 A/OFF
(I▲/I!▲)
ON-delay time (onDel) 0 to 60 s 0 to 60 s 0 to 99 s 0 to 99 s
Tripping delay time 0 to 30 s 0 to 30 s 0 to 30 s 0 to 30 s
(Del)
Reclosing time (RsDel) - - 0 to 300 min 0 to 300 min
Relay switching Closed-circuit Closed-circuit Closed-circuit Closed-circuit
behavior (NO / NC) principle principle principle/open- principle/open-
circuit principle circuit principle
Reset behavior Automatic/manu Automatic/manual Automatic/manu Automatic/manu
(Mem) al al al
Hysteresis threshold 6.25% x 6.25% x 0.1 to 3.0 A 0.1 to 8.0 A
value (Hyst) threshold value threshold value
SIRIUS Innovations
690 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.4 Functions
Functions/Parameters Basic current monitoring relay Standard current monitoring relay

3RR2141-.A.30 3RR2142-.A.30 3RR2241-.F.30 3RR2242-.F.30
Phase sequence - - Selectable Selectable
monitoring
( = yes)
Residual current - - Selectable Selectable
monitoring
(I >> = yes)
Blocking current - - 2 to 5 x Imax; 2 to 5 x Imax;
monitoring (n x I▲) OFF OFF
Load current Apparent Apparent current Apparent Apparent
monitoring (Is/Ip) current current/active current/active
current current
Cable break/phase 2-phase 2-phase 3-phase 3-phase
failure detection (L )
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 691
8.4 Functions
8.4.2 Function charts for Basic analog setting current monitoring relay
Memory = O: 2 I Memory = I: 2 I
I▲ %%
%%
I▼ = Off
1.
2 I
!, a, !, 2 2. I
, ,
+ \VW + \VW
a,
a,

)$8/7 )$8/7
/(' /('
OFF F LASH O F F F LASH O F F F LASH ON OFF F LASH OFF
OFF F LASH OFF F LASH ON ON F LASH OFF
slow slow slow fast
slow slow slow
onD el onD el I D el
onD el
onD el I D el
I▲ = Off %% %%

1.
I▼ , a, ,
2
2 2.
I
I
+ \VW
+ \VW
, ,
a, a,

)$8/7 )$8/7
/(' /('
OFF F LASH ON F LASH O F F F LASH ON OFF F LASH OFF OFF F LASH O F F F LASH ON ON F LASH OFF
slow slow slow fast slow slow slow
onD el
onD el onD el I D el onD el I D el
I▲
%% %% 1.
I▼ !, , !, ,
2
2 2.
I
I
a,
, + \VW , + \VW
+ \VW + \VW
, ,
a, a,

)$8/7 )$8/7
/(' /('
OFF F LASH ON F LASH OFF F LASH ON OFF F LASH ON OFF F LASH OFF OFF F LASH OFF F LASH ON ON ON F LASH OFF
slow slow slow slow fast slow slow slow
onD el
onD el onD el I D el I D el onD el I D el
SIRIUS Innovations
692 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.4 Functions
8.4.3 Function charts for Standard digital setting current monitoring relay
Memory = no Memory = no
Relay switching behavior = NC Relay switching behavior = NO
I▲ / I!▲ %% %%
I▼ / I!▼ = Off !, !Q[, !, !Q[,
n x I▲
Q[,Ⴃ Q[,Ⴃ
,Ⴃ,Ⴃ ,Ⴃ,Ⴃ
+ \VW + \VW
a, a,

4RQ 4RQ
4RII 4RII
onD el onD el D el R sD el R sD el
onD el onD el D el R sD el R sD el
I▲ / I!▲ = Off %% %%
I▼ / I!▼
!, ,,,ุ, !, ,,,ุ,
I >> = yes
+ \VW + \VW
, ,
, ,

4RQ
4RQ
4RII
4RII
onD el onD el D el R sD el
onD el onD el D el R sD el
I▲ / I!▲ = Off %% %%
I▼ / I!▼ !, , a !, , a
, , , ,
+ \VW + \VW
+ \VW , , + \VW

, ,
a, a,

4RQ 4RQ
4RII 4RII
onD el onD el D el R sD el D el R sD el
onD el onD el D el R sD el D el R sD el
= yes %% %%
/ // / / /
a,
a,

4RQ 4RQ
4RII
4RII
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 693
8.5 Configuration
8.5 Configuration
8.5.1 Current monitoring relay application areas

The 3RR2 current monitoring relay can be used for both system and machine protection. If
parameterizable current values are overshot or undershot, the current monitoring relay
switches after an adjustable delay has elapsed.
The current monitoring relay detects electrical changes immediately. It will even respond to
minor, insidious changes, and is also capable of underload monitoring.
The current monitoring relay will protect the system in the following situations:
● Overload
● Underload
● Phase failure/wire break
● Load surges
● Wear
● Long starting/heavy-duty starting
● Blocked rotor (3RR22)
● Fault current/ground fault (3RR22)
● Incorrect phase sequence (3RR22)
8.5.2 Fault detection

The current monitoring relay detects faults and blockages on the basis of changes in current.
Example applications:
● Detection of blocked filters, e.g. on fans and pumps
● Detection of pumps working against a closed slide valve
● Detection of machine blockages during operation (e.g. chip conveyors, pumps, crushers,
gear breakage)
● Faster blocking detection than with I²t characteristic curve, particularly with
overdimensioned motors
● Protection against mechanical system damage in the event of load surges as "electronic
shear pin"
SIRIUS Innovations
694 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.5 Configuration
8.5.2.1 Wear detection

The current monitoring relay detects the onset of wear on the basis of changes in current.
● Detection of blunt blades or tools in chucking machines (e.g.: turning, milling, sawing
machines)
● Detection of a lack of lubricant
● Detection of bearing wear
● Timely replacement of resistance heaters
The current rise at the end of service life can be evaluated to detect pending failures.
8.5.2.2 Process monitoring
Kneading resistance
The current monitoring relay detects changes in process states on the basis of changes in
current. This means that in cement or resin production, for example, the required state can
be detected at a specific kneading resistance, so that agitation can be terminated as a result.
Resistance due to pressure

In car washes, the system uses the rising mechanical resistance and, in turn, the current, to
detect how much pressure the rollers can be allowed to exert without causing damage.
8.5.2.3 Overload detection

The current monitoring relay detects possible machine overloads (affecting screw conveyors,
conveyor belts, cranes, fans, for example) on the basis of changes in current.
● Detection of excessive startup or transportation weight
● Detection of deposits on shovel blades
● Detection of insufficient viscosity
8.5.2.4 Detection of load shedding

The current monitoring relay detects undesirable load shedding on the basis of changes in
current. By evaluating the drop in current, in particular by analyzing the active current, the
current monitoring relay is able to respond to load shedding.
● Machine downtime due to belt slippage or defective drive although the motor is running
● Dry-running of pumps
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 695
8.5 Configuration
8.5.2.5 Cable break and phase failure

A phase failure or cable break will cause the lifting force of a crane, for example, to drop to
50%, thereby posing the risk of personal injury and damage to property. This strong
asymmetry subjects the motor windings to thermal overload. The current monitoring relay
detects the cable break or phase failure and shuts the motor down immediately.
8.5.2.6 Rotating field detection with motors

The phase sequence defines the direction of rotation in three-phase motors. Equipment and
product safety law requires that phase sequence monitoring is implemented due to the risk
to life and limb.
The 3RR224.-.F.30 digital setting current monitoring relay monitors the phase sequence and
trips if this is incorrect.
Examples of the consequence of incorrect phase sequence:
● Screw compressors compressing in the wrong direction ⇒ risk of explosion
● Cranes and elevators moving in the wrong direction
● Conveyor belts and saws rotating in the wrong direction
● Coolant transport for pumps and motors not working
8.5.2.7 Motor protection in the case of special applications

According to DIN EN 60204, all motors with a power rating > 0.5 kW have to be protected
against impermissible temperature rise.
Possible ways of protecting the motor against impermissible temperature rise:
● Overload protection
● Overtemperature protection
● Protection by means of current limiting
Protection by means of current limiting

Current measurement not only protects the motor but also enables many system states to be
permanently monitored.
Current monitoring with adjustable ON-delay of up to 99 s is the best solution for extremely
long start processes.
In the case of frequent start/braking processes (driving against limit stop, fast direction of
rotation changes or motors for rapid traverse, for example) a current monitoring relay
protects the motor in the overload and underload ranges.
SIRIUS Innovations
696 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.5 Configuration
Introduction
current monitoring relays.
The current monitoring relays are approved for installation altitudes up to 2,000 m. The
reduced air density at altitudes higher than 2,000 meters affects the relays' electrical
characteristics. The reduction factors which have to be taken into account when using
current monitoring relays at altitudes higher than 2,000 m can be obtained on request on the
Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
Operating conditions and resistance to extreme climates

3RR current monitoring relays are climate-proof. They are intended for use in enclosed
spaces in which no severe operating conditions prevail (e.g. dust, caustic vapors, hazardous
gases). Suitable enclosures are available as accessories for installation in dusty and damp
spaces. Condensation on the devices is not permissible.

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 697
8.6 Mounting
8.6 Mounting
8.6.1 Mounting options

3RR2 current monitoring relays are matched to 3RT2 contactors and 3RF34 (S0) solid-state
contactors in terms of their electrical and mechanical features. As a result, direct mounting
can be achieved easily.
Alternatively, the devices can also be installed individually in the case of stand-alone
assembly or if a 3RU2/3RB3 overload relay is being used at the same time.
8.6.2 Minimum clearances and mounting positions
Minimum clearance
A minimum lateral clearance of > 6 mm must be maintained from grounded parts.
Mounting position
It can be mounted in any position.
8.6.3 Mounting/Disassembly
Direct mounting on 3RT2 contactor/3RF34 (S0) solid-state contactor

The diagram below shows an example mounting scenario based on mounting the
3RR21 analog setting current monitoring relay, size S0, on the 3RT2 contactor.
Table 8- 3 Mounting of 3RR2 current monitoring relay, screw-type connection system (S0)

1 Push the current monitoring relay into the
contactor from below. Attach the two hooks
on the current monitoring relay to the two
openings on the rear of the contactor. This
pushes the main current contacts into the
corresponding terminals on the contactor.
2 Tighten the screws on the contactor with a
Pozidriv size 2 (S00) or Pozidriv size 3 (S0)
screwdriver (tightening torque 0.8 to 1.2 Nm).
SIRIUS Innovations
698 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.6 Mounting
Table 8- 4 Mounting of 3RR2 current monitoring relay, spring-loaded connection system (S0)

1 Insert the contacts (a) into the central opening
of the spring-loaded terminals on the
contactor (see below, a), with the contacts
flush to the right. Make sure that the guide
tabs (zoom view) are inserted into the
designated slots on the contactor.
The current monitoring relay will sit correctly
flush with the contactor on the left- and right-
hand sides.
The table below shows the openings of the main conductor terminals on the contactor into
which the contacts on the current monitoring relay have to be inserted.
Main conductor terminal on the contactor (a) Main conductor terminal on the contactor (a)
(S00): (S0):

Screw mounting on a mounting plate is an alternative option to DIN rail mounting. For screw
mounting, the contactor first has to be fastened with screws and then the current monitoring
relay mounted on the top of the contactor as shown in the figures.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 699
8.6 Mounting
Disassembly
To disassemble the S00/S0 assemblies from the DIN rail, press the contactor down and pull
it toward you.
Table 8- 5 Disassembly of current monitoring relays with screw-type connection system (S0)

1 Undo the screws on the main conductor
terminals.
2 Pull the current monitoring relay down and
away from the contactor.
Table 8- 6 Disassembly of current monitoring relays with spring-loaded connection system (S00)

1 Position the screwdriver on the current
monitoring relay as shown in the figure.
Carefully dislodge the current monitoring relay
from the contactor.
2 Pull the current monitoring relay toward you
and away from the contactor.
SIRIUS Innovations
700 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.7 Connection
8.7 Connection
8.7.1 3RR21 Basic analog setting current monitoring relay
Depending on their design, the current monitoring relays are supplied with a 24 V AC/DC or
24 to 240 V AC/DC supply via terminals B1/B2.
The current monitoring relays monitor an AC load current which flows via device terminals
1L1/2T1 and 3L2/4T2 depending on whether monitoring has been set to check for overshoot
(I▲) or undershoot (I▼), or whether range monitoring (I▲ and I▼ ≠ OFF) has been selected.
B1 Supply voltage ∼/+
B2 Supply voltage ∼/-
32 Output relay CO contact NC contact
31 Output relay CO contact root
34 Output relay CO contact NO contact
4T2
6T3
14/22 Feed-through contactor auxiliary switch (S00)
A2 Feed-through contactor coil terminal (S00)
Reference

About connection terminals 3RR214.-.A.30 Basic analog setting current
monitoring relay (Page 687)
About conductor cross-sections and tightening Connection for main circuit (Page 740)
torques
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 701
8.7 Connection
8.7.2 3RR22 Standard digital setting current monitoring relay
Depending on their design, the current monitoring relays are supplied with a 24 V AC/DC or
24 to 240 V AC/DC supply via terminals B1/B2.
The current monitoring relays monitor an AC load current (apparent current Is or active
current Ip) which flows through device terminals 1L1/2T1, 3L2/4T2, and 5L3/6T3. The current
monitoring relay has two separate outputs which respond to separate threshold values.
In accordance with the configuration the system is monitored for overshoot (I▲ CO contact,
I!▲ semiconductor output) or undershoot (I▼ CO contact, I!▼ semiconductor output), or values
are checked within a window range (I▲ , I!▲ and I▼ , I!▼ ≠ OFF).
B1 Supply voltage ∼/+
B2 Supply voltage ∼/-
Q Semiconductor output, e.g. for pre-warning threshold
32 Output relay CO contact NC contact, e.g. for alarm threshold
31 Output relay CO contact root, e.g. for alarm threshold
34 Output relay CO contact NO contact, e.g. for alarm threshold
4T2
6T3
14/22 Feed-through contactor auxiliary switch (S00)
A2 Feed-through contactor coil terminal (S00)
Reference

About connecting the SIRIUS modular system System overview, under "Connection (Page 74)"
About connection terminals 3RR224.-.F.30 Standard digital setting current
monitoring relay (Page 688)
torques
SIRIUS Innovations
702 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.8 Operation
8.8 Operation
8.8.1.1 Parameters
Operator controls
The analog setting current monitoring relay has 4 rotary buttons and 1 slide switch for setting
parameters. To make changes to the settings, you need a screwdriver.
6
'HOV W
6
RQ'HOV
0HPRU\
2 ,
Figure 8-3 Operator controls on the analog setting current monitoring relay
Parameters
The following parameters can be set:
● ON-delay time (onDel)
● Tripping delay time (Del)
● Threshold value for current overshoot (I▲)
● Threshold value for current undershoot (I▼)
● Automatic/manual RESET (Memory)
Required tools
To set the parameters, you can use the same screwdriver as for mounting the current
monitoring relay (Pozidriv size 2 for size S00 or Pozidriv size 3 for size S0).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 703
8.8 Operation
8.8.1.2 Lower threshold value
Definition of lower threshold value (I▼)

Setting the threshold value for current undershoot If one of the monitored parameters
undershoots this threshold value, the current monitoring relay will disconnect once the set
tripping delay time (Del, see the chapter titled Tripping delay time (Page 707)) has elapsed.
Setting range
The setting range for the lower threshold value (I▼) is OFF as well as continuously 1.6 A to
16 A (3RR2141-.A.30) or 4 A to 40 A (3RR2142-.A-30).
Note
Setting OFF selects "Current overshoot" monitoring mode, see the chapter titled Upper
threshold value (Page 705).
Factory setting
The lower threshold value is deactivated in the factory setting.
Changes to settings
Changes to the lower threshold value can be made by adjusting the corresponding rotary
button (I▼) with a screwdriver.
NOTICE
Deactivating monitoring
If both threshold values are deactivated (OFF), monitoring will cease.
• Current overshoot
• Current undershoot
The following parameters continue to be monitored:
• Phase failure
SIRIUS Innovations
704 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.8 Operation
8.8.1.3 Upper threshold value
Definition of upper threshold value (I▲)

Setting the threshold value for current overshoot If one of the monitored parameters
overshoots this threshold value, the current monitoring relay will disconnect once the set
tripping delay time (Del, see the chapter titled Tripping delay time (Page 707)) has elapsed.
Setting range
The setting range for the upper threshold value (I▲) is continuously 1.6 A to 16 A (3RR2141-
.A.30) or 4 A to 40 A (3RR2142-.A30) as well as OFF.
Note
Setting OFF selects "Current undershoot" monitoring mode, see the chapter titled Lower
Factory setting
The factory setting for the upper threshold value is as follows:
● Size S00: 8 A
● Size S0: 20 A
Changes to settings
Changes to the upper threshold value can be made by adjusting the corresponding rotary
button (I) with a screwdriver.
NOTICE
• Phase failure
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 705
8.8 Operation
8.8.1.4 ON-delay time
Definition of ON-delay time (onDel)

This is where the delay time until the start of monitoring following the start of current flow is
set.
Explanation
The set ON-delay time starts when current flow commences (I > 0) or the voltage Us is
connected. The relay picks up and the red FAULT LED flashes. During this time,
undershooting or overshooting of the set threshold values will not cause the CO contact to
respond. Once this time has elapsed, the switching contact changes the switching state and
the FAULT LED lights up continuously if the current value is outside the correct range. This
provides a means of protecting a motor with heavy-duty starting/lengthy startup, for example.
Note
Special cases wire break/phase failure
A delay time is not observed if a wire break or phase failure is detected. The current
monitoring relay responds immediately (≤ 300 ms) in such cases.
Setting range
The setting range for the ON-delay is continuously 0 s to 60 s.
Factory setting
The ON-delay is factory-set to 0 s.
Changes to settings
Changes to the ON-delay can be made by adjusting the corresponding rotary button (onDel)
with a screwdriver.
SIRIUS Innovations
706 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.8 Operation
8.8.1.5 Tripping delay time
Definition of tripping delay time (Del)

The set tripping delay time starts when the monitoring current overshoots or undershoots the
corresponding set threshold value.
Explanation
The set tripping delay time starts when the load current flowing under normal operating
conditions overshoots or undershoots the corresponding set threshold value. The red FAULT
LED flashes. Once this time has elapsed, the switching contact changes the switching state
and the FAULT LED lights up continuously if the current value is still outside the correct
range. As a result, transient current oscillations are ignored and do not lead to undesirable
switching operations (alarms, for example).
Note
Special cases wire break/phase failure
A delay time is not observed if a wire break or phase failure is detected. The current
monitoring relay responds immediately (≤ 300 ms) in such cases.
Setting range
The setting range for the tripping delay is continuously 0 s to 30 s.
Factory setting
The tripping delay is factory-set to 0 s.
Changes to settings
Changes to the tripping delay time can be made by adjusting the corresponding rotary button
(Del) with a screwdriver.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 707
8.8 Operation
8.8.1.6 Memory
Definition of memory
The "Memory" setting controls how the device behaves following a shutdown due to a fault
and subsequent return to the normal range.
There are two possible settings:
● Automatic reset (Memory = O)
If the device is set to automatic reset, the switching contact will respond once the normal
range plus the hysteresis threshold have been reached. The red FAULT LED goes out.
The overshoot or undershoot which triggered the response is not saved.
The hysteresis is set to a fixed value of 6.25% of the set value.
● Manual RESET (Memory = I)
If manual RESET is selected, the switching contact remains in the current switching state
even if the load current returns to a permissible value.
Note
Reset with manual RESET
This saved fault condition can be reset by briefly switching to Memory = O or by
disconnecting and then reconnecting the supply voltage.
Factory setting
The device is factory-set to automatic reset.
Changes to settings
Move the slide switch (Memory) to toggle the device between automatic reset and manual
RESET.
Reference
For more information, see the chapter titled Hysteresis (Page 717).
SIRIUS Innovations
708 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.8 Operation
8.8.1.7 Diagnostics with LED
Status display
On the analog setting current monitoring relay, two status LEDs indicate the operating state:
● FAULT (red)
● READY (green)
Display Meaning
FAULT off Measured value is within range limits
FAULT steady on Device has tripped
FAULT flashing slowly Delay time is running
FAULT flashing rapidly Cable break/phase failure detected
READY off No voltage at B1 - B2
READY on Voltage at B1 - B2
You will find more information about the LED display and its various settings in the chapter
titled Function charts for Basic analog setting current monitoring relay (Page 692).
Cable break detected

The CO contact responds immediately when a cable break is detected (only residual current
in branch circuit 1L1/2T1 or 3L2/4T2). All running delay times are aborted and the red
FAULT LED flashes rapidly. If the load current in both circuits falls below the lower range
limit, the current monitoring relay responds again in accordance with the settings made. If
Memory = I, the tripping state is saved.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 709
8.8 Operation
8.8.2.1 Parameters
Display information
The 3RR22 has two menus, "RUN" and "SET", which feature the following parameters:
"RUN" menu
The RUN menu shows the up-to-date current measured value. You can use the arrow keys
to switch between the current values of the individual phases. Furthermore, two symbols
representing the relay and the semiconductor output Q indicate whether delay times are
running and when the relay contacts are open or closed. The selected type of monitoring
(current monitoring for overshoot or undershoot and range monitoring) is also displayed.
In the event of faults or errors, the display also facilitates troubleshooting.
It is even possible to set threshold values for current overshoot and undershoot in this menu.
Press the SET button (< 0.5 s) to choose between the following parameters:
● Threshold value for current undershoot for the CO contact 31-32-34 (I▼)
See the chapter titled Lower threshold value (Page 715)
● Threshold value for current undershoot for the semiconductor output Q (I!▼)
See the chapter titled Lower threshold value (Page 715)
● Threshold value for current overshoot for the CO contact 31-32-34 (I▲)
See the chapter titled Upper threshold value (Page 716)
● Threshold value for current overshoot for the semiconductor output Q (I!▲)
See the chapter titled Upper threshold value (Page 716)
SIRIUS Innovations
710 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.8 Operation
"SET" menu
This menu is used to make basic device settings.
The following parameters can be set:
● Hysteresis (Hyst)
See the chapter titled Hysteresis (Page 717)
● ON-delay time (onDel)
See the chapter titled ON-delay time (Page 718)
● Tripping delay time (Del)
See the chapter titled Tripping delay time (Page 719)
● Reclosing delay time (RsDel)
See the chapter titled Reclosing delay time (Page 720)
● Blocking current monitoring ((n x I▲)
See the chapter titled Blocking current monitoring (Page 721)
● Fault current monitoring (I >> = yes)
See the chapter titled Fault current monitoring (Page 721)
● Memory: Automatic/manual RESET (Mem)
See the chapter titled Memory (Page 722)
● Incorrect phase sequence monitoring ( = yes)
See the chapter titled Incorrect phase sequence monitoring (Page 723)
● Load current monitoring (apparent current Is/actual current Ip)
See the chapter titled Load current monitoring (apparent current/active current)
(Page 724)
● Relay switching behavior (closed-circuit principle NC/open-circuit principle NO)
See the chapter titled Relay switching behavior (Page 725)
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 711
8.8 Operation
8.8.2.2 Switching menus (possible settings are SET and RUN)
581
2.
, I

,
,
I▲
12(5525
(5525 0HPRU\ \HV
! V I!
(5525 /
[,
I»

, I! ▲
6(7
H yst onD el D el RsD el n x I▲
NO/NC ,V,S Mem I»
! V V
① RUN - OK Status display, no errors, see below

② RUN - Settings Settings for threshold values, see below
③ RUN - ERROR Status display, error
• I1 /I2 / I3 Current is still outside the correct range and the delay time has
elapsed; the current has either been undershot or overshot
(depending on the selected type of monitoring)
Incorrect phase sequence detected
I>> Fault current detected
• n x I▲ Current is above the set blocking current
L Cable break/phase failure detected
④ SET Settings for basic device parameters, see below
SIRIUS Innovations
712 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.8 Operation
Operator controls
The digital setting current monitoring relay has three buttons for navigating in menus:
● Shift button (SET button) for navigating in menus and for switching between menus
● 2 arrow keys for setting parameters
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 713
8.8 Operation
Navigation in the menu

There are basically two ways of navigating in both menus:
● Press and release the shift key (≤ 500 ms)
Within a menu, you can jump from one parameter to the next by pressing and releasing
the shift key. The sequence - which is fixed - is shown in the table below.
Entry Display in the RUN menu Display in the SET menu
1. Current measured value or error symbol, Hysteresis
switching contact symbol, and monitoring
method for diagnostics
2. Threshold value for current undershoot for ON-delay time
the CO contact 31-32-34
3. Threshold value for current overshoot for Tripping delay time
the CO contact 31-32-34
4. Threshold value for current undershoot for Reclosing delay time
the semiconductor output Q
5. Threshold value for current overshoot for Blocking current monitoring
the semiconductor output Q
6. Fault current monitoring
7. Memory (automatic/manual RESET)
8. Incorrect phase sequence monitoring
9. Load current monitoring (apparent
current/active current)
10. Functional principle (closed-circuit
principle/open-circuit principle)
● Press and hold down the shift key (> 2.5 s)
Press and hold down the shift key to switch from the RUN menu to the SET menu and
vice versa.
– RUN → SET
You can switch menus from any of the parameters. While the shift key is pressed
down, "SET?" is displayed.
When you switch menus, you are always taken to the "Hysteresis" menu command in
the "SET" menu.
In the event of an error you will only be able to switch to the "SET" menu from the
"RUN-Settings" ②.
– SET → RUN
You can switch menus from any of the menu commands. While the shift key is
pressed down, "RUN?" is displayed and the changes to the settings are applied.
When you switch menus, you are always taken to the "Current measured value"
parameter in the RUN menu.
Note
Aborting the menu switchover
The switchover process will be interrupted if the shift key is released while "SET?" or
"RUN?" is displayed. The menu will revert to the menu command you were working
with when the switch was initiated.
SIRIUS Innovations
714 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.8 Operation
8.8.2.3 Settings in the "RUN" menu
Lower threshold value
Definition of lower threshold value (I▼)

Setting the threshold value for current undershoot for the CO contact (I▼) or the
semiconductor output (I!▼). If one of the monitored parameters undershoots these threshold
values, the current monitoring relay will switch the output relay or the semiconductor output
once the set tripping delay time (Del, see the chapter titled Tripping delay time (Page 719))
has elapsed.
Setting range
The setting range for the lower threshold value is OFF as well as 1.6 A to 16 A (3RR2241) or
4 A to 40 A (3RR2242). The increment is 0.1 A.
Note
Setting OFF selects "Current overshoot" monitoring mode, see the chapter titled Upper
Factory setting
The lower threshold value is factory-set to 1.6 A (3RR2241-.F.30)/4.0 A (3RR2242-.F.30).
Changes to settings
Changes to the lower threshold value can be made using the arrow keys. Press and hold
down the keys to speed up this process.
NOTICE
• Blocking current
• Fault current (if activated)
• Incorrect phase sequence (if activated)
• Phase failure
The up-to-date measured value is displayed permanently.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 715
8.8 Operation
Upper threshold value
Definition of upper threshold value (I▲)

Setting the threshold value for current overshoot for the CO contact (I▲) or the
semiconductor output (I!▲). If one of the monitored parameters overshoots this threshold
value, the current monitoring relay will switch the output relay or the semiconductor output
once the set tripping delay time (Del, see the chapter titled Tripping delay time (Page 719))
has elapsed.
Setting range
The setting range for the upper threshold value is 1.6 A to 16 A (3RR2241) or 4 A to 40 A
(3RR2242) as well as OFF. The increment is 0.1 A.
Note
Setting OFF selects "Current undershoot" monitoring mode, see the chapter titled Lower
Factory setting
The upper threshold value is factory-set to 3.0 A (3RR2241-.F.30)/8.0 A (3RR2242-.F.30).
Changes to settings
Changes to the upper threshold value can be made using the arrow keys. Press and hold
NOTICE
• Blocking current
• Fault current (if activated)
• Incorrect phase sequence (if activated)
• Phase failure
The up-to-date measured value is displayed permanently.
SIRIUS Innovations
716 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.8 Operation
8.8.2.4 Settings in the "SET" menu
Hysteresis
Definition of hysteresis (Hyst)

Hysteresis is the lagging of an effect behind its cause; its purpose is to prevent repeated
response in the threshold value range.
&RUUHFWUDQJH
1RUPDOUDQJH
+\VWHUHVLVWKUHVKROG
IRUXSSHU
8SSHU WKUHVKROGYDOXH
WKUHVKROGYDOXH ,
+\VW
+\VWHUHVLVWKUHVKROG
/RZHU +\VW IRUORZHU
WKUHVKROGYDOXH WKUHVKROGYDOXH
,
0HDVXUHG
, FXUUHQW
Figure 8-4 Explanation of hysteresis
Hysteresis
If, after the upper threshold value has been overshot to such an extent that switching was
necessary, the current returns to the normal range, switching over to the correct range will
not take place until a current which undershoots the hysteresis threshold has been reached.
The same applies if the lower threshold value is undershot.
Setting range
The setting range for the hysteresis threshold is 0.1 to 3 A (3RR2241-.F.30)/0.1 to 8.0 A
(3RR2242-.F.30) of the relevant lower and upper threshold setting with an increment of
0.1 A.
Factory setting
The hysteresis value is factory-set to 0.5 A (3RR2241-.F.30)/0.8 A (3RR2242-.F.30).
Changes to settings
Changes to the hysteresis threshold can be made using the arrow keys. Press and hold
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 717
8.8 Operation
ON-delay time
Definition of ON-delay time (onDel)

This is where the delay time until the start of monitoring following the start of current flow is
set.
Explanation
The set ON-delay time starts when current flow commences (S00: I > 1.1 A/S0: I > 3.0 A).
During this time, undershooting or overshooting of the set threshold values or a blocking
current error will not cause the CO contact and the semiconductor output to respond. Once
this time has elapsed, if the current value is not in the correct range, the CO contact and the
semiconductor output will change the switching state in accordance with the selected circuit
principle.
Note
Special cases wire break/phase failure (incorrect phase sequence/fault current)
When a wire break or phase failure is detected, as well as in the event of incorrect phase
sequence and fault current (if these have been activated), a delay time is not observed. The
current monitoring relay responds immediately (≤ 200 ms) in such cases.
Setting range
The setting range for the ON-delay time is 0 s to 99 s. The increment is 1 s.
Factory setting
The ON-delay time is factory-set to 0 s.
Changes to settings
Changes to the ON-delay time can be made using the arrow keys. Press and hold down the
keys to speed up this process.
SIRIUS Innovations
718 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.8 Operation
Tripping delay time
Definition of tripping delay time (Del)

The set tripping delay time starts when the monitoring current overshoots or undershoots the
corresponding set threshold value.
Explanation
The set tripping delay time starts when the load current flowing under normal operating
conditions overshoots or undershoots the corresponding set threshold value. The symbols
for the CO contact and/or the semiconductor output flash. Once this time has elapsed, if the
current value has not returned to the correct range, the CO contact and the semiconductor
output will change the switching state in accordance with the selected circuit principle.
Note
Special cases wire break/phase failure (incorrect phase sequence/fault current/blocking
current)
When a wire break or phase failure is detected, as well as in the event of incorrect phase
sequence, fault current, and blocking current (if these have been activated), a delay time is
not observed. The current monitoring relay responds immediately (≤ 200 ms) in such cases.
Setting range
The setting range for the tripping delay time is 0 s to 30 s. The increment is 1 s.
Factory setting
The tripping delay time is factory-set to 0 s.
Changes to settings
Changes to the tripping delay time can be made using the arrow keys. Press and hold down
the keys to speed up this process.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 719
8.8 Operation
Reclosing delay time
Definition of reclosing delay time (RsDel)

If automatic reset has been activated on the current monitoring relay, the reclosing delay
time will start when the monitoring current returns to the correct range following overshooting
or undershooting. The associated hysteresis threshold is taken into consideration here. At
the end of this time the contacts switch back to normal operation.
Setting range
The setting range for the reclosing delay time is 0 min to 300 min. The increment is 1 min.
Factory setting
The reclosing delay time is factory-set to 0 mins.
Changes to settings
Changes to the reclosing delay time can be made using the arrow keys. Press and hold
SIRIUS Innovations
720 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.8 Operation
Blocking current monitoring
Definition of blocking current monitoring (n x I▲)

If the load current overshoots the value of the set threshold value for current overshoot (I▲)
by n times during operation, a blocking current error has occurred. Any delay times which
are running (Del) are aborted and both the CO contact and the semiconductor output change
their switching state.
Setting range
The setting range for blocking current monitoring is No (off) or 2 to 5 x I▲. The increment is
1 x I▲.
Factory setting
Blocking current monitoring is deactivated by default (No).
Changes to settings
Changes to blocking current monitoring can be made using the arrow keys. Press and hold
Fault current monitoring
Definition of fault current monitoring

If fault current monitoring has been activated (I >> = yes) and the total current of the load
currents at terminals 1L1 / 2T1, 3L2 / 4T2 and 5L3 / 6T3 rises above the permissible
threshold (S00: 1.5 A / S00: 4 A) all delay times which are running (onDel, RsDel, Del) are
aborted and both the CO contact and the semiconductor output change their switching state
immediately (≤ 200 ms).
Factory setting
Fault current monitoring is deactivated by default.
Changes to settings
Fault current monitoring can be activated and deactivated using the arrow keys.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 721
8.8 Operation
Memory
Definition of Memory
The "Memory" setting controls how the device behaves following current overshoot or
undershoot/fault message and subsequent return to the normal range/troubleshooting within
the hysteresis limits.
There are two possible settings:
● Automatic reset (Memory = no)
If the device is set to automatic reset, following an error message, the relay will switch
back to the initial state once a previously occurring error has been dealt with. If a
reclosing delay time (RsDel) has been set, this is also taken into consideration. The relay
does not switch back to the initial state until this time has elapsed.
● Manual RESET (Memory = yes)
If manual RESET is selected in the settings menu, the relay will remain in the current
switching state following an error message, even if a previously occurring error has been
dealt with.
Note
Reset with manual RESET
Tripping is confirmed by disconnecting and reconnecting the supply voltage or by
pressing both of the arrow keys simultaneously for at least 2.5 seconds. The device then
resumes monitoring.
Explanation
If the device is set to automatic reset, the CO contact and the semiconductor output will
respond once a previously occurring error has been dealt with and the reclosing delay time
has elapsed. A previously occurring error is, therefore, not saved.
If manual RESET is selected, the CO contact remains in the current switching state even if a
previously occurring error has been dealt with.
This saved fault condition can be reset by pressing both arrow keys at the same time or by
disconnecting and reconnecting the auxiliary voltage.
Note
Semiconductor output
The semiconductor output always responds in automatic reset.
Factory setting
The device is factory-set to automatic reset.
SIRIUS Innovations
722 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.8 Operation
Changes to settings
Press the arrow keys to switch the device from automatic reset to manual RESET and vice
versa.
Incorrect phase sequence monitoring
Definition of incorrect phase sequence

If phase sequence monitoring has been activated ( = yes) and the load currents at
terminals 1L1/2T1, 3L2/4T2, and 5L3/6T3 exhibit the wrong phase sequence, the CO contact
and the semiconductor output will change their switching status immediately (≤ 200 ms).
Factory setting
Incorrect phase sequence monitoring is deactivated by default.
Changes to settings
Incorrect phase sequence monitoring can be activated and deactivated using the arrow keys.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 723
8.8 Operation
Load current monitoring (apparent current/active current)
Definition of load current monitoring

The relays monitor an AC load current which flows through the device terminals depending
on whether monitoring has been set to check for overshoot or undershoot, or window
monitoring.
There are two ways of monitoring the load current:
● Apparent current Is
● Active currentIp
Explanation
Whereas apparent current monitoring is primarily used in the rated torque range or for
overload, active current monitoring can be used to observe and evaluate the degree of
loading across a motor's entire torque range.
FRV˳ ,>$@
/$$$=N:1P

FRV˳

,V ,S ,V[FRV˳

0>@
① Strong change in cos φ

② Strong change in apparent current
cos φ Power factor
I [A] Current
M [%] Torque as a % of the rated torque
Ip Active current
Is Apparent current
Figure 8-5 Load current monitoring diagram
The diagram shows that it only makes sense to use the power factor cos φ to monitor the
rated current up to approx. 70%. At a higher rated current the change in the power factor is
too slight to produce measured values of any significance. In contrast, the monitoring quality
of the apparent current Is increases along with the torque, in other words as the rated current
rises. It is for this reason that monitoring of the apparent current is primarily used if a load
needs to be protected against overload. Integrated monitoring from no-load operation up to
overload is only possible by monitoring the active current Ip, the product of power factor and
apparent current.
Factory setting
Load current monitoring is factory-set to apparent current monitoring Is.
SIRIUS Innovations
724 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.8 Operation
Changes to settings
Load current monitoring can be activated and deactivated using the arrow keys.
Relay switching behavior
Definition of switching behavior

The relay responds in accordance with the set switching behavior. There are two different
options:
● Closed-circuit principle (NC)
If the closed-circuit principle is selected, the relay picks up when the voltage is applied
(contact 31/34 closed). It drops out in the event of an error (contact 31/32 closed).
Similarly, if the supply voltage fails, the relay will fall back to this setting.
The semiconductor output responds as an NC contact.
● Open-circuit principle (NO)
If the open-circuit principle is selected, the relay only picks up in the event of an error
(contact 31/34 closed). Interruptions to the supply voltage are not displayed.
The semiconductor output responds as an NO contact.
Factory setting
The device is factory-set to the closed-circuit principle (NC).
Changes to settings
Press the arrow keys to switch the device from closed- to open-circuit principle and vice
versa.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 725
8.8 Operation
8.8.2.5 Diagnostics in the "RUN" menu
Information on the display
Display information
The display can basically be divided into three different display values/symbols.
3 2
(1) Current measured value or fault symbol

(2) Type of monitoring
(3) Symbols for the CO contact (right) and the semiconductor output (left)
Meaning of the information on the display (with Mem = no)
Symbol Meaning
12.5A Displays the measured current
n x I▲ • Flashing: Current is above the set blocking current
I>> • Flashing: Fault current detected
L • Flashing: Cable break/phase failure detected
• Flashing: Incorrect phase sequence detected
• Not flashing: Relay contact 31/32 open, relay contact 31/34 closed
• Flashing: Delay time (ON or tripping delay) running
• Masked out: Relay contact 31/32 closed, relay contact 31/34 open
Q • Not flashing: Semiconductor output closed, supply voltage connected
• Flashing: Delay time (ON or tripping delay) running
• Masked out: Semiconductor output open, supply voltage not switched through
Monitoring for current overshoot
Monitoring for current undershoot
Window monitoring (monitoring for current overshoots and undershoots)
Current is in correct range
A current overshoot has occurred
A current undershoot has occurred
SIRIUS Innovations
726 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.8 Operation
Cable break detected

When a cable break is detected (residual current in branches 1L1/2T1, 3L2/4T2 or 5L3/6T3),
all delay times which are running (onDel, RsDel, Del) are aborted and both the CO contact
and the semiconductor output change their switching state immediately (≤ 200 ms). At the
start of current flow (I > 0) in all branches (1L1/2T1, 3L2/4T2, and 5L3/6T3) the CO contact
and the semiconductor output respond again in accordance with the settings made.
RESET
Display in the event of an error

The symbols on the display flash to indicate an error.
Example function charts can be found in the chapter titled Functions (Page 690).
RESET
The outputs are reset dependent on the set memory behavior.
The following settings can be selected:
● Memory = yes (manual RESET), see the chapter titled Memory (Page 722)
To reset the device you need to press and hold down both arrow keys simultaneously for
more than 2.5 s. The previously occurring error has to have been dealt with, otherwise a
new error message will appear immediately.
Alternatively, the device can be reset by disconnecting and reconnecting the supply
voltage.
● Memory = no (automatic reset)
The device is reset automatically as soon as a previously occurring error has been dealt
with. The set reclosing delay time is taken into consideration.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 727
8.9 Accessories
8.9 Accessories
8.9.1 Accessories
For maximum flexibility, accessories can be added to the current monitoring relays as
required, easily, and without the need for tools.
Mountable accessories
The following accessories are available for the current monitoring relays:
● Terminal support for stand-alone assembly
For stand-alone assembly or if an overload relay is being used at the same time
● Sealable cover
To protect the parameter settings against unauthorized or unintentional manipulation
8.9.2 Terminal support for stand-alone assembly
8.9.2.1 Description
For a stand-alone assembly or if an overload relay is being used at the same time, adapters
for stand-alone assembly are available for separate DIN rail mounting or screw mounting.
The current monitoring relays can also be assembled as stand-alone devices with
corresponding terminal supports for stand-alone assembly.
The accessories are exactly the same as the accessories for the 3RU21 thermal overload
relay and the 3RB3 solid-state overload relay.
Table 8- 7 Stand-alone assembly, current monitoring relays
Size Connection system Terminal support for stand-

alone assembly
S00 Screw-type 3RU2916-3AA01
Spring-loaded 3RU2916-3AC01
S0 Screw-type 3RU2926-3AA01
Spring-loaded 3RU2926-3AC01
SIRIUS Innovations
728 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.9 Accessories
8.9.2.2 Mounting
The terminal supports can be snapped onto 35 mm DIN rails according to DIN EN 50022.
They can also be screw-mounted.
The figure below shows how the terminal support for stand-alone assembly is mounted and
disassembled, based on the example of an analog setting current monitoring relay.
Table 8- 8 Mounting the terminal support (screw-type connection system)

1 Guide the current monitoring relay into the terminal
support from below.
2 Tighten the screws on the terminal support with a
Pozidriv size 2 (S00) or Pozidriv size 3 (S0)
screwdriver (tightening torque 0.8 to 1.2 Nm).

Table 8- 9 Mounting the terminal support (spring-loaded connection system)

1 Insert the contacts (a) into the central opening of the
main terminals on the terminal support, with the
contacts flush to the right. Make sure that the guide
tabs are inserted into the designated slots on the
terminal support.

D
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 729
8.9 Accessories
Disassembly
Table 8- 10 Disassembling the terminal support (screw-type connection system)

1 Undo the screws on the main conductor terminals.
2 Release the current monitoring relay by pushing down
the clip on the underside of the terminal support.
3 Use a screwdriver to dislodge the terminal support
from the current monitoring relay.
4 Pull the current monitoring relay down and away from
the contactor.
Table 8- 11 Disassembling the terminal support (spring-loaded connection system)

1 Release the current monitoring relay by pushing down
the clip on the underside of the terminal support.
2 Position the screwdriver on the terminal support as
shown in the figure. Carefully dislodge the current
monitoring relay from the contactor.
3 Pull the current monitoring relay toward you and away
from the terminal support.
SIRIUS Innovations
730 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.9 Accessories
8.9.3.1 Description
A sealable cover compatible for use with all sizes (3RR2940) is available for the digital and
analog setting current monitoring relays.
The sealable cover is used to protect the rotary buttons and the slide switch on the analog
current monitoring relay and the buttons on the digital current monitoring relay against
unauthorized or unintentional manipulation.
8.9.3.2 Mounting
The diagram below shows an example mounting scenario based on mounting the sealable
cover on the 3RR21 analog setting current monitoring relay, size S0. The mounting
sequence for the sealable cover for S00 is exactly the same as that for S0.
Table 8- 12 Mounting the sealable cover on the current monitoring relay

1 Remove the key from the
cover.
2 Insert the key into the
designated opening.
3 Attach the hooks on the
cover to the openings on
the current monitoring
relay.
4 Tilt the cover down.

5 Lock the cover with the key
connector to secure it
against unauthorized
removal.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 731
8.10 Technical data
8.10 Technical data
8.10.1 Performance features of current monitoring relays
Table 8- 13 Performance features of 3RR2 current monitoring relays
Functions/Parameters Analog setting current monitoring relays Digital setting current monitoring relays
3RR2141-.A.30 3RR2142-.A.30 3RR2241-.F.30 3RR2242-.F.30
Rated current 1.6 to 16 A 4 to 40 A 1.6 to 16 A 4 to 40 A
Line system AC 50/60 Hz AC 50/60 Hz AC 20 to 400 Hz AC 20 to 400 Hz
configuration
Supply voltage Us • -.AA30: 24 V AC/DC • -.FA30: 24 V AC/DC
• -.AW30: 24 to 240 V AC/DC • -.FW30: 24 to 240 V AC/DC
Monitoring for current 2-phase 2-phase 3-phase 3-phase
overshoots and/or
undershoots
Contacts 1 CO contact 1 CO contact 1 semiconductor 1 semiconductor
output/1 CO contact output/1 CO contact
8.10.1.1 General data
Table 8- 14 General data for 3RR2 current monitoring relays
Feature Benefit 3RR21 Basic, 3RR22 Standard,

analog setting digital setting
Sizes • Are matched to the dimensions, connections and technical S00, S0 S00, S0
features of the other devices in the SIRIUS modular system
• Permit the mounting of slim-line and compact load feeders
in widths of 45 mm (S00 and S0)
• Make configuration easier
Current range • Are matched to the other devices in the SIRIUS modular S00: 1.6 to 16 A S00: 1.6 to 16 A
system S0: 4.0 to 40 A S0: 4.0 to 40 A
• Just 1 option per size with a wide setting range makes
configuration easy
SIRIUS Innovations
732 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.10 Technical data
8.10.1.2 Monitoring functions
Table 8- 15 Monitoring functions of 3RR2 current monitoring relays

Current overshoot • Provides optimum current-dependent ✓ (2-phase) ✓ (3-phase)
protection of loads against impermissibly high
temperature rise due to overload
• Enables detection of filter blockages or pumps
working against closed slide valves
• Enables conclusions to be drawn about wear,
poor lubrication or other phenomena relevant
to maintenance
Current undershoot • Enables detection of overload due to a slipping ✓ (2-phase) ✓ (3-phase)
or torn belt
• Ensures that pumps are protected against
running dry
• Straightforward function monitoring of resistive
loads such as heaters
• Permits energy savings to be made through
monitoring of no-load operation
Apparent current monitoring • Sensitive current monitoring specifically in a ✓ ✓
motor's rated and upper torque range
Active current monitoring • Optimum current monitoring over a motor's - ✓ (selectable)
entire torque range thanks to the patented
combination of power factor and apparent
current monitoring
Range monitoring • Simultaneous monitoring for current overshoot ✓ (2-phase) ✓ (3-phase)
and undershoot with a single device
Phase failure, wire break • Minimizes the temperature rise of the three- ✓ (2-phase) ✓ (3-phase)
phase motor in the event of a phase failure
thanks to immediate disconnection
• Prevents hoisting gear from operating with half
payload
Phase sequence error • Prevents motors, pumps or compressors - ✓ (selectable)
starting up in the wrong direction of rotation
Internal ground-fault • Provides optimum protection of loads in the - ✓ (selectable)
detection (fault current event of high-impedance faults to ground
monitoring) caused by moisture, condensation, damaged
insulation, etc.
• Eliminates the need for additional special
equipemnt
• Saves space in the control cabinet
• Reduces wiring outlay and costs
Blocking current monitoring • Prevents temperature rise of the three-phase - ✓ (selectable)
motor in the event of blocking during operation
thanks to direct disconnection
• Minimizes the mechanical loading of the
system by functioning as an electronic shear
pin
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 733
8.10 Technical data
8.10.1.3 Equipment
Table 8- 16 Equipment of 3RR2 current monitoring relays

Reset function • Enables manual or automatic ✓ ✓
resetting of the relay
• Resetting directly on the device or
by disconnecting and reconnecting
the supply voltage (remote reset)
ON-delay time • Enables motor starting without 0 s to 60 s 0 to 99 s
evaluation of the starting current
• Can be used to monitor motors with
lengthy startup
Tripping delay time • Prevents frequent warnings and 0 s to 30 s 0 s to 30 s
disconnection in response to
currents in the vicinity of the
threshold values
• Permits brief violations of threshold
values during operation
Operator controls and displays • For setting threshold values and LEDs and rotary Display and buttons
delay times potentiometers
• For selectable functions
• For fast and selective diagnostics
• Display for permanent indication of
measured values
Integrated contacts • Allow the system or process to be 1 CO contact 1 CO contact
shut down in the event of an 1 semiconductor
irregularity
output
• Can be used to output signals
SIRIUS Innovations
734 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.10 Technical data
8.10.1.4 Configuration of load feeders
Table 8- 17 Load feeders with 3RR2 current monitoring relays

Short-circuit-proof up to 100 kA at 690 V • Provides optimum protection ✓ ✓
(in conjunction with the appropriate fuses of the loads and operating
or the appropriate motor starter personnel in the event of short
protector) circuits due to insulation faults
or faulty switching operations
Electrical and mechanical matching to • Simplifies configuration ✓ ✓
3RT2 contactors • Reduces connection outlay
and costs
• Enables stand-alone assembly
as well as space-saving direct
mounting
Spring-loaded connection system for • Enables fast connections ✓ (optional) ✓ (optional)
main circuit • Ensures that connections are
vibration-resistant
• Enables maintenance-free
connections
Spring-loaded connection system for • Enables fast connections ✓ (optional) ✓ (optional)
auxiliary circuits • Ensures that connections are
vibration-resistant
• Enables maintenance-free
connections
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 735
8.10 Technical data
8.10.1.5 Features of current monitoring relays
Feature Benefit 3RR21 Basic, analog 3RR22 Standard, digital

setting setting
Suitable for single- and three- • Enables even single-phase ✓ ✓
phase loads systems to be monitored
• By means of parallel
infeed in the contactor
• Or looping the current
through the three phase
inputs
Wide setting ranges • Reduce the number of ✓ ✓
variants
• Minimize the engineering
outlay and costs
• Enable savings to be
made where storage
overheads, storage costs,
and tied-up capital are
concerned
Wide-range power supply • Reduce the number of ✓ (optional) ✓ (optional)
variants
• Minimize the engineering
outlay and costs
• Enable savings to be
made where storage
overheads, storage costs,
and tied-up capital are
concerned
8.10.1.6 Combinations with 3RT20 contactor
Monitoring relay Current range 3RT20 1 S00 contactors 3RT20 2 S0 contactors

type 3/4/5.5/7.5 kW 5.5/7.5/11/15/18.5 kW
3RR21 41 1.6 to 16 A ✓ (with stand-alone assembly support)
3RR22 41 1.6 to 16 A ✓ (with stand-alone assembly support)
3RR21 42 4.0 to 40 A (with stand-alone assembly support) ✓
3RR22 42 4.0 to 40 A (with stand-alone assembly support) ✓
SIRIUS Innovations
736 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.10 Technical data
Table 8- 18 General technical data for 3RR21 current monitoring relays
Type 3RR2141 3RR2142

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
Tripping in the event of Overcurrent, undercurrent, phase failure
• Number of phases 2
• Number of monitored phases 2
Overload warning No
• Reset options following tripping Manual and automatic reset
• Recovery time following error
- Automatic RESET s 0.3
- Manual RESET s 0.3
Adjustable ON-delay time
• On startup s 0 ... 60
• On upper or lower limit violation s 0 ... 30
Maximum response time ms 300
Relative switching hysteresis % 6.25
Relative repeat accuracy % 2
Ambient temperature
• Storage/transport °C -40 ... + 80
• Operation °C -25 ... + 60
Resistance to extreme climates - Humidity % Condensation not permissible
Repeat terminals
acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
Vibration resistance Hz 10 to 55 per 0.35 mm
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 737
8.10 Technical data

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
- Burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 kV 2 (power ports), 1 (signal ports)
- Surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5 kV 2 (line to ground), 1 (line to line)
IEC 61000-4-2
• Field-related interference suppression to V/m 10
IEC 61000-4-3
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Limit class A (Industry)
– Emitted interference
acc. to EN 55011 (CISPR 11) and EN 55022
(CISPR 22)
Mech. operating cycles 10.000.000
Electr. operating cycles at AC-15/230 V 100.000
SIRIUS Innovations
738 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.10 Technical data
Table 8- 19 Technical data for the main circuit, 3RR21 current monitoring relay

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
Relative measuring accuracy % 10
• for permanent overcurrent A max. 16 max. 40
• for overcurrent < 1 s A max. 320 max. 800
Type of current
• Alternating current Hz 50 / 60
Current setting A 1.6 ... 16 4 to 40 A
Power loss per device (max.) W 2.5
LV 1 N SIRIUS Innovations
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 739
8.10 Technical data
8.10.2.3 Connection for main circuit
Table 8- 20 Technical data for the main circuit connection, 3RR21 current monitoring relays

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
• Operating tool ∅ 5 ... 6 ∅ 5 ... 6
- Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)1) 2 x (1 to 2.5)1)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5)1) 2 x (2.5 to 10)1)
2 x (1 to 4)1)
(DIN 46228 Part 1) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)2) 2 x (2.5 to 6)1)
max. 1 x 10
1 x 121) 2 x (14 to 8)1)
- Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 to 4) 1 x (1 to 10)
(DIN 46228 Part 1)
SIRIUS Innovations
740 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.10 Technical data
Table 8- 21 Technical data for the auxiliary circuit connection, 3RR21 current monitoring relays

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
Circuit principle Closed-circuit principle
Operational current at 17 V minimum mA 5
Number of CO contacts for auxiliary contacts 1
• AC-15
- 24 V A 3
- 125 V A 3
- 250 V A 3
- 400 V A 3
• DC-13
- 24 V A 1
- 125 V A 0.2
- 250 V A 0.1
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 741
8.10 Technical data
8.10.2.5 Connecting the auxiliary circuit

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
- Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 to 1.5) 1)
• Operating tool mm 3.0 x 0.5
- Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 to 4); 2 x (0.25 to 1.5)
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 to 1.5)
8.10.2.6 Short-circuit protection

Either fuses (fused design) or motor starter protectors/circuit breakers (fuseless design) must
be used for short-circuit protection. The types of coordination must also be considered when
selecting load feeders from the tables.
References
More information Can be found

About the assignments of corresponding short- In the configuration guide titled "Configuring
circuit protective devices to overload relays with SIRIUS Innovations - Selection data for load
contactor feeders in fuseless and fused designs" (order no.:
3ZX1012-0RA21-1AC0)
SIRIUS Innovations
742 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.10 Technical data
Table 8- 23 General technical data for 3RR22 current monitoring relays
Type 3RR22 41 3RR22 42

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
Tripping in the event of Overcurrent, undercurrent, phase failure, incorrect phase sequence,
blocking current, fault current
• Number of phases 3
• Number of monitored phases 3
Overload warning Yes
• Reset options following tripping Manual and automatic reset
• Recovery time following error
- Automatic RESET s 0.2
- Manual RESET s 0.2
Adjustable ON-delay time
• On startup s 0 ... 99
• On upper or lower limit violation s 0 ... 30
Maximum response time ms 200
Adjustable switching hysteresis A 0.1 ... 3 0.1 ... 8
Current monitoring upper limit 2 to 5 x Imax
Relative repeat accuracy % 2
Ambient temperatures
• Storage/transport °C -40 ... +80
• Operation °C -25 ... +60
Resistance to extreme climates - % Condensation not permissible
Humidity
Repeat terminals
acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
Vibration resistance Hz 10 to 55 per 0.35 mm
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 743
8.10 Technical data
Type 3RR22 41 3RR22 42

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
- Burst acc. to kV 2 (power ports), 1 (signal ports)
IEC 61000-4-4
(corresponds to
severity 3)
- Surge acc. to kV 2 (line to ground), 1 (line to line)
IEC 61000-4-5
(corresponds to
severity 3)
IEC 61000-4-2
• Field-related interference V/m 10
suppression to IEC 61000-4-3
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Limit class A (Industry)
– Emitted interference
acc. to EN 55011 (CISPR 11) and EN 55022
(CISPR 22)
Mech. operating cycles 10.000.000
Electr. operating cycles at AC-15/230 V 100.000
SIRIUS Innovations
744 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.10 Technical data
Table 8- 24 Technical data for the main circuit, 3RR21 current monitoring relay
Type 3RR22 41 3RR22 42

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
Relative measuring accuracy % 5
• for permanent overcurrent A max. 16 max. 40
• for overcurrent < 1 s A max. 320 max. 800
Type of current
• Alternating current Hz 50 / 60
Current setting A 1.6 ... 16 4 to 40 A
Power loss per device (max.) W 2.5
LV 1 N SIRIUS Innovations.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 745
8.10 Technical data
Table 8- 25 Technical data for the main circuit connection, 3RR22 current monitoring relays

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
• Operating tool ∅ 5 ... 6 ∅ 5 ... 6
- Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5)1) 2 x (1 to 2.5)1)
2 x (0.75 to 2.5)1) 2 x (2.5 to 10)1)
2 x (1 to 4)1)
(DIN 46228 Part 1) 2 x (0.75 to 2.5)2) 2 x (2.5 to 6)1)
max. 1 x 10
1 x 121) 2 x (14 to 8)1)
- Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 to 4) 1 x (1 to 10)
(DIN 46228 Part 1)
SIRIUS Innovations
746 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.10 Technical data

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
Circuit principle Closed-circuit principle/open-circuit principle
Operational current at 17 V minimum mA 5
Contact block for signaling function 1
Current carrying capacity of the semiconductor output
• DC-13/24 to 240 V mA 20
• AC-14/24 to 240 V/at 50/60 Hz mA 20
Short-circuit strength No
Dropout voltage(max.) V 3.0
Residual current of the semiconductor output mA 0.035
(max.)
Minimum inrush current of the semiconductor mA 0.010
output
Number of CO contacts for auxiliary contacts 1
• AC-15
- 24 V A 3
- 125 V A 3
- 250 V A 3
- 400 V A 3
• DC-13
- 24 V A 1
- 125 V A 0.2
- 250 V A 0.1
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 747
8.10 Technical data

Size S00 S0
Width 45 mm 45 mm
- Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 to 4)1), 2 x (0.5 to 2.5 mm²)1)
• Operating tool mm 3.0 x 0.5
- Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 to 1.5)
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 to 1.5)
8.10.3.6 Short-circuit protection

Either fuses (fused design) or motor starter protectors/circuit breakers (fuseless design) must
be used for short-circuit protection. The types of coordination must also be considered when
selecting load feeders from the tables.
References

About the assignments of corresponding short- In the configuration guide titled "Configuring
circuit protective devices to overload relays with SIRIUS Innovations - Selection data for load
contactor feeders in fuseless and fused designs" (order no.:
3ZX1012-0RA21-1AC0)
SIRIUS Innovations
748 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Note
8.11.1 Dimension drawings for 3RR21 Basic analog setting current monitoring relay
3RR2141-1A.30 (screw connection, S00)
With contactor With terminal support for stand-alone assembly

3RR2141-2A.30 (spring-loaded connection, S00)

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 749
3RR2142-1A.30 (screw connection, S0)

D

3RR2142-2A.30 (spring-loaded connection, S0)

SIRIUS Innovations
750 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
8.11.2 Dimension drawings for 3RR22 Standard digital setting current monitoring relay
3RR2241-1F.30 (screw connection, S00)

3RR2241-2F.30 (spring-loaded connection, S00)

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 751
3RR2242-1F.30 (screw connection, S0)

D

3RR2242-2F.30 (spring-loaded connection, S0)

SIRIUS Innovations
752 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01

SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 753
3RR2141-1A.30
/ / / %$&'&
7 7 7 % $
Figure 8-7 Monitoring relay, 1 CO contact, 2-phase
3RR2141-2A.30, 3RR2142-.A.30
/ / / %$&'&
7 7 7 %
Figure 8-8 Monitoring relay, 1 CO contact, 2-phase
3RR2241-1F.30
/ / / %$&'&
7 7 7 4 % $
Figure 8-9 Monitoring relay, 1 CO contact, 1 semiconductor output, 3-phase
3RR2241-2F.30, 3RR2242-.F.30
/ / / %$&'&
7 7 7 4 %
Figure 8-10 Monitoring relay, 1 CO contact, 1 semiconductor output, 3-phase
SIRIUS Innovations
754 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Appendix A A
A.1 Types of coordination
Standard DIN EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) or IEC 60947-4-1 distinguishes between
two types of coordination (type of coordination), which are referred to as coordination type
"1" and coordination type "2". The short circuit that needs to be dealt with is cleared reliably
and safely with both types of coordination; the only differences are in the extent of the
damage sustained by the device following a short circuit.
Type of coordination 1
It is permissible for the fuseless load feeder to be incapable of functioning after each short-
circuit disconnection. Damage to the contactor and the overload release is also permissible.
For 3RA2, the motor starter protector alone always achieves type of coordination "2".
Type of coordination 2
After short-circuit disconnection, there must be no damage to the overload release or to any
other part. The 3RA2 fuseless load feeder can resume operation without any parts having to
be repaired or replaced. Welding of the contactor contacts only is permitted if these can be
separated easily without significant deformation.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 755
Appendix A
A.2 More information
A.2 More information
More information
More information is available from Siemens on the Internet via the following links.
● Product documentation
You will find a list of manuals/operating instructions, characteristic curves, and certificates
on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support).
● Product information
Catalogs and other informative documents can be obtained from the Information Center
and Download Center (www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/infomaterial).
● Online ordering system
You will find the online ordering system with all the latest data on the ordering and
information platform (http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/mall).
● Technical Assistance
Siemens supports you with all technical product and system enquiries – both before and
after delivery. You can access our Service & Support Portal on the Internet
(www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-assistance). You can also submit your question
directly to a technical consultant using our support request service.
SIRIUS Innovations
756 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Appendix A
A.3 Correction sheet
Correction sheet
Have you noticed any errors while reading this manual? If so, please use this form to tell us
about them. We welcome comments and suggestions for improvement.
Fax response
From (please complete):

To Name
SIEMENS AG
I IA CE MMS 3 Company/Department
92220 Amberg / Germany Address
_________________________________________________________________________________
Fax: +49 (0)9621-80-3337
Manual title:
Table A- 1 Errors, comments, and suggestions for improvements
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 757
Appendix A
SIRIUS Innovations
758 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Glossary
2-phase control
Two out of three active phases are controlled by means of semiconductors. For example,
SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters feature two anti-parallel thyristors in each of
phases L1 and L3. Phase L2 is an uncontrolled phase, which is routed through the starter via
a copper link and connected directly to the corresponding output terminal.
3-phase busbar
The 3-phase busbar enables several motor starter protectors or compact starters to be fed
using a single infeed terminal.
8US busbar adapter

The 8US busbar adapter enables motor starter protectors, load feeders, or compact starters
to be mechanically fastened and electrically connected to a busbar system.
a release
Short designation for "inverse-time delayed overload release".
Adapter for screw mounting

The adapters for screw mounting enable you to mount the compact starter on a level
surface.
Approvals
Approval of switching devices and switchgear in accordance with national standards, some
of which must be met on a mandatory basis, which exist in addition to "IEC", "CENELEC",
and "CEE" guidelines, for example. So, the North American market (the USA and Canada)
requires UL or CSA approvals, for instance. There is also an obligation to label the
equipment accordingly, i.e. the approval mark must be inscribed on the device itself.
AS-Interface
The AS-Interface is an open, international standard in accordance with EN 50295 and
IEC 62026-2 for process communication and field communication. Leading manufacturers of
actuators and sensors worldwide support AS-Interface. The electrical and mechanical
specifications of the AS-Interface Association are disclosed to interested companies.
Assembly method
SIRIUS offers maximum flexibility in terms of configuration. The system components can be
assembled as feeders or mounted separately.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 759
Glossary
Auxiliary switch block for compact starter

Optional auxiliary switch block in the following versions: 2 NO contacts, 2 NC contacts or
1 NO contact plus 1 NC contact.
AWG (American Wire Gauge)

A standard measure for conductors used in the USA, which is assigned to a specific cross-
sectional area of a conductor or wire. Each AWG number represents a jump of 26% in the
cross-sectional area. The thicker the wire, the smaller the AWG number.
Basic module
Function modules consist of at least one basic module, which can be expanded by adding
coupling modules as required. The basic module contains the control logic and, for star-delta
(wye-delta) modules, the time setting for starting in star operation and a 10-pin connector
into which the plug connectors on the coupling modules are inserted.
Bypass operation
Once the motor has been started up correctly, the thyristors in the SIRIUS soft starters are
subject to fully advanced control, meaning that the whole line voltage is applied to the motor
terminals. As the motor voltage does not have to be controlled during operation, the
thyristors are bridged by integral bypass contacts that are rated for AC1 current. This
minimizes the waste heat generated during continuous operation (which is caused by the
thyristors' power loss), and prevents the switching device's environment from heating up.
CLASS (time)
See "Tripping class".
Closing power
The power input of the magnet coils of a contactor, which is required to set the magnet
system in motion. In AC operation, this power input is usually higher than the holding power.
When running SIRIUS contactors in DC operation, the closing power is equal to the holding
power.
Connection system
SIRIUS has the right connection system for every environment: screw terminals, spring-
loaded terminals, or ring cable lug connection.
Contactor
Switching device with just one neutral position, usually without a mechanical lock, which is
not activated manually and which, under normal circuit conditions, including an operating
overload, can switch on, conduct and switch off currents. Contactors are primarily used
where high switching frequencies are involved. A distinction is made between: contactors for
switching motors (motor switches) and contactor relays for control purposes.
SIRIUS Innovations
760 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Glossary
Contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start

Contactor assembly which switches the motor to the star circuit during startup (1/3 of the
starting current compared to delta startup) and back to the delta circuit after a certain period
of time. Contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) start are used in situations where a
high starting current has to be avoided in order to reduce the effects on the mechanical
components or the line.
Control kit
Tool for closing the main contacts manually by means of the handle.
Coupling module
Function modules consist of at least one basic module, which can be expanded by adding
coupling modules as required. The coupling module includes one NO contact and one 10-
pole connecting cable with a plug connector for insertion into the coupling module and basic
module; it is used for the mutual interlocking of star and delta operation. The communication-
capable version transfers signals to the other contactors and implements the electrical
interlock (reversing/star-delta (wye-delta) start) - in this case, there is no integrated
connecting cable.
Current limiting for soft starters

The SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter measures the phase current (motor current) continuously
with the help of integrated current transformers. The motor current that flows during the
startup process can be actively limited by means of the soft starter. The current limiting
function takes priority over the voltage ramp function. As soon as a parameterizable current
limit is reached, in other words, the voltage ramp is interrupted and the motor is started with
the current limiting value until it has started up successfully.
The current limiting function is always active with SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters. If the current
limiting potentiometer is set to the right endstop (maximum), the starting current is limited to
five times the set rated motor current.
The current limiting value is set to the current required during startup as a factor of the rated
motor current. Since the starting current is asymmetrical, the set current corresponds to the
arithmetic mean value for the three phases.
Current monitoring relay

Current monitoring relays are used to monitor motors or other loads for underload and
overload. The level of current permits extensive conclusions to be drawn about the powered
process or plant, e.g. a torn belt, pump no-load operation, tool wear, hoist overload or
blockage. With multi-phase monitoring, the phase sequence, phase failure, or fault current
can be monitored too. If the current measured values are outside the defined range, an alert
will be issued or a disconnection initiated either immediately or with a time delay.
Current setting range (of an overcurrent release)

The range between the lowest and highest current value to which the release can be set.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 761
Glossary
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism

Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms enable motor starter protectors/circuit breakers
and compact starters to be operated with the control cabinet doors closed.
Electrical dependency between switching devices, implemented by means of circuitry.
Typical for contactor controls: A contactor may only be switched on if a different one has
previously been switched off, for example. Auxiliary contacts or auxiliary switches are used
to realize an electrical interlock.
Prerequisite for using electrical equipment in hazardous areas conforming to DIN EN 50014
(VDE 0170/0171). In terms of explosion protection, you must ensure that equipment which
may generate explosive arcs (plasma) during operation is enclosed in a flameproof casing.
This means that, although the potentially explosive mixture could penetrate the enclosure, if
an explosion were to occur inside it then no explosive flame could escape.
Function module
Different function modules are used for:
● Direct-on-line start
● Reversing start
● Star-delta (wye-delta) start
Function modules are also available in communication-capable versions with AS-i or IO-Link,
in order to establish a connection to a higher-level control system.
Function module for direct-on-line start

This function module is used for the time-delayed switching of contactors.
Function module for reversing start

The function module for reversing start is used to control a reversing starter. The version
without a fieldbus interface consists of bridge modules, while the version for AS-Interface or
IO-Link comprises basic and coupling modules. In all three cases, the electrical interlocks for
protection in both directions are already in place.

The function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start is used for toggling between star (wye)
and delta operation. It consists of one basic module and two coupling modules. The
electrical interlocks are already in place in the modules.
SIRIUS Innovations
762 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Glossary
Generalized phase control for soft starters

With SIRIUS soft starters, the rms value of the motor voltage is increased (from a settable
starting voltage) to the rated motor voltage within a definable start time by means of the
phase control of two anti-parallel thyristor pairs.
The motor current changes in proportion to the voltage applied to the motor. As a result, the
starting current is reduced by the factor of this voltage.
There is a quadratic relationship between the torque and the voltage applied to the motor. As
a result, the starting torque is reduced quadratically in relation to this voltage.
Heavy-duty starting
Heavy starting exists if a motor requires more than 10 to 15 seconds from being switched on
to reaching its rated speed on account of its special load conditions. When heavy starting
exists, the load torque of the machine to be driven is greater during startup than in rated
operation. It takes a long time for the rated speed to be reached because large centrifugal
masses need to be accelerated (e.g. on rolling mills, centrifuges). Special overload relays
(heavy-duty starting relays, solid-state overload relays) or thermistor motor protection
devices must be used to protect heavy-starting motors.
Heavy-duty starting for soft starters

Assuming that certain conditions and constraints apply, the SIRIUS soft starter size must be
at least one performance class higher than the motor rating for heavy-duty starting
(CLASS 20 startup). The tables in the relevant product manual provide sample set values
and device dimensions.
Holding power
The power input of the magnet coils of a contactor, which depends on the continuously
consumed current, and which is required to hold the magnet system in the ON state.
Infeed system for 3RA6

The infeed system for 3RA6 enables several compact starters to be fed using an infeed
system designed to modular principles with retained wiring.
Instantaneous short-circuit release

Release for a motor starter protector/circuit breaker, which provides short-circuit protection
for the downstream load or the cable. The instantaneous short-circuit release must disable
all poles of the motor starter protector/circuit breaker (acc. to UL) instantaneously or with a
short-time delay in the event of a short circuit.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 763
Glossary
Intrinsic device protection for soft starters

The SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter features integrated intrinsic device protection, which protects
the thyristors from thermal overload. This is achieved by measuring the current via
transformers in the three phases on the one hand, and also by measuring the temperature
via thermal sensors on the thyristor heat sink. If the internal, permanently set trip value is
exceeded, the soft starter will switch off automatically.
Inverse-time delayed overload release (a release)

A thermal overload release which works with a time delay that decreases as the current
rises.
IO-Link
IO-Link is a new communication standard for sensors and actuators - defined by the
PROFIBUS User Organization (PNO). The IO-Link technology is based on a point-to-point
connection of the sensors and actuators to the control. Therefore, this technology is not a
bus system, but an enhanced version of a classic point-to-point connection. In addition to the
cyclic operating data, comprehensive parameters and diagnostics data are transferred for
the connected sensors and actuators. The connection system consists of a three-pole
standard cable or three single wires.
Leakage current
If semiconductors are used to control the current flow, no galvanic isolation can take place
within the device. This means that, even when the supply is disconnected, if a connected
load is present then a small residual current, known as the leakage current, will still flow.
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear combination

A switchgear and controlgear combination is a grouping of one or more low-voltage
switching devices with associated equipment for controlling, measuring, and indicating,
together with the associated protective devices and control devices. The manufacturer is
responsible for all assembly work, including all internal electrical and mechanical
connections and structural parts.
Main switch
Every industrial machine which falls under the scope of DIN EN 60204 Part 1 (VDE 0113,
Part 1) must be equipped with a main switch which disconnects all electrical equipment from
the network while cleaning, maintenance, and repair work is being carried out, as well as
during long periods of downtime. Usually a switch which can be operated by hand is
stipulated in order to prevent electrical or mechanical hazards. The main switch can also
function as an EMERGENCY-STOP device.
It must meet the following requirements:
1. Externally accessible handle
2. Only one "Off" position and one "On" position with allocated stops
3. Two positions labeled "0" and "I"
4. Lockable "Off" position
SIRIUS Innovations
764 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Glossary
5. Cover for the power supply terminals to protect against accidental contact
6. The switching capacity must correspond to AC-23 for motor switches and AC-22 for load-
break switches (utilization category).
7. Switch position displayed automatically
Mirror contacts of power contactors

A mirror contact is an NC contact, which cannot be closed at the same time as an NO main
contact (according to EN 60947-5-1, Annex F).
Modular system
The SIRIUS modular system offers all the functions and devices needed for switching,
starting, protecting, and monitoring motors and systems. In other words, it provides a
modular range of standard components, which are perfectly matched to one another, can be
combined really easily, and use the same accessories.
Motor protection
Protection for three-phase motors against overload and short circuit, i.e. protection for the
winding insulation against impermissible heating.
Motor starter protector

Generally a latch-operated switch, which can switch on, conduct, and switch off currents in
the circuit under normal operating conditions; it can also switch on the current up to the point
of a short circuit under specified operating conditions that are not normal, conduct current for
a defined period, and interrupt it too.
n release
Short designation for "instantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent release".
OFF-delay
The time interval effected by a timing relay or timer (on contactors, for example) between a
switch-off command being issued and the contacts of the timing relay or timer reaching their
initial position.
ON time in %
The duty ratio ON time in % is the ratio between the load duration and the cycle duration for
loads that are frequently switched on and off.
Operating range
Range within which the operating voltage of a contactor may deviate from the rated
operating voltage without impairing the operational reliability of the switching device (e.g.
contactor drop-out).
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 765
Glossary
Overload relay
Inverse-time delayed relay which responds to an overload in accordance with a time-current
characteristic, thus protecting the switching device and load from overloads.
Overload release
Overcurrent release that provides protection against overload.
Phase loss sensitivity

A product feature which enables the protective device to respond even when a three-phase
asynchronous motor is running in single-phase operation, before the motor sustains thermal
damage (DIN VDE 0660 Part 102).
Polarity balancing for soft starters

In 2-phase controlled SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters, the current that results from
the superimposition of the two controlled phases flows in the uncontrolled phase. The main
advantages of 2-phase control include the more compact size compared to a 3-phase
version and the lower hardware costs.
The occurrence of DC components, caused by the phase control and the overlapping of
phase currents, is a negative physical effect of 2-phase control during the startup process
that can mean a louder noise is produced by the motor. The "Polarity Balancing" control
principle was developed and patented by SIEMENS to prevent these DC components during
starting.
""Polarity Balancing" effectively eliminates these DC components during the startup phase. It
allows the motor to be started up with a constant speed, torque, and current rise. The
acoustic quality of the startup process comes very close to that of a 3-phase controlled
startup. This is made possible by the continuous dynamic alignment and balancing of current
half-waves with different polarities during motor startup.
Positively driven contacts for contactor relays

Positively driven contact elements are a combination of "n" NO contacts and "m" NC
contacts, which are designed such that they cannot be closed simultaneously (EN 60947-5-
1, Annex L).
Preferred wiring for star-delta (wye-delta) starters

According to the preferred wiring, the motor terminals of a motor running in the clockwise
direction are connected correctly if phase L1 is connected to motor terminals U1 and V2, L2
to V1 and W2, and L3 to W1 and U2. This order should be observed during installation in
order to keep the switchover current peaks in a motor running in the clockwise direction as
low as possible during switchover from star to delta operation.
SIRIUS Innovations
766 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Glossary
Protective technology
A basic distinction can be made between two current-based protective technologies: thermal
and electronic protection. Motor starter protectors and thermal overload relays provide
protection by means of bimetal releases, while solid-state overload relays, 3RW40 soft
starters, and 3RA6 compact starters offer protection via electronic means. Electronic
protective devices not only offer a significantly lower level of power loss, they also provide a
wide setting range of 1:4 and, as a result, much less variance than thermal releases. The
SIRIUS modular system offers the right solution for every type of switching technology.
Ramp time
With SIRIUS soft starters, the length of the set ramp time determines the time taken to
increase the motor voltage from the parameterized starting voltage to the line voltage. This
influences the motor's acceleration torque, which drives the load during the startup process.
A longer ramp time results in a lower acceleration torque as the motor is started up. The
startup is slower and smoother as a result. The ramp time should be long enough for the
motor to reach its nominal speed. If the time selected is too short, in other words if the ramp
time ends before the motor has started up successfully, a very high starting current that can
even equal the direct starting current at the same speed occurs at this instant.
Ramp-down time
The "Ramp-down time" potentiometer on the SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter allows you to
specify how long power should still be supplied to the motor after the ON command has
been removed. The torque generated in the motor is reduced by means of a voltage ramp
function within this ramp-down time and the application stops smoothly.
Ramp-up detection for soft starters

The SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter is equipped with an integrated ramp-up detection function. If
it detects a motor startup, the motor voltage is immediately increased to 100% of the line
voltage. The internal bypass contacts close and the thyristors are bridged.
Rated conditional short-circuit current Iq

The guaranteed short-circuit breaking capacity of switchgear assemblies and load feeders,
also called "rated conditional short-circuit current".
Rated data for the control circuit

The most important rated data for the control circuit in terms of selecting a contactor are the
rated control supply voltage Us (voltage of the coil terminal) with the associated frequency
(e.g. 50 Hz), as well as the power input of the coil (closing power and holding power).
Rated data for the main circuit

The most important rated data for the main circuit in terms of selecting a contactor are the
rated operational current Ie (current specified by the conditions of use) or the rated power
(motor power), as well as the corresponding rated voltage Ue.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 767
Glossary
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)

Peak value of a surge voltage with a defined waveform and polarity, which can be applied to
the device under specified test conditions without the device failing and to which the
clearances refer. The rated impulse withstand voltage of a device must be equal to or
greater than the transient overvoltages which occur in the network on which the device is
being used.
Rated insulation voltage Ui

Voltage value which specifies the insulation strength of the switching device or accessory
and to which the insulation tests and the creepages and clearances refer. The maximum
rated operational voltage must not be greater than the rated insulation voltage under any
circumstances.
Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics

Compared to the rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Icu, the test conditions here
are stricter and the short-circuit current is usually lower. Determined using test sequence II,
operating sequence O-t-CO-t-CO (O = open, t = time, CO = close-open). The function of the
motor starter protector/circuit breaker must remain unrestricted following this test.
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn

According to IEC 60947-2 and DIN EN 60947-2, the rated short-circuit breaking capacity of a
motor starter protector/circuit breaker is the value of the short-circuit current, which it can
switch off at the rated operational voltage, rated frequency, and specified power factor (or
specified time constant). The value of the prospective current (for alternating current, the rms
value of the AC component) specified by the manufacturer applies. For AC motor starter
protectors/circuit breakers, the rated short-circuit breaking capacity must be independent of
the magnitude of the DC (direct-current) component. The rated short-circuit breaking
capacity also ensures that the motor starter protector/circuit breaker can switch off every
current up to the rated short-circuit breaking capacity in the event of a line-frequency
recovery voltage with 110% of the rated operational voltage.
This applies
● For alternating current, at every value of the power factor, but not lower than the value
defined in the relevant test specification
● For direct current, if no other specifications have been made to the contrary by the
manufacturer, with every time constant, but not greater than the value defined in the
relevant test specification.
The short-circuit breaking capacity does not apply in the event of a line-frequency recovery
voltage above 110% of the rated operational voltage.
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Icu

Maximum short-circuit current Ik (limit value of the rated short-circuit breaking capacity),
which can switch the motor starter protector/circuit breaker off under specific conditions.
Determined using test sequence III, operating sequence O-t-CO (O = open, t = time,
CO = close-open). The function of the motor starter protector/circuit breaker may be
restricted following this test.
SIRIUS Innovations
768 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Glossary
Recovery time
When a protection function in a switching device has been tripped (e.g. motor starter
protector, soft starter, overload relay, or current monitoring relay), the motor cannot be
restarted until a recovery time has elapsed. The length of the recovery time will vary,
depending on the cause of the error. For more information, refer to the corresponding
product documentation.
Response delay
The response delay is the time from when you start to enter a command until the first contact
connection is made, at the contactor, for example.
RoHS
EC Directive 2002/95/EC concerning the restriction of the use of certain hazardous
substances in electrical and electronic equipment regulates the use of hazardous
substances in devices and components. The English abbreviation RoHS is used to refer to
this directive: (Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances), as well as all related
measures for implementing it into national legislation.
Service life
Period of time for which the switching device will work properly under normal operating
conditions. This is specified as the number of operating cycles, the electrical durability
(contact erosion), and the mechanical durability (operating cycles without load).
Short-circuit strength
This is the resistivity of a switching device in the closed state, along with its components
(e.g. releases), or a complete switchgear, to the electrodynamic (dynamic strength) and
thermal (thermal strength) stresses which arise in the event of a short circuit. The
characteristic for the dynamic stress is the rated peak withstand current, which is the
maximum instantaneous value of the short-circuit current. The characteristic for the thermal
stress of the short-circuit current is the root-mean-square value of the short-circuit current
throughout its duration.
SIL (Safety Integrity Level)

Discrete level (one of three possibilities) for defining safety integrity specifications of safety-
related control functions. Safety integrity level 3 is the highest possible level, level 1 the
lowest.
Soft ramp-down
The same principle as that used for soft starting is applied during the ramp-down process.
This ensures that the torque generated in the motor is reduced gradually, so that the
application can ramp down smoothly.
In "soft ramp-down" mode, the natural stop process of the load is decelerated. The function
is used when the load must be prevented from stopping abruptly. This is typically the case in
applications with a low mass inertia or a high counter-torque.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 769
Glossary
Soft starter
This is a motor starter which reduces the starting torque (starting torque, break loose torque)
and the starting current of the motor in order to decrease the vibrations experienced by the
driven machine and to prevent current peaks in the network. The starting torque is reduced
because the supply voltage is initially set to a value lower than the rated voltage of the motor
(the starting torque is proportional to the square of the voltage applied). The terminal voltage
can be increased as soon as the motor starts to run. Classic ways of reducing the terminal
voltage are star-delta (wye-delta) start, startup via resistors in the stator, and startup with an
auto-transformer, for example. The use of solid-state motor controllers with switched thyristor
circuits is becoming more and more prevalent as a way of controlling the terminal voltage on
squirrel-cage motors. See also "Soft starting" and "Soft ramp-down".
Soft starting
Since the motor voltage is controlled (phase control) by an electronic soft starter during the
startup process, the consumed starting current and the starting torque generated in the
motor are also controlled.
Space above the arc chute

When a switching device is being operated, particularly when highly inductive load currents
or short-circuit currents are being switched off, the ionized gases generated by the arc are
pressed out of the openings in the arc chute. In order to ensure that the concentration of
these ionized gases does not reach a hazardous level, a specific clearance must be
provided above or in front of the device. This space above the arc chute is defined by the
manufacturer (usually on the dimension drawings) and depends on whether exposed live
conductors (e.g. busbars), conductive structural components, and insulating partitions can
be found on the switching device. Arc chute attachments can be mounted to larger motor
starter protectors in order to reduce the required clearance and therefore the space required
in the control cabinet. No space is required above the arc chute for vacuum circuit breakers
and vacuum contactors, since the arc will not escape from the vacuum chute and no ionized
gases will be released.
Star-delta (wye-delta) starter

See "Contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta) start".
Starting current
Three-phase asynchronous motors have a high direct starting current Istarting. Depending on
the motor type, this current can be between three and fifteen times as high as the rated
operational current. Seven or eight times the rated motor current can be assumed as a
typical value.
Starting torque
The starting torque and the breakdown torque can usually be assumed to be between two
and four times the rated torque. From the point of view of the load machine, this means that
the starting and acceleration forces exert a higher mechanical load on the machine and the
product being conveyed compared to nominal operation.
SIRIUS Innovations
770 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Glossary
Starting voltage
The starting voltage determines the starting torque of the motor for SIRIUS soft starters. A
lower starting voltage results in a lower starting torque and a lower starting current. The
starting voltage selected must be sufficiently high to ensure that motor starts up smoothly as
soon as the start command is received by the soft starter.
Switching frequency
Number of operating cycles per time unit (e.g. 15 operations per hour).
The maximum permissible switching frequency must not be exceeded because the SIRIUS
soft starters could be damaged due to thermal overloading. The switching frequency of
SIRIUS soft starters size S0 to S3 can be increased by installing an optional additional fan.
Switching technology
A basic distinction can be made between two types of switching technology: On the
electromechanical side, there are contactors, contactor assemblies, and compact starters
which can be used to implement solutions for direct-on-line start, reversing start, and star-
delta (wye-delta) start. Frequent switching or reversing, soft starting, and soft ramp-down, on
the other hand, are initiated using electronic switching devices: solid-state switching devices
and soft starters. The SIRIUS modular system offers the right solution for every type of
switching technology.
Temperature compensation
With inverse-time delayed (thermal) overload releases and relays, not only the current, but
also the ambient temperature has an effect on the tripping time. An additional bimetal strip,
which is not heated up by the current, can be used to compensate for the influence of the
ambient temperature. If solid-state overload relays are used, electronic compensation is
possible.
Terminals for "Self Protected Combination Motor Controller Type E"

The terminals conform to the clearances and creepage distances stipulated by UL 508
(Type E).
Thermistor motor protection

Motor protection provided by temperature sensors (PTC sensors) integrated in the windings.
These sensors monitor the winding temperature directly.
Time-delayed auxiliary switch

Module which can be integrated into various combinations of auxiliary switches and can
usually be retrofitted to a switching device too.
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 771
Glossary
Timing relay
Switching device with electronic time delay, which opens or closes contacts after a specified
period of time has elapsed.
Tripping characteristic curve

The tripping characteristic (curve) is the graphical representation of the relationship between
the tripping time and the controlling variable. The time-current diagram can be used to find
out, for example, how long it will take for the release or the tripping relay to respond at a
particular current.
Tripping class (CLASS)

The tripping class of a current-dependent overload relay (including thermal and solid-state
overload relays and releases) specifies the maximum tripping time from cold at a particular
load. The tripping class number (e.g. CLASS 10, 20, 30) represents the maximum
permissible tripping time in seconds when the relay is subjected to a symmetrical 3-pole load
from cold with 7.2 times the current setting (IEC 947-4-1; DIN VDE 0660 Part 107). Tripping
classes 20 and 30 are used for protecting the motor under heavy-duty starting conditions, for
example.
Tripping current (of an overload release)

The current value at which a release trips within a certain time.
Standard DIN EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) or IEC 60947-4-1 distinguishes between
two types of coordination (type of coordination), which are referred to as coordination type
"1" and coordination type "2". The short circuit that needs to be dealt with is cleared reliably
and safely with both types of coordination; the only differences are in the extent of the
damage sustained by the device following a short circuit.
For additional information, please refer to the "" appendix.
Utilization category
According to DIN EN 60947-4-1, the application area of and the load applied to power
contactors can be identified by looking at the specified utilization category in conjunction with
the specified rated operational current or the motor power and the rated voltage. An example
is utilization category AC-3 for starting and switching off squirrel-cage motors.
Voltage ramp
The SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters achieve soft starting by means of a voltage
ramp. The motor terminal voltage is increased from a parameterizable starting voltage up to
the line voltage within a definable start time.
SIRIUS Innovations
772 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Index
Function modules for connection to the automation

level,
2 Function modules for mounting on contactors,
Insulating stop,
2-conductor connection, 153
LED display indicator module, 191
Link module for motor starter protector,
Link module for two contactors in series, 201
3
Mechanical latch, 184, 186
3-phase busbar system OFF-delay device, 182
Motor starter protector, 422, 437, 439 Parallel switching connector,
Motor starter protectors, 438 Pneumatic timer,
3-phase busbar system (motor starter protectors) Sealable cover, 197
3-phase infeed terminal, 438 Solder pin adapter, 192, 193
Type E starters, 437, 439 Surge suppressor, 169, 170, 177
3-phase infeed terminal Terminal module,
Contactors, 198 Accessories - Current monitoring relays
3RV2917 infeed system Sealable cover, 731
Motor starter protector, 446, 449, 450 Terminal support for stand-alone assembly, 728,
729, 730
Accessories - Function modules for mounting on
4 contactors
Sealable cover, 674
4-pole contactors, 124, 125
Accessories - Load feeders
Accessories for busbar mounting, 615
Accessories for DIN rail mounting, 614
A
Busbar adapter, 615
Accessories Device holder, 615
Contactors, 154 Link module, 611
Function modules for mounting on contactors, 674 Starter combinations, 610
Load feeders, 609 Accessories - Motor starter protectors
Motor starter protector, 407 3-phase busbar system, 422, 437, 438, 439
Overload relay, 523 3RV2917 infeed system, 446, 449, 450
Solid-state switching devices, 347 Auxiliary release, 416, 417, 418
Standard current monitoring relay, 728 Auxiliary switch blocks, 410, 411, 412
Accessories - Contactors Busbar adapter, 440, 442, 443, 444
3-phase infeed terminal, Disconnector module, 419, 420, 421
Additional load module, 187 Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism, 424,
Assembly kit for contactor assembly for star-delta 425, 426, 429
(wye-delta) start, Enclosures and mounting accessories, 432, 433
Assembly kit for reversing contactor assembly, Installation rules, 409
Auxiliary switch blocks, 160, 163, 166 Link module for contactor, 452
Coil terminal module, 189, 194, 195 Phase barriers/terminal block, 422, 423
Control kit, 188 Sealable cover, 436
Coupling link, 189, 190 Signaling switch, 413, 414, 415
Cover for ring cable lug, Accessories - Overload relays
EMC suppression module, 178, 179, 181 Cable release, 529, 530
Fitting of auxiliary switches, 44, 156 Cover for ring cable lug, 535
Mechanical remote RESET, 527, 529, 530
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 773
Index
Module for electrical remote RESET, 531, 532 Assembly kit for contactor assembly for star-delta
Release slide, 527 (wye-delta) start
Sealable cover, 533 Contactors, 218, 220
Terminal support for stand-alone assembly, 524 Assembly kit for reversing contactor assembly
Accessories - Solid-state switching devices Contactors, 211, 212
Insulating stop, 347 Automatic reset
Link module for motor starter protector, 348, 349 Current monitoring relay, 722
Accessories for busbar mounting Auxiliary contacts (contactors), 152, 160
Load feeders, 615 Integrated, 107, 160
Accessories for DIN rail mounting Time-delayed, 166
Load feeders, 614 Auxiliary contacts (motor starter protector), 392
Active current Auxiliary contacts (overload relay), 522
Current monitoring relay, 724 Auxiliary release
Active current monitoring Motor starter protector, 416, 417, 418
Current monitoring relay, 733 Auxiliary release (motor starter protector)
Actuation EMERGENCY OFF disconnection, 416
Solid-state contactor, 328 Shunt release, 416
Solid-state reversing contactor, 328 Undervoltage release, 416
Additional load module Voltage ranges, 417
Contactors, 187 Auxiliary switch
Adjustment correction factors Load feeders, 565
Frequency converter, 399 Overload relay, 500, 513
Advantages Auxiliary switch blocks
Contactors, 114 Contactor relays, 126
Current monitoring relay, 686 Contactors, 160, 163, 166
Motor starter protector, 384 Motor starter protector, 410, 411, 412
Overload relay, 489 Reversing contactor assemblies, 133
Solid-state switching devices, 325 Auxiliary switch blocks (contactors)
Ambient temperature Fitting according to standards, 164
Contactor relays, 118 Fitting rules, 163
Contactors for railway applications, 121 For contactor relays, 166
Load feeders, 573 Maximum number, 163
Motor starter protector, 397, 404 Solid-state compatible, 161
Overload relay, 507 With overlapping contacting, 161
Power contactors, 119, 120 Auxiliary switch blocks (motor starter protector)
Solid-state switching devices, 319 Solid-state compatible, 410
Apparent current Auxiliary switches (contactors)
Current monitoring relay, 724, 733 Solid-state time delay, 210
Application examples Auxiliary switches (function modules for mounting on
Current monitoring relay, 694, 695, 696 contactors)
Applications Solid-state time delay, 643, 657
Contactors, 113, 116
Current monitoring relay, 685
Function modules for mounting on contactors, 646 B
Load feeders, 568
Basic module, 219, 222
Motor starter protector, 382
Function modules for mounting on contactors, 648,
Overload relay, 488
649
Solid-state switching devices, 318
Blocked rotor
Approvals, 24, 101
Contactors, 101
Blocking current monitoring
AS-Interface, 20, 37, 86, 94, 135, 219
Current monitoring relay, 691, 721, 733
Assembly, 218, 220
Blocking voltage
SIRIUS Innovations
774 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Index
Solid-state switching devices, 327 Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch, 671

Busbar adapter Star-delta (wye-delta) start, 672
Load feeders, 599, 601, 602, 615 Timing relay, 669, 670
Motor starter protector, 440, 442, 443, 444 Connection systems, 32
Busbar mounting Contactor assembly for star-delta (wye-delta)
Load feeders, 593 start, 111
Busbar system Contactor relays, 105
Load feeders, 598 Contactors, 152
C 669, 671
Load feeders, 566, 567, 576
Cable break
Motor starter protector, 380, 403
Overload relay, 486, 513
Cable release
Power contactors, 107
Reversing contactor assembly, 110
CCW rotation
Solid-state switching devices, 317, 344
Contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta)
Contactor assemblies, 139
start, 139
Certifications, 24
start, 139
Changeover delay
Changing the direction of rotation, 139
Control circuit, 140
start, 136
Control circuit wiring, 136, 218, 222
Reversing contactor assemblies, 132
Load feeders, 567
Characteristics, 24
Main circuit, 140
Characteristics - switching frequency/load
Solid-state contactor, 362
Contactor relays, 118
Solid-state reversing contactor, 367
Contactors, 198
Circuit breaker
Extended operating range, 127
Switching, 116
Class, 136
Contactors with UC drive, 127
Clearance, 422
Contacts
Clockwise rotation
Reversing contactor assemblies, 134, 211
Control data, 87
Closed-circuit principle
Control kit
Contactors, 188
Coil terminal, 189, 194, 195
Correction sheet, 757
Overload relay, 513
Counterclockwise rotation
Coil terminal module
Reversing contactor assemblies, 134, 211
Contactors, 189, 194, 195
Coupling driver
Combinations, 34, 67, 70
Communication
Coupling link
Compact starters, 25, 30, 33, 61
Coupling module, 219, 222
Conductor cross-sections, 79
Configuration guidelines (motor starter protectors)
649
Frequency converter, 398
Coupling relays, 116, 130, 169
Inverter with pulsed voltage, 398
Cover for ring cable lug
Connection, 35
Contactors, 196
Overload relay, 535
start, clockwise rotation, 137
Creepage distance, 422
CSA
start, counterclockwise rotation, 139
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 775
Index
Motor starter protector, 395, 467 Solid-state switching devices, 331

Current limiting Direct-on-line starter, 132
Current monitoring relay, 696 Load feeders, 576, 598, 605
Current monitoring relay, 731 Disconnector module
Current monitoring relays, 731 Motor starter protector, 419, 420, 421
Current overshoot Disconnector module (motor starter protector)
Current monitoring relay, 733 Maintenance work, 419
Current reduction Display
Motor starter protector, 405 Current monitoring relay, 710, 726
Current setting Displays
Motor starter protector, 404 Current monitoring relay, 734
Current undershoot Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
Current monitoring relay, 733 Motor starter protector, 424, 425, 426, 429
Customer benefits, 40 Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism (motor
CW rotation starter protector)
Contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) Door interlocking, 424
start, 139 Isolating function, 424
Locking, 428, 431
Maintenance work, 424
D Operation, 426
Double ground fault
DC current
Drive types
DC loads
Contactors, 117
Overload relay, 494
Derating
E
Overload relay, 507 Electromagnetic interference
Derating (motor starter protectors) Solid-state switching devices, 339
3RV2917 infeed system, 449 EMC suppression module
Device holder Contactors, 178, 179, 181
Load feeders, 599, 615 EMERGENCY STOP door-coupling rotary operating
Device versions mechanism
Contactors, 104 Motor starter protector, 424
Current monitoring relay, 685 EMERGENCY STOP rotary operating mechanism, 432
Function modules for mounting on contactors, 643 Enclosures and mounting accessories
Load feeders, 564 Motor starter protector, 432, 433
Motor starter protector, 381 Enclosures and mounting accessories (motor starter
Overload relay, 487 protectors)
Solid-state switching devices, 316 Enclosures, 433
Diagnostics Flush-mounting enclosure, 434
Current monitoring relay, 709, 726 Front plates, 435
Diagnostics data, 37, 87, 89 Energy efficiency, 39
DIN EN 50005, 164 Environment, 38
DIN EN 50011, 165 Equipment features
DIN EN 50012, 165 Contactor relay, 4-pole, 106
DIN rail adapter Contactor relay, 8-pole, 106
Load feeders, 594 Current monitoring relay, 687, 688
Diode combination, 169, 175, 176 Function module for direct-on-line start, 649
Direct-on-line start, 30, 67, 69 Function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start, 649
Function modules for mounting on contactors, 643, Motor starter protector, 383
645, 646 Overload relay, 490, 491
SIRIUS Innovations
776 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Index
Power contactor, 108, 109 G

Ground fault
Current monitoring relay, 694, 733
Overload relay, 499, 501, 505
H
Overload relay, 506
Extension shaft Heavy-duty starting
Holding power, 117, 130
F Hybrid connection
Load feeders, 576, 613
Fault current
Hysteresis
Fault current monitoring
Finger-safety
I
Overload relay, 535
Fitting of auxiliary switches Inductive loads, 169, 179
Contactors, 44, 156 Solid-state switching devices, 340
Freewheel diode, 169, 175 Infeed systems, 53, 54, 64
Frequency converter Innovations, 19, 20, 27
Motor starter protector, 398, 399, 400 Inrush currents
Overload relay, 505 Motor starter protector, 393
Front plates, 435 Installation altitude
Function module for direct-on-line start, 649 Contactors, 122
Function modules for mounting on contactors, 660, Motor starter protector, 396
665 Installation guidelines
Function module for star-delta (wye-delta) start, 649 Load feeders, 572, 573
Control circuit wiring, 648 Motor starter protector, 401
Function modules for mounting on contactors, 662, Motor starter protectors with limiter function, 403
666 Installation rules
Pre-assembled, 648 Accessories - Motor starter protectors, 409
Function modules, 209 Insulating stop, 206
Contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) Contactors, 206
start, 111, 135, 218, 222 Solid-state switching devices, 347
Function modules for connection to the automation Insulation strength, 422
level, 209 Interfering signals, 169
Contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) Interlock
start, 219 Contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta)
Contactors, 209 start, 136
Function modules for mounting on contactors, 210 Electrical, 211, 213, 648
Contactor assemblies for star-delta (wye-delta) Mechanical, 211, 212, 218
start, 210, 219 Internal circuit diagrams, 85, 293, 374, 482, 559, 637,
Contactors, 210 679, 753
Setting times, 673 Load feeders, 638
Function modules for reversing starting, 643 Overload relay, 560, 561, 562
Fuses Solid-state switching devices, 375
Solid-state switching devices, 336 Inverter with pulsed voltage, 398
IO-Link, 20, 37, 87, 89, 123, 135, 219
IT system
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 777
Index
Motor starter protector, 393 Motor starter protector, 393

Manual motor controller
Motor starter protector, 395, 467, 469
K Manual motor controller suitable for tap conductor
protection in group installations
Knob
Manual RESET
Maximum load integral
L
Latched contactor relays, 126 Mechanical latch
LED display indicator module Contactors, 184, 186
Contactors, 191 Mechanical remote RESET
Line capacity, 144 Overload relay, 527, 529, 530
Link module, 203 Memory
Hybrid connection, 589, 613 Current monitoring relay, 708, 722
Load feeder, 610, 611 Menu navigation
Screw connection, 577, 611 Current monitoring relay, 714
Spring-loaded connection, 579, 612 Minimum clearance
Link module for contactor Contactors, 147
Link module for motor starter protector Function modules for mounting on contactors, 660
Contactors, 203 Load feeders, 572
Solid-state switching devices, 348, 349 Motor starter protector, 401
Link module for two contactors in series Overload relay, 508
Contactors, 201 Power contactors, 119
Load current monitoring Solid-state switching devices, 341
Current monitoring relay, 691, 724 Mirror contacts, 103
Load feeders, 614 Modular system, 19, 21, 25, 29, 30, 33, 38
Combination of individual devices, 567, 570, 576 Module for electrical remote RESET
Pre-assembled complete devices, 566, 570 Overload relay, 531, 532
Solid-state switching devices, 329, 339 Molded-plastic enclosure, 432
Tested device combinations, 569 Monitoring, 25
Load monitoring Monitoring function
Current monitoring relay, 690 Current monitoring relay, 733
Load shedding Motor dimensioning
Current monitoring relay, 695 Solid-state switching devices, 330
Load surges Motor feeder (overload relay)
Current monitoring relay, 694 Design, 503
Locking Motor protection
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism, 428, Current monitoring relay, 696
431 Motor starter protector, 391
Long control cables, 141 Motor starter protectors, 438
Long control cables (contactors) Mounting position
Switching off, 144 Contactors, 147
Switching on, 141 Current monitoring relay, 698
Long starting Function modules for mounting on contactors, 660
Current monitoring relay, 694 Motor starter protector, 401
Overload relay, 508
M
Main switch
SIRIUS Innovations
778 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Index
N Motor starter protector, 422, 423

Phase failure
Normal starting
Current monitoring relay, 691, 694, 696, 718, 733
Phase loss sensitivity
O
Phase sequence error
OFF-delay, 182 Current monitoring relay, 733
OFF-delay device Phase sequence monitoring
Contactors, 182 Current monitoring relay, 691, 694, 718, 723
ON period Photovoltaic plant
Power contactors, 120, 184 Solid-state switching devices, 340
ON-delay time Pneumatic timer
Current monitoring relay, 690, 706, 718, 734 Contactors, 204, 205
Open-circuit principle Pneumatic timer (contactors)
Current monitoring relay, 725 With OFF-delay, 204
Operating range of the contactor drive With ON-delay, 204
Contactors for railway applications, 121 Positively driven contact elements, 103
Contactors with extended operating range, 127 Power contactor, 119, 120
Power contactors, 119 Communication-capable, 108, 109, 135, 219
Operator controls Power distribution, 446
Current monitoring relay, 703, 713, 734 Power loss, 38
Overload Power supply, 446
Current monitoring relay, 694, 695 Preferred voltage, 112, 127
Load feeders, 570 Preferred wiring, 135, 137
Overload relay, 495, 501 Programmable logic controller (PLC), 112, 187, 189,
Overload protection, 36 209
Motor starter protector, 386 Protective functions, 36
Overload relay function Protective separation, 102
Overload relays, 529, 530
Overload release R
Railway applications
Overvoltage attenuation, 169, 172
Overvoltage protection
Contactors - Mounting instruction, 129
Function modules for mounting on contactors, 651
Contactors with electronic drive, 129
Contactors with series resistor, 128
Coupling relays, 129
P
Pair of adapters Range monitoring
Load feeders, 599 Current monitoring relay, 733
Parallel switching connector RC element, 169, 174
Contactors, 199, 200 Reclosing
Parameters Motor starter protector, 406
Current monitoring relay, 690, 703, 710 Reclosing delay time
Permanent load with parallel connection, 199 Current monitoring relay, 720
Permissible residual current, 187 Reclosing time
Phase asymmetry Current monitoring relay, 690
Overload relay, 498, 501 Recovery time
Phase barriers Overload relay, 518
Motor starter protector, 396, 473 Release slide
Phase barriers/terminal block Overload relay, 527
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 779
Index
Replacing a magnet coil, 150 Solid-state switching devices, 329

Replacing the terminal block Selection using a tool
Function modules for mounting on contactors, 668 Solid-state switching devices, 330
RESET Selection using a tool - input parameters
Current monitoring relay, 722 Solid-state switching devices, 332, 333
Overload relay, 527, 529, 530 Self-protected combination motor controller (type E)
Residual current monitoring Motor starter protector, 395, 396, 467, 473
Current monitoring relay, 691 Service life
Response delay, 651 Power contactors, 120
Reversing contactor assemblies, 133 Solid-state switching devices, 327
4-pole, 216 Setting ground-fault detection
Control circuit, 134 Overload relay, 517
Load feeders, 567, 595, 598, 600 Setting the current
Main circuit, 133 Motor starter protector, 404
Reversing start, 30, 67, 69 Overload relay, 516
Load feeders, 610 Setting the tripping class
Solid-state switching devices, 331 Overload relay, 517
Reversing starter Setting times
Load feeders, 576, 605 Function modules for mounting on contactors, 673
Ring cable lug connection system, 21, 32, 79, 84 Short-circuit breaking capacity
rms value Motor starter protector, 393
Current monitoring relay, 690 Short-circuit current
Rotary operating mechanism, 424 Solid-state switching devices, 337
Rotating field Short-circuit protection
Current monitoring relay, 696 Load feeders, 570
Overload relay, 506
S Solid-state contactor, 334
Safety applications, 38
Safety instructions
Signaling switch
Safety rules, 22
Signaling switch (motor starter protector)
Screw mounting, 72
Diagnostics, 415
Operation, 415
Single-phase load
Load feeders, 593
Overload relay, 494
Overload relay, 511
SIRIUS 4SI electronic module, 92
SITOR semiconductor fuses
Screwdriver, 34
Screw-type connection system, 32, 74, 80
Snap-on mounting, 72
Sealable cover
Contactors, 197
Overload relay, 511
Overload relay, 533
Securing
Soft start, 30
Disconnector module, 421
Load feeders, 570
Soft starter, 31, 49
Selection
Solder pin adapter
SIRIUS Innovations
780 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Index
Contactors, 192, 193 T

Solder pin connection, 105, 153, 192
Technology, 31
Solid-state contactors, 316, 317, 318, 349
Terminal blocks
Solid-state reversing contactors, 316, 317, 318, 349
Terminal designations
Instantaneous switching, 316, 317, 340
Contactors, 152
Source voltage, 178
Spring-loaded connection system, 21, 32, 75, 82
Standards, 23, 101
670, 671, 672
Contactors, 101
Load feeders, 563
Terminal module
Overload relay, 485
Contactors, 207
Terminal support for stand-alone assembly
Star-delta (wye-delta) start, 672
Contactors, 135
Overload relay, 524
Test certificates, 24
645, 647, 659
Test function
Starter combinations
Overload relay, 502, 520, 521
Load feeders, 610
Thermal load capacity
Starting current, 135, 136
Three-phase current loads
Starting three-phase motors, 135
Overload relay, 503
Status data, 87
Threshold value, lower
Suppression diode, 169, 175
Surface-mounting enclosure, 432
Threshold value, upper
Surge suppression
Integrated, 189
Thyristor pair, 30, 31
Surge suppressor
Time-delayed switching of contactors, 651
Surge suppressors (contactors)
657, 659
Selection aid, 170
Time-delayed switching of contactors, OFF-delay with
Switch position, 37
auxiliary voltage, 653
Switching
Function charts, 653
Contactors, 116
Time-delayed switching of contactors, OFF-delay
Motorized load, 123, 316, 318, 330, 340
without auxiliary voltage, 654
Resistive load, 124, 316
Switching frequency
Time-delayed switching of contactors, ON-delay, 651
Power contactors, 119, 120
Switching overvoltage, 169
Time-delayed switching of contactors, star-delta (wye-
Switch-off delay, 175
delta) start, 655
Switch-on power, 117
Function chart, 655
Switchover current peak, 137, 138
Timing relay, 669, 670
System components, 33
System monitoring, 40
656
System protection
Timing relays, 136, 210, 218, 222
Tool, 34
Selecting solid-state switching devices, 330, 332,
333
SIRIUS Innovations
System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01 781
Index
Touch protection
Overload relay, 513
Transformer protection, 386
Tripping characteristics
Tripping classes
Load feeders, 570
Overload relay, 495
Tripping delay time
Current monitoring relay, 690, 707, 719, 734
tRMS
True rms measurement
Types of coordination, 755
Load feeders, 564
U
UL
Underload
Contactors, 113, 123, 124, 125, 126, 132, 135
V
Varistor, 169, 173
W
Wall mounting
Load feeders, 605
Wear
Wire break
Z
Zener diode, 169, 176
SIRIUS Innovations
782 System Manual, 11/2009, A8E56203870002-01
Service & Support
Download catalogs and information material:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/catalogs
Newsletter – always up to date:

www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/newsletter
E-business in the Industry Mall:

www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/mall
Online Support:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support
Contact for all technical information:

Technical Assistance
Tel.: +49 (911) 895-5900
e-mail: technical-assistance@siemens.com
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-assistance
Siemens AG Subject to change without prior notice

Industry Sector Order No.: 3ZX1012-0RA01-1AC1
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG © Siemens AG 2009
GERMANY
www.siemens.com/automation

Manual SIRIUS Innovations en-US

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Manual SIRIUS Innovations en-US

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

SIRIUS Innovations

System Manual • 11/2009

SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state

SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load

SIRIUS 3RR2 current

Siemens AG Ordernumber: 3ZX1012-0RA01-1AC1 Copyright © Siemens AG 2010.

1.8 Mounting and disassembly ..........................................................................................................72

2.4.5 Switching resistive loads............................................................................................................124

2.7.10.2 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................191

3.5 Planning/configuring ..................................................................................................................329

4 SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors................................................................................................... 379

4.9.3 Auxiliary switch...........................................................................................................................410

4.10.6 Auxiliary switches, lateral and signaling switches......................................................................457

5.7.1 Connection of 3RU21 overload relay.........................................................................................514

6 SIRIUS 3RA21/22 load feeders ............................................................................................................. 563

8 SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays ................................................................................................ 683

8.9.2.1 Description .................................................................................................................................728

1.1.1 Modular system for SIRIUS

1.1.2 SIRIUS Innovations

SIRIUS stands for innovation

Figure 1-1 Innovations in the SIRIUS modular system

Simple and straightforward connection

Monitoring in just a few short steps

Minimized planning and configuration outlay

Flexible mounting options

1.2 Safety instructions

Five safety rules for work in or on electrical installations

1.3 Standards and approvals

Table 1- 1 IEC/DIN EN/DIN VDE standards

IEC DIN EN DIN VDE Title

60947-4-1 60947-4-1 — • Contactors and motor-starters: Electromechanical

60947-5-1 60947-5-1 — Control circuit devices and switching elements:

60947-6-2 60947-6-2 — Multiple function equipment: Control and protective

60335-1 60335-1 — Safety of household and similar electrical appliances -

— 50274 — Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies -

60439-1 60439-1 — Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies:

IEC DIN EN DIN VDE Title

Table 1- 2 UL/CSA/JIS standards

UL CSA C22.2 ASME JIS Title

1.3.2 Approvals, test certificates, characteristics

Approvals, test certificates, characteristics

1.4.1 SIRIUS modular system

SIRIUS modular system

Soft starters ...

Protecting Motor starter

Overload relays ...

Monitoring Current monitoring

Control circuit Function modules for

Function modules for

1.4.2 Content of SIRIUS Innovations System Manual

Content of SIRIUS Innovations System Manual in the SIRIUS modular system

Information about ... Is available in ...

1.5 System properties

1.5.1 System properties

1.5.2 Modular system design

1 3RV29 infeed systems

1.5.3 Switching technology

Table 1- 3 Motor starting options

Example: 3RT contactors, 3RA contactor assemblies, or 3RA6 compact starters

Example: 3RF solid-state switching devices

Figure 1-4 Two-phase switching through antiparallel thyristor pairs

Example: 3RW soft starters

Figure 1-5 Phase angle control of the thyristor pairs

&RQILJXUDWLRQ 3ODQQLQJ2UGHULQJ 0RXQWLQJ 2SHUDWLRQ 0DLQWHQDQFH

:RUOGZLGHDSSOLFD 5HGXFHGSODQQLQJ 5HGXFHGZLULQJ 5HGXFHGVWRUDJH